WO2022237603A1 - Control processing method and display device - Google Patents

Control processing method and display device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022237603A1
WO2022237603A1 PCT/CN2022/090765 CN2022090765W WO2022237603A1 WO 2022237603 A1 WO2022237603 A1 WO 2022237603A1 CN 2022090765 W CN2022090765 W CN 2022090765W WO 2022237603 A1 WO2022237603 A1 WO 2022237603A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
widget
business
control
display
service
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/090765
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
王光强
薛梅
杨绍栋
高斯太
赖园园
Original Assignee
聚好看科技股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 聚好看科技股份有限公司 filed Critical 聚好看科技股份有限公司
Priority to CN202280017552.6A priority Critical patent/CN117043733A/en
Publication of WO2022237603A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022237603A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/41Structure of client; Structure of client peripherals
    • H04N21/4104Peripherals receiving signals from specially adapted client devices
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/41Structure of client; Structure of client peripherals
    • H04N21/422Input-only peripherals, i.e. input devices connected to specially adapted client devices, e.g. global positioning system [GPS]
    • H04N21/42204User interfaces specially adapted for controlling a client device through a remote control device; Remote control devices therefor
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/47End-user applications
    • H04N21/485End-user interface for client configuration
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/80Generation or processing of content or additional data by content creator independently of the distribution process; Content per se
    • H04N21/81Monomedia components thereof
    • H04N21/8166Monomedia components thereof involving executable data, e.g. software
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02PCLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN THE PRODUCTION OR PROCESSING OF GOODS
    • Y02P90/00Enabling technologies with a potential contribution to greenhouse gas [GHG] emissions mitigation
    • Y02P90/02Total factory control, e.g. smart factories, flexible manufacturing systems [FMS] or integrated manufacturing systems [IMS]

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the technical field of device display, and in particular to a control processing method and a display device.
  • a display device such as a smart TV
  • display devices can not only provide users with live TV program content received through data broadcasting, but also provide users with various application and service content such as online video programs, online games, and the like.
  • the user For focus control, during the operation of the existing interactive mode, the user needs to return the focus to the TAB control/or the default control corresponding to the current interface by returning, and then move the focus on the TAB bar to open the target TAB The interface corresponding to the entry. If the entry corresponding to the interface is on the first-level or second-level page, you need to select the target TAB first to display the target first-level page, and then select the entry on the first-level page, or, after entering the second-level page, select the entrance.
  • the present application provides a display device, including: a display configured to display a desktop home page presenting a Widget panel, the Widget panel displaying several business Widget controls for providing a startup entry for a business module; and a controller to which the display is connected, the controller being configured to:
  • the second service Widget control of the second service corresponding to the selected icon is displayed at the first position, wherein the first position is a display position of the first service Widget control.
  • the present application provides a display device, including: a display configured to display a desktop home page presenting a Widget panel, the Widget panel displaying several business Widget controls for providing a startup entry for a business module; and a controller to which the display is connected, the controller being configured to:
  • the first business Widget control When it is detected that the first business Widget control is deleted, determine and display the icon of the second business, wherein the size of the second business Widget control corresponding to the second business is not larger than the size of the first position, and the first position The display position of the first business Widget control and the blank position adjacent to the display position of the first business Widget control;
  • a second service Widget control of the second service corresponding to the selected icon is displayed at the first position.
  • the present application also provides a control display method, the method comprising:
  • the second service Widget control of the second service corresponding to the selected icon is displayed at the first position, wherein the first position is a display position of the first service Widget control.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an operation scene between an intelligent control device and a control device in some embodiments of the present application;
  • FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a hardware configuration of an intelligent control device 200 in some embodiments of the present application
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram of hardware configuration of the control device 100 in some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a software configuration diagram of the intelligent control device 200 in some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is an architectural diagram of desktop controls in some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart of a control processing method in some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a data flow chart of a control processing method in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 8 is a schematic diagram of the system home page in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 9 is a schematic diagram of a desktop homepage in some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a Widget panel displayed on a desktop homepage in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 11 is a schematic diagram showing failure signs on the service Widget control of the Widget panel in some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of displaying an invalidation mark on a service Widget control of an uninstalled remote application in some embodiments of the present application
  • Fig. 13 is a schematic diagram of a failure prompt interface in some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of a Widget panel that replaces and displays a specified recommended Widget control in some embodiments of the present application;
  • Fig. 15 is a schematic diagram of displaying vacancies on the Widget panel in some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of a widget recommendation interface in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 17 is a control display method in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 18 is a schematic diagram of an interface displaying an indicating arrow when a control is deleted in some embodiments of the present application;
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram of an interface displaying a deletion prompt control when a control is deleted in some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram of an interface displaying a deletion prompt when a control is deleted in some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of a display interface after a control is deleted from a control in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 22 is a schematic diagram of the display interface after the movement of the control is completed in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 23 is a schematic diagram of a user interface shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 24 is a possible TV system home page under the theme of "children" shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 25 is a possible homepage of the children's mode system shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 26 is a user interface including a Widget panel in a global lock state shown in some embodiments of the present application;
  • Fig. 27A is a possible password input interface shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 27B is an unlocked user interface containing a Widget panel shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 28 is a user interface including a Widget panel in a partially locked state shown in some embodiments of the present application;
  • Fig. 29 is a user interface displayed after unlocking the "Application Center" control shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 30 is another display after unlocking the "Application Center" control shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 31 is the user interface shown in some embodiments of the present application after the "AI Gathering Hands" control is expanded;
  • Fig. 32 is a user interface after expanding the "Application Center" control shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 33 is the user interface after the "signal source" control is expanded shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 34 is a user interface after expanding the "Settings" control shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 35 is a user interface after expanding the "sound mode" control shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 38 is a schematic diagram of a desktop home page in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 39 is a schematic diagram of a Widget panel in some embodiments of the present application.
  • 40 is a schematic diagram of player Widget data refresh in the Widget panel in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 41 is a schematic diagram of displaying failure signs on Widgets in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 42 is a schematic diagram of another failure prompt interface in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 43 is a schematic diagram of adding pages in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 44 is another schematic diagram of adding pages in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 46 is another schematic diagram of the service menu in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 47 is a possible user interface containing Widget reminders shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 48 is another possible user interface containing Widget reminders shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 50 is a user interface displayed after operating the Widget reminder control shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 51 is a possible user interface including a Widget panel shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 53 is another user interface including a Widget panel shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 54 is a user interface displayed after moving the "Settings" control to the right shown in some embodiments of the present application;
  • Fig. 55 is a user interface displayed after the "Settings" control is moved out of the Widget panel shown in some embodiments of the present application;
  • Fig. 57 is a schematic diagram of a Widget control extension rule shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 59 is a schematic diagram of another Widget control extension rule shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 61 is a user interface including a Widget panel shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 62 is another user interface including a Widget panel shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 63 is another user interface including a Widget panel shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 64 is a user interface including a deletion confirmation box shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 66 is a user interface including a rotation confirmation box shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 67 is a homepage of a vertical screen system shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 69 is a horizontal screen system home page in an editing state shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 70 is a user interface including a deletion confirmation box shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 71 is a schematic diagram of Widget control positioning rules in touch mode shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 72 is a user interface when dragging the "Karaoke" control shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 74 is a user interface displayed after confirming the editing operation of dragging the "Karaoke" control shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 1 is a usage scenario of an intelligent control device in some embodiments of the present application.
  • the smart control device 200 also performs data communication with the server 400 , and the user can operate the smart control device 200 through the smart device 300 or the control device 100 .
  • the smart device 300 may include any one of a mobile terminal, a tablet computer, a computer, a notebook computer, an AR/VR device, and the like.
  • the smart device 300 can also be used to control the smart control device 200 .
  • the smart control device 200 is controlled using an application program running on the smart device.
  • the smart device 300 and the smart control device may also be used for data communication.
  • the intelligent control device 200 can also be controlled in a manner other than the control device 100 and the intelligent device 300, for example, the voice instruction module configured inside the intelligent control device 200 can directly receive the user's voice
  • the command control can also be controlled by receiving the user's voice command through the voice control device installed outside the intelligent control device 200 .
  • the intelligent control device 200 also performs data communication with the server 400 .
  • the intelligent control device 200 can be allowed to communicate via local area network (LAN), wireless local area network (WLAN) and other networks.
  • the server 400 may provide various contents and interactions to the smart control device 200 .
  • Fig. 2 is a block diagram of hardware configuration of the control device 100 in some embodiments of the present application.
  • the control device 100 includes a controller 110 , a communication interface 130 , a user input/output interface 140 , a memory, and a power supply.
  • the control device 100 can receive the user's input operation instruction, and convert the operation instruction into an instruction that the intelligent control device 200 can recognize and respond to, and acts as an intermediary interaction between the user and the intelligent control device 200 .
  • the communication interface 130 is used for communicating with the outside, and includes at least one of a WIFI chip, a Bluetooth module, NFC or an alternative module.
  • the user input/output interface 140 includes at least one of a microphone, a touch pad, a sensor, a button or an alternative module.
  • Fig. 3 is a block diagram of hardware configuration of an intelligent control device 200 in some embodiments of the present application.
  • the intelligent control device 200 includes a tuner and demodulator 210, a communicator 220, a detector 230, an external device interface 240, a controller 250, a display 260, an audio output interface 270, a memory, and a power supply , at least one of a user interface.
  • the controller includes a CPU, a video processor, an audio processor, a graphics processor, a RAM, a ROM, and a first interface to an nth interface for input/output.
  • the display 260 includes a display screen component for presenting images, and a drive component for driving image display, for receiving image signals output from the controller, and displaying video content, image content, and menu manipulation interface. Components and user manipulation of the UI interface, etc.
  • the display 260 may be at least one of a liquid crystal display, an OLED display, and a projection display, and may also be a projection device and a projection screen.
  • the controller 250 and the tuner-demodulator 210 may be located in different split devices, that is, the tuner-demodulator 210 may also be located in an external device of the main device where the controller 250 is located, such as an external set-top box Wait.
  • the controller 250 controls the work of the intelligent control device and responds to user operations by storing various software control programs in the memory.
  • the controller 250 controls the overall operation of the smart control device 200 . For example, in response to receiving a user command for selecting a UI object to be displayed on the display 260, the controller 250 may perform an operation related to the object selected by the user command.
  • the object may be any one of selectable objects, such as hyperlinks, icons, or other operable controls. Operations related to the selected object include: displaying hyperlink pages, documents, images, etc., or executing the program corresponding to the icon.
  • the controller includes a central processing unit (Central Processing Unit, CPU), a video processor, an audio processor, a graphics processing unit (Graphics Processing Unit, GPU), RAM Random Access Memory, RAM), ROM (Read- Only Memory, ROM), at least one of the first interface to the nth interface for input/output, a communication bus (Bus), and the like.
  • CPU Central Processing Unit
  • video processor video processor
  • audio processor audio processor
  • graphics processing unit Graphics Processing Unit, GPU
  • RAM Random Access Memory
  • ROM Read- Only Memory
  • the user can input user commands through a graphical user interface (GUI) displayed on the display 260, and the user input interface receives user input commands through the graphical user interface (GUI).
  • GUI graphical user interface
  • the user may input a user command by inputting a specific sound or gesture, and the user input interface recognizes the sound or gesture through a sensor to receive the user input command.
  • FIG. 4 is a software configuration diagram of the intelligent control device 200 in some embodiments of the present application.
  • the system is divided into four layers, from top to bottom are applications (Applications) layer (referred to as “application layer”), application framework (Application Framework) layer (referred to as “framework layer”) "), Android runtime (Android runtime) and system library layer (referred to as “system runtime layer”), and the kernel layer.
  • applications Applications
  • Application Framework application framework
  • Android runtime Android runtime
  • system library layer referred to as “system runtime layer”
  • kernel layer the kernel layer.
  • the application framework layer in some embodiments of the present application includes managers (Managers), provider (Content Provider), network management system, etc., wherein the manager includes at least one of the following modules: activity manager ( Activity Manager) is used to interact with all activities running in the system; Location Manager is used to provide system services or applications with access to system location services; Package Manager is used to retrieve the current Various information related to the application package installed on the device; Notification Manager (Notification Manager) is used to control the display and clearing of notification messages; Window Manager (Window Manager) is used to manage icons, windows, tools on the user interface Bars, wallpapers and widgets.
  • Activity Manager is used to interact with all activities running in the system
  • Location Manager is used to provide system services or applications with access to system location services
  • Package Manager is used to retrieve the current Various information related to the application package installed on the device
  • Notification Manager Notification Manager
  • Window Manager (Window Manager) is used to manage icons, windows, tools on the user interface Bars, wallpapers and widgets.
  • applications implementing different functions may be configured in the display device.
  • some applications can implement a function based on the application itself, while some applications provide multiple services, and different services implement different functions, that is, this application can implement multiple functions.
  • a desktop application is configured in the display device, and the desktop application provides multiple service modules to implement different functions based on the service modules provided by the desktop application.
  • different components can be generated based on different functions and displayed on the home page of the desktop.
  • a shortcut to the user's frequently used business can be generated in the form of a Widget.
  • Widget It is used to provide a shortcut entry for the corresponding business module.
  • Each Widget is displayed in the Widget panel, that is, the user can register commonly used functions in the data center (WidgetService) to add to the Widget panel, and provide a quick start entry for the functions under the preset operating system application through the Widget.
  • the current display device is usually implemented by the native desktop component framework of Android, that is, the system component service WidgetService works at the system frameworks level.
  • Each component provider application provides a provider, and exposes its own component data to the desktop application through the provider.
  • System component service WidgetService will automatically collect provider information of all component providers after the system is started.
  • the desktop application uses WidgetHost to communicate with the system component service WidgetService to obtain the provider information of each component application, and obtain component data through the provider, add buttons or update the displayed components.
  • the component provider application includes service modules provided by third-party applications and desktop applications.
  • the component data includes information such as the identification (ID) of the interface component and the operation (Action) of the interface component.
  • ID can be customized on the provider side; but Action can only use less than 20 fixed types, such as setting text size, text color, background image, click monitoring, etc. That is to say, the operation updates for all Widget panels are limited to less than 20 Actions, which is difficult to expand and realize complex interface effects.
  • the interface layout file of the component comes from the component provider application.
  • the desktop application in order to obtain the resource files in the component provider application, it is necessary to create the context of the application, which consumes a lot of resources.
  • there cannot be custom components in the layout file of the component otherwise it will not be recognized in the desktop application. Therefore, custom interface components cannot be used in component layout files, and it is difficult to achieve complex interface effects.
  • the desktop components implemented by the display device based on the Android system are limited by the Android system and can only use several native components provided by the system, making it difficult to expand or customize the desktop components, and the display effect is relatively simple.
  • this application provides a brand-new desktop component framework.
  • any component can be used.
  • the source of component data can also be flexibly customized, which can come from within the application or from other applications.
  • the size, layout, style (square, circle, etc.) of each Widget presented in the Widget panel can be customized and edited through the desktop component framework, and multi-level Widget menu display and Widget classification can be performed, and a certain widget can be added vertically.
  • Components under the category modify various properties of the components, etc., to provide users with a Widget panel with various effects.
  • the desktop home page can be displayed on the display device to display the applications configured by the system or the installed business modules, and the desktop component framework can be run in the application layer in FIG. 4 .
  • a desktop application (example: J application) is configured in the display device.
  • the desktop application is an application of the application layer.
  • the desktop application is composed of a desktop component framework and is used to present the desktop home page when the display device is started.
  • Fig. 5 is a structural diagram of a desktop component framework in some embodiments of the present application.
  • the desktop component architecture includes a business component management module (WidgetManager), a component display module (WidgetContainer) and HostView, a data center module (WidgetService) and a component management module (WidgetServer).
  • WidgetManager business component management module
  • WidgetContainer component display module
  • HostView HostView
  • WidgetService data center module
  • WidgetServer component management module
  • the business component management module (WidgetManager) is divided according to the business modules, with business identification (ID), one business component management module corresponds to one business module, and manages and maintains components related to each business module. Initiate a request to the remote business module, receive data from the data center module (WidgetService), and distribute it to different components according to the business ID.
  • the business component management module (WidgetManager) is used to manage component information, and the component information is used to record basic information such as component ID, length, width, click, expansion, refresh interval, etc.; component data and Widget panel information, without any restrictions, can be Flexible expansion.
  • Component display module (WidgetContainer) and HostView: responsible for adding, deleting, moving, and displaying information of components.
  • Remote business module relative to the remote side of the desktop component module itself, it can be other business modules inside the desktop application or other applications.
  • Component data is provided by the remote business module and delivered to the business component management module through the data center module WidgetService.
  • service module A and application B are both remote service modules.
  • Business module A is a business module provided by desktop applications
  • application B is an external application, not a business application provided by desktop applications.
  • Application B refers to a remote application that is installed in the software system of the display device and can be displayed on the home page of the desktop, such as a third-party application or a system preset application.
  • the application management module in the software system obtains the installation information of the application from the system, and displays it on the desktop home page based on the installation information. If the application also provides Widget display, the application management module registers the information of the application to the WidgetService, and the WidgetService realizes that the Widget component corresponding to the application is displayed in the Widget panel.
  • the data center module (WidgetService) is equivalent to the system component service, which is used to connect the business component management module and the remote business module.
  • the data sent by the remote business module is sent to the WidgetService. After the WidgetService completes the preliminary processing, it is distributed to different business component management module.
  • the component management module (WidgetServer) is used to cache component information and component data.
  • the desktop component framework splits each component information used to present the Widget.
  • the component information includes component data and Widget panel information
  • component data refers to the data required to be displayed on the Widget panel by the business module represented by the business ID, such as Widget ID, click operation, expansion, refresh interval, display content and other information
  • Widget panel information refers to the information displayed by the component Interface layout information, such as Widget's length, width and other size information.
  • component data uses string formats such as json and xml with good compatibility, and data transmission is flexible and limited; Widget panel information can be stored on the desktop application side or in other applications end. If the widget panel information is stored in other applications, the desktop application can use a cross-process loading technology, such as a plug-in loading method. When using the cross-process loading technology, the final Widget panel information is still loaded and run in the desktop application.
  • the interface layout of the component is always loaded in the desktop application, and the resources and controls in the desktop application can be used arbitrarily without system restrictions. On this basis, more business forms can be derived, such as custom menus of components, multi-service combination components, etc.
  • the desktop component framework implements the Widget panel, it does not care about the size, layout, style and other information of the Widget.
  • the size, layout, style and other information of the Widget can be customized. Since the size of each Widget can be different, the combined installation of each Widget in the Widget panel is not limited by the desktop component framework, but can be customized, as long as it conforms to the display of the Widget panel.
  • the desktop component framework manages Widgets (components) according to business modules, and one business module generates one Widget.
  • Widgets components
  • more business modules can be expanded horizontally, and more components can also be expanded under the existing business modules.
  • the implementation of the data channel of the desktop component framework is relatively flexible: when a request is initiated to a remote service, the remote service inside the desktop application can be called directly through the interface, and the remote service in other applications can send an IPC request (socket, ipc, file, etc.).
  • the return data of the remote service can also be realized in multiple ways.
  • the desktop component framework can easily implement dynamic components: the remote business can actively notify the desktop application to add and delete some components according to business needs. For example: on the contact application side, if a contact is added/deleted, it can actively notify the desktop application to add/delete a contact component. Another example: the application management component can actively notify the desktop application to add/delete an application component when the application is installed/uninstalled.
  • the desktop component framework can flexibly control the timing of component loading: for example, when the system is just started and the desktop application is just started, the system resources are relatively tight, which can be handled simply and the registration of the component is suspended, thereby reducing system resource contention and avoiding Causing the operation of the main function to freeze.
  • the desktop application is an application installed in the application layer
  • application B is also an application installed in the application layer.
  • the homepage of the desktop is displayed on the display device.
  • the desktop home page displays several business modules provided by the pre-installed operating system, such as signal source, network status, children, education, fitness and other business modules. Users can register any commonly used business module into the data center module (WidgetService) and add it to the Widget panel in the form of Widget to achieve quick start.
  • the business module belongs to the business within the desktop application. During the display process of any business module, the user can call up the Widget panel and display it on the home page of the desktop through preset operations.
  • the information of service modules such as signal source and networking status is obtained from other applications other than the desktop application.
  • the calling instruction of the Widget panel is not responded to.
  • Applications other than desktop applications include remote applications installed by users, such as third-party applications such as Kiwi, Cool Meow, etc.
  • third-party applications such as Kiwi, Cool Meow, etc.
  • the home page of the desktop may be provided by a native system application or a pre-installed operating system application.
  • the desktop application may be a pre-installed operating system application.
  • the Widget panel When the display device is running, the Widget panel is usually hidden and displayed. When the user needs to quickly start a certain function (such as a function realized by a business module) through the Widget panel, the Widget panel can be called out based on the trigger operation and displayed on the home page of the desktop. Trigger Operation means that the user long presses the left button of the remote control or other preset function buttons. If the user wants to start a certain function, the corresponding Widget control is triggered in the Widget panel to directly start the function, that is, start a certain business module provided by the desktop application.
  • Trigger Operation means that the user long presses the left button of the remote control or other preset function buttons.
  • the corresponding business Widget control will be invalid at this time, but it will not be marked in the Widget panel, so when the corresponding business Widget control is triggered, the specified business module cannot be quickly started. It can be seen that when a user implements a quick startup of a certain business module based on the Widget panel, the failure of the Widget control cannot be known in time, resulting in a failure to start a certain business module, which affects user experience.
  • failure refers to unavailability.
  • the failure of a business module refers to whether the application is available. For example, if the application exists in the display device, but is offline due to policy reasons or is no longer maintained in the background, the service module is unavailable. In contrast, valid refers to the usable state.
  • the Widget panel that undertakes the business Widget control display needs to monitor the offline broadcast of the business module or the uninstall broadcast of the application, or in the When starting the desktop application, detect the change of the business Widget controls supported by the current business module, and set the offline business Widget controls to invalid, so as to update the valid state of the controls in time, and then perform operations such as deletion according to the user's wishes. Improve user experience.
  • the embodiment of the present invention provides a display device for realizing the detection of the validity of the control, and triggering the query at a specific time point based on the own characteristics of the business module Mechanism, that is, to detect the validity of the corresponding business Widget controls from the two dimensions of application and business, to detect the invalid business modules in real time, and to add invalidation signs to the corresponding business Widget controls in the Widget panel, so that users can know in time
  • the invalid business module avoids the situation that the business Widget control is triggered and the corresponding business module cannot be started, and the user experience is better.
  • FIG. 6 is a flow chart of a control processing method in some embodiments of the present application
  • FIG. 7 is a data flow chart of a control processing method in some embodiments of the present application.
  • a display device provided by an embodiment of the present invention includes: a display configured to display a desktop home page presenting a Widget panel, the Widget panel displaying several business Widget controls for providing a startup entry for a business module; connected to the display
  • the controller when executing the control processing method shown in Figure 6 and Figure 7, the controller is configured to perform the following steps:
  • the designated business module refers to a business module that displays a business Widget control in the Widget panel, and the business status is used to represent the designated business. Whether the module is available.
  • the scenario where the display device activates the control validity query mechanism needs to be started when the desktop home page is presented on the display device.
  • the controller is performing receiving preset operations generated based on the desktop home page to detect whether the business status of each specified business module has changed. , is further configured to perform the following steps:
  • Step 111 receiving the startup operation of the desktop application, and detecting whether the business status of each specified business module has changed when the desktop home page is presented in the user interface; or,
  • Step 112 when receiving a trigger operation on the designated business modules displayed on the desktop homepage, detect whether the business status of each designated business module has changed; or,
  • Step 113 When receiving the startup operation for starting the Widget panel generated based on the desktop homepage, detect whether the business status of each specified business module changes.
  • the time when the display device detects the validity of each service Widget control configured by the user is when the corresponding service module is started, when the Widget panel is called out, or when the desktop application is started. That is, when the corresponding business module is started, the control validity query mechanism is triggered synchronously, or when the Widget panel is started, the control validity query mechanism is triggered synchronously, or when the desktop application is started, the control validity query mechanism is triggered synchronously, so that Real-time validity detection is performed on the business Widget control corresponding to the business module.
  • the specified service module to be started may be the service module displayed on the home page of the desktop, that is, the source application of the shortcut.
  • the display device when the user starts the display device, the display device presents a system home page, and the system home page displays a desktop application (J application) control icon.
  • the desktop application control icon is triggered to present the desktop home page on the display device, and at the same time, the control validity query mechanism is synchronously triggered.
  • Each business module provided by the J application is displayed on the home page of the desktop.
  • Each business module can be added to the Widget panel in the form of a business Widget control based on user-defined settings to provide a quick entry to the business module.
  • the control validity query mechanism is triggered synchronously.
  • the way to start the business module may be to trigger the control icon of the business module displayed on the desktop home page.
  • the desktop application when the desktop application is started, it is actively inquired whether the service state of each specified service module has changed. Since the user seldom utilizes the working capacity of the entire display device hardware at startup, a full query can be performed on each specified business module at this time. It may be that the display device acquires the change of the specified service in a timely manner and updates it, so as to avoid the invariance caused by the user selecting the Widget control corresponding to the service and then inquiring.
  • the Widget panel when the Widget panel is started, it is actively inquired whether the service state of each designated service module changes. Since the user has not started to select the Widget control at this time, it is possible to perform a full query on each specified business module at this time, and update the status in a timely manner to avoid the occurrence of the user selecting the Widget control corresponding to the business and then querying. unchanged.
  • the application After the application is started, it can receive service change notifications from the server or other devices to update the service status.
  • Fig. 8 is a schematic diagram of a system homepage in some embodiments of the present application
  • Fig. 9 is a schematic diagram of a desktop homepage in some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 when the display device starts and displays the system homepage, in addition to displaying desktop application (J application) control icons, various third-party application control icons installed by the user are also displayed on the system homepage. If the user triggers the desktop application (J application) control icon, the desktop home page shown in FIG. 9 is switched and displayed on the display device.
  • desktop application J application
  • the interface shown in FIG. 8 does not need to display the J application, but displays the default self-starting desktop application of the device without additional triggering.
  • the navigation bar of the user interface includes "My”, “Cable Bao”, “Circle of Relatives and Friends”, “Recommendation”, “VIP”, “Children”, and “Video” and other title controls, the user can display the corresponding title interface by moving the focus to a different title control.
  • the title interface of "Children” will be displayed in the content display area, and the title interface of "Children” mainly displays media resources for children.
  • the user can select the media resource to be played or open the application program to be used on the home page of the TV system, and can also indicate to enter the next-level interface by operating the controls on the home page of the TV system. Select the media resource you want to play in the level interface.
  • the specified business module that the user wants to start is the "Children” business module
  • the Widget panel refers to a panel control used to centrally display Widget controls.
  • Fig. 10 is a schematic diagram of displaying a Widget panel on a desktop homepage in some embodiments of the present application.
  • the user When the desktop home page is displayed on the display device, the user generates a trigger operation for starting the Widget panel, and the control validity query mechanism is synchronously triggered when the Widget panel is started.
  • the trigger operation refers to the user long pressing the left button of the remote control or other preset functions key.
  • the Widget panel in the first state is displayed in the left content area of the user interface, and multiple Widget controls are displayed in the Widget panel, which are respectively "Signal Source”, “Application Center”, “Router”, “Settings”, “Player”, “Standard”, “Multi-Screen Interaction”, “City Service”, “Discovery”, “Contacts”, “Device”, “AI Camera”; the right content area of the user interface continues to display the contents of the standard mode home page.
  • each item in the standard mode home page is displayed in alignment with the left border of the right content area with the original layout parameters, and the standard mode home page exceeds the user interface
  • the displayed content of the right border is hidden.
  • the original layout parameters refer to the layout parameters of each item in FIG. 9 . That is to say, when the user presses the left button for a long time, the Widget panel is displayed in the left content area of the user interface, and all items in the standard mode home page are translated to the right content area as a whole, and the displayed content beyond the right boundary of the user interface hide.
  • the user can operate the return key on the remote controller, or press and hold the right button to input a return command, control the Widget panel to be retracted, and return to the standard mode home page .
  • the Widget application receives the input return command, it exits the foreground and the Widget panel is closed.
  • the J application responds to the exit of the Widget application from the foreground, switches to the foreground to run, and displays the standard mode interface in full screen.
  • the desktop application if the display device directly enters the radio and television signal source when starting, such as directly playing a TV program, at this time, the desktop application is not started, and the system home page is not displayed on the display device, then the desktop home page cannot be entered, that is, the startup cannot be generated.
  • the default operation of the business module or Widget panel therefore, does not trigger the control validity query mechanism.
  • the desktop home page when the desktop home page is presented on the display device, if the user wants to start a different application, such as a third-party cloud audio-visual application installed in the TV, the desktop application (J application) needs to be set to the background/cancel the thread and then Start the interface of the cloud audio-visual application.
  • the Widget panel In the display state of the cloud audio-visual application, the Widget panel cannot be called up, and it can only be opened after returning to the home page of the desktop.
  • the desktop home page can also display control icons of some remote applications (application B in FIG. 5 ).
  • the information of the remote application can be registered to the WidgetService, and then the registration information can be obtained from the WidgetService through the business control management module (WidgetManager) to display on the desktop homepage, and the user can start the corresponding remote application on the desktop homepage.
  • the remote application can be used as a business module provided by the desktop application, or the remote application on the desktop home page can be added to the Widget panel in the form of a business Widget control to provide a quick start entry for the remote application.
  • the business module when starting a business module through other entrances outside the Widget panel, it can be judged first whether the business module provides Widget control display, if the started business module does not provide business Widget control display, then the business can be started directly The module only needs to display the homepage of the business module. If the started business module provides a business Widget control display, the application is determined as a designated business module, that is, the designated business module refers to a business module that displays a business Widget control in the Widget panel.
  • the method of judging whether the business module provides a Widget control display can be judged by obtaining application information. If there is a control ID in the application information, it means that the business module provides Widget control display; if there is no control ID in the application information, then Explain that this business module provides Widget control display.
  • the desktop application can directly obtain the application information generated by each business module in WidgetService through the business control management module (WidgetManager), that is, call the data center (WidgetService) Query whether there is a control ID in each business module.
  • the business control management module can obtain the application information generated by the remote application when it is added to the desktop homepage by the application management module of the system and registered to the WidgetService.
  • the layer where the display window of the desktop home page is located is different from the layer where the Widget panel is located.
  • the layer where the display window of the desktop homepage is located is the same as the layer where the Widget panel is located, and when an instruction to call out the Widget panel is detected, the display position of the display window of the desktop homepage is adjusted so that the desktop homepage The display window moves to one side, and the display windows of some desktop homepages move out of the display interface of the monitor and cannot be displayed. The display windows of some desktop homepages do not move out of the display interface of the monitor and can be displayed. Draw the Widget panel in the position vacated after the display window of the desktop homepage is moved. In order to realize the display of both in the same layer.
  • a spacer is provided on the side of the display window of the widget panel close to the home page of the desktop.
  • the display window so that the user can distinguish the Widget panel and the home page of the desktop are two different operation areas. After the Widget panel is presented, the focus is set to the Widget panel area by default, and the display window of the home page of the desktop cannot get the focus. In this way, the focus can be avoided from switching between the two areas during the process of moving the focus through the remote control.
  • the user enters an instruction to exit the Widget panel.
  • the display window of the home page of the desktop can be restored to the original display position.
  • the current interface of the desktop homepage calls out the Widget panel, it is generally based on the current interface of the desktop homepage that triggers a Widget requirement.
  • the controller when the designated business module or Widget panel is started, the controller is further configured to perform the following steps when detecting whether the business state of each designated business module changes:
  • Step 121 when starting the specified service module or the Widget panel, obtain the service package name and service type of each specified service module, and check whether the specified service module is available based on the service package name and service type.
  • Step 122 if it is detected that the specified service module is unavailable, then determine that the service status of the specified service module has changed.
  • Step 123 if it is detected that the specified service module is available, then determine that the service status of the specified service module has not changed.
  • J application can be displayed on the desktop homepage, and third-party applications can also be displayed by customizing and adding, then when judging whether the business status has changed, for the business modules provided by the desktop application, then It is to judge whether the business state has changed by judging the change of the business, that is, judge by the business package name and business type; for remote applications, judge whether the application status has changed by judging the change of the application, that is, by using the Use information to make judgments.
  • control validity query mechanism is triggered when the Widget panel is started, or the control validity query mechanism is triggered when the specified business module is started, it is possible to judge whether the state of the corresponding application occurs through the business package name and business type. Variety.
  • the business package name is used to verify whether there is a business module corresponding to the current package name in the current display device in the later stage, that is, to identify the specified business module, and the business type is used to identify whether the corresponding business module is within the validity period. If the business type of the specified business module indicates that the specified business module is within the validity period, it means that the specified business module is available, and then it is determined that the business status of the specified business module has not changed; if the business type of the specified business module indicates that the specified business module is not within the validity period , it indicates that the specified service module is unavailable, and then it is determined that the service status of the specified service module has changed.
  • the remote application Based on the remote application, obtain the state parameters of the remote application based on the application package name. If the state parameter represents a normal state, it means that the remote application is available, and then determine that the application state of the specified application has not changed; if the state parameter represents an abnormal state, then It indicates that the remote application is unavailable, and then it is determined that the application status of the specified application has changed.
  • the desktop application provides two service modules A and B, and the service types a and b of the two service modules A and B indicate that the service modules A and B are both within the validity period. If business module A goes offline due to policies or other reasons during later use, business module A will be unavailable and business module B will be available.
  • the controller when the desktop application is started, the controller detects whether the service state of each specified service module changes, and is further configured to perform the following steps:
  • Step 131 When starting the desktop application, obtain the total number of current business modules provided by the desktop application and the corresponding total number of historical business modules at the last startup.
  • Step 132 If the total number of current business modules is less than the total number of historical business modules, determine that the business status of the specified business module corresponding to the difference between the total number of current business modules and the total number of historical business modules has changed.
  • the implementation form can be to obtain the current business module provided by the desktop application when the desktop application is started.
  • the total number is compared with the total number of historical business modules corresponding to the last startup, and the difference between the total number of business modules started twice is compared. If the total number of business modules (one: B) corresponding to this startup is less than the total number of business modules (two: A and B) corresponding to the last startup, it means that there are unavailable business modules in the business modules provided by the desktop application.
  • the designated business module can be screened out based on the difference between the total number of current business modules and the total number of historical business modules, and at the same time, it can be determined that the business status of the designated business module has changed.
  • a certain business module in the desktop application provides a business Widget control and displays it in the Widget panel, it is necessary to check the validity of this type of business Widget control.
  • a specified application provided in the desktop application does not provide the service Widget control, the validity detection process does not need to be performed. Therefore, such business modules that have been provided with business Widget controls and displayed in the Widget panel are taken as specified business modules, and such business modules that are not provided with Widget controls are taken as common service modules.
  • the business modules provided by the desktop application include designated business modules and commonly used business modules.
  • the designated business modules can be started quickly through the business Widget control, or can be restarted by triggering the desktop homepage where the designated business modules are located; and the commonly used business modules The startup can only be restarted by triggering the home page of the desktop where the common business module is located.
  • control validity query mechanism is terminated, and the specified business module can be started directly; if it is detected that the business status of a specified business module has changed, the control validation will continue The query mechanism further determines the target Widget control to display the invalidation mark.
  • the status change information includes information such as the control ID, the specified business module ID, and the status change ID.
  • the invalidation indicator when the control validity query mechanism is triggered when the Widget panel is started, when the Widget panel is displayed, the invalidation indicator may be directly displayed on the determined target service Widget control.
  • control validity query mechanism when the control validity query mechanism is triggered when the specified business module is started, or when the control validity query mechanism is triggered when the desktop application is started, after detecting that the currently started specified business module has changed the service state, The state change information is sent to the Widget panel, so that the Widget panel can update the displayed control information based on the control validity detection results when the Widget panel is subsequently displayed, so as to update the validity status of the target business Widget control of the currently specified application in time.
  • the Widget panel When the user starts the desktop application, starts any specified application based on the desktop home page, or starts the Widget panel, the validity of the control is checked, and the resulting state change information is sent to the Widget panel.
  • the Widget panel When the Widget panel is triggered by the user to start, it displays the invalidation mark on the corresponding target business Widget control in a timely manner based on the state change information to inform the user that the target business Widget control where the invalidation mark is located is invalid, and the target business Widget control cannot be used to implement the corresponding business module. start up.
  • a feasible display mode of the Widget panel is to pop up from the left side of the display, pushing the desktop home page to the right, and at this time, the content displayed on the right side of the desktop home page disappears from the display; if the display of the Widget panel is canceled , the homepage of the desktop moves to the left and is displayed in the state shown in Figure 9 .
  • the Widget panel displays all system presets or user-set business Widget controls. Therefore, in order to display the Widget panel, it is necessary to obtain the total control information of all business Widget controls stored in the device, and generate a Widget panel based on the total control information, and display it on the desktop. in the home page.
  • the total control information is used to represent the name and icon of each business module, effective parameters displayed by the control, control identification, control name, source of the business module of the control icon (which business module provides the control), etc.
  • the total control information obtained is the desktop control information preset by the system; if the user does not start the Widget target for the first time, the total control information obtained is saved when the display device was turned off last time control information. And, the total control information will be refreshed in real time every time based on the result of the control validity, and all the valid control information is retained.
  • the Widget panel Before the user starts the Widget panel to be displayed on the desktop homepage, every time the user generates a preset operation based on the desktop homepage, the validity of the controls will be checked for each business module displayed on the desktop homepage. If it is detected that the business state of a specified business module providing the Widget control changes, the state change information will be sent to the Widget panel. When the user subsequently calls up the Widget panel to display, the Widget panel can add an invalidation mark to the corresponding service Widget control based on the received business status change information corresponding to each specified business module, so that the user can promptly know the status of each service in the Widget panel. The validity state of a Widget control, so as to deal with the invalid Widget control accordingly, such as deleting or replacing it with another Widget control.
  • the target business Widget control corresponding to the specified business module can be determined based on the comparison between the control ID and the total control information. Then, display the invalidation mark on the target business Widget control in the Widget panel.
  • Fig. 11 is a schematic diagram of displaying failure signs on the service Widget control of the Widget panel in some embodiments of the present application.
  • the business module is designated as "Children” in the detected desktop homepage
  • the "Children” business module provides a business Widget control display. If it is detected that the "Children” business module is unavailable, add an invalidation mark on the "Children's" business Widget control, as shown in the figure "Invalidated” mark.
  • the reason for the change of the business status of the specified business module can also be that the business module is offline. After the business module is offline, the corresponding business Widget control displayed in the Widget panel will no longer be triggered to start the business module. Therefore, the business Widget control of the business module that is to be uninstalled of this type needs to be marked as invalid.
  • the controller is further configured to: respond to the instruction to cancel the provision of the specified business module, when starting the Widget panel, on the Widget panel corresponding to the target business Widget control of the specified business module Display the invalidation flag.
  • the application management module of the display device will send an offline broadcast to the Widget panel, and the Widget panel will judge the uninstalled business Whether the module provides Widget control display, the judging method can refer to the content of the foregoing embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
  • the uninstalled business module does not provide a business Widget control display, it will not be processed. If the unloaded business module provides a Widget control display, the business module that provides the business Widget control is used as the specified business module. At the same time, when the Widget panel is displayed on the desktop home page after the user starts it, the target service Widget control corresponding to the specified service module is determined based on the comparison between the control identifier and the total control information. Finally, display the invalidation mark on the target business Widget control in the Widget panel.
  • the application management module of the display device will send an uninstall broadcast to the Widget panel, and when the subsequent user triggers the Widget panel to be displayed on the desktop homepage, The invalidation mark is displayed on the business Widget control corresponding to the application.
  • Fig. 12 is a schematic diagram of displaying an invalidation mark on a service Widget control for uninstalling a remote application in some embodiments of the present application.
  • the remote application uninstalled by the user is the "Kiwi" application
  • an invalidation mark will be displayed on the business Widget control of the "Kiwi” application in the Widget panel, as shown in the figure "Invalid " logo.
  • the control validity query mechanism is triggered, so that each specified display in the Widget panel
  • the target business Widget control corresponding to the business module performs real-time validity detection.
  • the failure indicator can be directly added to the corresponding target business Widget control in the Widget panel, without performing the action of starting the Widget panel.
  • the control validity query mechanism when the desktop home page is presented on the display device, if a certain business module displayed on the desktop home page is triggered, the control validity query mechanism is triggered, and after it is judged that the business module provides a Widget display, the business module is determined.
  • the module is a designated business module, and continues to perform real-time validity detection on the target business Widget control corresponding to the designated business module.
  • the user detects that the business module provides Widget display and the business module is unavailable when starting a certain business module, that is, it detects that the business status changes, and then sends the status change information corresponding to the specified business module to the Widget panel, so that When the Widget panel is subsequently displayed, it can update the displayed control information based on the control validity detection results, that is, display the invalidation mark on the target business Widget control corresponding to the specified business module, so as to update each displayed in the Widget panel in time.
  • the status of the validity of the Business Widget control is
  • the display device when the system home page is presented on the display device, if the user triggers the desktop application displayed on the system home page, the display device switches to display the desktop home page. And, when the desktop application is started, a control validity query mechanism is triggered to detect the service Widget controls corresponding to each service module provided by the desktop application for real-time validity detection.
  • the status change information corresponding to the specified business module will be sent to the Widget panel, so that when the Widget panel is subsequently displayed, It is possible to update the information of each control displayed based on the control validity detection result, that is, to display the invalidation mark on the target business Widget control corresponding to the specified business module, so as to update the validity status of each business Widget control displayed in the Widget panel in time .
  • the Widget panel provides a method for updating the validity of the business Widget control, which is used for interacting with each business module provided by the desktop application, timely synchronizing the state of the target business Widget control provided by the specified business module, and monitoring the entire If the uninstalled business module provides Widget control display function, it is necessary to display the invalidation mark of the corresponding business Widget control in time.
  • the Widget panel after the user triggers the Widget panel to be displayed on the home page of the desktop, when the user sees that there is a service Widget control with an invalidation logo in the Widget panel, if the user triggers the invalidation Widget control, the current interface A failure prompt interface will pop up.
  • the invalidation prompt interface is triggered, and when the Widget control is not an invalid control, the secondary level corresponding to the Widget control is displayed. page or start the function corresponding to the Widget control.
  • the controller when triggering a Widget control with an invalidation flag, the controller is further configured to:
  • Step 41 In response to the instruction of triggering the display of the target business Widget control with an invalidation mark in the Widget panel, the startup process of the specified business module corresponding to the target business Widget control is not executed, and an invalidation prompt showing a delete button is displayed on the home page of the desktop interface.
  • Step 42 in response to the instruction of triggering the delete button, delete the target service Widget control in the Widget panel.
  • the specified business module corresponding to the target business Widget control cannot be started. Therefore, when a business widget control with an invalidation flag in the widget panel is triggered, the action of starting the specified business module corresponding to the target business widget control is no longer performed.
  • a failure prompt interface will pop up on the home page of the desktop.
  • Fig. 13 is a schematic diagram of a failure prompt interface in some embodiments of the present application.
  • an invalidation prompt interface is presented in the current interface.
  • the invalidation prompt interface there are delete button, cancel button and replacement control display area.
  • the delete button is used to delete the invalid Widget control
  • the cancel button is used to close the invalid prompt interface.
  • the replacement control display area is used to display other Widget controls recommended by the system that can be displayed.
  • the icon of the second service is displayed in the replacement control display area.
  • the icon of the second service may be a Widget control of the second service, or may be another type of control representing the second service. This is because the replacement of the control display area is only used to display the services that can be selected by the user, so any solution can be adopted as long as the display effect is realized.
  • the difference is that if the icon of the second service is the Widget control of the second service, the floating layer is controlled by the Widget component display module in the desktop application, and icons of other formats can be displayed by modules different from the Widget component in the desktop application.
  • the target business Widget control in the Widget panel can be deleted, that is, the "children" business Widget control can be deleted.
  • the replacement control display area will not be displayed on the invalidation prompt interface.
  • an invalid Widget control in the Widget panel if an invalid Widget control in the Widget panel is deleted, the original position of the Widget control will create a vacancy. If the space is no longer filled with other business Widget controls, space will be wasted. If other business widget controls in the Widget panel are rearranged, because the sizes of each business widget control are different, rearranging will make it difficult for users to find the position of the previous controls.
  • this application can recommend other alternatives for the user when deleting an invalid Widget control Displayed business Widget controls.
  • controller is further configured to perform the following steps when replacing and displaying the business Widget control:
  • Step 51 When triggering the display of the target business widget with an invalidation flag, generate a recommended widget based on the attribute parameters of the target business widget.
  • the recommended widget refers to a control that has the same characteristics as the target business widget.
  • Step 52 displaying the replacement widget display area in the failure prompt interface, and displaying the recommended Widget control in the replacement widget display area.
  • Step 53 in response to an instruction to trigger replacement of a designated recommended Widget control in the widget display area, displaying the designated recommended Widget control at the original position of the target business Widget control in the Widget panel.
  • the replacement business widget recommended by the system to the user can be synchronously displayed on the invalidation prompt interface when the user triggers the invalidated widget. Therefore, when the user triggers and displays the target business widget with an invalidation mark, the recommended widget recommended by the system is obtained. , displayed in the replacement control display area of the failure prompt interface.
  • the recommended Widget control is generated based on the attribute parameters of the target service Widget control, and the attribute parameters are widget (Widget) information.
  • the attribute parameters of the target business Widget control can be obtained from the data center (WidgetService).
  • Attribute parameters include control size, business type, application, etc.
  • the recommended Widget control refers to a control that has the same characteristics as the target business Widget control, and the recommended Widget control is used to replace and display the original position of the deleted target Widget control based on user triggers.
  • the replacement widget display area in the failure prompt interface can be displayed under the delete button, and the replacement widget display area can display up to 6 display bit thresholds, that is, the replacement widget display area can display at most 6 recommended Widget controls.
  • the disabled Widget control icon triggered by the user may be deleted, and the selected recommended Widget control may be displayed at the original position of the disabled Widget control.
  • the invalidation prompt interface shown in Figure 13 when the invalidation prompt interface shown in Figure 13 is displayed, if the user directly clicks the specified recommended Widget control in the replacement control display area, the target business Widget control with the invalidation mark triggered by the user can be deleted at the same time. , and displaying the selected specified recommended Widget control at the original position of the target business Widget control. At the same time, the display of the invalidation prompt interface is canceled, and the original position of the invalidated Widget control is replaced and displayed in the Widget panel with the designated recommended Widget control.
  • the recommendation of the Widget control is by displaying an icon corresponding to the recommended service.
  • the icon may be a Widget control, or other forms of control display.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of a Widget panel that replaces and displays a specified recommended Widget control in some embodiments of the present application.
  • the recommended Widget controls displayed in the replacement control display area include time control, clock control, control center control and fitness control.
  • the user directly triggers the Fitness Widget control as the specified recommended Widget control, delete the "Children" business Widget control in the invalid Widget panel, and display the Fitness Widget control at the original position of the "Children" business Widget control .
  • Fig. 15 is a schematic diagram of displaying vacancies on the Widget panel in some embodiments of the present application.
  • the invalidation prompt interface shown in Figure 13 when the invalidation prompt interface shown in Figure 13 is displayed, if the user clicks the delete button, the target business Widget control (children's Widget control) with the invalidation mark can be directly deleted, see Figure 15, the invalidation prompt The display of the interface is canceled, and the original position of the deleted target business Widget control is empty.
  • the user can click the original position of the deleted target business Widget control again (the space is empty at this time), and the control recommendation interface will pop up and be displayed on the upper layer of the desktop home page.
  • Fig. 16 is a schematic diagram of a widget recommendation interface in some embodiments of the present application.
  • the widget recommendation interface presents a replacement widget display area, and the replacement widget display area displays widgets recommended by the system that have the same characteristics as the target business Widget widget.
  • some recommended Widget controls displayed in the replacement control display area of the widget recommendation interface include a time control, a clock control, a control center control, and a fitness control. If the user triggers the fitness control as the designated recommended Widget control, the fitness control will be displayed at the original position of the "Kids" business Widget control, and the display effect after replacement can be seen in Figure 14 again.
  • the business Widget control recommended by the system can be displayed at the original position of the deleted target business Widget control, and can be based on the deleted business Widget The size of the control finds a Business Widget control with the same size.
  • Widgets for business to recommend similar functions and same size widgets to users according to the current widget size and business type, so that users can add them easily, avoiding vacancies in the Widget panel, and even filling up the vacancies after users select them, so as to improve user experience.
  • the process of moving or deleting the widget can also be realized by the user moving the focus point.
  • the focus moves to the “Settings” Widget control in FIG.
  • the service can be started through the input confirmation operation or other preset first operations, and the validity query can be triggered at the same time.
  • the received input is the preset second operation, the "settings" Widget control is activated to move or delete the thread.
  • the target position in the first moving direction of the "Settings" Widget control is the border of the panel (that is, there is no position with a preset size as a movable position)
  • none of the target positions in the four movable directions of the "Settings" Widget control is the boundary of the Widget panel, and it is further judged that the size of the control at the target position, the length and width of the control at the target position and the "setting"
  • the pointing arrow will be displayed, and it will not be displayed when they are different. In some embodiments, only controls with the same length and width can be replaced.
  • the movement arrows may be displayed regardless of the size of the control at the target location.
  • the "Settings" Widget control is superimposed and displayed on the top of the target position control, without moving the target position control.
  • an input command for example, a right arrow key command
  • the Widget control is “set” and not operated. If the position of the "Rounter” Widget is set to a different layer, the "Settings” Widget is superimposed on the position of the "Rounter” Widget on the right.
  • the "Settings" Widget control can be connected to the "Rounter” on the right side of it.
  • the widget controls are swapped so that the user can fully see the controls that are currently on the panel.
  • a deletion prompt interface as shown in FIG. 20 is displayed. , to give the user further confirmation that they want to delete the control.
  • the information prompt window on the deletion prompt interface does not cover the to-be-deleted "settings" Widget control, so that the user knows the current object to be deleted.
  • the information prompt window on the delete prompt interface includes a delete confirmation control and a cancel control. After the information prompt window is displayed, cancel the focus on the panel, and display the focus on the preset control on the default window of the information prompt window, so as to facilitate the user's operation.
  • the response is related to the user's operation of determining to delete the control.
  • the interface shown in FIG. 19 is returned.
  • the final target position of the "Setting" Widget control is now in the movement process , and according to the preset algorithm, select the position of other controls with the least adjustment to maintain the original interface displayed on the panel, and the number of moved controls is the least.
  • the focus is still displayed on the "Settings" Widget control, so as to facilitate the user's subsequent operations.
  • the font of the system home page in the drawings is a replacement for the image of the area before the change in order to simplify the drawing, and the image of the area can maintain the original display logic in the panel control logic.
  • the system when the system generates a recommended Widget control, it first obtains the control size corresponding to the target service Widget control with an invalidation flag.
  • the size of the widget and the business type can also be used as search criteria to recommend other business Widget controls of a similar type to the invalid specified business module for the user.
  • the controller executes step 51, that is, generates a recommended Widget control based on the attribute parameters of the target business Widget control, and is further configured to perform the following steps:
  • Step 511 acquire the business type of the specified business module and the control size of the target business Widget control.
  • Step 512 based on the business type of the specified business module, search for a business widget control having the same control size as the target business widget control, as the first type of control, the business type of the business module corresponding to the first type of control is the same as the business type of the specified business module .
  • Step 513 if the number of controls of the first type of controls satisfies the display position threshold of the replacement control display area, use the first type of controls as recommended Widget controls.
  • the timing for the system to generate the recommended Widget control may be when the user triggers the target service Widget control with an invalidation flag, or when the user triggers a space displayed in the Widget panel.
  • the recommendation may be made based on the characteristics of the service Widget control originally displayed in the vacancy.
  • the recommendation strategy can be recommended according to the order of priority, that is, firstly find Widget controls with the same characteristics (that is, the same business type) based on the business type and control size; then based on the desktop application Widget controls with the same characteristics (that is, the same application) are searched for the control sizes of other business modules provided; finally, Widget controls with the same characteristics (that is, the same size of the controls) are searched based on the control sizes of all controls in the system.
  • the Widget panel when the Widget control is displayed in the Widget panel, the Widget panel is provided with a plurality of regular grid grids with the same size. Since different Widget controls correspond to different control sizes, the number of grids occupied by different Widget controls is different. For example, refer to Figure 13 again, the "period weather” control occupies 3 horizontal grids, and the corresponding control size is 3 ⁇ 1; the “Signal Source” control occupies 3 vertical grids, and the corresponding control size is 1 ⁇ 3; the “Settings” control occupies 2 horizontal grids, and the corresponding control size is 2 ⁇ 1;” “Children” control occupies a grid, and the corresponding control size is 1 ⁇ 1.
  • the size of the control can be represented by the number of grids, then the size of the space formed after the control is deleted is also represented by the number of grids, and the size requirements of the recommended Widget controls that can be replaced and displayed are also represented by the number of grids.
  • a search can be performed based on the business type. If the business widget deleted by the user is a "children" business widget, the business type of this business is educational, and it occupies a grid, then it is necessary to find a business widget that is also educational and occupies a grid, as First class controls. At this time, the business type of the business module corresponding to the first type of control is the same as the business type of the specified business module, and the control size of the first type of control is the same as that of the target business Widget control corresponding to the specified business module.
  • the first type of controls After finding the first type of controls, it is judged whether the number of controls of the first type of controls satisfies the display position threshold of the replacement control display area, that is, it is judged whether the first type of controls can occupy all the display areas of the replacement control display area. If the number of controls of the first type of control meets the display position threshold of the replacement control display area, it means that the first type of control can occupy all the display areas of the replacement control display area, and there is no need to continue to query, then the first type of control is recommended as the Widget control .
  • the display bit threshold N is defined according to the application size.
  • the display bit threshold N is 6, if the control size is 1 ⁇ 1, then N is 6, that is, at most 6 recommended Widget controls are displayed; if the control size is 2 ⁇ 2, N is 3, that is, at most 3 are displayed recommended Widget controls; if the control size is 3 ⁇ 2, then N is 2, that is, at most 2 recommended Widget controls are displayed.
  • each found first-type control can be directly used as a recommended Widget control, and displayed in the replacement control display area in turn. If the number of controls found in the first type of controls is 3, which is less than the display bit threshold N, it is necessary to continue to search in the next order. If the number of controls found in the first type of controls is 8, which is greater than the display bit threshold N, only the first 6 controls are recommended as Widget controls.
  • the query order of the recommended Widget controls is searched, the business type is the first priority order, and when the first type of controls found in the first priority order does not meet the conditions, continue to search with the second priority order , wherein the second priority order is based on the search order for Widget controls corresponding to other business modules provided by the application to which the currently specified business module belongs.
  • the search is continued with the third priority order, wherein the third priority order is a search order based on all controls provided by the system.
  • the controller if the first type of control found by the first priority does not meet the conditions and continues to search in the order of the second priority, the controller generates a recommended Widget control based on the attribute parameters of the target business Widget control , is further configured to perform the following steps:
  • Step 514 If the number of controls of the first type of controls does not meet the display position threshold of the replacement control display area, based on the business module provided by the desktop application to which the specified business module belongs, search for a business widget control with the same control size as the target application Widget control , as the second type of control, the application to which the second type of control corresponds to the business module and the application to which the specified business belongs are both desktop applications.
  • Step 515 if the total number of controls of the first type of widgets and the second type of controls meets the display position threshold of the replacement widget display area, use the first type of controls and the second type of controls as recommended Widget controls.
  • the system When the system follows the first priority order and uses the business type and control size as the search basis, and the number of controls found in the first control does not meet the display position threshold of the replacement control display area, it needs to continue to search based on the second priority order .
  • obtain the application to which the specified business module belongs (which is a desktop application), and based on other business modules provided by the desktop application to which the specified business module belongs, search for a business Widget control with the same control size as the target business Widget control, as the second type controls.
  • the application of the business module corresponding to the second type of control is the same as the application of the specified business, both of which are desktop applications, and the control size of the second type of control is the same as that of the target business Widget control corresponding to the specified business module.
  • the desktop application to which this business module belongs also provides business modules such as The functions displayed by the Widget control.
  • the widget size of the "Friends Circle” business widget is 3 ⁇ 2
  • the widget size of the "TV Drama” business widget is 2 ⁇ 1
  • the widget size of the "Movie” business widget is 1 ⁇ 1
  • the widget size of the "Children” business Widget controls with the same control size (1 ⁇ 1) are “movies”, therefore, the “movie” service Widget controls can be used as the second type of controls.
  • zero or more second-type controls can be found. After searching based on the second priority order, calculate the total number of first-type controls and second-type controls, and replace the controls again. The display bit threshold of the display area is compared.
  • the first type of widget and the second type of widget are used as recommended Widget controls, which are sequentially displayed in the replacement widget display area.
  • the searched first type of control and the second type of control If the total control quantity of the control does not meet the display bit threshold of the replacement control display area, it is necessary to continue to search based on the third priority order.
  • get all the Widget controls stored in the system use the business Widget control with the same control size as the target business Widget control as the third type of control, and recommend it to the user in order of priority, and display it in the replacement control display area .
  • the total number of controls of the first type of control, the second type of control and the third type of control meets the display bit threshold of the replacement control display area.
  • the application in order to avoid repeatedly adding the same control to be displayed in the Widget panel when searching for recommended Widget controls based on each priority order, the application only selects the remaining ones that meet the query conditions that are not displayed in the Widget panel when querying. Query in the business Widget control.
  • the "Recommended” business Widget control when querying other business modules provided by the desktop application to which the "Children" business module belongs, the "Recommended" business Widget control has been displayed in the Widget panel, although the "Recommended” business Widget control meets the search conditions (the control has the same size, is the same as the specified business modules belong to the same desktop application), and the "recommended" business Widget control is not used as the second type of control, that is, the "recommended” business Widget control is not displayed repeatedly.
  • each business module provided by it when the desktop application is started, each business module provided by it will report its own support control information (control size, business type, application, etc.) to the Widget panel, and the type of control is equivalent to the business of the corresponding business module type.
  • the Widget panel will be displayed according to system presets or user-defined desktop controls (the Widget panel will display the preset controls when it is first started, and the user-defined desktop controls will be cached when it is started again).
  • the widget management module (WidgetServer) in the system will first inquire about the application, service type and size of the widget to which the widget currently to be deleted belongs. The widget management module will first query and reduce the dimensionality of the three dimensions of the application to be deleted, the business type, and the application to which it belongs, select and sort the widgets after they are applied, and then display the recommended order of the widgets after sorting. If the system does not find a recommended control that meets the conditions, no recommendation will be made. If the user selects one of the recommended Widget controls, the new widget will be added to the original position of the deleted widget, and if there is no selection, the corresponding widget will be deleted directly.
  • the priority order of widget recommendation is: because the widget is registered in the At this time, the control size (size), business type, application, etc. of the current business widget will be provided. Therefore, when a control fails or is to be deleted, the system first checks whether the business type of the failed business widget still has a control of the same size. , if there is and the control is not displayed in the Widget panel (increasing that it is not displayed on the desktop is to prevent repeated addition of the same control), this type of control has the highest priority.
  • the display device provided by this application is based on the deleted target business Widget control, and first obtains whether there is a Widget control of the same size as the business type of the invalid target business Widget control. If there is a Widget control, then Recommend it to the user; if not, check whether there is a business Widget control of the same size in the corresponding desktop application. added to the desktop).
  • the system recommends controls with similar functions and the same size to the user according to the size of the current control and the type of business, which is convenient for users to add, avoids vacancies in the Widget panel, and even fills the vacancies after the user selects to improve user experience.
  • a control display method includes:
  • determining and displaying the icon of the second business includes: obtaining the business type of the first business module corresponding to the first business Widget control and the control size of the first business Widget control; the target service, and determine the second service corresponding to the second service Widget control of the first service Widget control with the same control size in the target service; and display the icon corresponding to the second service.
  • the service corresponding to the recommended control can be made the same or similar to the service of the deleted control, so that the service deleted by the user can be effectively replaced.
  • the deleted control is deleted by the user when the control is not invalid, controls corresponding to different types of services are recommended; when the deleted control is deleted by the user when the control is invalid, the same recommended The control corresponding to the type business. This is because in some embodiments, the user's initiative to delete a control that has not expired may indicate that the user does not like this type of service. Therefore, controls corresponding to different business types are recommended.
  • determining and displaying the icon of the second service includes: obtaining the second service corresponding to the second service Widget control having the same control size as the first service Widget; and displaying the icon corresponding to the second service.
  • determining and displaying icons of the second services includes: determining a plurality of second services and usage frequencies of the plurality of second services; Icons, wherein the icon corresponding to the second service with high frequency of use is highlighted compared to the icon corresponding to the second service with low frequency of use. In this way, among controls of the same size, controls that are frequently used by users and not displayed in the panel can be selected for recommendation. Conducive to the quick use of the user.
  • the highlighting can be sort-first, highlighting, or large-size displaying.
  • determining and displaying icons of the second services includes: determining a plurality of second services and usage times of the plurality of second services; Icons, wherein the icon corresponding to the second service with a small time difference between the usage time and the current time is highlighted compared to the icon corresponding to the second service with a large time difference between the usage time and the current time.
  • Icons wherein the icon corresponding to the second service with a small time difference between the usage time and the current time is highlighted compared to the icon corresponding to the second service with a large time difference between the usage time and the current time.
  • determining and displaying the icons of the second services includes: determining a plurality of second services and update times of the plurality of second services; Icons, wherein the icon corresponding to the second service with a small time difference between the update time and the current time is highlighted compared to the icon corresponding to the second service with a large time difference between the update time and the current time.
  • Icons wherein the icon corresponding to the second service with a small time difference between the update time and the current time is highlighted compared to the icon corresponding to the second service with a large time difference between the update time and the current time.
  • determining and displaying the icon of the second service includes: obtaining the target service corresponding to the second service Widget control having the same control size as the first service Widget control; filtering the Widget controls deleted by the user in the target service to determine the second service; and display an icon corresponding to the second service. In order to exclude the services deleted by the user during the recommendation process and avoid repeated recommendations.
  • determining and displaying the icon of the second service includes: obtaining the service type corresponding to the system page, and obtaining the control size of the Widget control of the first service, wherein the system page refers to the system page before the Widget panel is displayed; type, searching for the target business with the same business type, and determining the second business corresponding to the second business Widget control with the same control size of the first business Widget control in the target business; displaying the icon corresponding to the second business. Since the user's demand for calling out the panel may be triggered based on the current system page, the user's purpose is to find services related to the current interface, so when recommending, recommend controls that are related to the current system page business and are not displayed on the panel. Conducive to the quick use of the user.
  • S1702 Receive an input selection of an icon of the second service
  • there are multiple icons of the second service and the focus is set on the highlighted icon by default (the focus in the Widget panel is revoked at this time). By moving the focus, the user can view the icon of the second service that can be selected. If the user exits the selection of the icon for the second service, leave blank in the first position. If the user selects one of the icons, execute step S1703.
  • S1703 Display the second service Widget control of the second service corresponding to the selected icon at the first position, where the first position is the display position of the first service Widget control.
  • some embodiments of the present application provide a method for displaying widgets, including: when detecting that the Widget control of the first business is deleted, determining and displaying the icon of the second business, wherein the icon of the second business corresponding to the second The size of the business Widget control is not greater than the size of the first position, the first position being the display position of the first business Widget control and the blank position adjacent to the display position of the first business Widget control; receiving the input icon for the second business selection; the second service Widget control of the second service corresponding to the selected icon is displayed at the first position.
  • the control when recommending, consider the deleted control and the blank space in the adjacent position (if it exists) to recommend the control. At this time, the control can be the same size as the deleted position, or the same as the entire blank position. Or it is the same as any combination of the minimum position unit of the entire blank position, realizing diversified recommendations.
  • the first position includes a reserved blank position existing before the delete action and a target position of the deleted control.
  • the target position is 2*4 in size
  • the reserved blank space is 4*4, then the blank space left after deletion is 4*6 in size (or 6*4 in size).
  • Icons of 6*4, 4*2, 2*4, 2**2 and other sizes can be recommended. The number of sizes that can be screened is thus expanded.
  • Fig. 6 is a flowchart of a control processing method in some embodiments of the present application.
  • a control processing method provided by an embodiment of the present invention the method for detecting the validity of the control includes:
  • the designated business module refers to a business module that displays a business Widget control in the Widget panel, and the business status is used to represent the designated business. whether the module is available;
  • a control processing method and a display device receive preset operations generated based on the desktop home page, detect whether the business status of each specified business module changes, and if there is a change, determine the target business based on the status change information Widget controls.
  • an invalidation mark is displayed on the target business Widget control in the Widget panel to indicate that the target business Widget control corresponding to the specified business module with a state change is invalid. It can be seen that this method and the display device can display the validity of the control according to the two dimensions of business and application when realizing the validity detection of the control, and trigger the query mechanism at a specific point in time.
  • the invalidation mark is displayed on the corresponding business Widget control in the panel, which is convenient for users to find unavailable business Widget controls in time, and the user experience is good.
  • Fig. 23 is a schematic diagram of a user interface of a display device shown in some exemplary embodiments of the present application.
  • the user interface may include multiple view display areas, such as view display areas 501A, 502A, 503A, 504A as shown in FIG. 23 .
  • One or more items can be laid out in each view display area, where items include icons, windows, controls and other visual interface elements, where controls can include icons, buttons, menus, tabs, text boxes, dialog boxes, status bars , navigation bar, Widget control, etc.
  • the display device after the display device is started, it can directly enter the homepage of the TV system.
  • the homepage of the TV system can be the homepage of a preset video-on-demand program, such as the homepage of Jukankan (J) application.
  • the display device can work in a standard mode, an education mode, or a kid's mode based on the J application.
  • the standard mode is the basic working mode provided by the display device for users;
  • the education mode refers to the working mode that can provide users with primary, elementary and higher education media resources;
  • the children's mode refers to the provision of children's media resources for users working mode.
  • the interface that can be provided by the J application includes a standard mode interface, a children's mode interface and an education mode interface, and the content accessible to the user in the corresponding mode is displayed on the interface of different modes.
  • the different working modes supported by the display device are referred to as the first mode and the second mode respectively
  • the user interface displayed in the first mode is the first mode interface
  • the user interface displayed in the second mode The interface is the second mode interface.
  • the first mode interface is used to display content accessible in the first mode
  • the second mode interface is used to display content accessible in the second mode. It should be understood that the accessible contents in the first mode and the second mode are contents of different scopes provided by content service providers.
  • the user can select the working mode of the display device during the booting navigation process when the display device is turned on for the first time.
  • the startup navigation process refers to a series of initial basic setting processes for the display device, including but not limited to selecting the language of the operation interface, initializing the connection to the network, logging in to the cloud service account, and selecting the working mode, etc.
  • the user can select the working mode of the display device in the mode selection interface.
  • the mode selection interface includes multiple mode options such as "Standard Mode", "educationion Mode” and "Children Mode”.
  • the display device When the user selects "educational mode”, the display device will work in the educational mode, such as displaying the homepage of the educational mode, and executing the interactive control strategy corresponding to the educational mode.
  • the display device When the user selects "Standard Mode”, the display device will work in the standard mode, such as displaying the homepage in the standard mode, and executing the interactive control strategy corresponding to the standard mode.
  • the user can also control the display device to switch from the standard mode to the education mode or the children's mode in the interface provided in the standard mode that includes the mode switching button, and the interface that includes the mode switching button provided in the education mode or the children's mode In the interface, control the display device to switch from education mode or children's mode to standard mode.
  • the J application is started during the start-up process of the operating system of the display device. After the J application starts, read the mode attribute variable in the system attribute data. If the read mode attribute variable is the first value, display the standard mode system home page. If the read mode attribute variable is not the first value, display the homepage of the children's mode system or the education mode system homepage. For example, if the read mode attribute variable is the second value, then display the homepage of the juvenile mode system; if the read mode attribute variable is the third value, then display the education mode system homepage.
  • the J application executes a mode switching process in response to a user operation. Specifically, the J application modifies the mode attribute variable in the system attribute data to the second value in response to the user operation indicating to enter the kids mode from the standard mode, and at the same time updates the currently displayed standard mode interface to the kids mode interface. The J application modifies the mode attribute variable in the system attribute data to the first value in response to the user operation indicating to enter the standard mode from the children's mode, and at the same time updates the currently displayed children's mode interface to the standard mode interface.
  • the home page of the TV system provided by the J application includes at least a navigation bar and a content area below the navigation bar. , so as to display the title interface corresponding to the selected title control.
  • the programs in the application layer can be integrated in the J application and displayed through a control on the navigation bar.
  • the application control in the navigation bar is selected, further display the page of the application.
  • the applications on the display device include system applications and user applications, and the system applications may include Widget applications and other system applications.
  • the Widget application is used to read the application registration information of the operating system, and integrate the Widgets corresponding to the user application and other system applications according to the read application registration information, so that the user can operate other system applications and user applications in the Widget application, such as launching A certain user application or a certain functional module that operates a certain user application.
  • the Widget application may have an independent UI interaction interface, which may be called a Widget panel, and is mainly used to display Widget controls.
  • a Widget control corresponds to a certain user application or system application. The user operates the corresponding application by operating the Widget control on the Widget panel.
  • the system home page displayed after the display device is turned on is a Widget application interface, that is, the system home page is a Widget panel including Widget controls arranged in a preset order.
  • the system home page is a Widget panel including Widget controls arranged in a preset order.
  • the view display area for displaying the Widget panel may occupy the entire screen, or may occupy part of the screen, such as occupying the left area of the screen.
  • the user can start the Widget application and display the Widget panel by inputting a preset operation.
  • the display device receives the input preset operation through the J application, and the J application starts the Widget application after receiving the preset operation.
  • the Widget application displays Widget panels in different states according to the attributes of the current working mode. Specifically, if the current working mode is the standard mode, the Widget panel in the first state is displayed, and all widget controls displayed in the Widget panel in the first state are available; For the Widget panel in the second state, at least one Widget control in the Widget panel in the second state is unavailable. In this way, in the standard mode, the user can open all Widget controls, but in the children's mode or education mode, the user will not be able to directly open those Widget controls that are restricted to be used in the corresponding mode.
  • the user can press and hold the left arrow key (hereinafter referred to as "left key") on the remote control to trigger the display of the Widget panel.
  • the J application receives the operation, it launches the Widget application through the implicit start method of the Intent.
  • the Widget application After the Widget application is started, it reads the mode attribute variable in the system attribute data. According to the read mode attribute variable, it can be determined that the current working mode is the standard mode, so the Widget panel in the first state is displayed. In the Widget panel in the first state Contains one or more Widget controls, each Widget control is available. When the Widget panel in the first state is displayed, the user can start the application corresponding to the Widget by operating any Widget control on it, and display relevant content of the application.
  • the Widget control on the Widget panel can obtain the focus, but the J application cannot obtain the focus.
  • the specified Widget on the Widget panel first obtains the focus, and the selector indicating the focus position is displayed on the specified Widget control by default. When the Widget panel is displayed, the user can move the position of the selector through corresponding operations to select different Widget controls.
  • the specified Widget control may be the first Widget control on the Widget panel.
  • the J application responds to the received preset operation, while pulling up the Widget application, moves the content in the standard mode interface to the right content area of the display along the lateral right direction of the display show. After the Widget application is started, the Widget panel is displayed in the left content area of the display. In this way, while the Widget panel is displayed, the content in the J application standard mode interface can be continuously displayed.
  • the right content area of the display is referred to as a first content area
  • the left content area of the display is referred to as a second content area. It should be understood that the sizes of the first content area and the second content area can be preset according to requirements.
  • the left part of the content in the standard mode interface is displayed in the right content area with the original display size, and the other right part of the content is hidden.
  • each interface element is displayed at a new display position, and the interface elements beyond the right edge of the display window will be hidden.
  • all content in the standard mode interface is displayed in the right content area in a compressed display size.
  • S W2/Wmax.
  • the new display size of each interface element in the standard mode interface calculated according to the reduction ratio is (a0 ⁇ S) ⁇ (b0 ⁇ S), where a0 ⁇ b0 is the original display size of a certain interface element.
  • all the content in the standard mode interface is displayed in the right content area with the new display size.
  • the Widget panel is displayed superimposed on the content of the J application standard mode interface.
  • the Widget panel can be set to be translucent, so that the covered content in the interface can be displayed through the Widget panel.
  • the user can control switching to the children's mode or the education mode interface through a specified control on the homepage of the standard mode. Since the children's mode or education mode interface can display children's media or education media, it can restrict children in the family from using functions that have nothing to do with children or education, ensuring that children can learn in a pure space without being disturbed by other factors.
  • the J App's Kid Mode interface is different from the "Kids" title interface nested in the standard mode home page.
  • the child mode interface is independent, and its display scheme can be configured separately, while the "children" title interface is nested in the standard mode homepage, and its display scheme is a part of the standard mode homepage display scheme; on the other hand, the child mode interface
  • the displayed content is different from the "Children” title interface.
  • the TAB column of the home page in the standard mode may also include an "education” control, and when the focus falls on "education”, the title interface of "education” will be displayed in the lower content display area. It should be understood that, based on a similar reason to the title interface of "Children", the title interface of "Education” is different from the user interface in the education mode, and details will not be described here.
  • Fig. 24 is an example of a possible “children" title interface.
  • the interface includes functional controls such as “Children's Mode” and "Parents Center”, wherein the user can enter into the Children's Mode by operating the "Children's Mode” control.
  • the application J receives the user's operation on the "children's mode” control, it displays the homepage of the children's mode, and sets the value of the mode attribute in the local attribute data as the second value.
  • the user when the homepage in the kids mode is displayed, the user can trigger the launch of the Widget application and display the Widget panel through a preset operation.
  • the user can press and hold the left button of the remote control to trigger the display of the Widget panel.
  • Application J receives the preset operation, and launches the Widget application through the implicit start mode of Intent.
  • the mode attribute variable in the system attribute data is read. According to the read mode attribute variable, it can be determined that the current working mode is the children's mode, so the Widget panel in the second state is displayed. Different from the Widget panel in the first state displayed in the standard mode, at least one Widget control is unavailable in the Widget panel in the second state displayed in the children's mode.
  • the Widget panel in the second state includes a hidden Widget control and an unlocking control for triggering the display of the hidden Widget control, that is, the Widget panel in the second state does not display any Widget control, so that by setting all the Widget controls to Controls are hidden making all Widget controls unavailable. At this time, the user cannot view the Widget controls on the Widget panel, and cannot operate any Widget control.
  • the Widget application displays a password input interface in response to the operation (such as a click operation) on the unlock control, and receives the password input by the user in the password input interface.
  • the Widget application After the Widget application receives the password entered by the user, it verifies whether the entered password is correct; if it verifies that the entered password is correct, it controls the hidden Widget control to appear in the Widget panel, thereby releasing the locked state of the Widget panel.
  • the unlocked Widget panel is the same as the Widget panel in the first state.
  • the user can move the position of the selector through corresponding operations to select different Widget controls.
  • the user can start the application corresponding to the Widget control and display relevant content of the application by operating the selected Widget control.
  • auxiliary information such as time information, weather information, and unlock prompt information may also be displayed on the Widget panel in the second state.
  • the J application responds to the received preset operation, while pulling up the Widget application, moves the content in the children's mode interface to the right content of the display along the lateral right direction of the display displayed in the area.
  • the Widget panel in the second state is displayed in the left content area of the display. In this way, while the Widget panel is displayed, the content in the child mode interface can be continuously displayed.
  • the left part of the content in the children's mode interface is displayed in the right content area at the original display size, and the other right part of the content is hidden.
  • all content in the child mode interface is displayed in the right content area in a compressed display size.
  • the Widget panel in the second state is displayed superimposed on the content of the children's mode interface.
  • the layer where the Widget panel in the second state is located can be set to be translucent, so that the covered content in the interface can be displayed through the layer where the Widget panel is located.
  • FIG. 26 is a user interface shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • the user interface is a user interface displayed when a long press operation of the left button is received when the home page of the system for children in FIG. 25 is displayed.
  • a Widget panel is displayed in the content area on the left side of the user interface.
  • the Widget panel displays unlock controls and auxiliary information.
  • the auxiliary information specifically includes time information "12:34", greeting " Good noon” and the weather information "Today -11 ⁇ 2°C, sunny to cloudy".
  • the main page of the child mode system continues to be displayed.
  • each item in the home page of the system in kids mode is displayed in alignment with the left border of the display area on the right side with the original layout parameters, and the home page of the system in kids mode Displayed content that extends beyond the right border of the user interface is hidden.
  • the original layout parameters refer to the layout parameters of each item in FIG. 25 .
  • FIG. 27A is a user interface shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • the user interface is specifically the password input interface displayed after the user operates the unlock control in the Widget panel.
  • operable numeric soft keys, a delete key, and a password input area are displayed in the password input interface.
  • the user can select the number to be input by moving the focus, input the selected number by confirming the operation, and delete the input number by operating the delete key.
  • FIG. 27A is only an example of a password input interface.
  • the password input interface displayed in different products may be different. For example, in some embodiments, a 6-digit or 8-digit password can be input in the password input area of the password input interface, and letters and/or symbol soft keys can also be displayed, and a clear key can also be displayed.
  • FIG. 27B is an unlocked user interface shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • the user interface is specifically the user interface displayed after the user enters a correct password in the password input interface.
  • the unlocked Widget panel is displayed in the content area on the left side of the user interface, and there are multiple Widget controls displayed on the Widget panel, which are "signal source”, “application center” and “city service”. , "Small Classroom”, “Contacts”, “Player”, “Fitness Program”, “Standard”, “Equipment”, “Smart Camera”.
  • the items in the homepage of the system for children are shifted to the right content area of the user interface as a whole, and the displayed content on the page that exceeds the right boundary of the user interface is hidden.
  • the Widget application if the Widget application verifies that the password input by the user in the password input interface is correct, then modify the mode attribute variable in the system attribute data to the second value or the third value.
  • the J application polls the mode attribute variable in the system attribute data, and when the polled mode attribute system changes from the second value or the third value to the first value, the currently displayed children's mode interface or education
  • the modal interface is updated to the standard modal interface.
  • the J application when the J application is switched from the background to the foreground, the J application reads the mode attribute variable in the system attribute data. If the read mode attribute variable is the first value, a standard mode interface is displayed. If the read mode attribute value is the second value or the third value, continue to display the child mode interface or the education mode interface.
  • the Widget application when the user successfully unlocks the Widget panel in the children's mode or education mode, and then controls the Widget application to exit through the return command, the Widget application will exit the foreground, and the J application will switch to the foreground, and read the mode attribute value as the first value , so as to update the currently displayed child mode or education mode interface to the standard mode interface, that is, to switch from the child mode or education mode to the standard mode.
  • the Widget control in the Widget panel in the second state, is normally displayed, wherein the designated Widget control is unavailable, and the designated Widget control refers to a Widget control whose use is restricted in the children's mode and/or the education mode.
  • the mode attribute of each Widget is determined according to the configuration information of each Widget. If it is a children's mode and/or an education mode, a Widget control icon containing an unavailable mark is displayed, and the The Widget is configured as unavailable; if it is in the standard mode, the Widget control icon without the unavailable logo will be displayed.
  • the user can normally check the Widget panel to know all the Widget controls on the Widget panel, and the user can directly operate the available Widget controls, but cannot directly operate the unavailable Widget controls.
  • the Widget application when the user selects an unavailable Widget control and determines, the Widget application responds to the user operation by displaying the password input interface as shown in FIG. 27A and receiving the password input by the user on the password input interface.
  • the Widget application if the Widget application verifies that the password entered by the user in the password input interface is correct, the Widget application directly launches the application corresponding to the Widget control operated by the user. After the corresponding application is started, the relevant content of the application may be directly displayed in the left content area, or the interface of the application may be displayed in full screen.
  • the Widget application verifies that the password entered by the user in the password input interface is correct, activate the Widget control operated by the user to an available state, and cancel the unavailable mark on its icon.
  • the application corresponding to the Widget control can be opened, that is, relevant content of the application is displayed.
  • Fig. 28 is a user interface shown in some exemplary embodiments of the present application.
  • the user interface is specifically a user interface displayed after receiving a long press operation of the left button when the homepage of the system for children is displayed.
  • a Widget panel is displayed in the view display area on the left side of the user interface, and there are multiple Widget controls displayed on the Widget panel, which are "Signal Source”, “Application Center”, and “City Service”. , “Small Classroom”, “Contacts”, “Player”, “Fitness Program”, “Standard”, “Equipment”, “Smart Camera”.
  • “Signal Source”, “Application Center”, “City Service” and “Device” are unavailable Widget controls, on which a lock icon is displayed, while other Widget controls are available Widget controls.
  • the Widget application When the user interface shown in Figure 28 is displayed, if the user selects the unavailable "Application Center” control and confirms, the Widget application will respond to the user's operation on the "Application Center", display the password input interface as shown in Figure 27A, and Receive the password entered by the user in the password input interface. In some implementation situations, if the Widget application verifies that the password entered by the user in the password input interface is correct, the application center application module is directly launched. After the application module of the application center is started, multiple application program icons may be displayed in the left content area, and the multiple application program icons are the first-level item contents corresponding to the "application center" control.
  • the homepage of the application module of the application center is displayed in full screen, and multiple application icons are displayed on the homepage.
  • the Widget application verifies that the password entered by the user in the password input interface is correct, the lock icon on the "application center” control is canceled. The user needs to operate the "Application Center” control again to expand the multiple application icons corresponding to the "Application Center” control in the left content area.
  • Widget controls in the Widget panel can be activated as available Widget controls.
  • the Widget application when the user interface shown in Figure 28 is displayed, if the user selects the "Application Center" control and confirms, the Widget application will respond to the user's operation on the "Application Center” and display the password input interface as shown in Figure 27A. And receive the password input by the user in the password input interface. If the Widget application verifies that the password entered by the user in the password input interface is correct, the lock icons on all unavailable Widget controls in the Widget panel are canceled, and then the user interface shown in FIG. 30 is displayed.
  • the user can operate the return key on the remote control, or press and hold the right button to input a return command to control the Widget panel Collapse and return to the standard mode home page or continue to display the kids mode home page or the education mode home page.
  • the Widget application exits the foreground after receiving the input return instruction, and the Widget panel is put away.
  • the J application responds to the exit of the Widget application from the foreground, switches to the foreground to run, and reads the mode attribute variable in the system attribute data. If the read mode attribute variable is the first value, the currently displayed standard mode interface or children's mode interface is updated to the standard mode interface. If the read mode attribute value is the second value or the third value, continue to display the child mode interface or the education mode interface.
  • the Widget control in the Widget panel can obtain the focus, and the user can select the target Widget control by moving the focus position for operation.
  • the user can click the target Widget control by operating the "OK" button on the remote control.
  • the Widget application starts the application corresponding to the target Widget control, and displays relevant content of the application.
  • the first-level item content of the application can be displayed in the preset content area, for example, floating on the Widget panel and displayed in the left content area of the user interface . It is also possible to display a first-level page of the application in full screen, such as the home page of the application.
  • FIG. 31 is an exemplary user interface displayed after the user selects the "AI Gathering Assistant" control in the Widget panel shown in FIG. 10 .
  • the first-level item content corresponding to the "AI Gathering Assistant” is displayed in the view display area on the left side of the user interface.
  • the first-level items corresponding to "AI Xiaoju Assistant” include "weather", “information", and “calendar” controls, as well as five-day weather change charts and schedule information.
  • the focus stays on the "Weather” control by default. At this point, the user can move the focus to select other controls to display different item content.
  • the weather information can be canceled and the calendar details of this month can be displayed.
  • the calendar details of this month will be canceled and the information list will be displayed.
  • Fig. 32 exemplarily shows the user interface displayed after the user selects the "application center" control in the Widget panel shown in Fig. 10 .
  • the content of the first-level items corresponding to the "application center” is expanded in the view display area on the left side of the user interface, specifically including multiple application program icons.
  • the focus stays on the first application icon by default, and the user can move the focus position to select and operate any application to start the application.
  • Fig. 33 exemplarily shows the user interface displayed after the user selects the "signal source” control in the Widget panel shown in Fig. 10 .
  • the signal source list is displayed in the view display area on the left side of the user interface.
  • the signal source list is arranged by multiple signal source options, such as HDMI1, HDMI2, analog TV, terrestrial digital, etc.
  • the user can move the hidden signal source option in the signal source list to the view display area to display it by continuously moving the focus downward.
  • the focus stays on HDMI1 by default, and the user can move the focus position by operation to select and operate any signal source option.
  • the user can trigger the display of the content of the secondary item corresponding to the content of the primary item by operating the content of the primary item of the corresponding application of the Widget control.
  • Fig. 34 exemplarily shows the user interface displayed after the user selects the "Settings” control in the Widget panel shown in Fig. 10 .
  • multiple first-level setting items such as “one-key acceleration”, “one-key direct access”, “playback settings”, “image mode” and “sound mode” are displayed in the view display area on the left side of the user interface , the focus stays on the "One-Key Acceleration” item by default.
  • the user can select the item to be operated by moving the focus position, and by operating the selected first-level setting item, the content of the corresponding second-level item is triggered to be displayed.
  • the secondary setting item corresponding to the "sound mode” item will be displayed.
  • the secondary setting items corresponding to "sound mode” such as "AI sound quality”, “cinema”, “music”, “sports” are displayed in the view display area on the left side of the user interface, and the user can move the focus position to select the sound mode you want to set, or cancel the currently set sound mode.
  • the displayed content and its level triggered by the user clicking on the Widget control depend on the design of the application corresponding to the Widget control, and those skilled in the art can design the display logic of the relevant content of each application according to user requirements.
  • navigation icons are displayed in the view display area where the project content is displayed. For example, when displaying the content of the secondary item corresponding to a certain application, an icon indicating to return to the previous level is displayed in the display area of the corresponding view. If the currently displayed project content also includes the project content of the next level, an icon indicating entering the next level is displayed in the display area of the corresponding view.
  • the display device provided by the present application can work in two modes, which are respectively the first mode and the second mode, and the content accessible in the first mode includes the content accessible in the second mode and other content, so that it can be accessed through Configure the content that can be accessed in different modes, so that users can only access allowed content in a certain mode, while restricting access to other content.
  • the first mode is a standard mode
  • the second mode is a children's mode or an education mode.
  • the standard mode interface is displayed, the user can access children's media resources, educational media resources and other media resources, while when the children's mode interface or the education mode interface is displayed, the user can only access educational media resources and/or children's media resources.
  • the user can call out the Widget control panel through a preset operation.
  • the display device receives the preset operation, it first judges the current mode attribute; if the current mode is the first mode, then displays the Widget panel in the first state, and all Widget controls displayed in the Widget panel in the first state are available; if If the current mode is the second mode, the Widget panel in the second state is displayed, and at least one Widget control in the Widget panel in the second state is unavailable. In this way, in the first mode, the user can open all Widget controls, but in the second mode, the user cannot directly open those Widget controls that are restricted to be used in the second mode.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a Widget control display method. As shown in Figure 36, the method may include the following steps:
  • S120A in response to the preset operation, determine the current mode attribute. If the current mode is the first mode, execute S130A, and if the current mode is the second mode, execute S140A.
  • the content accessible in the first mode includes the content accessible in the second mode and other content.
  • the content in the system page in the first mode is moved to the first content area for continuous display, and the Widget panel in the first state is displayed in the second content area.
  • the content in the system page in the second mode is moved to the first content area for continuous display, and the Widget panel in the second state is displayed in the second content area.
  • it includes: displaying the left part of the content of the system home page in the first mode or the second mode in the first content area with the original display size, and displaying the other part of the right part A part of the content is hidden; or, all the content of the system home page in the first mode or in the second mode is displayed in the first content area in a compressed display size.
  • the Widget panel in the second state includes a hidden Widget control and an unlock control for triggering the display of the hidden Widget control.
  • the display method provided by the present application further includes: displaying a password input interface in response to the confirmation operation on the unlock control; when receiving the correct password input in the password input interface, controlling the hidden Widget control displayed in the panel.
  • the designated Widget control in the Widget panel in the second state is unavailable, and the designated Widget control refers to a Widget control whose use is restricted in the second mode.
  • the display method provided by the present application further includes: displaying a password input interface in response to the confirmation operation on the unavailable Widget control; when receiving the correct password input in the password input interface, displaying the corresponding content; in response to the confirmation operation on the available Widget control, display the content corresponding to the operated Widget control.
  • the mode attribute variable in the system property data in response to the operation of switching from the second mode to the first mode in response to the input, is set to the first value; in response to the input indicating switching from the first mode to the second mode action to set the pattern attribute variable in the system attribute data to a different value.
  • the current mode is determined according to the following steps: obtaining the mode attribute variable in the system attribute data; if the mode attribute variable is the first value, determining that the current mode is the first mode; if the mode attribute variable is not is the first value, it is determined that the current mode is the second mode.
  • the mode attribute variable is set to a first value.
  • the corresponding Widget panel is also adjusted according to the changed mode attribute
  • the displaying the content corresponding to the Widget control includes: starting the application corresponding to the Widget control, and displaying the content corresponding to the application in the second content area through the application.
  • the display method provided by the present application further includes: when displaying the Widget panel, receiving an input return instruction; acquiring a mode attribute variable in the system attribute data; if the mode attribute variable is the first value, Then cancel the Widget panel and display the system homepage in the first mode; if the mode attribute variable is not the first value, cancel the Widget panel and display the system homepage in the second mode.
  • the display method provided by the present application further includes: when displaying the content corresponding to the application, receiving an input return instruction; in response to the return instruction, returning the control to the upper-level interface, the previous The level interface refers to the interface before displaying the current content corresponding to the application.
  • the icon of the unavailable Widget control in the Widget panel in the second state has an unavailable identification; when the correct password input in the password input interface is received, the unavailable identification is revoked .
  • Fig. 37 is a flowchart of a component display method in some embodiments of the present application.
  • An embodiment of the present invention provides a display device, including: a display configured to present a user interface; a controller connected to the display, when executing the component display method shown in FIG. 37 , the controller is configured to perform the following steps:
  • S1B Receive an operation to start the desktop application, acquire the service data of each business module provided by the desktop application, and display the desktop homepage in the user interface based on the service data of each service module.
  • Fig. 8 is a schematic diagram of a system homepage in some embodiments of the present application
  • Fig. 38 is a schematic diagram of a desktop homepage in some embodiments of the present application.
  • the user starts the display device, and the display device presents a system home page, and a desktop application (J application) control icon is displayed on the system home page.
  • the desktop application control icon is triggered to start the desktop application to present the desktop home page on the display device.
  • the desktop homepage When displaying the desktop homepage, obtain the business data of each business module provided by the desktop application.
  • the business data is used to realize the functions of the business module.
  • the business data includes a business ID, which is used to represent the business module.
  • the desktop homepage is displayed in the user interface according to the preset homepage layout mode, and the functional content of each business module is displayed on the desktop homepage.
  • each business module provided by the J application is displayed on the home page of the desktop, and each business module can be added to the Widget panel in the form of a Widget based on user-defined settings to provide a quick entry to the business module.
  • the Widget panel is displayed on the home page of the desktop, and the display method of the Widget panel can be displayed synchronously with the desktop home page on the user interface of the display device when the desktop application is started; or, when the desktop application is started, the display device is given priority
  • the desktop homepage is displayed in the user interface of the desktop, and when a preset operation is generated based on the desktop homepage, the Widget panel is called out and displayed on the desktop homepage.
  • the Widget panel is usually hidden when the display device is running, and when the user needs to quickly start a certain function (such as a function realized by a certain business module) through the Widget panel, the Widget panel can be called out based on a preset operation Displayed on the desktop homepage, the default operation refers to the user long pressing the left button on the remote control or other preset function keys. If the user wants to start a certain function, trigger the corresponding Widget in the Widget panel to directly start the function, that is, start a certain business module provided by the desktop application.
  • a certain function such as a function realized by a certain business module
  • the user can simultaneously register a corresponding Widget for a certain business module when starting the desktop application.
  • the WidgetManagers of all business modules are collected, the registration of component information related to the business modules is triggered, and stored in the WidgetServer.
  • the controller when registering a Widget for a business module, the controller is further configured to perform the following steps:
  • Step 101 when registering a Widget for a business module, obtain business data of each remote business module, where the remote business module includes a business module provided by a desktop application or a third-party application.
  • Step 102 Send the service data of each remote service module to the data center module, and the data center module is used to process the service data of each remote service module.
  • Step 103 After the service data is processed, configure a service component management module for each remote service module based on the service ID of each remote service module.
  • Step 104 calling the target service component management module, registering the corresponding Widget for the target remote service module, and storing the component information and the corresponding service ID generated by registering the Widget into the component management module.
  • the remote service modules include service modules provided by desktop applications (such as service module A in FIG. 5 ) or third-party applications (such as application B in FIG. 5 ).
  • the data center module When starting the desktop application, pull up the data center module (WidgetService) synchronously, so as to be ready to receive the business data of the remote business module. Therefore, when a Widget based on a new service module is registered, the data center module receives the service data of the remote service module.
  • a business component management module is configured for each remote business module.
  • a remote service module corresponds to a service ID, therefore, the service ID can represent the corresponding service component management module (WidgetManager), and a service module corresponds to a service component management module.
  • the data center module sends the business data of the target remote business model to the corresponding target business component management module, so that the target business component management module registers the corresponding Widget for the target remote business module. For example, send the business data of business module A to business component management module A for component registration, and send the business data of business module B to business component management module B for component registration.
  • component data and Widget panel information can be synchronously generated to form component information of the target business module.
  • component information A of business module A includes component data A and Widget panel information A
  • component information B of business module B includes component data B and Widget panel information B.
  • the component information of the target business module needs to be further stored, and the module for storing component information is the component management module (WidgetServer). Therefore, after the registration is completed, the target business component management module will store the component information generated by the target business module registration Widget and the corresponding business ID into the component management module (WidgetServer). The component management module stores the component information of the corresponding business module according to the business ID, so as to distinguish and call the component information of different business modules.
  • the above method of registering a Widget for a business module can be applied when the desktop application is started, and can also be applied during the running process of the desktop application. As long as there is a situation of registering a Widget for a business module, the above method can be used to realize the registration.
  • the component management module When displaying the Widget panel, call the business component management module to obtain the component information of the business module corresponding to each business ID from the component management module, and send it to the component display module.
  • the component information refers to the registration of the business module provided by the desktop application Widget information.
  • Component information includes component data and widget panel information.
  • Component data refers to the data required to be displayed on the widget panel by the business module represented by the business ID.
  • Widget panel information refers to the interface layout information displayed by the widget.
  • a desktop homepage is presented in a user interface of the display device.
  • the Widget panel can be displayed synchronously, or the Widget panel can be called up based on a preset operation and displayed on the desktop homepage. Then, when the Widget panel needs to be displayed, based on the desktop component framework shown in Figure 5, call the business component management module to obtain the component information of the business module corresponding to each business ID from the component management module, and send it to the component display module for display .
  • the component management module stores component information of all business modules capable of displaying components. Therefore, when the Widget panel needs to be presented, the component information of all business modules needs to be displayed.
  • the business component management module corresponding to the different business modules obtains the historically added component information from the component management module. That is, based on each business ID added in history, the corresponding business component management module obtains the component information of the business module corresponding to the business ID from the component management module.
  • the desktop application starts, if the component registration of the new business module is performed, in addition to querying the historically added component information, it is also necessary to obtain the newly registered component information from the component management module. That is, based on each newly registered service ID, the corresponding service component management module obtains the component information of the service module corresponding to the service ID from the component management module.
  • each business component management module After obtaining the component information of all business modules that need to be displayed, each business component management module sends the component information of the business modules obtained to the component display module, so that the component display module is based on the component information of each business module Complete the display of the Widget panel.
  • the display of the Widget panel may be delayed because the generation of the desktop home page and the data acquired by the Widget panel may be different.
  • the default data includes the default picture and default text
  • the Widget panel is generated based on the default picture and default text, and displayed in time.
  • the cached component information is obtained from the component management module based on the desktop component framework, the component information of each business module is replaced and displayed in the Widget panel.
  • the calling component display module generates a Widget panel based on the component data corresponding to each business ID and the Widget panel information, and displays it on the desktop homepage.
  • the Widget panel displays several Widgets for providing the startup entry of each business module.
  • the component display module After the component display module receives the component information of the corresponding business module sent by each business component management module, it can generate a Widget panel based on the component information of each business module and display it on the home page of the desktop. Each business module generates a corresponding Widget, lays it out on the Widget panel, and triggers a Widget to realize the quick start of the business module corresponding to the Widget.
  • the controller generates a Widget panel based on the component data and Widget panel information corresponding to each business ID when executing the calling component display module, and is further configured to perform the following steps:
  • Step 31D calling the component display module to generate a component display frame including multiple Widgets based on the Widget panel information corresponding to each service ID, one service ID corresponding to one Widget.
  • step 32D the component data corresponding to each service ID is displayed on the corresponding Widget to form a Widget panel, and a Widget corresponds to a service module.
  • the Widget panel information in the component information is used to determine the layout and size (length and width) of the Widget corresponding to each business module. Therefore, when displaying the Widget corresponding to each business module in the Widget panel, it can be displayed according to the size of each Widget. layout and sorting.
  • the component data in the component information is used to determine the information of the corresponding business module displayed on each Widget, such as the name, icon, and brief introduction of the business module.
  • the component display module determines the layout and sorting of the Widgets corresponding to each service module based on the Widget panel information of the service module corresponding to each service ID. After completing the Widget layout and sorting, the component data of each business ID corresponding to the business module is displayed on the corresponding Widget to form a Widget panel. There is a one-to-one correspondence between business ID, business module and Widget.
  • the component data of the business module also includes trigger operations such as clicking. If the user wants to quickly start a certain business module provided by the desktop application, he can find the corresponding Widget of the business module in the Widget panel, trigger the Widget, and directly enter the corresponding business The home page of the module to realize the quick start of the business module.
  • the Widget panel when displaying the Widget in the Widget panel, is provided with a plurality of regular grids with the same size. Since different Widgets correspond to different component sizes, the number of grids occupied by different Widgets is different.
  • Fig. 39 is a schematic diagram of a Widget panel in some embodiments of the present application.
  • the part of the desktop homepage actually displayed is not shown.
  • the Widget panel and the desktop homepage are two independent display modules, and the Widget panel can be set independently from the desktop homepage in different display modes.
  • the corresponding component size is 3 ⁇ 1 (that is, 3 control units in the horizontal direction and 1 control unit in the vertical direction, and the subsequent size expressions will not be repeated.
  • My App occupies 2 horizontal grids, and the corresponding component size is 2 ⁇ 1;
  • Quality Settings occupies 1 grid, and the corresponding component size is 1 ⁇ 1;
  • Media Center occupies a grid, and the corresponding component size is 1 ⁇ 1.
  • a Widget corresponding to a business module is newly added, a new Widget is displayed on the basis of each Widget originally displayed in the Widget panel. If the component size of the Widget is too large to be fully displayed in the horizontal direction, it will automatically expand one row downward for display. If a Widget displayed in the Widget panel is deleted, it will automatically shrink vertically.
  • the method of determining the position when adding a component may be: obtain the component size of the newly added Widget, and determine whether the vacancy in the rectangular area corresponding to the position of all current controls can accommodate the component of the newly added Widget If the size can be accommodated, the newly added Widget component will be placed adjacent to the existing component, if not, it will be automatically extended by one row below.
  • the four vacancies distributed in an exemplary square shape can be divided into vacancies of the following sizes according to the vacancy segmentation technology: 1 ⁇ 1, 1 ⁇ 2, 2 ⁇ 1, 2 ⁇ 2.
  • the slot segmentation technology can be implemented using existing technologies.
  • the height of the expanded row when automatically extending a row below, it is necessary to determine the height of the expanded row according to the determined height of the newly added Widget component, and then place the newly added Widget component in the expanded new row. Exemplarily, if the height of the component of the newly added Widget is 2, it is necessary to add a new line whose high bit is 2;
  • the home page of the desktop can switch between different TABs for different display.
  • Other pages are the second-level pages corresponding to the controls under any TAB on the home page on the left, or the third-level pages of non-desktop home pages that are redirected from the second-level pages.
  • the display device directly enters the radio and television signal source when starting, such as directly playing a TV program, at this time, the display device does not display the system home page, then it is impossible to enter the desktop home page, that is, the startup service module or Widget panel cannot be generated The default operation, that is, the Widget panel cannot be called up for display.
  • an instruction to move the focus from the user is received, and when the focus moves to the left or right border of the page, in response to the designation of the user continuing to move the focus, it is judged whether the current page is the desktop homepage, and if so, the desktop homepage is moved to Move in the opposite direction, and display the Widget panel at the vacant position on the display interface.
  • the desktop home page when the desktop home page is presented on the display device, if the user wants to start a different application, such as a third-party cloud audio-visual application installed in the TV, the desktop application (J application) needs to be set to the background/cancel the thread and then Start the interface of the cloud audio-visual application.
  • the Widget panel In the display state of the cloud audio-visual application, the Widget panel cannot be called up, and it can only be opened after returning to the home page of the desktop.
  • the display device provided by the present application is equipped with a desktop component framework, and realizes the custom layout of each Widget displayed in the desktop Widget panel through the desktop component framework, which is not limited by the system, and can realize rich interface effects and good user experience. .
  • the displayed content of the Widget may be refreshed.
  • the data refresh method includes actively notifying the desktop application of the business module that has data changes, and the Widget panel actively obtains the data change of each business module from the data center module at a certain time interval.
  • Step 42D calling the target business component management module to send the new component information corresponding to the target business ID to the component display module.
  • Step 43D call the component display module to determine the corresponding target Widget in the Widget panel based on the target service ID, and update the information display of the target Widget based on the new component information corresponding to the target service ID, so as to update the displayed information in the Widget panel.
  • the target business module that generates data changes actively notifies the desktop application to refresh the display content of the corresponding Widget in the Widget panel.
  • the target business module that generates data changes will update the data Sent to the data center module (WidgetService).
  • the data center module After the data center module simply processes the new component information of the target business module, it distributes the new component information of the target business module to the target business component management module corresponding to the target business module.
  • the target business component management module (WidgetManager) for managing component information of the target business module can be determined based on the target business ID of the target business module.
  • the new component information indicates that the data change of the target business module is component data
  • the target business module is the contact application side
  • the changed component data is the contact information .
  • the target Widget in the Widget panel is determined by the target business ID of the target business module as the "contact" component. Therefore, the newly added contact information is updated to the display content of the "Contact” component, or the deleted contact information is deleted from the "Contact” component, so as to update the display information in the Widget panel.
  • the target business module is the contact application side
  • the style of the "Contact” component is square
  • the target Widget in the Widget panel is determined to be the "contact” component by the target business ID of the target business module. Therefore, update the component style of the "Contact” component from the original square shape to a circle shape to update the information displayed in the Widget panel.
  • the controller when the Widget panel actively acquires the changed data of the business module for data refresh, the controller is further configured to perform the following steps:
  • Step 51D when refreshing the display information on the Widget panel at intervals, call the target business component management module to obtain the new component information generated by the target business module from the data center module according to the preset interval, and send the new component information generated by the target business module to Component display module;
  • the Widget panel When the Widget panel actively obtains the change data of the business module for data refresh, the Widget panel actively requests the target business module to return the change data. At this time, the target business module sends the new component information generated by itself to the data after receiving the request.
  • the central module after simple data processing, obtains new component information generated by the target business module from the data center module by the business component management module corresponding to the target business module (target business ID).
  • the target business component management module In order to refresh the data of the Widget panel, the target business component management module is called to send the new component information corresponding to the target business ID to the component display module, and the component display module updates the display content of the corresponding Widget in the Widget panel based on the new component information.
  • the target service component management module In order to update the cached data in the component management module in time, the target service component management module synchronously sends the corresponding new component information to the component management module for storage based on the target service ID.
  • the preset interval for updating information on the Widget panel can be set as 30 minutes, and then the preset interval for invoking the target business component management module to actively obtain the new component information of the target module is also 30 minutes.
  • the preset interval may also be other values, which are not specifically limited.
  • Fig. 40 is a schematic diagram of updating player Widget data in the Widget panel in some embodiments of the present application.
  • the new component information indicates that the data change of the target business module is component data, for example, the target business module is a player, and the corresponding target Widget in the Widget panel is a "player" component.
  • the management module of the target business component corresponding to the player actively requests the player through the data center module Returns the current playback information.
  • the desktop application can actively obtain the data changes generated by a certain business module, and the target business component management module corresponding to the business module can actively obtain the new component information of the business module according to the preset interval, and update the display on the Widget panel at an active real-time interval.
  • Information it is very convenient to implement dynamic components, and the display effect of the Widget panel is better.
  • the desktop application when implementing dynamic components, can also change the valid status of the corresponding Widget in the Widget panel according to the business status of each business module.
  • the valid status is used to indicate whether the corresponding Widget can be triggered by clicking. For example, if a certain business module is uninstalled, in order to remind the user that the business module cannot be quickly started through the Widget in the Widget panel, an invalidation mark may be added to the corresponding Widget.
  • the controller when adding an invalidation identifier to an invalidated Widget, the controller is further configured to perform the following steps:
  • Step 61D When deleting the target service module, receive the delete operation on the target service module, and based on the target service ID of the target service module, invoke the corresponding target service component management module to send a service deletion command carrying the target service ID to the component display module.
  • Step 62D call the component display module, and based on the service deletion instruction, add an invalidation mark on the target Widget corresponding to the target service ID in the Widget panel.
  • the invalidation mark is used to indicate that the Widget corresponding to the target service module corresponding to the target service ID is invalid.
  • a business module configured in the desktop application is deleted/offline, it means that the desktop application no longer provides the business module, then the application management module of the display device will send the deletion/offline broadcast to the Widget panel, and the corresponding The invalidation logo is displayed on the target Widget.
  • the application module is deleted, the invalidation mark is displayed on the corresponding Widget in the Widget panel, and the user is notified in time that the corresponding Widget is invalid, the corresponding business module is deleted, and the corresponding business module cannot be started by triggering the Widget, so the user experience is good.
  • the target business component management module will synchronously send the corresponding service deletion command to the component management module based on the target service ID, so that the component management module will delete the component information of the deleted business module ,refresh cache.
  • the new component information of the target business module indicates that the component data has changed.
  • the component data means that the target business module is unavailable, that is, the trigger operation cannot be performed.
  • the target business module After the target business module generates new component information, it actively notifies the desktop application, that is, sends the new component information to the data center module, and the data center module simply processes the new component information of the target business module, and distributes the new component information of the target business module To the target business component management module corresponding to the target business module.
  • the target business component management module (WidgetManager) for managing component information of the target business module can be determined based on the target business ID of the target business module.
  • the component display module Based on the new component information, call the target service component management module corresponding to the target service ID to send a service deletion command carrying the target service ID to the component display module.
  • the component display module adds an invalidation mark on the target Widget corresponding to the target business ID in the Widget panel.
  • the invalidation mark is used to represent the Widget corresponding to the target business module corresponding to the target business ID invalidated.
  • Fig. 41 is a schematic diagram of displaying failure signs on Widgets in some embodiments of the present application.
  • the service module uninstalled by the user is Xpress
  • the target Widget in the Widget panel is determined by the target service ID of the target service module as "Listen to your heart" component.
  • the invalidation mark is displayed on the Widget control corresponding to the Xpressing service in the Widget panel, as shown in the figure "Invalidated”.
  • an invalidation prompt interface will pop up in the current interface.
  • the controller when triggering a Widget control with an invalidation flag, the controller is further configured to:
  • Step 72D receiving a trigger operation on the delete button, and deleting the target Widget in the Widget panel.
  • the target business module corresponding to the target Widget cannot be started. Therefore, when a target Widget with an invalidation flag in the Widget panel is triggered, the action of starting the target business module corresponding to the target Widget is no longer performed.
  • a failure prompt interface will pop up on the home page of the desktop.
  • Fig. 42 is a schematic diagram of another failure prompt interface in some embodiments of the present application.
  • an invalidation prompt interface is presented in the current user interface.
  • the invalidation prompt interface there are delete button, cancel button and replacement control display area.
  • the delete button is used to delete the invalid Widget
  • the cancel button is used to close the invalidation prompt interface.
  • the replacement widget display area is used to display other widgets recommended by the system that can be displayed. If the user clicks the delete button, the target Widget in the Widget panel can be deleted, that is, the "media center” Widget will be deleted.
  • the Widget panel is located in the home page of the desktop, so when the invalid target Widget is triggered based on the Widget panel, the failure prompt interface is provided by the Widget panel, that is, the display is controlled by the component display module.
  • the pop-up invalidation prompt interface is displayed on the upper layer of the Widget panel, which is equivalent to displaying the invalidation prompt interface on the upper layer of the desktop homepage.
  • the display of the invalidation prompt interface does not affect the original display structure of the desktop homepage, that is, the positions of the various businesses originally displayed on the desktop homepage will not be adjusted, and the invalidation prompt interface is displayed in a floating form.
  • the recommended Widget control when the recommended Widget control recommended by the system is displayed in the replacement widget display area, the recommended Widget control is generated based on the property parameters of the target Widget control with an invalidation flag, and the property parameters are widget (Widget) information.
  • the property parameters are widget (Widget) information.
  • the icon, size, business type, application and other information generated when registering the business Widget control will be stored in the component management module (WidgetServer). Therefore, the attribute parameters of the target Widget can be obtained from the component management module (WidgetServer). Attribute parameters include control size, business type, application, etc.
  • the recommended Widget control refers to a control that has the same characteristics as the target Widget, and the recommended Widget control is used to replace and display the original position of the deleted target Widget control based on user triggers.
  • the replacement control display area in the failure prompt interface can be displayed under the delete button. If the replacement control display area can display up to 6 display bit thresholds, the replacement control display area can display up to 6 recommended Widget controls, and the replacement control display area The number of display positions that can be displayed can also be other numbers, which can be adjusted according to actual application conditions.
  • a Widget with the same size can be searched based on the size of the deleted Widget.
  • the desktop component framework can realize the multi-level menu expansion of a certain Widget in the Widget panel, and can classify the various business modules provided by the desktop application according to business requirements, and divide the business of the same type into the same category , and configure a general Widget in the Widget panel for this class.
  • the general Widget can be triggered, and a secondary service menu pops up in the Widget panel, and the secondary service menu displays menu items corresponding to services of the same type. Then trigger a menu item based on the secondary service menu to realize the quick start of the corresponding service.
  • Step 81D when adding a Widget group in the Widget panel, receive a trigger operation on the Add button displayed in the Widget panel, switch the add page to display in the user interface, and display the Widget group list and component preview area on the Add page, under the same Widget group
  • the business types of the business modules to which each Widget belongs are the same, and the component preview area displays each Widget corresponding to the Widget group.
  • Step 82D Receive a trigger operation on the target Widget group in the Widget group list, and display the Widget corresponding to the target Widget group in the component preview area.
  • Step 83D receiving a trigger operation on the target Widget in the component preview area, and adding the target Widget corresponding to the target Widget group into the Widget panel.
  • the user can add a Widget based on the Widget panel.
  • an Add button is displayed at the bottom of the Widget panel (as shown in FIG. 39 ), and the Add button is triggered to generate an Add page, which is switched and displayed in the user interface.
  • Fig. 43 is a schematic diagram of adding pages in some embodiments of the present application. See Figure 43, the Widget group list and the component preview area are displayed on the adding page, and the names of several Widget groups are displayed in the Widget group list, and a Widget group includes Widgets with business modules of the same business type, that is, business modules of the same business type Classification; Widgets of each business module corresponding to the Widget group are displayed in the component preview area, and the display content in the component preview area changes with the change of the clicked target Widget group in the Widget group list.
  • the added page and the Widget panel are generated through the component display module, and the desktop home page is generated through the application management module of the system configuration.
  • the display window of the desktop application is located on the system homepage, and when the desktop application is triggered, the desktop homepage pops up and is displayed on the upper layer of the system homepage.
  • the Widget panel needs to be called up, the user long presses the left button of the remote control to call up the Widget panel and display it on the desktop homepage.
  • a feasible way to display the Widget panel is to pop up from the left side of the display, extrude the desktop homepage as a whole to the right, and leave a space on the left side of the desktop homepage for the Widget panel to display.
  • the displayed content on the right side of the desktop homepage disappears from the display, and is displayed in the state shown in Figure 38; if the display of the Widget panel is canceled, the desktop homepage moves to the left as a whole and restores the original state.
  • the Widget panel is located in the home page of the desktop, so when the add button is triggered based on the Widget panel, the add page is provided by the Widget panel, that is, the display is controlled by the component display module.
  • the pop-up add page is displayed on the upper layer of the Widget panel, which is equivalent to being displayed on the upper layer of the home page of the desktop.
  • the added page is displayed on the upper layer of the desktop homepage in the form of overlay. Therefore, the display of the added page will not affect the original display structure of the desktop homepage, that is, the positions of the original displayed businesses on the desktop homepage will not be adjusted.
  • each business widget may have different component sizes for the user to select and add a Widget of a target component size to the widget panel.
  • the component information and business type of each business module of the corresponding pre-registered Widget are obtained from the component management module by the business component management module based on each business ID, and the component information refers to the desktop
  • the component information includes component data and widget panel information. interface layout information.
  • Group several business modules based on business types call the component display module to generate a Widget group list for business modules of the same business type, and display the Widgets corresponding to each business module of the same business type in the component preview area.
  • each Widget corresponding to the target Widget group will be displayed in the component preview area;
  • Each Widget corresponding to the target Widget group is displayed in the component preview area.
  • the business component management module counts the business type of the business module that has added Widget to the Widget panel for the last time , calculate the number of business modules that have added Widgets to the Widget panel under the same business type based on the added business type.
  • the added quantity is displayed on the display item of the Widget group corresponding to the service type, as shown in Figure 43, the added quantity of Widgets under the "Media Center" Widget group is 1.
  • the target widget in the component preview area When the user needs to display the widgets of each business module under the children's zone group in the widget panel, the target widget in the component preview area will be directly triggered. If the "kids mode” widget is triggered, the “kids mode” widget will be added to the widget panel .
  • the target business ID is determined by the triggered target Widget, and the target business component management module corresponding to the target business ID is called to store the component information of the target Widget in the component In the management module, it is convenient for subsequent component display.
  • Fig. 44 is another schematic diagram of adding pages in some embodiments of the present application.
  • the business modules corresponding to the target Widget group are all application-type services, which can be "cloud audio-visual small TV”, “CIBN Cool Meow”, “Cloud Audiovisual Aurora”, “Galaxy Kiwi”, etc.
  • the component preview area the fixed widgets of the target widget group and the widgets of each business module corresponding to the target widget group need to be displayed.
  • the fixed widgets are "My Application (1x1)” Widget, “My Application (2x1)” Widget, “ My application (2x2)” Widget;
  • Widgets corresponding to the target Widget group can be “Cloud Audiovisual Small TV” Widget, “CIBN Cool Meow” Widget, “Cloud Audiovisual Aurora” Widget, “Galaxy Kiwi” Widget, etc.
  • the fixed widgets of the target widget group include different component sizes. Widgets with different component sizes perform different trigger processes. For example, if the component size is 1x1, when the corresponding "application" group widget is triggered, the user interface will jump. Go to my application page, which displays various applications of the same application type, and the application is displayed as a menu item instead of a widget; if the component size is 2x1 or 2x2, trigger the corresponding "application "When grouping Widgets, the category menu of "My Application” will be displayed on the upper layer of the current Widget panel. The category menu of "My Application” displays the applications of the same application type installed by the system. displayed in the form of Widget instead of in the form of Widget.
  • the user can click on the target in the component preview area Fixed Widgets grouped by Widgets, such as "My Application (2x1)" Widget; if the user wants to add a Widget of a certain business module to the Widget panel, so as to directly start a certain business module based on the Widget panel, he can click the component to preview Widgets of various business modules in the district, such as "Cloud Audiovisual TV” Widget, "CIBN Cool Meow” Widget, “Cloud Audiovisual Aurora” Widget, “Galaxy Kiwi” Widget, etc.
  • the display device when displaying desktop components based on the desktop component framework, the display device provided by this application can customize the width, height, layout, style, click to jump, multi-level expansion menu, etc. of the components according to their own business needs, and display the widget panel The effect is better and the user experience is good.
  • a secondary classification menu may pop up in the current Widget panel to display all business modules belonging to the business type corresponding to the target Widget group.
  • the controller is further configured to perform the following steps:
  • Step 9D1 when triggering the target Widget corresponding to the target Widget group, receive a trigger operation on the target Widget corresponding to the target business module in the Widget panel, if the component size of the target Widget meets the preset size, call the target business component management module from The component management module obtains the menu item information corresponding to each business module under the target Widget group, and sends it to the component display module.
  • Step 92D call the component display module to generate a service menu based on the menu item information corresponding to each business module, and display it in the Widget panel, and display the service menu items corresponding to each business module under the target Widget group in the service menu.
  • the classification menu corresponding to the target Widget group can pop up in the Widget panel, that is, the service menu.
  • call the target business component management module corresponding to each business module in the target Widget group to obtain the menu item information corresponding to each business module under the corresponding target Widget group from the component management module, and send it to the component display module.
  • the component display module When displaying each service menu item under the classification of the target service module, the component display module generates a service menu based on the menu item information corresponding to each service module.
  • the service menu is a secondary menu relative to the Widget panel.
  • the service menu items corresponding to each service module under the target Widget group are displayed in the service menu.
  • the method of generating the service menu can refer to the various service modules provided based on the desktop application in the foregoing embodiments. The method of generating the Widget panel from the component information will not be repeated here.
  • the category menu of "My Application” will be displayed on the upper layer of the current Widget panel, and the category menu of "My Application” will display the ones installed by the system. For each application of the same application type, the application is displayed in the form of a menu item.
  • Fig. 45 is a schematic diagram of a service menu in some embodiments of the present application.
  • the service menu will pop up in the current Widget panel, and the "My Application” will be displayed in the service menu.
  • the menu items of all applications under the "Applications" category such as the "Cloud TV” menu item, the "CIBN Cool Meow” menu item, the “Cloud Video Aurora” menu item, the “Galaxy Kiwi” menu item, etc.
  • the corresponding application can be launched directly.
  • Fig. 46 is another schematic diagram of the service menu in some embodiments of the present application.
  • the service menu will pop up in the current Widget panel, and all the "AI Camera” categories will be displayed in the service menu.
  • the menu items of the application such as the "Magic Mirror” menu item, the "Video Call” menu item, the "AI Fitness” menu item, the "Small Gathering at Home” menu item, etc.
  • the corresponding business module can be started directly, and the corresponding business home page can be switched and displayed.
  • the Widget panel is located in the home page of the desktop, so when the target Widget group is triggered based on the Widget panel, the service menu pops up and is displayed on the upper layer of the Widget panel.
  • the service menu is provided by the Widget panel, that is, the display is controlled by the component display module.
  • the service menu is displayed on the upper layer of the Widget panel in the form of a floating layer. Therefore, the display of the service menu does not affect the original display structure of the Widget panel and the desktop homepage, that is, the positions of the original displayed services on the Widget panel and the desktop homepage will not be adjusted.
  • an edit button and an alignment button are also displayed in the Widget panel.
  • any Widget displayed in the Widget panel can be modified, such as modifying properties;
  • the alignment button is triggered, the All Widgets displayed in the Widget panel are aligned and arranged.
  • the target business module during the display process of the Widget panel, no matter whether the target business module generates data changes in any of the above-mentioned ways, when the Widget panel needs to refresh the interface display content, the changed data of the target business module is returned, or the target business module When the data is actively refreshed, the changed data is sent to the data center module. After the data center module receives the changed data and simply processes it, it is distributed to the corresponding target business component management module according to the target business ID. After the target business component management module receives the data, it distributes it to the corresponding Widget according to the target business ID. After the component display module receives the data, it displays the changed data on the target Widget to update the display information of the Widget panel.
  • the display device provided by this application can classify each service module provided by the desktop application according to different types, and all services under the same category belong to the same type. Therefore, more categories can be extended infinitely horizontally, and each category manages its own components.
  • Fig. 37 is a flowchart of a component display method in some embodiments of the present application.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a component display method, the method includes:
  • S1B Receive a startup operation on the desktop application, acquire the business data of each business module provided by the desktop application, and display the desktop homepage in the user interface based on the business data of each business module;
  • the business component management module When displaying the Widget panel, call the business component management module to obtain the component information of the business module corresponding to each business ID from the component management module, and send it to the component display module.
  • the component information refers to the business module provided by the desktop application
  • the information generated when the Widget is registered, the component information includes component data and Widget panel information, the component data refers to the data required to be displayed on the Widget panel for the business module represented by the business ID, and the Widget panel information refers to the Widget panel information Displayed interface layout information;
  • S3B Call the component display module to generate a Widget panel based on the component data and Widget panel information corresponding to each business ID, and display it on the desktop homepage. There are several displays in the Widget panel for providing each business module startup entry Widget.
  • a component display method and a display device provided by an embodiment of the present invention display a desktop homepage based on business data of each business module when a desktop application is started.
  • call the business component management module to obtain the component information of the business module corresponding to each business ID from the component management module, and send it to the component display module, and call the component display module based on the information corresponding to each business ID
  • Component data and Widget panel information generate a Widget panel and display it on the home page of the desktop.
  • the Widget panel displays several Widgets that provide the startup entry for each business module.
  • the component information is split into component data and Widget panel information without being restricted by the system, and the layout and style of each Widget presented in the Widget panel can be customized. Define the editor to provide users with a Widget panel with various effects.
  • a Widget reminder is displayed on the upper layer of the currently displayed interface.
  • a Widget reminder is used to prompt the user that the signal source has changed, and/or, when the Widget reminder is displayed, the user can instruct the display device to display the Widget panel or the signal source selection interface through operations.
  • control used to load the widget reminder is not focusable. In these embodiments, when the Widget reminder is displayed, the focus may remain unchanged after the user's last operation.
  • the control where the Widget prompts is located may acquire focus.
  • the Widget reminder control seizes the focus, that is, the focus automatically falls on the control where the Widget reminder is located.
  • the display device after the display device is turned on, it displays the TV system homepage or pages corresponding to other signal sources, where the TV system homepage can be the homepage of a preset video-on-demand program, such as the application homepage of the "Jukankan" application, other signal sources
  • the corresponding page may be the live TV homepage or the page corresponding to the HDMI interface.
  • the input signal source of the display device is a video-on-demand program, and at this time, other signal sources such as live TV interface and HDMI interface may have no signal input.
  • other signal sources such as the video-on-demand program interface and the HDMI interface may have no signal input.
  • a Widget reminder When displaying the home page of the TV system or the page corresponding to other signal sources, if it is detected that the input signal source changes, such as adding a signal source, reducing a signal source or switching signal sources, a Widget reminder will be displayed on the upper layer of the system home page.
  • the Widget reminder When the Widget reminder is displayed, the user can instruct the display device to display the first-level item content corresponding to the Widget panel or the "signal source" Widget control by long pressing the left button.
  • Fig. 47 is a user interface shown in some exemplary embodiments of the present application.
  • the user interface is specifically a user interface displayed when a change in the input signal source is detected when the homepage of the TV system as shown in Fig. 7 is displayed.
  • a Widget reminder control is displayed in the upper left corner of the system home page, through which the user can learn that the current signal source changes.
  • the Widget reminder control cannot acquire focus.
  • the Widget panel may be displayed, as shown in FIG. 640 , which will not be repeated here.
  • the Widget reminder control cannot acquire focus when it is displayed.
  • the display device receives an instruction from the user to move the focus, and when the focus moves to the left/right border of the display interface, determine whether there is a Widget reminder control currently displayed, and if so, display the sub-panel corresponding to the signal source control in the control panel area to display the signal Source information; if not, the control panel area displays the default Widget panel.
  • the non-full-screen playback page refers to other pages other than the full-screen playback page.
  • the default Widget panel is the main panel, and at least some components on the main panel correspond to sub-panels to display detailed information corresponding to the components.
  • the Widget panel is provided with a signal source component, and after the user selects the signal source component, a sub-panel corresponding to the signal source control is displayed in the Widget control panel area.
  • the display device plays the video program in full screen, if it is detected that the input signal source changes, the Widget reminder is displayed on the upper layer of the video program screen while continuing to play the video program in full screen. At this point, the user may instruct the display device to display the Widget panel or the signal source list through operations.
  • the Widget reminder control displayed when the video program is playing in full screen can acquire focus.
  • the user when the focus stays on the Widget reminder control, the user can control the display of the Widget panel or the signal source list through a confirmation operation.
  • the Widget reminder control is canceled.
  • the user when the Widget reminder control is displayed on the video program screen, the user can cancel the Widget reminder control by operating the return button or other designated buttons on the remote control.
  • the Widget reminder control cannot acquire focus when it is displayed.
  • the user can trigger the display device to set the focus on the Widget reminder control through a predetermined button, or, the Widget reminder control displayed at this time is configured by default to obtain the focus when it appears, and the user can move the focus through the direction keys, so that the focus is on the Widget reminder control Or play the window full screen.
  • the Widget reminder control When the Widget reminder control is displayed on the full-screen playback page, when responding to and receiving the confirmation command of the confirmation key on the corresponding remote control device, determine the current focus position/who currently has the focus, and if the Widget reminder control obtains the focus, then display the Widget panel The area or sub-panel corresponding to the display source control; if the full-screen playback window gets focus, the control pauses the playback of the video.
  • the Widget notification control gets the focus, and the Widget panel area is displayed or the sub-panel corresponding to the signal source control is displayed. It may be that the position of the full-screen playback window is moved, and the Widget panel area or the sub-panel corresponding to the signal source control is displayed in the vacated area. Or directly above the full-screen playback window, the Widget panel area or the sub-panel corresponding to the signal source control is displayed in the form of a floating layer.
  • Fig. 48 is a user interface displayed when a signal source change is detected when a video program is played in full screen.
  • the video program screen is displayed in full screen, and a Widget reminder control is displayed in the upper left corner area of the upper layer of the video program screen. At this time, no focus object is displayed on the Widget reminder control, that is, it has not acquired focus.
  • FIG. 49 is a user interface displayed after the display duration of the Widget reminder control in FIG. 48 reaches a first preset duration (for example, 3s).
  • a first preset duration for example, 3s.
  • the main difference from the interface shown in FIG. 48 is that, in the user interface shown in FIG. 49 , a focus object is displayed on the Widget reminder control. At this point, the user can instruct to display the Widget panel or the signal source list by operating the confirmation key on the remote controller.
  • FIG. 50 exemplarily shows a user interface displayed upon receiving a confirmation operation input by a user when the user interface shown in FIG. 49 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 50 , while continuing to play the video program, a Widget panel or a signal source list is displayed on the upper layer of the video program screen.
  • the video program can also be stopped.
  • the user can remove the Widget controls on the Widget panel and move the position of the Widget controls on the Widget panel to change the layout of the Widget controls in the Widget panel.
  • the user when the focus stays on any Widget control, the user can activate the editing state of the Widget panel by long pressing the confirmation key on the remote control.
  • the Widget panel is in the editing state, the user can edit it Move or delete the Widget controls on the
  • the Widget panel in the editing state is called a Widget editing panel.
  • Figure 51 is a user interface displaying the Widget panel, in which the focus stays on the "Settings" control.
  • the Widget panel enters the editing state, and then displays the Widget editing panel, as shown in FIG. 52 .
  • the Widget panel has a control for activating the editing state of the Widget panel, and the user can activate the editing state of the Widget panel by operating the control.
  • the Widget control is picked up according to the default location where the focus is. For example, as shown in Figure 51, the focus stays on the "Settings” control, and when the user presses and holds the confirmation key on the remote control, the "Settings” control is automatically picked up while the Widget panel editing state is activated (put the focus on the "Settings” control). Settings” control). This is because the user invokes the setting operation when the focus is on the Widget control, which means that the user will edit the Widget control. Therefore, picking up the Widget control by default simplifies the user’s operate.
  • the user can cancel the picking of the "Settings” control through the operation of the return command, and then move the focus through the direction keys.
  • the focus is on the target control, short press the OK key to pick up the target control.
  • the activation of the Widget panel can be deactivated through continuous instructions.
  • the position of the "Settings” control is determined, and a direction control is displayed for a side that is not adjacent to the boundary to indicate an inputtable direction command that does not delete the control.
  • a delete control is displayed for sides adjacent to the border to indicate that entering a direction command for that direction deletes the control.
  • the automatically picked up "Settings” control can be located in the middle position, so the direction controls are displayed in the four directions centered on it, up, down, left, and right. After receiving the direction instruction to move to the right inputted by the user, the position of the control is moved. , the control pointed to (such as the "Router” control) can be overlaid, that is, the setting control is overlaid and displayed on the top of the "Router” control, or the position can be exchanged.
  • the controller judges whether the four sides of the "Setting" control are adjacent to the border of the panel , for example, as shown in Figure 54, set the right side of the control to be adjacent to the right border of the display panel, and the other sides are not adjacent to the panel border, so the other three sides display direction arrow controls respectively, and the right side displays a deletion prompt controls.
  • the user can be prompted to continue pressing the side direction key (for example, the right direction key) on the remote control device at this time, and the "settings" control will not be moved to the next row, but will be deleted. .
  • the following method can be used to determine whether the edge of the control is adjacent to the border of the panel.
  • One way is to determine whether the border of the control and the border of the Widget are preset values. The distance between them can be determined according to the display position of the control and the display position of the Widget panel during the design process.
  • Another way is to specify the boundary control bit, and when the position of the control overlaps with the boundary control bit, determine the boundary corresponding to the control adjacent to the boundary control bit.
  • the overlapping display can avoid the repeated movement of the control.
  • the control can be overlaid on the first target control such as the "Router” control. If the user chooses to move down The “Move, Set” control can be overlaid on the second target control such as the "Multi-Screen Interaction” control, and the "Router” control is restored to the display and the position is avoided. If the user enters the editing operation now, the "Settings" can be exchanged through the update of the coordinates " control and "Multi-Screen Interaction” control, while the "Router” control is not affected.
  • FIG. 53 is a user interface displayed after the user slides the Widget panel to the bottom.
  • edit controls and add controls are displayed below the current function controls.
  • the Widget controls on the Widget panel are reserved on the Widget editing panel, and a position frame is also displayed.
  • the position frame is composed of multiple grids.
  • a grid is the smallest area unit that a Widget control can occupy, and it is also the minimum moving distance when moving the position of the Widget control.
  • a Widget control can be laid out on one or more grids. It should be understood that the larger the size of the Widget control, the larger the number of grids it occupies.
  • the "Settings" control is in the picked-up state. At this time, the "Settings" control also displays an operation indicator, which indicates four moving directions, which are up, down, left, and right, indicating The user can move the Settings control up, down, left, and right.
  • the user can pick up the Widget control to be moved, move the picked up Widget control up, down, left or right, delete the Widget control by moving the Widget control out of the view display area, and Drop the picked up Widget control.
  • the user can operate the confirmation key on the remote control to pick up the Widget control, and then move the position of the Widget control by operating the direction keys on the remote control.
  • the Widget control is moved out of the view display area, the Widget control will be deleted; the user can drop the picked up Widget control by operating the confirmation key on the remote control.
  • the display device When the display device receives the user operation of moving the "Settings” control to the right, it displays the user interface shown in FIG. 54 . It can be seen that, compared to Figure 52, in Figure 54, the "Settings” control moves one grid to the right, overlaps with the "Router” control and is displayed on the upper layer of the “Router” control, and the operation instructions displayed on the "Settings” control
  • the logo indicates three directions of movement, up, down, and left, indicating that the user can move the Settings control up, down, and left.
  • the grid where the "Settings” control is currently located is located at the edge of the view display area, so a deletion reminder is displayed on the right side of the "Settings” control to remind the user that the "Settings” control can be moved out of view by right-clicking display area to remove the control.
  • the Widget control is extended to the space to fill up the space.
  • the width of the Widget control is the same as the width of the surrounding space, or the height of the Widget control is the same as the height of the surrounding space, it is considered that the Widget control is adapted to the size of the surrounding space. Empty slots are grids not occupied by Widget controls.
  • the figure shows the change of vacancies, rather than the same actual interface for the three states.
  • the Widget control can extend one grid to the right, thereby changing from display state 11 to display state 12 .
  • the Widget control can extend downward by one grid, thereby changing from display state 11 to display state 13 .
  • display state 11 is the state when the Widget control occupies 1 ⁇ 1 grid
  • display state 12 is the state when the Widget control occupies 1 ⁇ 2 grid
  • display state 13 is the state when the Widget control occupies 2 ⁇ 1 grid. The state of the grid.
  • the figure shows the change of vacancies, rather than the same actual interface for the three states.
  • the Widget control can extend one grid to the right, thereby changing from display state 21 to display state 22 .
  • 1 ⁇ 2 vacancies are generated on the lower side of the Widget control, the Widget control can extend downwards by one grid as a whole, thereby changing from the display state 21 to the display state 23 .
  • the display state 21 is the state when the Widget control occupies 1 ⁇ 2 grids
  • the display state 22 is the state when the Widget control occupies 1 ⁇ 3 grids
  • the display state 13 is the state when the Widget control occupies 2 ⁇ 2 grids. The state of the grid.
  • the figure shows the change of vacancies, rather than the same actual interface in the three states.
  • the Widget control can extend one grid to the right, thereby changing from display state 31 to display state 32 .
  • 1 ⁇ 2 vacancies are generated on the lower side of the Widget control, the Widget control can extend downwards by one grid as a whole, thereby changing from the display state 31 to the display state 33 .
  • the display state 31 is the state when the Widget control occupies 2 ⁇ 2 grids
  • the display state 32 is the state when the Widget control occupies 2 ⁇ 3 grids
  • the display state 33 is the state when the Widget control occupies 3 ⁇ 2 grids. The state of the grid.
  • the height of the highest Widget control is used as the height of the row where the Widget control is located.
  • the lower rows are translated upward as a whole to complement the blank row. Widget controls in each row are aligned to the left.
  • the position of the empty space determines whether there is a control on the left side of it, and then determine whether there is a control on the left side of it, and if so, determine whether the height of the left control is the same as the height of the empty space, and if they are the same, expand the left side The display area of the control to cover the empty space. If it is different, determine whether there is a control on the right side of it. If it exists, determine whether the height of the control on the right is the same as the height of the empty space. If they are the same, expand the display area of the control on the right to Cover the vacancy, if different, do not fill the vacancy, or execute the judgment logic of other dimensions.
  • the position of the blank determines whether there is a control on its upper side, and if so, determine whether the width of the control on the left is the same as the width of the blank, and if so, expand the left side The display area of the control to cover the empty space. If it is different, determine whether there is a control located below it. If it exists, determine whether the width of the lower control is the same as the width of the empty space. If they are the same, expand the display area of the lower control to Cover the vacancy, if different, do not fill the vacancy, or execute the judgment logic of other dimensions.
  • the determination of the left and right directions and the determination of the up and down sides can be combined in any order.
  • the Widget controls in each row are arranged from top to bottom and then from left to right.
  • the user can also continue to move the focus position to select the control to be moved or deleted, and pick up the selected control through the confirmation operation, and move the picked up control by operating the arrow keys.
  • the user can pick up the "Router” control with a confirmation action. Then, the user can move the "Router” control one grid to the left with one left-click operation. Alternatively, the user can right-click to move the "Router” control out of the view display area, thereby deleting the "Router” control from the Widget panel.
  • an invalidation mark is displayed on the icon of the invalidated Widget control, so as to remind the user that the Widget control has been invalidated through the invalidation mark. It should be understood that there are various reasons for the failure of the Widget control. For example, if an application program in the system is deleted, the Widget control corresponding to the application program will become invalid.
  • a Widget invalidation prompt box when the Widget panel is displayed, if the user picks up the invalid Widget control by operation, a Widget invalidation prompt box may be displayed, and the Widget invalidation prompt box includes a control and a cancel control for deleting the invalid Widget, and the user can operate Delete the control, delete the invalid Widget control picked up, or operate the cancel control, and return to the interface before the Widget invalidation prompt box is displayed.
  • a plurality of recommended Widget controls may also be displayed in the Widget invalidation prompt box for replacing the picked up invalid Widget controls.
  • the user can select a recommended Widget control in the Widget invalidation prompt box to replace the invalid Widget control picked up by the user with the selected recommended Widget control.
  • the recommended Widget controls are selected according to the picked up invalid Widget controls, and the size of the recommended Widget controls is the same as that of the picked up invalid Widget controls.
  • the user interface shown in Figure 63 when the user interface shown in Figure 63 is displayed, the user first moves the focus to the "Discovery” control, and then operates the confirmation key on the remote control to pick up the "Discovery” control. Since the "Discovery” control is an invalid Widget control, therefore , when the display device receives a confirmation operation on the "discovery” control, it displays a Widget invalidation prompt box, as shown in FIG. 64 . Referring to FIG. 64 , in the Widget invalidation prompt box, there are displayed a "delete invalid Widget” control, a "cancel” control, and multiple recommended widgets.
  • the Widget invalidation prompt box When the Widget invalidation prompt box is displayed, if the user operates the "Delete Invalid Widget” control, the "Discovery” control is deleted from the Widget panel, and returns to the user interface containing the latest Widget panel. When the Widget invalidation prompt box is displayed, if the user operates the "Cancel” control, the user interface shown in 44 will be returned. When the Widget invalidation prompt box is displayed, if the user selects a recommended Widget, the display device replaces the "Discovery" control in the Widget panel with the recommended Widget selected by the user.
  • each Widget control before displaying the Widget panel, it is detected whether each Widget control is invalid, and if there is an invalid Widget control, the invalid Widget control is deleted from the Widget panel data, so that the displayed Widget panel does not display the invalid Widget controls.
  • the user when the display device works in the education mode, the user can operate the display device through key input, touch input and/or voice input.
  • the display device after the display device is turned on in the education mode, it displays the homepage of the education mode system.
  • the system home page displayed after the display device is turned on is designed in a Widget manner, that is, the system home page includes Widget controls arranged in a preset order, and when the user clicks on any Widget control, the user interface jumps to the Widget control The corresponding first-level page or the main interface of the Widget program.
  • the view display area for displaying the Widget control may occupy the entire screen, or may occupy part of the screen, such as occupying the left area of the screen.
  • the user can set a local picture or a background theme provided by the system as the background of the system homepage.
  • the rotation angle of the display part of the display device is in the same quadrant, and the state changes from the landscape state to the portrait state, and returns along the original rotation path when changing from the portrait state to the landscape state.
  • FIG. 65 is a user interface shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • the user interface is a homepage of a horizontal screen system designed in the form of a Widget.
  • the user interface includes multiple Widget controls such as "Time”, “Settings”, “Calendar”, “Weather”, “Jukankan”, “Juhaoxue”. It is worth noting that the Widget control of the vertical screen application can be displayed on the home page of the horizontal screen system.
  • the user when the display is in the horizontal screen state, the user can control the rotation of the fixed component through key input, touch input and/or voice input to convert the display from the current horizontal screen state to the vertical screen state, and from The displayed home page of the horizontal screen system is switched to the home page of the vertical screen system.
  • the rotation confirmation interface when the homepage of the landscape system is displayed, if the user clicks on the Widget control that can display the application in the portrait orientation on the homepage of the landscape system, the rotation confirmation interface is displayed, and the rotation confirmation interface includes the "Confirm rotation” control and the " Cancel” control.
  • the controller controls the display to rotate, and displays the system home page in portrait orientation on the display. For example, when the homepage of the system in landscape orientation as shown in FIG. 65 is displayed, if the user clicks on the “small video” control, the rotation confirmation interface as shown in FIG. 66 will be displayed.
  • the display rotates to the portrait state, and the display displays the portrait system homepage.
  • FIG. 67 is a user interface shown in some embodiments of the present application.
  • the user interface is a homepage of a vertical screen system designed in the form of a Widget.
  • the user interface includes multiple Widget controls such as "Time”, “Settings”, “Calendar”, “Weather”, “Jukankan”, “Juhaoxue”. It is worth noting that the Widget control of the horizontal screen application can be displayed on the home page of the vertical screen system.
  • Widget controls displayed on the homepage of the horizontal screen system and the homepage of the vertical screen system may be the same, not completely the same, or completely different.
  • the user can delete the Widget control on the home page through touch input, or move the position of the Widget control on the home page to change the layout of the Widget control on the home page .
  • the current rotation state of the display device is determined in response to the operation of the input to arouse the Widget panel, and when the display device is in a landscape state, the home page of the desktop is controlled to move, and the Widget panel is displayed at the vacant position.
  • the display device is in the portrait state, cancel the display of the portrait homepage and display the Widget panel in full screen.
  • the Widget panel can be displayed at the original position, or the display of the desktop home page can be canceled, and the Widget panel can be displayed in full screen.
  • the display device is a display device that can be operated by touch.
  • the user can long press any Widget control on the page to activate the page editing state. For example, as shown in Figure 68, when the user presses the "Karaoke" control for a long time, the page editing state is activated, and the system homepage in the editing state as shown in Figure 69 is displayed.
  • control can be dragged while the control is selected and kept under touch. After the dragging is completed, the position of the touch point is detected, and when the position of the touch point is located on the first control position, the position of the control is determined. Whether there is an existing control on the screen, if yes, control the existing control and the dragged control to exchange control positions, if not, display the dragged control at the first control position.
  • a prompt indicating whether to delete the dragged control is displayed.
  • the system homepage in the editing state displays a position frame, which is composed of multiple grids.
  • a grid is the smallest area unit that a Widget control can occupy, and it is also used when moving the position of a Widget control. the minimum movement distance.
  • a Widget control can be laid out on one or more grids.
  • the system home page in the editing state displays a "Restore” control and a "OK” control.
  • the user can click the "Restore” control to instruct to return to the system home page before editing, and click the "OK” control.
  • each selectable area includes at least one grid that is partially or fully occupied by the target Widget control, and each optional area is the same size as the target Widget control; calculate the overlapping area between the target Widget control and each optional area, and the maximum overlapping area will be generated
  • the optional area of is determined as the target area; the target Widget control is placed on the target area.
  • the user drags the Widget control in Figure 71 from the first position to the second position and lets go.
  • the grid occupied by the Widget control includes grids 1-6, and grids 1-6 can Determine optional areas 1-3, wherein optional area 1 includes grids 1-2, optional area 2 includes grids 1-4, optional area 3 includes grids 5-6, and the size of each optional area is the same as Widget controls have the same size, 2 ⁇ 2.
  • the overlapping areas of the Widget control and the optional areas 1-3 are S1, S2, and S3 respectively. Since S3>S2>S1, the Widget control is displayed on the optional area 3.
  • Alternative regions are formed based on combinations of adjacent grids.
  • Fig. 72 if the user drags the "Karaoke” control from the original position to the position shown in Fig. 72 through the dragging gesture and lets go, the user interface shown in Fig. 73 will be displayed. It can be seen from Figure 73 that after the user drags, the "Karaoke” control moves down and to the right by one grid respectively, and is separately laid out in the second row, and the controls such as "Jukankan” and “Juhaoxue” move down as a whole Three cells are laid out in the third row, with gaps between the second and first rows, and gaps in the second and third rows.
  • the user can also confirm or cancel the input editing operation by pressing the key, so as to achieve the same effect as clicking the "OK" control or the "Cancel” control.
  • the user can press the confirmation key on the remote controller to confirm the input editing operation and exit the editing state, and then display the user interface.
  • the user can press the return key on the remote control to cancel the input editing operation, and then return to the interface before dragging the "Karaoke" control.
  • the homepage of the horizontal screen system and the homepage of the vertical screen system also display a control for activating the page editing state, and the user can activate the page editing state by clicking the control.
  • the homepage of the horizontal screen system shown in FIG. 71 the user can slide the editing control into the view display area by sliding the homepage upwards.
  • the page editing state is activated, and then the horizontal screen system home page in the editing state is displayed.
  • the display device presents a user interface corresponding to the touch mode in response to receiving the touch input. For example, when the horizontal screen system homepage as shown in Figure 71 is displayed, in response to receiving the user's long press operation on the "Karaoke" control, the system homepage in the editing state corresponding to the touch mode as shown in Figure 76 is displayed.
  • the position of the moved "Karaoke” control is detected, and when there are other controls that do not completely overlap at this position, determine the row where the covered control is located, and move all the controls in these rows down to be The height of the row where the covered control is located, and the "Karaoke" control is displayed at the dragged position.
  • the dragged control occupies part of the positions (2 ⁇ 2) in the fourth row grid and the fifth row grid.
  • the controls it covers include the "Children's Drawing Board” control, the "Family Message” control and the “Family Album” control.
  • the row height of the rows occupied by these controls is 4 (the third row grid, the fourth row grid, the fifth row grid, and the sixth row grid), so the other controls in the row height except the "Karaoke" control
  • the control moves down 4 grids.
  • the "Karaoke” control is displayed in the fourth row and the fifth row of the grid (2 ⁇ 2).
  • controls that move down will be left-filled for a smoother visual presentation.
  • control will fill up in units of rows, so that no blank grid line will appear.
  • the above two completions may be performed successively or simultaneously.
  • the moved "Karaoke” control occupies the third and fourth rows of the grid, and other original controls occupy the positions of the fifth and lower grids.
  • the "Children's Drawing Board” control and The “Office Whiteboard” control has been filled to the left.
  • the position of the moved "Karaoke" control is detected, and when the position is completely overlapped with other controls of the same size, the positions of the two are exchanged.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Software Systems (AREA)
  • User Interface Of Digital Computer (AREA)

Abstract

A control display method and a display device. The method comprises: when it is detected that a first service widget control is deleted, determining icons of a second service, and displaying the icons (S1701), wherein the sizes of second service widget controls corresponding to the second service are the same as the size of the first service widget control; receiving an input selection regarding the icons of the second service (S1702); and displaying, at a first position, a second service widget control, which corresponds to the selected icon, of the second service (S1703), wherein the first position is the position where the first service widget control is displayed. By means of the present solution, a recommended interface can fill an original position during the replacement of a deleted control without affecting the display of other original controls, thereby realizing a good user experience.

Description

一种控件处理方法及显示设备Control processing method and display device
本申请要求于2021年5月10日提交到国家知识产权局、申请号为202110505212.5,在2021年12月14日提交到国家知识产权局、申请号为202111526619.2,在2021年12月14日提交到国家知识产权局、申请号为202111531851.5,在2022年01月20日提交到国家知识产权局、申请号为202210066285.3的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application is required to be submitted to the State Intellectual Property Office on May 10, 2021, with the application number 202110505212.5, and submitted to the State Intellectual Property Office on December 14, 2021, with the application number 202111526619.2, and submitted to the State Intellectual Property Office on December 14, 2021. State Intellectual Property Office, application number 202111531851.5, the priority of the Chinese patent application with application number 202210066285.3 submitted to the State Intellectual Property Office on January 20, 2022, the entire content of which is incorporated in this application by reference.
技术领域technical field
本申请涉及设备显示技术领域,尤其涉及一种控件处理方法及显示设备。The present application relates to the technical field of device display, and in particular to a control processing method and a display device.
背景技术Background technique
显示设备,如智能电视,可以为用户提供诸如音频、视频、图片等播放画面。如今,显示设备不仅可以为用户提供通过数据广播接收的直播电视节目内容,而且可以为用户提供诸如网络视频节目、网络游戏等各种应用和服务内容。A display device, such as a smart TV, can provide users with playback images such as audio, video, and pictures. Today, display devices can not only provide users with live TV program content received through data broadcasting, but also provide users with various application and service content such as online video programs, online games, and the like.
智能电视中,功能一般会通过常规的TAB入口或者遥控器上的快捷按键实现功能界面的打开,例如,在焦点选中TAB栏的推荐控件,智能电视会显示推荐页面,如果用户选中TAB栏的健身控件,智能电视会显示健身界面。又或者,通过遥控器上的设置按键可以使智能电视显示设置页面。In smart TVs, the functions are generally opened through the conventional TAB entry or the shortcut keys on the remote control. For example, if the recommended control in the TAB bar is selected in the focus, the smart TV will display the recommended page. If the user selects the fitness controls, the smart TV will display the fitness interface. Or, the smart TV can display the setting page by pressing the setting button on the remote control.
对于通过焦点控制来讲,现有的交互方式在操作过程中,需要用户通过返回使焦点回到当前界面对应的TAB控件/或默认控件,然后通过焦点在TAB栏上移动,以便于打开目标TAB入口对应的界面。如果界面对应的入口位于一级页面或二级页面上,则需要先选中目标TAB,展示目标一级页面,然后选中一级页面上的入口,或者,进入二级页面后,选中二级页面上的入口。For focus control, during the operation of the existing interactive mode, the user needs to return the focus to the TAB control/or the default control corresponding to the current interface by returning, and then move the focus on the TAB bar to open the target TAB The interface corresponding to the entry. If the entry corresponding to the interface is on the first-level or second-level page, you need to select the target TAB first to display the target first-level page, and then select the entry on the first-level page, or, after entering the second-level page, select the entrance.
发明内容Contents of the invention
第一方面,本申请提供了一种显示设备,包括:显示器,被配置为显示呈现有Widget面板的桌面主页,所述Widget面板中展示有数个用于提供业务模块启动入口的业务Widget控件;与所述显示器连接的控制器,所述控制器被配置为:In a first aspect, the present application provides a display device, including: a display configured to display a desktop home page presenting a Widget panel, the Widget panel displaying several business Widget controls for providing a startup entry for a business module; and a controller to which the display is connected, the controller being configured to:
在检测到第一业务Widget控件被删除时,确定并显示第二业务的图标,其中,所述第二业务对应的第二业务Widget控件的尺寸与所述第一业务Widget控件的尺寸相同;When it is detected that the first business Widget control is deleted, determine and display the icon of the second business, wherein the size of the second business Widget control corresponding to the second business is the same as the size of the first business Widget control;
接收输入的对所述第二业务的图标的选择;receiving an input selection of an icon for the second service;
在所述第一位置显示被选择的图标所对应的第二业务的第二业务Widget控件,其中,所述第一位置是所述第一业务Widget控件的显示位置。The second service Widget control of the second service corresponding to the selected icon is displayed at the first position, wherein the first position is a display position of the first service Widget control.
第二方面,本申请提供了一种显示设备,包括:显示器,被配置为显示呈现有Widget面板的桌面主页,所述Widget面板中展示有数个用于提供业务模块启动入口的业务Widget控件;与所述显示器连接的控制器,所述控制器被配置为:In a second aspect, the present application provides a display device, including: a display configured to display a desktop home page presenting a Widget panel, the Widget panel displaying several business Widget controls for providing a startup entry for a business module; and a controller to which the display is connected, the controller being configured to:
在检测到第一业务Widget控件被删除时,确定并显示第二业务的图标,其中,所述第二业务对应的第二业务Widget控件的尺寸不大于第一位置的尺寸,所述第一位置为所述第一业务Widget控件的显示位置以及和所述第一业务Widget控件的显示位置相邻的空白位置;When it is detected that the first business Widget control is deleted, determine and display the icon of the second business, wherein the size of the second business Widget control corresponding to the second business is not larger than the size of the first position, and the first position The display position of the first business Widget control and the blank position adjacent to the display position of the first business Widget control;
接收输入的对所述第二业务的图标的选择;receiving an input selection of an icon for the second service;
在所述第一位置显示被选择的图标所对应的第二业务的第二业务Widget控件。A second service Widget control of the second service corresponding to the selected icon is displayed at the first position.
本申请还提供了一种控件显示方法,所述方法包括:The present application also provides a control display method, the method comprising:
在检测到第一业务Widget控件被删除时,确定并显示第二业务的图标,其中,所述第二业务对应的第二业务Widget控件的尺寸与所述第一业务Widget控件的尺寸相同;When it is detected that the first business Widget control is deleted, determine and display the icon of the second business, wherein the size of the second business Widget control corresponding to the second business is the same as the size of the first business Widget control;
接收输入的对所述第二业务的图标的选择;receiving an input selection of an icon for the second service;
在所述第一位置显示被选择的图标所对应的第二业务的第二业务Widget控件,其中,所述第一位置是所述第一业务Widget控件的显示位置。The second service Widget control of the second service corresponding to the selected icon is displayed at the first position, wherein the first position is a display position of the first service Widget control.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1为本申请一些实施例中智能控制设备与控制装置之间操作场景的示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an operation scene between an intelligent control device and a control device in some embodiments of the present application;
图2为本申请一些实施例中智能控制设备200的硬件配置框图;FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a hardware configuration of an intelligent control device 200 in some embodiments of the present application;
图3为本申请一些实施例中控制装置100的硬件配置框图;FIG. 3 is a block diagram of hardware configuration of the control device 100 in some embodiments of the present application;
图4为本申请一些实施例中智能控制设备200中软件配置图;FIG. 4 is a software configuration diagram of the intelligent control device 200 in some embodiments of the present application;
图5为本申请一些实施例中桌面控件架构图;FIG. 5 is an architectural diagram of desktop controls in some embodiments of the present application;
图6为本申请一些实施例中控件处理方法的流程图;FIG. 6 is a flowchart of a control processing method in some embodiments of the present application;
图7为本申请一些实施例中控件处理方法的数据流程图;FIG. 7 is a data flow chart of a control processing method in some embodiments of the present application;
图8为本申请一些实施例中系统主页的示意图;Fig. 8 is a schematic diagram of the system home page in some embodiments of the present application;
图9为本申请一些实施例中桌面主页的示意图;Fig. 9 is a schematic diagram of a desktop homepage in some embodiments of the present application;
图10为本申请一些实施例中桌面主页中展示Widget面板的示意图;FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a Widget panel displayed on a desktop homepage in some embodiments of the present application;
图11为本申请一些实施例中在Widget面板的业务Widget控件上展示失效标识的示意图;Fig. 11 is a schematic diagram showing failure signs on the service Widget control of the Widget panel in some embodiments of the present application;
图12为本申请一些实施例中在卸载远端应用的业务Widget控件上展示失效标识的示意图;FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of displaying an invalidation mark on a service Widget control of an uninstalled remote application in some embodiments of the present application;
图13为本申请一些实施例中一种失效提示界面的示意图;Fig. 13 is a schematic diagram of a failure prompt interface in some embodiments of the present application;
图14为本申请一些实施例中替换展示指定推荐Widget控件的Widget面板的示意图;FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of a Widget panel that replaces and displays a specified recommended Widget control in some embodiments of the present application;
图15为本申请一些实施例中Widget面板展示空位的示意图;Fig. 15 is a schematic diagram of displaying vacancies on the Widget panel in some embodiments of the present application;
图16为本申请一些实施例中控件推荐界面的示意图;FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of a widget recommendation interface in some embodiments of the present application;
图17为本申请一些实施例中控件显示方法;Fig. 17 is a control display method in some embodiments of the present application;
图18为本申请一些实施例中控件删除时显示指示箭头的界面的示意图;Fig. 18 is a schematic diagram of an interface displaying an indicating arrow when a control is deleted in some embodiments of the present application;
图19为本申请一些实施例中控件删除时显示删除提示控件的界面的示意图;FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram of an interface displaying a deletion prompt control when a control is deleted in some embodiments of the present application;
图20为本申请一些实施例中控件删除时显示删除提示的界面的示意图;FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram of an interface displaying a deletion prompt when a control is deleted in some embodiments of the present application;
图21为本申请一些实施例中控件删除控件后的显示界面的示意图;FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of a display interface after a control is deleted from a control in some embodiments of the present application;
图22为本申请一些实施例中控件移动完成后的显示界面的示意图;Fig. 22 is a schematic diagram of the display interface after the movement of the control is completed in some embodiments of the present application;
图23为本申请一些实施例中示出的用户界面示意图;Fig. 23 is a schematic diagram of a user interface shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图24为本申请一些实施例中示出的一种可能的“少儿”主题下的电视系统主页;Fig. 24 is a possible TV system home page under the theme of "children" shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图25为本申请一些实施例中示出的一种可能的少儿模式系统主页;Fig. 25 is a possible homepage of the children's mode system shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图26为本申请一些实施例中示出的一种包含全局锁定状态下的Widget面板的用户界面;FIG. 26 is a user interface including a Widget panel in a global lock state shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图27A为本申请一些实施例中示出的一种可能的密码输入界面;Fig. 27A is a possible password input interface shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图27B为本申请一些实施例中示出的一种解锁后包含Widget面板的用户界面;Fig. 27B is an unlocked user interface containing a Widget panel shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图28为本申请一些实施例中示出的一种包含局部锁定状态下的Widget面板的用户界面;Fig. 28 is a user interface including a Widget panel in a partially locked state shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图29为本申请一些实施例中示出的一种解锁“应用中心”控件后显示的用户界面;Fig. 29 is a user interface displayed after unlocking the "Application Center" control shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图30为本申请一些实施例中示出的另一种解锁“应用中心”控件后显示的;Fig. 30 is another display after unlocking the "Application Center" control shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图31为本申请一些实施例中示出的展开“AI小聚手”控件后的用户界面;Fig. 31 is the user interface shown in some embodiments of the present application after the "AI Gathering Hands" control is expanded;
图32为本申请一些实施例中示出的展开“应用中心”控件后的用户界面;Fig. 32 is a user interface after expanding the "Application Center" control shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图33为本申请一些实施例中示出的展开“信号源”控件后的用户界面;Fig. 33 is the user interface after the "signal source" control is expanded shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图34为本申请一些实施例中示出的展开“设置”控件后的用户界面;Fig. 34 is a user interface after expanding the "Settings" control shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图35为本申请一些实施例中示出的展开“声音模式”控件后的用户界面;Fig. 35 is a user interface after expanding the "sound mode" control shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图36为本申请一些实施例中示出的Widget控件显示方法流程图;Fig. 36 is a flow chart of a Widget control display method shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图37为本申请一些实施例中组件展示方法的流程图;Fig. 37 is a flowchart of a component display method in some embodiments of the present application;
图38为本申请一些实施例中桌面主页的示意图;Fig. 38 is a schematic diagram of a desktop home page in some embodiments of the present application;
图39为本申请一些实施例中Widget面板的示意图;Figure 39 is a schematic diagram of a Widget panel in some embodiments of the present application;
图40为本申请一些实施例中Widget面板中播放器Widget数据刷新的示意图;40 is a schematic diagram of player Widget data refresh in the Widget panel in some embodiments of the present application;
图41为本申请一些实施例中在Widget上展示失效标识的示意图;Fig. 41 is a schematic diagram of displaying failure signs on Widgets in some embodiments of the present application;
图42为本申请一些实施例中另一种失效提示界面的示意图;Fig. 42 is a schematic diagram of another failure prompt interface in some embodiments of the present application;
图43为本申请一些实施例中添加页面的一种示意图;Fig. 43 is a schematic diagram of adding pages in some embodiments of the present application;
图44为本申请一些实施例中添加页面的另一种示意图;Fig. 44 is another schematic diagram of adding pages in some embodiments of the present application;
图45为本申请一些实施例中业务菜单的一种示意图;Fig. 45 is a schematic diagram of a service menu in some embodiments of the present application;
图46为本申请一些实施例中业务菜单的另一种示意图;Fig. 46 is another schematic diagram of the service menu in some embodiments of the present application;
图47为本申请一些实施例中示出的一种可能的包含Widget提醒的用户界面;Fig. 47 is a possible user interface containing Widget reminders shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图48为本申请一些实施例中示出的另一种可能的包含Widget提醒的用户界面;Fig. 48 is another possible user interface containing Widget reminders shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图49为本申请一些实施例中示出的另一种可能的包含Widget提醒的用户界面;Fig. 49 is another possible user interface containing Widget reminders shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图50为本申请一些实施例中示出的操作Widget提醒控件后显示的用户界面;FIG. 50 is a user interface displayed after operating the Widget reminder control shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图51为本申请一些实施例中示出的一种可能的包含Widget面板的用户界面;Fig. 51 is a possible user interface including a Widget panel shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图52为本申请一些实施例中示出的一种包含编辑状态下的Widget面板的用户界面;Fig. 52 is a user interface including a Widget panel in an editing state shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图53为本申请一些实施例中示出的另一种包含Widget面板的用户界面;Fig. 53 is another user interface including a Widget panel shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图54为本申请一些实施例中示出的向右移动“设置”控件后显示的用户界面;Fig. 54 is a user interface displayed after moving the "Settings" control to the right shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图55为本申请一些实施例中示出的将“设置”控件移出Widget面板后显示的用户界面;Fig. 55 is a user interface displayed after the "Settings" control is moved out of the Widget panel shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图56为本申请一些实施例中示出的删除“设置”控件后显示的用户界面;Fig. 56 is a user interface displayed after deleting the "Settings" control shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图57为本申请一些实施例中示出的一种Widget控件延伸规则示意图;Fig. 57 is a schematic diagram of a Widget control extension rule shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图58为本申请一些实施例中示出的另一种Widget控件延伸规则示意图;Fig. 58 is a schematic diagram of another Widget control extension rule shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图59为本申请一些实施例中示出的另一种Widget控件延伸规则示意图;Fig. 59 is a schematic diagram of another Widget control extension rule shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图60为本申请一些实施例中示出的一种包含编辑状态下的Widget面板的用户界面;Fig. 60 is a user interface including a Widget panel in an editing state shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图61为本申请一些实施例中示出的一种包含Widget面板的用户界面;Fig. 61 is a user interface including a Widget panel shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图62为本申请一些实施例中示出的另一种包含Widget面板的用户界面;Fig. 62 is another user interface including a Widget panel shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图63为本申请一些实施例中示出的另一种包含Widget面板的用户界面;Fig. 63 is another user interface including a Widget panel shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图64为本申请一些实施例中示出的一种包含删除确认框的用户界面;Fig. 64 is a user interface including a deletion confirmation box shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图65为本申请一些实施例中示出的一种横屏系统主页;Fig. 65 is a home page of a horizontal screen system shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图66为本申请一些实施例中示出的一种包含旋转确认框的用户界面;Fig. 66 is a user interface including a rotation confirmation box shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图67为本申请一些实施例中示出的一种竖屏系统主页;Fig. 67 is a homepage of a vertical screen system shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图68为本申请一些实施例中示出的一种长按“K歌”控件时的用户界面;Fig. 68 is a user interface shown in some embodiments of the present application when long pressing the "Karaoke" control;
图69为本申请一些实施例中示出的一种编辑状态下的横屏系统主页;Fig. 69 is a horizontal screen system home page in an editing state shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图70为本申请一些实施例中示出的一种包含删除确认框的用户界面;Fig. 70 is a user interface including a deletion confirmation box shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图71为本申请一些实施例中示出的触控模式下Widget控件坐落规则示意图;Fig. 71 is a schematic diagram of Widget control positioning rules in touch mode shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图72为本申请一些实施例中示出的一种拖动“K歌”控件时的用户界面;Fig. 72 is a user interface when dragging the "Karaoke" control shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图73为本申请一些实施例中示出的一种拖动“K歌”控件后显示的用户界面;Fig. 73 is a user interface displayed after dragging the "Karaoke" control shown in some embodiments of the present application;
图74为本申请一些实施例中示出的确认拖动“K歌”控件的编辑操作后显示的用户界面。Fig. 74 is a user interface displayed after confirming the editing operation of dragging the "Karaoke" control shown in some embodiments of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
为使本申请的目的和实施方式更加清楚,下面将结合本申请示例性实施例中的附图,对本申请示例性实施方式进行清楚、完整地描述,显然,描述的示例性实施例仅是本申请一部分实施例,而不是全部的实施例。In order to make the purpose and implementation of the application clearer, the following will clearly and completely describe the exemplary implementation of the application in conjunction with the accompanying drawings in the exemplary embodiment of the application. Obviously, the described exemplary embodiment is only the present application. Claim some of the examples, not all of them.
在智能控制设备为显示设备时,基于显示设备的结构进行介绍。When the intelligent control device is a display device, the introduction is based on the structure of the display device.
图1为本申请一些实施例中智能控制设备的使用场景。如图1所示,智能控制设备200还与服务器400进行数据通信,用户可通过智能设备300或控制装置100操作智能控制设备200。Fig. 1 is a usage scenario of an intelligent control device in some embodiments of the present application. As shown in FIG. 1 , the smart control device 200 also performs data communication with the server 400 , and the user can operate the smart control device 200 through the smart device 300 or the control device 100 .
在一些实施例中,控制装置100可以是遥控器,遥控器和智能控制设备的通信包括红外协议通信或蓝牙协议通信,及其他短距离通信方式中的至少一种,通过无线或有线方式来控制智能控制设备200。用户可以通过遥控器上按键、语音输入、控制面板输入等至少一种输入用户指令,来控制智能控制设备200。In some embodiments, the control device 100 may be a remote control, and the communication between the remote control and the intelligent control device includes at least one of infrared protocol communication, Bluetooth protocol communication, and other short-distance communication methods, and is controlled by wireless or wired Intelligent control device 200. The user can control the intelligent control device 200 by inputting at least one user instruction through buttons on the remote control, voice input, and control panel input.
在一些实施例中,智能设备300可以包括移动终端、平板电脑、计算机、笔记本电脑,AR/VR设备等中的任意一种。In some embodiments, the smart device 300 may include any one of a mobile terminal, a tablet computer, a computer, a notebook computer, an AR/VR device, and the like.
在一些实施例中,也可以使用智能设备300以控制智能控制设备200。例如,使用在智能设备上运行的应用程序控制智能控制设备200。在一些实施例中,也可以使用智能设备300和智能控制设备进行数据的通信。In some embodiments, the smart device 300 can also be used to control the smart control device 200 . For example, the smart control device 200 is controlled using an application program running on the smart device. In some embodiments, the smart device 300 and the smart control device may also be used for data communication.
在一些实施例中,智能控制设备200还可以采用除了控制装置100和智能设备300之外的方式进行控制,例如,可以通过智能控制设备200设备内部配置的获取语音指令的模块直接接收用户的语音指令控制,也可以通过智能控制设备200设备外部设置的语音控制装置来接收用户的语音指令控制。In some embodiments, the intelligent control device 200 can also be controlled in a manner other than the control device 100 and the intelligent device 300, for example, the voice instruction module configured inside the intelligent control device 200 can directly receive the user's voice The command control can also be controlled by receiving the user's voice command through the voice control device installed outside the intelligent control device 200 .
在一些实施例中,智能控制设备200还与服务器400进行数据通信。可允许智能控制设备200通过局域网(LAN)、无线局域网(WLAN)和其他网络进行通信连接。服务器400可以向智能控制设备200提供各种内容和互动。In some embodiments, the intelligent control device 200 also performs data communication with the server 400 . The intelligent control device 200 can be allowed to communicate via local area network (LAN), wireless local area network (WLAN) and other networks. The server 400 may provide various contents and interactions to the smart control device 200 .
图2为本申请一些实施例中控制装置100的硬件配置框图。如图2所示,控制装置100包括控制器110、通信接口130、用户输入/输出接口140、存储器、供电电源。控制装置100可接收用户的输入操作指令,且将操作指令转换为智能控制设备200可识别和响应的指令,起用用户与智能控制设备200之间交互中介作用。Fig. 2 is a block diagram of hardware configuration of the control device 100 in some embodiments of the present application. As shown in FIG. 2 , the control device 100 includes a controller 110 , a communication interface 130 , a user input/output interface 140 , a memory, and a power supply. The control device 100 can receive the user's input operation instruction, and convert the operation instruction into an instruction that the intelligent control device 200 can recognize and respond to, and acts as an intermediary interaction between the user and the intelligent control device 200 .
在一些实施例中,通信接口130用于和外部通信,包含WIFI芯片,蓝牙模块,NFC或可替代模块中的至少一种。在一些实施例中,用户输入/输出接口140包含麦克风,触摸板,传感器,按键或可替代模块中的至少一种。In some embodiments, the communication interface 130 is used for communicating with the outside, and includes at least one of a WIFI chip, a Bluetooth module, NFC or an alternative module. In some embodiments, the user input/output interface 140 includes at least one of a microphone, a touch pad, a sensor, a button or an alternative module.
图3为本申请一些实施例中智能控制设备200的硬件配置框图。参见图3,在一些实施例中,智能控制设备200包括调谐解调器210、通信器220、检测器230、外部装置接口240、控制器250、显示器260、音频输出接口270、存储器、供电电源、用户接口中的至少一种。在一些实施例中,控制器包括中央处理器,视频处理器,音频处理器,图形处理器,RAM,ROM,用于输入/输出的第一接口至第n接口。Fig. 3 is a block diagram of hardware configuration of an intelligent control device 200 in some embodiments of the present application. 3, in some embodiments, the intelligent control device 200 includes a tuner and demodulator 210, a communicator 220, a detector 230, an external device interface 240, a controller 250, a display 260, an audio output interface 270, a memory, and a power supply , at least one of a user interface. In some embodiments, the controller includes a CPU, a video processor, an audio processor, a graphics processor, a RAM, a ROM, and a first interface to an nth interface for input/output.
在一些实施例中,显示器260包括用于呈现画面的显示屏组件,以及驱动图像显示的驱动组件,用于接收源自控制器输出的图像信号,进行显示视频内容、图像内容以及菜单操控界面的组件以及用户操控UI界面等。在一些实施例中,显示器260可为液晶显示器、OLED显示器、以及投影显示器中的至少一种,还可以为一种投影装置和投影屏幕。In some embodiments, the display 260 includes a display screen component for presenting images, and a drive component for driving image display, for receiving image signals output from the controller, and displaying video content, image content, and menu manipulation interface. Components and user manipulation of the UI interface, etc. In some embodiments, the display 260 may be at least one of a liquid crystal display, an OLED display, and a projection display, and may also be a projection device and a projection screen.
在一些实施例中,控制器250和调谐解调器210可以位于不同的分体设备中,即调谐解调器210也可在控制器250所在的主体设备的外置设备中,如外置机顶盒等。在一些实施例中,控制器250,通过存储在存储器上中各种软件控制程序,来控制智能控制设备的工作和响应用户的操作。控制器250控制智能控制设备200的整体操作。例如:响应于接收到用于选择在显示器260上显示UI对象的用户命令,控制器250便可以执行与由用户命令选择的对象有关的操作。In some embodiments, the controller 250 and the tuner-demodulator 210 may be located in different split devices, that is, the tuner-demodulator 210 may also be located in an external device of the main device where the controller 250 is located, such as an external set-top box Wait. In some embodiments, the controller 250 controls the work of the intelligent control device and responds to user operations by storing various software control programs in the memory. The controller 250 controls the overall operation of the smart control device 200 . For example, in response to receiving a user command for selecting a UI object to be displayed on the display 260, the controller 250 may perform an operation related to the object selected by the user command.
在一些实施例中,所述对象可以是可选对象中的任何一个,例如超链接、图标或其他可操作的控件。与所选择的对象有关操作有:显示连接到超链接页面、文档、图像等操作,或者执行与所述图标相对应程序的操作。In some embodiments, the object may be any one of selectable objects, such as hyperlinks, icons, or other operable controls. Operations related to the selected object include: displaying hyperlink pages, documents, images, etc., or executing the program corresponding to the icon.
在一些实施例中控制器包括中央处理器(Central Processing Unit,CPU),视频处理器,音频处理器,图形处理器(Graphics Processing Unit,GPU),RAM Random Access Memory,RAM),ROM(Read-Only Memory,ROM),用于输入/输出的第一接口至第n接口,通信总线(Bus)等中的至少一种。In some embodiments, the controller includes a central processing unit (Central Processing Unit, CPU), a video processor, an audio processor, a graphics processing unit (Graphics Processing Unit, GPU), RAM Random Access Memory, RAM), ROM (Read- Only Memory, ROM), at least one of the first interface to the nth interface for input/output, a communication bus (Bus), and the like.
在一些实施例中,用户可在显示器260上显示的图形用户界面(GUI)输入用户命令,则用户输入接口通过图形用户界面(GUI)接收用户输入命令。或者,用户可通过输入特定的声音或手势进行输入用户命令,则用户输入接口通过传感器识别出声音或手势,来接收用户输入命令。In some embodiments, the user can input user commands through a graphical user interface (GUI) displayed on the display 260, and the user input interface receives user input commands through the graphical user interface (GUI). Alternatively, the user may input a user command by inputting a specific sound or gesture, and the user input interface recognizes the sound or gesture through a sensor to receive the user input command.
图4为本申请一些实施例中智能控制设备200中软件配置图。参见图4,在一些实施例中,将系统分为四层,从上至下分别为应用程序(Applications)层(简称“应用层”),应用程序框架(Application Framework) 层(简称“框架层”),安卓运行时(Android runtime)和系统库层(简称“系统运行库层”),以及内核层。FIG. 4 is a software configuration diagram of the intelligent control device 200 in some embodiments of the present application. Referring to Fig. 4, in some embodiments, the system is divided into four layers, from top to bottom are applications (Applications) layer (referred to as "application layer"), application framework (Application Framework) layer (referred to as "framework layer") "), Android runtime (Android runtime) and system library layer (referred to as "system runtime layer"), and the kernel layer.
如图4所示,本申请一些实施例中应用程序框架层包括管理器(Managers),提供器(Content Provider)、网络管理系统等,其中管理器包括以下模块中的至少一个:活动管理器(Activity Manager)用与和系统中正在运行的所有活动进行交互;位置管理器(Location Manager)用于给系统服务或应用提供了系统位置服务的访问;文件包管理器(Package Manager)用于检索当前安装在设备上的应用程序包相关的各种信息;通知管理器(Notification Manager)用于控制通知消息的显示和清除;窗口管理器(Window Manager)用于管理用户界面上的图标、窗口、工具栏、壁纸和桌面部件。As shown in Figure 4, the application framework layer in some embodiments of the present application includes managers (Managers), provider (Content Provider), network management system, etc., wherein the manager includes at least one of the following modules: activity manager ( Activity Manager) is used to interact with all activities running in the system; Location Manager is used to provide system services or applications with access to system location services; Package Manager is used to retrieve the current Various information related to the application package installed on the device; Notification Manager (Notification Manager) is used to control the display and clearing of notification messages; Window Manager (Window Manager) is used to manage icons, windows, tools on the user interface Bars, wallpapers and widgets.
在一些实施例中,为提高显示设备的用户体验,可在显示设备中配置实现不同功能的应用。其中,有些应用可基于应用本身实现一种功能,而还有些应用会提供多种业务,不同的业务实现不同的功能,即这种应用可实现多种功能。例如,显示设备内配置有桌面应用,桌面应用提供多个业务模块,以基于桌面应用提供的业务模块实现不同的功能。为便于用户启动某个功能,可基于不同功能生成不同的组件展示在桌面主页中。In some embodiments, in order to improve the user experience of the display device, applications implementing different functions may be configured in the display device. Among them, some applications can implement a function based on the application itself, while some applications provide multiple services, and different services implement different functions, that is, this application can implement multiple functions. For example, a desktop application is configured in the display device, and the desktop application provides multiple service modules to implement different functions based on the service modules provided by the desktop application. In order to facilitate the user to start a certain function, different components can be generated based on different functions and displayed on the home page of the desktop.
在一些实施例中,由于显示设备中配置的预置操作系统应用中业务模块较多,为便于用户能够对指定业务模块进行快速启动,可通过Widget的形式,生成用户常用业务的快捷方式,Widget用于为对应的业务模块提供快捷入口。各个Widget展示在Widget面板中,即用户可将常用的功能注册到数据中心(WidgetService)中以添加到Widget面板中,通过Widget为预置操作系统应用下的功能提供快速启动入口。In some embodiments, since there are many business modules in the preset operating system applications configured in the display device, in order to facilitate the user to quickly start the specified business module, a shortcut to the user's frequently used business can be generated in the form of a Widget. Widget It is used to provide a shortcut entry for the corresponding business module. Each Widget is displayed in the Widget panel, that is, the user can register commonly used functions in the data center (WidgetService) to add to the Widget panel, and provide a quick start entry for the functions under the preset operating system application through the Widget.
在一些实施例中,显示设备安装安卓系统,那么在桌面主页中展示Widget面板时,目前的显示设备通常采用安卓原生的桌面组件框架实现,即系统组件服务WidgetService工作在系统frameworks层级。各个组件提供者应用提供一个provider,通过provider将自己的组件数据暴露给桌面应用。系统组件服务WidgetService在系统开机后,会自动搜集所有的组件提供者的provider信息。而桌面应用使用WidgetHost和系统组件服务WidgetService通信,获取到各个组件应用的provider信息,并通过provider获取组件数据,添加按钮或者更新已展示的组件。其中,组件提供者应用包括第三方应用和桌面应用提供的业务模块。In some embodiments, if the Android system is installed on the display device, then when the Widget panel is displayed on the desktop home page, the current display device is usually implemented by the native desktop component framework of Android, that is, the system component service WidgetService works at the system frameworks level. Each component provider application provides a provider, and exposes its own component data to the desktop application through the provider. System component service WidgetService will automatically collect provider information of all component providers after the system is started. The desktop application uses WidgetHost to communicate with the system component service WidgetService to obtain the provider information of each component application, and obtain component data through the provider, add buttons or update the displayed components. Wherein, the component provider application includes service modules provided by third-party applications and desktop applications.
组件数据包含界面组件的标识(ID)和界面组件的操作(Action)等信息。ID在provider端可以自定义;但Action只能使用固定的不到20种,例如设置文字大小、文字颜色、背景图、点击监听等。也就是说,对所有Widget面板的操作更新,都局限于这不到20种Action,难以扩展,难以实现复杂的界面效果。The component data includes information such as the identification (ID) of the interface component and the operation (Action) of the interface component. ID can be customized on the provider side; but Action can only use less than 20 fixed types, such as setting text size, text color, background image, click monitoring, etc. That is to say, the operation updates for all Widget panels are limited to less than 20 Actions, which is difficult to expand and realize complex interface effects.
组件的界面布局文件,来源于组件提供者应用。而在桌面应用中,为了能够拿到组件提供者应用内的资源文件,需要创建该应用的上下文,资源消耗比较大。另外,组件的布局文件里,不能有自定义的组件,否则在桌面应用里无法识别。所以,在组件布局文件里不能使用自定义的界面组件,难以实现复杂的界面效果。The interface layout file of the component comes from the component provider application. In the desktop application, in order to obtain the resource files in the component provider application, it is necessary to create the context of the application, which consumes a lot of resources. In addition, there cannot be custom components in the layout file of the component, otherwise it will not be recognized in the desktop application. Therefore, custom interface components cannot be used in component layout files, and it is difficult to achieve complex interface effects.
可见,显示设备基于安卓系统实现的桌面组件,受限于安卓系统,只能使用系统提供的几种原生组件,使得桌面组件难以扩展或者定制,展示效果比较简陋。It can be seen that the desktop components implemented by the display device based on the Android system are limited by the Android system and can only use several native components provided by the system, making it difficult to expand or customize the desktop components, and the display effect is relatively simple.
因此,为使显示设备在呈现Widget面板时,对安卓系统无依赖,本申请提供一种全新的桌面组件框架,基于该桌面组件框架可以使用任意组件(Widget),组件可来源于应用内部,也可以来源于其他应用。组件数据来源也可以灵活定制,可来源于应用内部,也可来源于其他应用。通过桌面组件框架可以对Widget面板中呈现的各个Widget的大小、布局、样式(方形、圆形等)等进行自定义编辑,并可进行多级Widget菜单展示和Widget分类,也可以纵向增加某一分类下的组件,修改组件的各种属性等,为用户提供多样效果的Widget面板。Therefore, in order to make the display device independent of the Android system when presenting the Widget panel, this application provides a brand-new desktop component framework. Based on the desktop component framework, any component (Widget) can be used. Can be derived from other applications. The source of component data can also be flexibly customized, which can come from within the application or from other applications. The size, layout, style (square, circle, etc.) of each Widget presented in the Widget panel can be customized and edited through the desktop component framework, and multi-level Widget menu display and Widget classification can be performed, and a certain widget can be added vertically. Components under the category, modify various properties of the components, etc., to provide users with a Widget panel with various effects.
在一些实施例中,为使启动显示设备时,能够在显示设备中呈现桌面主页,以展示系统配置的应用或安装的业务模块,可在图4中的应用程序层内运行桌面组件框架。显示设备内配置桌面应用(示例性的:J应用),桌面应用为应用层的一个应用,桌面应用由桌面组件框架构成,用于在显示设备启动时呈现桌面主页。In some embodiments, when the display device is started, the desktop home page can be displayed on the display device to display the applications configured by the system or the installed business modules, and the desktop component framework can be run in the application layer in FIG. 4 . A desktop application (example: J application) is configured in the display device. The desktop application is an application of the application layer. The desktop application is composed of a desktop component framework and is used to present the desktop home page when the display device is started.
图5为本申请一些实施例中桌面组件框架的架构图。参见图5,桌面组件架构包括业务组件管理模块(WidgetManager)、组件展示模块(WidgetContainer)和HostView、数据中心模块(WidgetService)和组件管理模块(WidgetServer)。Fig. 5 is a structural diagram of a desktop component framework in some embodiments of the present application. Referring to Fig. 5, the desktop component architecture includes a business component management module (WidgetManager), a component display module (WidgetContainer) and HostView, a data center module (WidgetService) and a component management module (WidgetServer).
业务组件管理模块(WidgetManager)按照业务模块的划分,带有业务标识(ID),一个业务组件管理模块对应一个业务模块,管理维护各自业务模块相关的组件。向远端业务模块发起请求,接收数据中心模块(WidgetService)的数据,根据业务ID分发到不同的组件。业务组件管理模块(WidgetManager)用于管理组件信息,组件信息用于记录组件的ID、长、宽、点击、展开、刷新间隔等基础信息;组件数据和Widget面板信息,完全不做任何限制,可灵活扩展。The business component management module (WidgetManager) is divided according to the business modules, with business identification (ID), one business component management module corresponds to one business module, and manages and maintains components related to each business module. Initiate a request to the remote business module, receive data from the data center module (WidgetService), and distribute it to different components according to the business ID. The business component management module (WidgetManager) is used to manage component information, and the component information is used to record basic information such as component ID, length, width, click, expansion, refresh interval, etc.; component data and Widget panel information, without any restrictions, can be Flexible expansion.
组件展示模块(WidgetContainer)和HostView:负责组件的添加、删除、移动、信息展示等。远端业务模块:相对于桌面组件模块自身的远端,可以是桌面应用内部的其他业务模块,也可以是其他应用。组件数据由远端业务模块提供,通过数据中心模块WidgetService传递到业务组件管理模块内部。图5中,业务模块A和应用B,都是远端业务模块。Component display module (WidgetContainer) and HostView: responsible for adding, deleting, moving, and displaying information of components. Remote business module: relative to the remote side of the desktop component module itself, it can be other business modules inside the desktop application or other applications. Component data is provided by the remote business module and delivered to the business component management module through the data center module WidgetService. In Fig. 5, service module A and application B are both remote service modules.
业务模块A为桌面应用提供的业务模块,应用B为外部应用,并非桌面应用提供的业务应用。应用B是指安装在显示设备的软件系统中,并可展示在桌面主页中的远端应用,例如第三方应用或系统预置的应用。在展示时,由软件系统中的应用管理模块从系统中获取该应用的安装信息,基于安装信息展示在桌面主页。如果该应用也提供Widget展示,则由应用管理模块将该应用的信息注册到WidgetService,由WidgetService实现该应用对应的Widget组件展示在Widget面板中。Business module A is a business module provided by desktop applications, and application B is an external application, not a business application provided by desktop applications. Application B refers to a remote application that is installed in the software system of the display device and can be displayed on the home page of the desktop, such as a third-party application or a system preset application. When displaying, the application management module in the software system obtains the installation information of the application from the system, and displays it on the desktop home page based on the installation information. If the application also provides Widget display, the application management module registers the information of the application to the WidgetService, and the WidgetService realizes that the Widget component corresponding to the application is displayed in the Widget panel.
数据中心模块(WidgetService)相当于系统组件服务,用于对接业务组件管理模块和远端业务模块, 远端业务模块发送的数据发送到WidgetService,WidgetService做完初步处理后,分发给不同的业务组件管理模块。组件管理模块(WidgetServer)用于缓存组件信息和组件数据。The data center module (WidgetService) is equivalent to the system component service, which is used to connect the business component management module and the remote business module. The data sent by the remote business module is sent to the WidgetService. After the WidgetService completes the preliminary processing, it is distributed to different business component management module. The component management module (WidgetServer) is used to cache component information and component data.
在一些实施例中,为了保证Widget面板中展示的各个Widget的大小、布局、样式等信息不受系统限制,桌面组件框架将各个用于呈现Widget的组件信息进行拆分,组件信息包括组件数据和Widget面板信息,组件数据是指业务ID表征的业务模块所需在Widget面板上展示的数据,如Widget的ID、点击操作、展开、刷新间隔、展示内容等信息;Widget面板信息是指组件展示的界面布局信息,如Widget的长、宽等尺寸信息。In some embodiments, in order to ensure that information such as the size, layout, and style of each Widget displayed in the Widget panel is not restricted by the system, the desktop component framework splits each component information used to present the Widget. The component information includes component data and Widget panel information, component data refers to the data required to be displayed on the Widget panel by the business module represented by the business ID, such as Widget ID, click operation, expansion, refresh interval, display content and other information; Widget panel information refers to the information displayed by the component Interface layout information, such as Widget's length, width and other size information.
将组件数据和Widget面板信息拆分:组件数据使用兼容性较好的json、xml等字符串形式的格式,数据传递灵活限制少;Widget面板信息可以存放在桌面应用端,也可以存放在其他应用端。如果Widget面板信息存放在其他应用内,则桌面应用可以使用跨进程的加载技术,比如插件加载方式。使用跨进程加载技术时,最终Widget面板信息还是加载运行于桌面应用中。组件的界面布局总是在桌面应用中加载,可以任意使用桌面应用内的资源、控件等,不受系统限制。在此基础上,可以衍生出更多的业务形态,比如组件的自定义菜单、多业务组合组件等。Split component data and Widget panel information: component data uses string formats such as json and xml with good compatibility, and data transmission is flexible and limited; Widget panel information can be stored on the desktop application side or in other applications end. If the widget panel information is stored in other applications, the desktop application can use a cross-process loading technology, such as a plug-in loading method. When using the cross-process loading technology, the final Widget panel information is still loaded and run in the desktop application. The interface layout of the component is always loaded in the desktop application, and the resources and controls in the desktop application can be used arbitrarily without system restrictions. On this basis, more business forms can be derived, such as custom menus of components, multi-service combination components, etc.
桌面组件框架在实现Widget面板时,并不关心Widget的大小、布局、样式等信息,Widget的大小、布局、样式等信息均可自定义。由于各个Widget的大小可不同,因此,各个Widget在Widget面板中的组合安装并不由桌面组件框架限定,而是可自定义,只需符合Widget面板展示即可。When the desktop component framework implements the Widget panel, it does not care about the size, layout, style and other information of the Widget. The size, layout, style and other information of the Widget can be customized. Since the size of each Widget can be different, the combined installation of each Widget in the Widget panel is not limited by the desktop component framework, but can be customized, as long as it conforms to the display of the Widget panel.
在一些实施例中,桌面组件框架按照业务模块管理Widget(组件),一个业务模块生成一个Widget。组件数据和Widget面板信息展示一一对应:不同业务模块的组件之间,不同组件之间,互相之间不受影响,保证了业务和组件的独立性、内聚性。根据业务模块发展,可以横向扩展出更多的业务模块,也可在现有的业务模块下,扩展出更多的组件。In some embodiments, the desktop component framework manages Widgets (components) according to business modules, and one business module generates one Widget. There is a one-to-one correspondence between component data and Widget panel information display: components of different business modules, and between different components, are not affected by each other, ensuring the independence and cohesion of business and components. According to the development of business modules, more business modules can be expanded horizontally, and more components can also be expanded under the existing business modules.
在一些实施例中,桌面组件框架的数据通道的实现比较灵活:向远端业务发起的请求时,桌面应用内部的远端业务可以直接通过接口调用,其他应用里的远端业务,可以发送IPC请求(socket、ipc、file等)。而远端业务的返回数据,同样也可以使用多种方式实现。In some embodiments, the implementation of the data channel of the desktop component framework is relatively flexible: when a request is initiated to a remote service, the remote service inside the desktop application can be called directly through the interface, and the remote service in other applications can send an IPC request (socket, ipc, file, etc.). The return data of the remote service can also be realized in multiple ways.
在一些实施例中,桌面组件框架可以很方便的实现动态组件:远端业务可以根据业务需要,主动通知到桌面应用,添加和删除一些组件。比如:联系人应用端,添加/删除了一个联系人,则可以主动通知到桌面应用,添加/删除一个联系人组件。再比如:应用管理组件,可以在应用安装/卸载时,主动通知到桌面应用,添加/删除一个应用组件。In some embodiments, the desktop component framework can easily implement dynamic components: the remote business can actively notify the desktop application to add and delete some components according to business needs. For example: on the contact application side, if a contact is added/deleted, it can actively notify the desktop application to add/delete a contact component. Another example: the application management component can actively notify the desktop application to add/delete an application component when the application is installed/uninstalled.
在一些实施例中,桌面组件框架可以灵活控制组件加载时机:比如系统刚开机,桌面应用刚启动时,系统资源比较紧张,可以简单的处理,暂停组件的注册,从而减少系统资源争抢,避免造成主功能的操作卡顿。In some embodiments, the desktop component framework can flexibly control the timing of component loading: for example, when the system is just started and the desktop application is just started, the system resources are relatively tight, which can be handled simply and the registration of the component is suspended, thereby reducing system resource contention and avoiding Causing the operation of the main function to freeze.
在一些实施例中,桌面应用为安装在应用层的应用内,应用B也为安装在应用层的应用。In some embodiments, the desktop application is an application installed in the application layer, and application B is also an application installed in the application layer.
在一些实施例中,启动桌面应用时,在显示设备中展示桌面主页。桌面主页中展示有预置操作系统提供的数个业务模块,如信号源、联网状态、少儿、教育、健身等业务模块。用户可将常用的任一个业务模块注册到数据中心模块(WidgetService)中以Widget的形式添加到Widget面板中,实现快速启动。业务模块属于桌面应用之内的业务,在任一业务模块展示过程中,用户均可通过预设操作调出Widget面板展示在桌面主页中。In some embodiments, when the desktop application is started, the homepage of the desktop is displayed on the display device. The desktop home page displays several business modules provided by the pre-installed operating system, such as signal source, network status, children, education, fitness and other business modules. Users can register any commonly used business module into the data center module (WidgetService) and add it to the Widget panel in the form of Widget to achieve quick start. The business module belongs to the business within the desktop application. During the display process of any business module, the user can call up the Widget panel and display it on the home page of the desktop through preset operations.
在一些实施例中,信号源、联网状态等业务模块的信息是从桌面应用外的其他应用获取的。In some embodiments, the information of service modules such as signal source and networking status is obtained from other applications other than the desktop application.
在一些实施例中,在桌面应用之外的其他应用展示过程中,不响应Widget面板调出指令。桌面应用之外的应用包括用户安装的远端应用,如奇异果、酷喵等第三方应用,在显示设备的用户界面中展示远端应用时,用户触发预设操作,不可调出Widget面板展示在桌面主页中。In some embodiments, during the presentation of applications other than the desktop application, the calling instruction of the Widget panel is not responded to. Applications other than desktop applications include remote applications installed by users, such as third-party applications such as Kiwi, Cool Meow, etc. When displaying remote applications on the user interface of the display device, the user triggers a preset operation, and the Widget panel cannot be called out for display in the desktop home page.
在一些实施例中,桌面主页可以是原生系统应用提供的,也可以是预置的操作系统应用提供的。在一些实施例中,桌面应用可以为预置的操作系统应用。In some embodiments, the home page of the desktop may be provided by a native system application or a pre-installed operating system application. In some embodiments, the desktop application may be a pre-installed operating system application.
在显示设备运行时Widget面板通常隐藏显示,在用户需要通过Widget面板快速启动某个功能(如某个业务模块实现的功能)时,可基于触发操作可调出Widget面板展示在桌面主页中,触发操作是指用户长按遥控器左键或其他预设功能键。如果用户想要启动某个功能,则在Widget面板中触发对应的Widget控件,以直接启动该功能,即启动桌面应用提供的某个业务模块。When the display device is running, the Widget panel is usually hidden and displayed. When the user needs to quickly start a certain function (such as a function realized by a business module) through the Widget panel, the Widget panel can be called out based on the trigger operation and displayed on the home page of the desktop. Trigger Operation means that the user long presses the left button of the remote control or other preset function buttons. If the user wants to start a certain function, the corresponding Widget control is triggered in the Widget panel to directly start the function, that is, start a certain business module provided by the desktop application.
但是,如果该业务模块被下线,此时对应的业务Widget控件会失效,但并不会在Widget面板中标识出来,那么在触发对应的业务Widget控件时,无法实现指定业务模块的快速启动。可见,用户在基于Widget面板实现某个业务模块的快速启动时,因无法及时获知失效Widget控件,导致某个业务模块启动失败,影响用户体验。However, if the business module is offline, the corresponding business Widget control will be invalid at this time, but it will not be marked in the Widget panel, so when the corresponding business Widget control is triggered, the specified business module cannot be quickly started. It can be seen that when a user implements a quick startup of a certain business module based on the Widget panel, the failure of the Widget control cannot be known in time, resulting in a failure to start a certain business module, which affects user experience.
其中,失效是指不可用。业务模块的失效是指应用是否可用,例如,如果该应用虽然存在显示设备中,但因政策原因下线或后台不再维护,则该业务模块不可用。相反的,有效是指可用状态。Wherein, failure refers to unavailability. The failure of a business module refers to whether the application is available. For example, if the application exists in the display device, but is offline due to policy reasons or is no longer maintained in the background, the service module is unavailable. In contrast, valid refers to the usable state.
业务Widget控件有效性发生变化的场景:在业务模块的业务状态发生变化时可能会导致业务Widget控件的有效性发生变化。例如,如果具有Widget控件的业务模块因为政策原因被下线了,则相应的业务Widget控件肯定是失效的。或者展示在桌面主页的某个应用B被卸载,则其对应的Widget控件也肯定是失效的,所以承接业务Widget控件展示的Widget面板需要监听业务模块的下线广播或应用的卸载广播,或者在启动桌面应用时检测当前业务模块支持的业务Widget控件的变化,将已经下线的业务Widget控件设置为失效,这样才能及时更新控件的是否有效的状态,进而可以根据用户的意愿进行删除等操作,提升用户体验。Scenario where the validity of the business Widget control changes: When the business status of the business module changes, the validity of the business Widget control may change. For example, if a business module with a Widget control is offline due to policy reasons, the corresponding business Widget control must be invalid. Or if an application B displayed on the desktop homepage is uninstalled, its corresponding Widget control must also be invalid. Therefore, the Widget panel that undertakes the business Widget control display needs to monitor the offline broadcast of the business module or the uninstall broadcast of the application, or in the When starting the desktop application, detect the change of the business Widget controls supported by the current business module, and set the offline business Widget controls to invalid, so as to update the valid state of the controls in time, and then perform operations such as deletion according to the user's wishes. Improve user experience.
基于此,为便于用户能够及时获知每个业务Widget控件的有效性,本发明实施例提供一种显示设备, 用于实现控件有效性的检测,基于业务模块的自身特性在特定的时间点触发查询机制,即以应用和业务两个维度检测对应业务Widget控件的有效性,以实时将失效的业务模块检测出来,并在Widget面板中对应的业务Widget控件上添加失效标识,以便于用户能够及时获知失效的业务模块,避免出现触发业务Widget控件而无法启动对应业务模块的情况,用户体验更好。Based on this, in order to facilitate the user to know the validity of each business Widget control in a timely manner, the embodiment of the present invention provides a display device for realizing the detection of the validity of the control, and triggering the query at a specific time point based on the own characteristics of the business module Mechanism, that is, to detect the validity of the corresponding business Widget controls from the two dimensions of application and business, to detect the invalid business modules in real time, and to add invalidation signs to the corresponding business Widget controls in the Widget panel, so that users can know in time The invalid business module avoids the situation that the business Widget control is triggered and the corresponding business module cannot be started, and the user experience is better.
图6为本申请一些实施例中控件处理方法的流程图;图7为本申请一些实施例中控件处理方法的数据流程图。本发明实施例提供的一种显示设备,包括:显示器,被配置为显示呈现有Widget面板的桌面主页,所述Widget面板中展示有数个用于提供业务模块启动入口的业务Widget控件;与显示器连接的控制器,在执行图6和图7所示的控件处理方法时,控制器被配置为执行下述步骤:FIG. 6 is a flow chart of a control processing method in some embodiments of the present application; FIG. 7 is a data flow chart of a control processing method in some embodiments of the present application. A display device provided by an embodiment of the present invention includes: a display configured to display a desktop home page presenting a Widget panel, the Widget panel displaying several business Widget controls for providing a startup entry for a business module; connected to the display The controller, when executing the control processing method shown in Figure 6 and Figure 7, the controller is configured to perform the following steps:
S1A、接收基于桌面主页产生的预设操作,检测每个指定业务模块的业务状态是否发生变化,指定业务模块是指在Widget面板中展示有业务Widget控件的业务模块,业务状态用于表征指定业务模块是否可用。S1A. Receive preset operations generated based on the desktop homepage, and detect whether the business status of each designated business module has changed. The designated business module refers to a business module that displays a business Widget control in the Widget panel, and the business status is used to represent the designated business. Whether the module is available.
显示设备启动控件有效性查询机制的场景需在显示设备中呈现桌面主页时启动,具体地,控制器在执行接收基于桌面主页产生的预设操作,检测每个指定业务模块的业务状态是否发生变化,被进一步配置为执行下述步骤:The scenario where the display device activates the control validity query mechanism needs to be started when the desktop home page is presented on the display device. Specifically, the controller is performing receiving preset operations generated based on the desktop home page to detect whether the business status of each specified business module has changed. , is further configured to perform the following steps:
步骤111、接收对桌面应用的启动操作,在用户界面中呈现桌面主页时,检测每个指定业务模块的业务状态是否发生变化;或者,Step 111, receiving the startup operation of the desktop application, and detecting whether the business status of each specified business module has changed when the desktop home page is presented in the user interface; or,
步骤112、接收对所述桌面主页中展示的指定业务模块的触发操作时,检测每个指定业务模块的业务状态是否发生变化;或者,Step 112, when receiving a trigger operation on the designated business modules displayed on the desktop homepage, detect whether the business status of each designated business module has changed; or,
步骤113、接收基于所述桌面主页产生的用于启动Widget面板的启动操作时,检测每个指定业务模块的业务状态是否发生变化。Step 113 : When receiving the startup operation for starting the Widget panel generated based on the desktop homepage, detect whether the business status of each specified business module changes.
显示设备在对用户配置的各个业务Widget控件有效性的检测时机为启动相应业务模块的时刻、调出Widget面板的时刻或者启动桌面应用的时刻。即在启动相应业务模块时,同步触发控件有效性查询机制,或者,在启动Widget面板时,同步触发控件有效性查询机制,或者,在启动桌面应用时,同步触发控件有效性查询机制,以便于对业务模块对应的业务Widget控件进行实时的有效性检测。启动的指定业务模块可为桌面主页显示的业务模块,即快捷方式的源应用。The time when the display device detects the validity of each service Widget control configured by the user is when the corresponding service module is started, when the Widget panel is called out, or when the desktop application is started. That is, when the corresponding business module is started, the control validity query mechanism is triggered synchronously, or when the Widget panel is started, the control validity query mechanism is triggered synchronously, or when the desktop application is started, the control validity query mechanism is triggered synchronously, so that Real-time validity detection is performed on the business Widget control corresponding to the business module. The specified service module to be started may be the service module displayed on the home page of the desktop, that is, the source application of the shortcut.
在一些实施例中,在用户启动显示设备,显示设备中呈现系统主页,系统主页中展示桌面应用(J应用)控件图标。触发该桌面应用控件图标,在显示设备中呈现桌面主页,同时,同步触发控件有效性查询机制。In some embodiments, when the user starts the display device, the display device presents a system home page, and the system home page displays a desktop application (J application) control icon. The desktop application control icon is triggered to present the desktop home page on the display device, and at the same time, the control validity query mechanism is synchronously triggered.
桌面主页中展示J应用提供的各个业务模块,每个业务模块均可基于用户的自定义设置以业务Widget控件的形式添加至Widget面板中,以提供该业务模块的快速入口。为实时查询每个业务Widget控件的有效性,在用户启动某个业务模块时,同步触发控件有效性查询机制。启动的业务模块的方式可为触发桌面主页中展示的该业务模块控件图标。Each business module provided by the J application is displayed on the home page of the desktop. Each business module can be added to the Widget panel in the form of a business Widget control based on user-defined settings to provide a quick entry to the business module. In order to query the validity of each business Widget control in real time, when the user starts a certain business module, the control validity query mechanism is triggered synchronously. The way to start the business module may be to trigger the control icon of the business module displayed on the desktop home page.
在一些实施例中,执行在启动桌面应用的时候主动的查询每个指定业务模块的业务状态是否发生变化。由于用户在启动时对整个显示设备硬件工作能力利用的较少,因此可以在此时对每个指定业务模块进行一遍全量的查询。可以是显示设备及时的获取到指定业务的变化,并进行更新,避免出现用户在选中业务对应的Widget控件再去查询带来的不变。In some embodiments, when the desktop application is started, it is actively inquired whether the service state of each specified service module has changed. Since the user seldom utilizes the working capacity of the entire display device hardware at startup, a full query can be performed on each specified business module at this time. It may be that the display device acquires the change of the specified service in a timely manner and updates it, so as to avoid the invariance caused by the user selecting the Widget control corresponding to the service and then inquiring.
在一些实施例中,执行在启动Widget面板的时候主动的查询每个指定业务模块的业务状态是否发生变化。由于此时用户还没有开始选中Widget控件,因此可以在此时对每个指定业务模块进行一遍全量的查询,及时的对状态进行更新,避免出现用户在选中业务对应的Widget控件再去查询带来的不变。In some embodiments, when the Widget panel is started, it is actively inquired whether the service state of each designated service module changes. Since the user has not started to select the Widget control at this time, it is possible to perform a full query on each specified business module at this time, and update the status in a timely manner to avoid the occurrence of the user selecting the Widget control corresponding to the business and then querying. unchanged.
在应用启动后,可以接收服务器或其他设备传递的业务变化的通知来更新业务的状态。After the application is started, it can receive service change notifications from the server or other devices to update the service status.
图8为本申请一些实施例中系统主页的示意图;图9为本申请一些实施例中桌面主页的示意图。Fig. 8 is a schematic diagram of a system homepage in some embodiments of the present application; Fig. 9 is a schematic diagram of a desktop homepage in some embodiments of the present application.
在一些实施例中,参见图8,在显示设备启动并展示系统主页时,系统主页中除展示桌面应用(J应用)控件图标,还展示用户安装的各个第三方应用控件图标。如果用户触发桌面应用(J应用)控件图标,则在显示设备中切换展示图9所示的桌面主页。In some embodiments, referring to FIG. 8 , when the display device starts and displays the system homepage, in addition to displaying desktop application (J application) control icons, various third-party application control icons installed by the user are also displayed on the system homepage. If the user triggers the desktop application (J application) control icon, the desktop home page shown in FIG. 9 is switched and displayed on the display device.
在一些实施例中,如图8所示的界面无需显示J应用,显示设备默认的自启动桌面应用,无需额外触发。In some embodiments, the interface shown in FIG. 8 does not need to display the J application, but displays the default self-starting desktop application of the device without additional triggering.
在一些实施例中,如图9所示,该用户界面的导航栏中包括“我的”、“有线宝”、“亲友圈”、“推荐”、“VIP”、“少儿”、“影视”等标题控件,用户可以通过移动焦点至不同的标题控件来显示对应的标题界面。例如,图9中,焦点落在“推荐”控件上时,显示的标题界面为“推荐”界面,该“推荐”界面中的导航栏中包括“精选”、“综艺”、“动漫”、“体育”、“电竞”、“动画片”、“知识”、“全部”、“戏曲”等多个类别控件,用户可以通过移动焦点至不同的类别控件来显示对应的推荐内容。例如,图A9中,焦点落在“精选”控件上时,“推荐”界面的内容显示区中则显示为用户推荐的精选项目,包括图标、缩略图、电影、电视剧的影音内容对应的视觉对象等等。焦点移动到“少儿”上时,内容显示区中将显示“少儿”标题界面,该“少儿”标题界面中主要显示少儿媒资。在一些实施例中,用户可以在电视系统主页中选择想要播放的媒体资源或者打开想要使用的应用程序,也可以通过操作电视系统主页上的控件,指示进入到下一级界面,在下一级界面中选择想要播放的媒体资源。In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 9 , the navigation bar of the user interface includes "My", "Cable Bao", "Circle of Relatives and Friends", "Recommendation", "VIP", "Children", and "Video" and other title controls, the user can display the corresponding title interface by moving the focus to a different title control. For example, in Figure 9, when the focus falls on the "Recommendation" control, the displayed title interface is the "Recommendation" interface, and the navigation bar in the "Recommendation" interface includes "Selected", "Variety", "Anime", "Sports", "E-sports", "Cartoon", "Knowledge", "All", "Chinese Opera" and other category controls, the user can display the corresponding recommended content by moving the focus to different category controls. For example, in Figure A9, when the focus falls on the "Selected" control, the content display area of the "Recommended" interface displays the selected items recommended by the user, including icons, thumbnails, movies, and TV series. Visuals and more. When the focus moves to "Children", the title interface of "Children" will be displayed in the content display area, and the title interface of "Children" mainly displays media resources for children. In some embodiments, the user can select the media resource to be played or open the application program to be used on the home page of the TV system, and can also indicate to enter the next-level interface by operating the controls on the home page of the TV system. Select the media resource you want to play in the level interface.
例如,如果用户想要启动的指定业务模块为“少儿”业务模块,则可直接触发图9所示桌面主页中呈现的“少儿”业务模块图标,此时,同步触发控件有效性查询机制。For example, if the specified business module that the user wants to start is the "Children" business module, the icon of the "Children" business module presented on the desktop homepage shown in FIG.
在一些实施例中,Widget面板是指用于集中展示Widget控件的面板控件。In some embodiments, the Widget panel refers to a panel control used to centrally display Widget controls.
图10为本申请一些实施例中桌面主页中展示Widget面板的示意图。在显示设备中展示桌面主页时, 用户产生用于启动Widget面板的触发操作,则在启动Widget面板时同步触发控件有效性查询机制,触发操作是指用户长按遥控器左键或其他预设功能键。Fig. 10 is a schematic diagram of displaying a Widget panel on a desktop homepage in some embodiments of the present application. When the desktop home page is displayed on the display device, the user generates a trigger operation for starting the Widget panel, and the control validity query mechanism is synchronously triggered when the Widget panel is started. The trigger operation refers to the user long pressing the left button of the remote control or other preset functions key.
如图10所示,该用户界面的左侧内容区中显示第一状态的Widget面板,该Widget面板中显示有多个Widget控件,分别为“信号源”、“应用中心”、“Router”、“设置”、“播放器”、“标准”、“多屏互动”、“城市服务”、“发现”、“联系人”、“设备”、“AI Camera”;该用户界面的右侧内容区中继续显示标准模式主页中的内容。As shown in FIG. 10 , the Widget panel in the first state is displayed in the left content area of the user interface, and multiple Widget controls are displayed in the Widget panel, which are respectively "Signal Source", "Application Center", "Router", "Settings", "Player", "Standard", "Multi-Screen Interaction", "City Service", "Discovery", "Contacts", "Device", "AI Camera"; the right content area of the user interface continues to display the contents of the standard mode home page.
值得注意的是,在该示例中,受限于右侧内容区的尺寸,标准模式主页中的各项目以原始布局参数,对齐右侧内容区的左侧边界显示,标准模式主页中超出用户界面右侧边界的显示内容隐藏。其中,原始布局参数是指各项目在图9中的布局参数。也就是说,当用户长按左键时,Widget面板显示在用户界面的左侧内容区中,标准模式主页中的各项目则整体平移到右侧内容区,超出用户界面右侧边界的显示内容隐藏。It is worth noting that, in this example, limited by the size of the right content area, each item in the standard mode home page is displayed in alignment with the left border of the right content area with the original layout parameters, and the standard mode home page exceeds the user interface The displayed content of the right border is hidden. Wherein, the original layout parameters refer to the layout parameters of each item in FIG. 9 . That is to say, when the user presses the left button for a long time, the Widget panel is displayed in the left content area of the user interface, and all items in the standard mode home page are translated to the right content area as a whole, and the displayed content beyond the right boundary of the user interface hide.
在一些实施例中,在显示如上所述的Widget面板时,用户可以通过操作遥控器上的返回键,或者长按右键,以输入返回指令,控制将Widget面板收起,并返回到标准模式主页。Widget应用接收到输入的返回指令后,退出前台,Widget面板收起。J应用响应于Widget应用从前台退出,切换到前台运行,并全屏显示标准模式界面。In some embodiments, when the above-mentioned Widget panel is displayed, the user can operate the return key on the remote controller, or press and hold the right button to input a return command, control the Widget panel to be retracted, and return to the standard mode home page . After the Widget application receives the input return command, it exits the foreground and the Widget panel is closed. The J application responds to the exit of the Widget application from the foreground, switches to the foreground to run, and displays the standard mode interface in full screen.
在一些实施例中,如果显示设备在启动时直接进入广电信号源,如直接播放电视节目,此时,桌面应用未启动,显示设备中未展示系统主页,则无法进入桌面主页,即无法产生启动业务模块或Widget面板的预设操作,因此,不触发控件有效性查询机制。In some embodiments, if the display device directly enters the radio and television signal source when starting, such as directly playing a TV program, at this time, the desktop application is not started, and the system home page is not displayed on the display device, then the desktop home page cannot be entered, that is, the startup cannot be generated. The default operation of the business module or Widget panel, therefore, does not trigger the control validity query mechanism.
在一些实施例中,在显示设备中呈现桌面主页时,如果用户想要启动不同应用,例如电视里安装的第三方云视听应用,需要将桌面应用(J应用)置为后台/撤销线程后再启动云视听应用的界面。而在云视听应用展示状态下,无法调出Widget面板,只有回到桌面主页后才能打开。In some embodiments, when the desktop home page is presented on the display device, if the user wants to start a different application, such as a third-party cloud audio-visual application installed in the TV, the desktop application (J application) needs to be set to the background/cancel the thread and then Start the interface of the cloud audio-visual application. In the display state of the cloud audio-visual application, the Widget panel cannot be called up, and it can only be opened after returning to the home page of the desktop.
在一些实施例中,桌面主页也可展示一些远端应用(图5中的应用B)的控件图标。此时,可将远端应用的信息注册到WidgetService,再通过业务控件管理模块(WidgetManager)从WidgetService中获取注册信息以展示在桌面主页,用户可在桌面主页启动相应的远端应用。此时,远端应用可作为桌面应用提供的一个业务模块,也可将桌面主页中的远端应用以业务Widget控件的形式添加至Widget面板中,以提供远端应用的快速启动入口。In some embodiments, the desktop home page can also display control icons of some remote applications (application B in FIG. 5 ). At this time, the information of the remote application can be registered to the WidgetService, and then the registration information can be obtained from the WidgetService through the business control management module (WidgetManager) to display on the desktop homepage, and the user can start the corresponding remote application on the desktop homepage. At this point, the remote application can be used as a business module provided by the desktop application, or the remote application on the desktop home page can be added to the Widget panel in the form of a business Widget control to provide a quick start entry for the remote application.
在启动某一业务模块或启动Widget面板时,同步产生启动指令,以触发控件有效性查询机制,检测该Widget面板中展示的各个业务Widget控件对应的业务模块的业务状态是否发生变化。其中,用于检测业务模块的业务状态是否发生变化所需的参数可从数据中心(WidgetService)获取。When starting a certain business module or starting a Widget panel, synchronously generate a start command to trigger a control validity query mechanism to detect whether the business status of the business module corresponding to each business Widget control displayed in the Widget panel changes. Among them, the parameters required for detecting whether the service state of the service module changes can be obtained from the data center (WidgetService).
在一些实施例中,在通过Widget面板外的其他入口启动一个业务模块时,可先判断该业务模块是否提供Widget控件展示,如果该启动的业务模块未提供业务Widget控件展示,则可直接启动业务模块展示业务模块主页即可。如果该启动的业务模块提供业务Widget控件展示,则将该应用确定为指定业务模块,即指定业务模块是指在Widget面板中展示有业务Widget控件的业务模块。In some embodiments, when starting a business module through other entrances outside the Widget panel, it can be judged first whether the business module provides Widget control display, if the started business module does not provide business Widget control display, then the business can be started directly The module only needs to display the homepage of the business module. If the started business module provides a business Widget control display, the application is determined as a designated business module, that is, the designated business module refers to a business module that displays a business Widget control in the Widget panel.
其中,判断该业务模块是否提供业务Widget控件展示的方式可通过获取应用信息来判断,如果应用信息中存在控件标识,则说明该业务模块提供Widget控件展示;如果应用信息中不存在控件标识,则说明该业务模块提供Widget控件展示。Among them, the method of judging whether the business module provides a Widget control display can be judged by obtaining application information. If there is a control ID in the application information, it means that the business module provides Widget control display; if there is no control ID in the application information, then Explain that this business module provides Widget control display.
在一些实施例中,在业务模块为系统预置的业务模块时,桌面应用可直接通过业务控件管理模块(WidgetManager)在WidgetService中获取每个业务模块在注册时产生的应用信息,即调用数据中心(WidgetService)查询每个业务模块是否存在控件标识。在业务模块为软件系统安装的远端应用时,可由业务控件管理模块(WidgetManager)获取远端应用在由系统的应用管理模块添加到桌面主页时并注册到WidgetService产生的应用信息。In some embodiments, when the business module is a system preset business module, the desktop application can directly obtain the application information generated by each business module in WidgetService through the business control management module (WidgetManager), that is, call the data center (WidgetService) Query whether there is a control ID in each business module. When the business module is a remote application installed in the software system, the business control management module (WidgetManager) can obtain the application information generated by the remote application when it is added to the desktop homepage by the application management module of the system and registered to the WidgetService.
在启动桌面应用(J应用)的场景下,为及时确定指定业务模块对应的业务Widget控件的有效性,可在启动桌面应用(J应用)、启动指定业务模块或启动Widget面板时,触发控件有效性查询机制,检测该每个业务模块的业务状态是否发生变化。In the scenario of starting a desktop application (J application), in order to timely determine the validity of the business Widget control corresponding to the specified business module, you can trigger the control to be valid when starting the desktop application (J application), starting the specified business module, or starting the Widget panel A permanent query mechanism to detect whether the business status of each business module has changed.
在一些实施例中,桌面主页的显示窗口位于的图层和Widget面板所在的图层不同。In some embodiments, the layer where the display window of the desktop home page is located is different from the layer where the Widget panel is located.
在一些实施例中,桌面主页的显示窗口位于的图层和Widget面板所在的图层相同,在检测到调出Widget面板的指令时,调整桌面主页的显示窗口的显示位置,以使桌面主页的显示窗口向一侧移动,部分桌面主页的显示窗口移出了显示器的显示界面,无法显示,部分桌面主页的显示窗口未移出显示器的显示界面,可以显示。在桌面主页的显示窗口移动后空出的位置绘制Widget面板。以实现两者在同一图层的显示。In some embodiments, the layer where the display window of the desktop homepage is located is the same as the layer where the Widget panel is located, and when an instruction to call out the Widget panel is detected, the display position of the display window of the desktop homepage is adjusted so that the desktop homepage The display window moves to one side, and the display windows of some desktop homepages move out of the display interface of the monitor and cannot be displayed. The display windows of some desktop homepages do not move out of the display interface of the monitor and can be displayed. Draw the Widget panel in the position vacated after the display window of the desktop homepage is moved. In order to realize the display of both in the same layer.
在一些实施例中,在Widget面板上的靠近桌面主页的显示窗口的一侧设置有隔离符。以使得用户可以区分Widget面板和桌面主页的显示窗口是两个不同的操作区域。在Widget面板呈现后,焦点被默认设置在Widget面板区域,桌面主页的显示窗口不可获取焦点。这样通过遥控器移动焦点的过程中就可以避免焦点在两个区域之间的切换。用户通过输入退出Widget面板的指令。可以使得桌面主页的显示窗口恢复原来的显示位置。In some embodiments, a spacer is provided on the side of the display window of the widget panel close to the home page of the desktop. The display window so that the user can distinguish the Widget panel and the home page of the desktop are two different operation areas. After the Widget panel is presented, the focus is set to the Widget panel area by default, and the display window of the home page of the desktop cannot get the focus. In this way, the focus can be avoided from switching between the two areas during the process of moving the focus through the remote control. The user enters an instruction to exit the Widget panel. The display window of the home page of the desktop can be restored to the original display position.
在一些实施例中,桌面主页的当前界面调出Widget面板时,一般是基于桌面主页的当前界面触发了一个Widget需求。In some embodiments, when the current interface of the desktop homepage calls out the Widget panel, it is generally based on the current interface of the desktop homepage that triggers a Widget requirement.
在一些实施例中,响应与用户对业务的选中,将桌面主页的显示窗口中的界面切换只被选中的业务的界面,同时撤销Widget面板的显示,以恢复桌面主页的显示窗口的全屏显示。In some embodiments, in response to the user's selection of a service, the interface in the display window of the desktop homepage is switched to only the interface of the selected service, and at the same time, the display of the Widget panel is canceled to restore the full-screen display of the display window of the desktop homepage.
在一些实施例中,在启动指定业务模块或Widget面板时,控制器在执行检测每个指定业务模块的业务状态是否发生变化,被进一步配置为执行下述步骤:In some embodiments, when the designated business module or Widget panel is started, the controller is further configured to perform the following steps when detecting whether the business state of each designated business module changes:
步骤121、在启动指定业务模块或Widget面板时,获取每个指定业务模块的业务包名和业务类型,基于业务包名和业务类型检测指定业务模块是否可用。Step 121 , when starting the specified service module or the Widget panel, obtain the service package name and service type of each specified service module, and check whether the specified service module is available based on the service package name and service type.
步骤122、如果检测到指定业务模块不可用,则确定指定业务模块的业务状态发生变化。Step 122, if it is detected that the specified service module is unavailable, then determine that the service status of the specified service module has changed.
步骤123、如果检测到指定业务模块可用,则确定指定业务模块的业务状态未发生变化。Step 123, if it is detected that the specified service module is available, then determine that the service status of the specified service module has not changed.
由于桌面主页中可展示桌面应用(J应用)提供的各个业务模块,也可通过自定义添加的方式展示第三方应用,那么在判断业务状态是否发生变化时,对于桌面应用提供的业务模块,则是通过判断业务的变化来判断业务状态是否发生变化,即通过业务包名和业务类型来进行判断;对于远端应用,则是通过判断应用的变化来判断应用状态是否发生变化,即通过应用包名和应用信息来进行判断。Since various business modules provided by the desktop application (J application) can be displayed on the desktop homepage, and third-party applications can also be displayed by customizing and adding, then when judging whether the business status has changed, for the business modules provided by the desktop application, then It is to judge whether the business state has changed by judging the change of the business, that is, judge by the business package name and business type; for remote applications, judge whether the application status has changed by judging the change of the application, that is, by using the Use information to make judgments.
在一些实施例中,无论是在启动Widget面板时触发控件有效性查询机制,还是在启动指定业务模块时触发控件有效性查询机制,均可通过业务包名和业务类型来判断相应应用的状态是否发生变化。In some embodiments, no matter whether the control validity query mechanism is triggered when the Widget panel is started, or the control validity query mechanism is triggered when the specified business module is started, it is possible to judge whether the state of the corresponding application occurs through the business package name and business type. Variety.
业务包名用于在后期校验当前显示设备中是否存在当前包名对应的业务模块,即标识指定业务模块,业务类型用于标识对应业务模块是否位于有效期内。如果指定业务模块的业务类型表征指定业务模块位于有效期内,则说明该指定业务模块可用,进而确定指定业务模块的业务状态未发生变化;如果指定业务模块的业务类型表征指定业务模块未位于有效期内,则说明该指定业务模块不可用,进而确定指定业务模块的业务状态发生变化。The business package name is used to verify whether there is a business module corresponding to the current package name in the current display device in the later stage, that is, to identify the specified business module, and the business type is used to identify whether the corresponding business module is within the validity period. If the business type of the specified business module indicates that the specified business module is within the validity period, it means that the specified business module is available, and then it is determined that the business status of the specified business module has not changed; if the business type of the specified business module indicates that the specified business module is not within the validity period , it indicates that the specified service module is unavailable, and then it is determined that the service status of the specified service module has changed.
基于远端应用,基于应用包名获取远端应用的状态参数,如果状态参数表征正常状态,则说明远端应用可用,进而确定指定应用的应用状态未发生变化;如果状态参数表征异常状态,则说明远端应用不可用,进而确定指定应用的应用状态发生变化。Based on the remote application, obtain the state parameters of the remote application based on the application package name. If the state parameter represents a normal state, it means that the remote application is available, and then determine that the application state of the specified application has not changed; if the state parameter represents an abnormal state, then It indicates that the remote application is unavailable, and then it is determined that the application status of the specified application has changed.
例如,桌面应用提供两个业务模块A、B,两个业务模块A、B的业务类型a、b表征业务模块A、B均位于有效期内。如果在后期使用过程中因政策或其他原因业务模块A下线,则业务模块A不可用,业务模块B可用。For example, the desktop application provides two service modules A and B, and the service types a and b of the two service modules A and B indicate that the service modules A and B are both within the validity period. If business module A goes offline due to policies or other reasons during later use, business module A will be unavailable and business module B will be available.
在一些实施例中,在启动桌面应用时,控制器在执行检测每个指定业务模块的业务状态是否发生变化,被进一步配置为执行下述步骤:In some embodiments, when the desktop application is started, the controller detects whether the service state of each specified service module changes, and is further configured to perform the following steps:
步骤131、在启动桌面应用时,获取桌面应用提供的当前业务模块总数和上一次启动时对应的历史业务模块总数。Step 131. When starting the desktop application, obtain the total number of current business modules provided by the desktop application and the corresponding total number of historical business modules at the last startup.
步骤132、如果当前业务模块总数少于历史业务模块总数,则确定当前业务模块总数和历史业务模块总数的差异对应的指定业务模块的业务状态发生变化。Step 132: If the total number of current business modules is less than the total number of historical business modules, determine that the business status of the specified business module corresponding to the difference between the total number of current business modules and the total number of historical business modules has changed.
如果在启动桌面应用时触发控件有效性查询机制时,那么在判断桌面应用提供的各个业务模块的状态是否发生变化,则其实现形式可为在启动桌面应用时,获取桌面应用提供的当前业务模块总数和上一次启动时对应的历史业务模块总数,对比两次启动的业务模块总数差异。如果本次启动对应的业务模块总数(一个:B)少于上一次启动对应的业务模块总数(两个:A和B),则说明该桌面应用提供的业务模块中存在不可用的业务模块。此时,可基于当前业务模块总数和历史业务模块总数的差异筛选出指定业务模块,同时,确定指定业务模块的业务状态发生变化。If the control validity query mechanism is triggered when the desktop application is started, then when judging whether the status of each business module provided by the desktop application has changed, the implementation form can be to obtain the current business module provided by the desktop application when the desktop application is started The total number is compared with the total number of historical business modules corresponding to the last startup, and the difference between the total number of business modules started twice is compared. If the total number of business modules (one: B) corresponding to this startup is less than the total number of business modules (two: A and B) corresponding to the last startup, it means that there are unavailable business modules in the business modules provided by the desktop application. At this time, the designated business module can be screened out based on the difference between the total number of current business modules and the total number of historical business modules, and at the same time, it can be determined that the business status of the designated business module has changed.
在一些实施例中,由于桌面应用中的某个业务模块提供业务Widget控件并展示在Widget面板中,则需要对该类业务Widget控件进行有效性检测。而如果桌面应用中提供的某个指定应用并未提供业务Widget控件,则不需要进行有效性检测过程。因此,将已提供业务Widget控件并展示在Widget面板中的这类业务模块作为指定业务模块,而将未提供Widget控件的这类业务模块作为常用业务模块。桌面应用提供的业务模块包括指定业务模块和常用业务模块,指定业务模块的启动可通过业务Widget控件进行快速启动,或者在指定业务模块所处的桌面主页中通过触发再启动;而常用业务模块的启动仅可在该常用业务模块所处的桌面主页中通过触发再启动。In some embodiments, since a certain business module in the desktop application provides a business Widget control and displays it in the Widget panel, it is necessary to check the validity of this type of business Widget control. However, if a specified application provided in the desktop application does not provide the service Widget control, the validity detection process does not need to be performed. Therefore, such business modules that have been provided with business Widget controls and displayed in the Widget panel are taken as specified business modules, and such business modules that are not provided with Widget controls are taken as common service modules. The business modules provided by the desktop application include designated business modules and commonly used business modules. The designated business modules can be started quickly through the business Widget control, or can be restarted by triggering the desktop homepage where the designated business modules are located; and the commonly used business modules The startup can only be restarted by triggering the home page of the desktop where the common business module is located.
如果桌面应用中不可用的业务模块提供业务Widget控件展示在Widget面板中,则需要对该业务Widget控件进行失效标识;如果桌面应用中不可用的业务模块未提供业务Widget控件展示,则可不做后续的失效标识展示处理。因此,为简便控件有效性的检测过程,在检测业务状态是否发生变化时,仅以提供Widget控件并展示在Widget面板中的业务模块作为判断依据,而不再考虑未提供Widget控件的常用业务模块,即仅以指定业务模块的是否可用情况来确定业务状态是否发生变化。If a business module that is not available in the desktop application provides a business Widget control to display in the Widget panel, you need to mark the failure of the business Widget control; if a business module that is not available in the desktop application does not provide a business Widget control display, no follow-up The failure identification display processing. Therefore, in order to simplify the detection process of the effectiveness of controls, when detecting whether the business status has changed, only the business modules that provide Widget controls and are displayed in the Widget panel are used as the basis for judgment, and the common business modules that do not provide Widget controls are no longer considered. , that is to determine whether the business status has changed only by the availability of the specified business module.
可见,指定业务模块的业务状态是否发生变化的判断依据包括基于提供业务Widget控件展示的指定业务模块的可用情况,而不包括未提供业务Widget控件展示的常用业务模块的可用情况。It can be seen that the basis for judging whether the business state of the specified business module has changed includes the availability of the specified business module based on the business Widget control display, and does not include the availability of the common business module that does not provide the business Widget control display.
如果检测到某个指定业务模块的业务状态未发生变化,则控件有效性查询机制终止,可直接启动指定业务模块;如果检测到某个指定业务模块的业务状态发生变化,则继续执行控件有效性查询机制,进一步确定目标Widget控件,以展示失效标识。If it is detected that the business status of a specified business module has not changed, the control validity query mechanism is terminated, and the specified business module can be started directly; if it is detected that the business status of a specified business module has changed, the control validation will continue The query mechanism further determines the target Widget control to display the invalidation mark.
S2A、如果存在任一个指定应用的业务状态发生变化,则产生对应的状态变化信息,状态变化信息用于确定存在状态变化的指定业务模块对应的目标业务Widget控件。S2A. If there is a change in the service state of any specified application, generate corresponding state change information, and the state change information is used to determine the target service Widget control corresponding to the specified service module with state change.
在检测到至少一个指定业务模块的业务状态发生变化时,说明Widget面板中展示的与该指定业务模块对应的业务Widget控件存在失效情况。因此,基于状态变化信息即可确定出存在状态变化的指定业务模块对应的目标Widget控件,即需要对这种存在失效情况的业务Widget控件进行标识。状态变化信息包括控件标识、指定业务模块标识、状态变化标识等信息。When it is detected that the business status of at least one designated business module changes, it indicates that the business Widget control corresponding to the designated business module displayed in the Widget panel is invalid. Therefore, based on the state change information, the target Widget control corresponding to the specified business module with state change can be determined, that is, it is necessary to identify such business Widget control with failure. The status change information includes information such as the control ID, the specified business module ID, and the status change ID.
在一些实施例中,在启动Widget面板时触发控件有效性查询机制时,在展示Widget面板时,可直接在确定出的目标业务Widget控件上展示失效标识。In some embodiments, when the control validity query mechanism is triggered when the Widget panel is started, when the Widget panel is displayed, the invalidation indicator may be directly displayed on the determined target service Widget control.
在一些实施例中,在启动指定业务模块时触发控件有效性查询机制,或者,在启动桌面应用时触发控件有效性查询机制时,则在检测到当前启动的指定业务模块产生业务状态变化后,将状态变化信息发送至 Widget面板,使得Widget面板在后续展示时,能够基于控件有效性检测结果对其展示的各个控件信息进行更新,以便及时更新当前指定应用的目标业务Widget控件有效性的状态。In some embodiments, when the control validity query mechanism is triggered when the specified business module is started, or when the control validity query mechanism is triggered when the desktop application is started, after detecting that the currently started specified business module has changed the service state, The state change information is sent to the Widget panel, so that the Widget panel can update the displayed control information based on the control validity detection results when the Widget panel is subsequently displayed, so as to update the validity status of the target business Widget control of the currently specified application in time.
S3A、接收用于启动Widget面板的触发操作,基于每个指定业务模块的业务Widget控件展示Widget面板,以及,在Widget面板中的目标业务Widget控件上展示失效标识,失效标识用于表征存在状态变化的指定业务模块对应的目标业务Widget控件失效。S3A. Receiving a trigger operation for starting the Widget panel, displaying the Widget panel based on the business Widget control of each specified business module, and displaying a failure indicator on the target service Widget control in the Widget panel, where the failure indicator is used to represent a state change The target business Widget control corresponding to the specified business module is invalid.
用户在启动桌面应用时、基于桌面主页启动任一个指定应用或启动Widget面板时均进行控件有效性检测,并将产生的状态变化信息发送至Widget面板。Widget面板在用户触发启动时,及时基于状态变化信息在对应的目标业务Widget控件上展示失效标识,以告知用户失效标识所在的目标业务Widget控件失效,不可通过该目标业务Widget控件实现对应业务模块的启动。When the user starts the desktop application, starts any specified application based on the desktop home page, or starts the Widget panel, the validity of the control is checked, and the resulting state change information is sent to the Widget panel. When the Widget panel is triggered by the user to start, it displays the invalidation mark on the corresponding target business Widget control in a timely manner based on the state change information to inform the user that the target business Widget control where the invalidation mark is located is invalid, and the target business Widget control cannot be used to implement the corresponding business module. start up.
在用户需要利用Widget面板实现对某个业务模块的快速启动时,用户长按遥控器左键,调出Widget面板并展示在桌面主页中。再次参见图10,Widget面板的一种可行展示方式是从显示器的左侧弹出,将桌面主页向右挤出,此时,桌面主页的右侧显示内容从显示器中消失;如果取消Widget面板的显示,则桌面主页向左移动,以图9所示状态进行展示。When the user needs to use the Widget panel to quickly start a certain business module, the user presses and holds the left button of the remote control to bring up the Widget panel and display it on the desktop home page. Referring to Fig. 10 again, a feasible display mode of the Widget panel is to pop up from the left side of the display, pushing the desktop home page to the right, and at this time, the content displayed on the right side of the desktop home page disappears from the display; if the display of the Widget panel is canceled , the homepage of the desktop moves to the left and is displayed in the state shown in Figure 9 .
Widget面板中展示所有系统预置或用户设置的业务Widget控件,因此,为展示Widget面板,需获取设备内存储的所有业务Widget控件的总控件信息,并基于总控件信息生成Widget面板,展示在桌面主页中。总控件信息用于表征每个业务模块的名称、图标,控件展示有效参数,控件标识,控件名称,控件图标业务模块来源(控件是由哪个业务模块提供的)等。The Widget panel displays all system presets or user-set business Widget controls. Therefore, in order to display the Widget panel, it is necessary to obtain the total control information of all business Widget controls stored in the device, and generate a Widget panel based on the total control information, and display it on the desktop. in the home page. The total control information is used to represent the name and icon of each business module, effective parameters displayed by the control, control identification, control name, source of the business module of the control icon (which business module provides the control), etc.
在一些实施例中,如果用户首次启动Widget面板,则获取的总控件信息为系统预置的桌面控件信息;如果用户非首次启动Widget目标,则获取的总控件信息为上次关闭显示设备时保存的控件信息。以及,总控件信息每次均会基于控件有效性的结果进行实时刷新,其保留的均为有效的控件信息。In some embodiments, if the user starts the Widget panel for the first time, the total control information obtained is the desktop control information preset by the system; if the user does not start the Widget target for the first time, the total control information obtained is saved when the display device was turned off last time control information. And, the total control information will be refreshed in real time every time based on the result of the control validity, and all the valid control information is retained.
由于用户在启动Widget面板展示在桌面主页中之前,用户每次基于桌面主页产生预设操作,均会对桌面主页上展示的每个业务模块进行控件有效性检测。如果检测到某个提供Widget控件的指定业务模块的业务状态发生变化,则均会将状态变化信息发送至Widget面板。在后续用户调出Widget面板显示时,Widget面板可以基于接收到的每个指定业务模块对应的业务状态变化信息,在对应的业务Widget控件上添加失效标识,以便于用户能够及时获知Widget面板中每个Widget控件的有效性状态,以对失效Widget控件进行相应处理,如删除或替换为其他Widget控件。Before the user starts the Widget panel to be displayed on the desktop homepage, every time the user generates a preset operation based on the desktop homepage, the validity of the controls will be checked for each business module displayed on the desktop homepage. If it is detected that the business state of a specified business module providing the Widget control changes, the state change information will be sent to the Widget panel. When the user subsequently calls up the Widget panel to display, the Widget panel can add an invalidation mark to the corresponding service Widget control based on the received business status change information corresponding to each specified business module, so that the user can promptly know the status of each service in the Widget panel. The validity state of a Widget control, so as to deal with the invalid Widget control accordingly, such as deleting or replacing it with another Widget control.
在查找目标业务Widget控件时,基于控件标识和总控件信息进行对比,即可确定指定业务模块对应的目标业务Widget控件。而后,在Widget面板中的目标业务Widget控件上展示失效标识。When searching for the target business Widget control, the target business Widget control corresponding to the specified business module can be determined based on the comparison between the control ID and the total control information. Then, display the invalidation mark on the target business Widget control in the Widget panel.
图11为本申请一些实施例中在Widget面板的业务Widget控件上展示失效标识的示意图。参见图11,在检测的桌面主页中指定业务模块为“少儿”时,“少儿”业务模块提供业务Widget控件展示。如果检测到“少儿”业务模块不可用,则在“少儿”业务Widget控件上添加失效标识,如图中“已失效”标识。Fig. 11 is a schematic diagram of displaying failure signs on the service Widget control of the Widget panel in some embodiments of the present application. Referring to FIG. 11 , when the business module is designated as "Children" in the detected desktop homepage, the "Children" business module provides a business Widget control display. If it is detected that the "Children" business module is unavailable, add an invalidation mark on the "Children's" business Widget control, as shown in the figure "Invalidated" mark.
在一些实施例中,指定业务模块产生业务状态变化的原因还可为该业务模块被下线,业务模块被下线后,Widget面板中展示的对应的业务Widget控件将无法再通过触发而启动该业务模块。因此,需将该类被卸载的业务模块的业务Widget控件也进行失效标识。In some embodiments, the reason for the change of the business status of the specified business module can also be that the business module is offline. After the business module is offline, the corresponding business Widget control displayed in the Widget panel will no longer be triggered to start the business module. Therefore, the business Widget control of the business module that is to be uninstalled of this type needs to be marked as invalid.
具体地,在存在业务模块下线情况时,控制器被进一步配置为:响应于取消提供指定业务模块的指令,在启动Widget面板时,在Widget面板中与指定业务模块对应的目标业务Widget控件上展示失效标识。Specifically, when there is a business module offline situation, the controller is further configured to: respond to the instruction to cancel the provision of the specified business module, when starting the Widget panel, on the Widget panel corresponding to the target business Widget control of the specified business module Display the invalidation flag.
如果桌面应用内配置的某个业务模块被下线,说明桌面应用不再提供该业务模,则显示设备的应用管理模块会将下线广播发送至Widget面板,由Widget面板来判断该卸载的业务模块是否提供了Widget控件展示,判断方式可参照前述实施例的内容,此处不赘述。If a business module configured in the desktop application is offline, it means that the desktop application no longer provides the business model, then the application management module of the display device will send an offline broadcast to the Widget panel, and the Widget panel will judge the uninstalled business Whether the module provides Widget control display, the judging method can refer to the content of the foregoing embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
如果该卸载的业务模块未提供业务Widget控件展示,则不做处理。如果该卸载的业务模块提供了Widget控件展示,则将该提供业务Widget控件的业务模块作为指定业务模块。同时,在后续用户启动Widget面板展示在桌面主页时,基于控件标识和总控件信息进行对比,以确定指定业务模块对应的目标业务Widget控件。最后,在Widget面板中的目标业务Widget控件上展示失效标识。If the uninstalled business module does not provide a business Widget control display, it will not be processed. If the unloaded business module provides a Widget control display, the business module that provides the business Widget control is used as the specified business module. At the same time, when the Widget panel is displayed on the desktop home page after the user starts it, the target service Widget control corresponding to the specified service module is determined based on the comparison between the control identifier and the total control information. Finally, display the invalidation mark on the target business Widget control in the Widget panel.
在一些实施例中,如果桌面主页中展示的某个远端应用被用户卸载,则显示设备的应用管理模块会将卸载广播发送至Widget面板,在后续用户触发Widget面板展示在桌面主页中时,将该应用对应的业务Widget控件上展示失效标识。In some embodiments, if a remote application displayed on the desktop homepage is uninstalled by the user, the application management module of the display device will send an uninstall broadcast to the Widget panel, and when the subsequent user triggers the Widget panel to be displayed on the desktop homepage, The invalidation mark is displayed on the business Widget control corresponding to the application.
图12为本申请一些实施例中在卸载远端应用的业务Widget控件上展示失效标识的示意图。参见图12,如果用户卸载的远端应用为“奇异果”应用,则在启动Widget面板时,在Widget面板中的“奇异果”应用的业务Widget控件上展示失效标识,如图中“已失效”标识。Fig. 12 is a schematic diagram of displaying an invalidation mark on a service Widget control for uninstalling a remote application in some embodiments of the present application. Referring to Figure 12, if the remote application uninstalled by the user is the "Kiwi" application, when the Widget panel is started, an invalidation mark will be displayed on the business Widget control of the "Kiwi" application in the Widget panel, as shown in the figure "Invalid " logo.
在一些实施例中,在显示设备中呈现桌面主页时,如果用户通过触发操作将Widget面板调出展示在桌面主页中时,触发控件有效性查询机制,以便于对Widget面板中展示的每个指定业务模块对应的目标业务Widget控件进行实时的有效性检测。In some embodiments, when the desktop homepage is presented on the display device, if the user calls out the Widget panel to display it on the desktop homepage through a trigger operation, the control validity query mechanism is triggered, so that each specified display in the Widget panel The target business Widget control corresponding to the business module performs real-time validity detection.
如果检测到某个指定业务模块的业务状态未发生变化,可正常启动运行,则确定其对应的目标业务Widget控件有效,并直接启动该指定业务模块。如果检测到某个指定应用的业务状态发生变化,则在该指定业务模块对应的目标业务Widget控件上添加失效标识。同时,弹出提示框,以告知用户该指定业务模块不可用。If it is detected that the business state of a certain designated business module has not changed and can be started and run normally, then it is determined that the corresponding target business Widget control is valid, and the designated business module is started directly. If it is detected that the business state of a specified application changes, an invalidation mark is added to the target business Widget control corresponding to the specified business module. At the same time, a prompt box pops up to inform the user that the specified service module is unavailable.
由于此时Widget面板已被调出展示,因此,失效标识可直接添加到Widget面板中对应的目标业务Widget控件上,无需执行启动Widget面板动作。Since the Widget panel has been called out for display at this time, the failure indicator can be directly added to the corresponding target business Widget control in the Widget panel, without performing the action of starting the Widget panel.
在一些实施例中,在显示设备中呈现桌面主页时,如果触发桌面主页中展示的某个业务模块时,触发控件有效性查询机制,在判断出该业务模块提供有Widget展示后,确定该业务模块为指定业务模块,并 继续对该指定业务模块对应的目标业务Widget控件进行实时的有效性检测。In some embodiments, when the desktop home page is presented on the display device, if a certain business module displayed on the desktop home page is triggered, the control validity query mechanism is triggered, and after it is judged that the business module provides a Widget display, the business module is determined. The module is a designated business module, and continues to perform real-time validity detection on the target business Widget control corresponding to the designated business module.
如果用户在启动某个业务模块时检测到该业务模块提供有Widget展示且该业务模块不可用,即检测到业务状态发生变化,则将该指定业务模块对应的状态变化信息发送至Widget面板,使得Widget面板在后续展示时,能够基于控件有效性检测结果对其展示的各个控件信息进行更新,即在该指定业务模块对应的目标业务Widget控件上展示失效标识,以便及时更新Widget面板中展示的各个业务Widget控件有效性的状态。If the user detects that the business module provides Widget display and the business module is unavailable when starting a certain business module, that is, it detects that the business status changes, and then sends the status change information corresponding to the specified business module to the Widget panel, so that When the Widget panel is subsequently displayed, it can update the displayed control information based on the control validity detection results, that is, display the invalidation mark on the target business Widget control corresponding to the specified business module, so as to update each displayed in the Widget panel in time. The status of the validity of the Business Widget control.
在一些实施例中,在显示设备中呈现系统主页时,如果用户触发系统主页中展示的桌面应用,则在显示设备中切换显示桌面主页。以及,在启动桌面应用时,触发控件有效性查询机制,以检测桌面应用提供的各个业务模块对应的业务Widget控件进行实时的有效性检测。In some embodiments, when the system home page is presented on the display device, if the user triggers the desktop application displayed on the system home page, the display device switches to display the desktop home page. And, when the desktop application is started, a control validity query mechanism is triggered to detect the service Widget controls corresponding to each service module provided by the desktop application for real-time validity detection.
如果检测到某个业务模块提供有Widget展示且该业务模块不可用,即检测到业务状态发生变化,则将该指定业务模块对应的状态变化信息发送至Widget面板,使得Widget面板在后续展示时,能够基于控件有效性检测结果对其展示的各个控件信息进行更新,即在该指定业务模块对应的目标业务Widget控件上展示失效标识,以便及时更新Widget面板中展示的各个业务Widget控件有效性的状态。If it is detected that a business module provides Widget display and the business module is unavailable, that is, a change in the business status is detected, the status change information corresponding to the specified business module will be sent to the Widget panel, so that when the Widget panel is subsequently displayed, It is possible to update the information of each control displayed based on the control validity detection result, that is, to display the invalidation mark on the target business Widget control corresponding to the specified business module, so as to update the validity status of each business Widget control displayed in the Widget panel in time .
在一些实施例中,Widget面板提供更新业务Widget控件有效性的方法,用于与桌面应用提供的各个业务模块进行交互,及时的同步指定业务模块提供的目标业务Widget控件的状态,并且会监听整机的业务模块安装(包括更新)、卸载关闭广播,如果卸载的业务模块提供Widget控件展示功能,则需要及时将对应的业务Widget控件展示失效标识。In some embodiments, the Widget panel provides a method for updating the validity of the business Widget control, which is used for interacting with each business module provided by the desktop application, timely synchronizing the state of the target business Widget control provided by the specified business module, and monitoring the entire If the uninstalled business module provides Widget control display function, it is necessary to display the invalidation mark of the corresponding business Widget control in time.
可见,在进行控件有效性检测时,本申请提供的显示设备能够按照业务和应用两个维度来展示控件的有效性,并且在特定的时间点触发查询机制,如果查询到Widget控件失效后在Widget面板中对应的业务Widget控件上展示失效图标,便于用户及时发现不可用的业务Widget控件。因此,在控件失效时能够第一时间反馈出来,便于用户及时进行失效控件的识别及替换。It can be seen that when testing the validity of the widget, the display device provided by this application can display the validity of the widget according to the two dimensions of business and application, and trigger the query mechanism at a specific point in time. The invalid icon is displayed on the corresponding business widget control in the panel, so that the user can find the unavailable business widget control in time. Therefore, when the control fails, it can be fed back at the first time, which is convenient for the user to identify and replace the failed control in time.
在一些实施例中,在用户通过触发操作调出Widget面板展示在桌面主页后,用户看到Widget面板中存在展示有失效标识的业务Widget控件时,如果用户触发该失效Widget控件,则在当前界面中弹出失效提示界面。In some embodiments, after the user triggers the Widget panel to be displayed on the home page of the desktop, when the user sees that there is a service Widget control with an invalidation logo in the Widget panel, if the user triggers the invalidation Widget control, the current interface A failure prompt interface will pop up.
在一些实施例中,在焦点移动到Widget控件后,响应与用户输入的确认操作,在Widget控件为失效控件时,触发失效提示界面,在Widget控件不是失效控件时,显示Widget控件对应的二级页面或启动Widget控件对应的功能。In some embodiments, after the focus is moved to the Widget control, in response to the confirmation operation input by the user, when the Widget control is an invalid control, the invalidation prompt interface is triggered, and when the Widget control is not an invalid control, the secondary level corresponding to the Widget control is displayed. page or start the function corresponding to the Widget control.
具体地,在触发带有失效标识的Widget控件时,控制器被进一步配置为:Specifically, when triggering a Widget control with an invalidation flag, the controller is further configured to:
步骤41、响应于触发Widget面板中展示有失效标识的目标业务Widget控件的指令,不执行目标业务Widget控件对应的指定业务模块的启动过程,以及,在桌面主页中呈现展示有删除按钮的失效提示界面。Step 41: In response to the instruction of triggering the display of the target business Widget control with an invalidation mark in the Widget panel, the startup process of the specified business module corresponding to the target business Widget control is not executed, and an invalidation prompt showing a delete button is displayed on the home page of the desktop interface.
步骤42、响应于触发删除按钮的指令,将Widget面板中的目标业务Widget控件删除。Step 42, in response to the instruction of triggering the delete button, delete the target service Widget control in the Widget panel.
在用户调出Widget面板,并触发其展示有失效标识的目标业务Widget控件时,由于该目标业务Widget控件对应的指定业务模块已无法启动。因此,在触发Widget面板中带有失效标识的业务Widget控件时,不再执行启动目标业务Widget控件对应指定业务模块的动作。When the user invokes the Widget panel and triggers it to display a target business Widget control with an invalidation flag, the specified business module corresponding to the target business Widget control cannot be started. Therefore, when a business widget control with an invalidation flag in the widget panel is triggered, the action of starting the specified business module corresponding to the target business widget control is no longer performed.
而为告知用户当前目标业务Widget控件对应的指定业务模块无法启动,则在桌面主页中弹出失效提示界面。In order to inform the user that the specified service module corresponding to the current target service Widget control cannot be started, a failure prompt interface will pop up on the home page of the desktop.
图13为本申请一些实施例中一种失效提示界面的示意图。参见图11和图13,在用户触发已失效的“少儿”业务Widget控件时,在当前界面中呈现失效提示界面。失效提示界面中展示有删除按钮、取消按钮和更换控件显示区。删除按钮用于实现对失效Widget控件的删除,取消按钮用于关闭该失效提示界面。更换控件显示区用于展示系统推荐的可进行展示的其他Widget控件。Fig. 13 is a schematic diagram of a failure prompt interface in some embodiments of the present application. Referring to Fig. 11 and Fig. 13, when the user triggers the invalid "children" business Widget control, an invalidation prompt interface is presented in the current interface. In the invalidation prompt interface, there are delete button, cancel button and replacement control display area. The delete button is used to delete the invalid Widget control, and the cancel button is used to close the invalid prompt interface. The replacement control display area is used to display other Widget controls recommended by the system that can be displayed.
在一些实施例中,更换控件显示区显示的是第二业务的图标。在一些实施例中,第二业务的图标可以是第二业务Widget控件,也可以是表征第二业务的其他类型的控件。这是因为更换控件显示区只是用来显示可供用户选择的业务,因此只要实现展示的效果的方案均可以采用。In some embodiments, the icon of the second service is displayed in the replacement control display area. In some embodiments, the icon of the second service may be a Widget control of the second service, or may be another type of control representing the second service. This is because the replacement of the control display area is only used to display the services that can be selected by the user, so any solution can be adopted as long as the display effect is realized.
不同的是,如果第二业务的图标是第二业务Widget控件,则该浮层是由桌面应用中的Widget组件展示模块控制,其他格式的图标可以有桌面应用中不同于Widget组件的模块展示。The difference is that if the icon of the second service is the Widget control of the second service, the floating layer is controlled by the Widget component display module in the desktop application, and icons of other formats can be displayed by modules different from the Widget component in the desktop application.
如果用户点击删除按钮,则可将Widget面板中的目标业务Widget控件删除,即将“少儿”业务Widget控件删除。If the user clicks the delete button, the target business Widget control in the Widget panel can be deleted, that is, the "children" business Widget control can be deleted.
在一些实施例中,如果系统没有可进行替换展示的推荐Widget控件,则失效提示界面中不再展示更换控件显示区。In some embodiments, if the system has no recommended Widget controls that can be replaced and displayed, the replacement control display area will not be displayed on the invalidation prompt interface.
在一些实施例中,如果将Widget面板中的某个失效Widget控件删除,则该Widget控件的所处原位置将产生空位。如果该空位不再填充其他业务Widget控件,则会造成空间浪费。若是将Widget面板中的其他业务Widget控件重新排序,由于各个业务Widget控件的大小不一,重新排列会导致用户不易找到之前控件的位置。In some embodiments, if an invalid Widget control in the Widget panel is deleted, the original position of the Widget control will create a vacancy. If the space is no longer filled with other business Widget controls, space will be wasted. If other business widget controls in the Widget panel are rearranged, because the sizes of each business widget control are different, rearranging will make it difficult for users to find the position of the previous controls.
因此,为便于能够在删除某个失效Widget控件后,不改变Widget面板的原形态,以及,充分利用Widget面板的展示空间,本申请可为用户在删除某个失效Widget控件时,推荐其他可替换展示的业务Widget控件。Therefore, in order not to change the original form of the Widget panel after deleting an invalid Widget control, and to make full use of the display space of the Widget panel, this application can recommend other alternatives for the user when deleting an invalid Widget control Displayed business Widget controls.
具体地,在进行业务Widget控件替换展示时,控制器被进一步配置为执行下述步骤:Specifically, the controller is further configured to perform the following steps when replacing and displaying the business Widget control:
步骤51、在触发展示有失效标识的目标业务Widget控件时,基于目标业务Widget控件的属性参数,产生推荐Widget控件,推荐Widget控件是指与目标业务Widget控件具有相同特性的控件。Step 51. When triggering the display of the target business widget with an invalidation flag, generate a recommended widget based on the attribute parameters of the target business widget. The recommended widget refers to a control that has the same characteristics as the target business widget.
步骤52、在失效提示界面中展示更换控件显示区,将推荐Widget控件显示在更换控件显示区中。Step 52, displaying the replacement widget display area in the failure prompt interface, and displaying the recommended Widget control in the replacement widget display area.
步骤53、响应于触发更换控件显示区中指定推荐Widget控件的指令,将指定推荐Widget控件展示在Widget面板中目标业务Widget控件的所处原位置。Step 53 , in response to an instruction to trigger replacement of a designated recommended Widget control in the widget display area, displaying the designated recommended Widget control at the original position of the target business Widget control in the Widget panel.
系统向用户推荐的替换展示的业务Widget控件可在用户触发失效Widget控件时同步展示在失效提示界面中,因此,在用户触发展示有失效标识的目标业务Widget控件时,获取系统推荐的推荐Widget控件,显示在失效提示界面的更换控件显示区中。The replacement business widget recommended by the system to the user can be synchronously displayed on the invalidation prompt interface when the user triggers the invalidated widget. Therefore, when the user triggers and displays the target business widget with an invalidation mark, the recommended widget recommended by the system is obtained. , displayed in the replacement control display area of the failure prompt interface.
推荐Widget控件基于目标业务Widget控件的属性参数产生,属性参数即为控件(Widget)信息。由于用户在基于业务模块注册业务Widget控件时,注册该业务Widget控件时产生的图标、尺寸大小、业务类型、所属应用等信息均会存储在数据中心(WidgetService)。因此,可从数据中心(WidgetService)获得目标业务Widget控件的属性参数。属性参数包括控件尺寸、业务类型、所属应用等。推荐Widget控件是指与目标业务Widget控件具有相同特性的控件,推荐Widget控件用于基于用户的触发替换展示在被删除的目标Widget控件的所处原位置。The recommended Widget control is generated based on the attribute parameters of the target service Widget control, and the attribute parameters are widget (Widget) information. When the user registers the service Widget control based on the service module, the icon, size, service type, application and other information generated when the service Widget control is registered will be stored in the data center (WidgetService). Therefore, the attribute parameters of the target business Widget control can be obtained from the data center (WidgetService). Attribute parameters include control size, business type, application, etc. The recommended Widget control refers to a control that has the same characteristics as the target business Widget control, and the recommended Widget control is used to replace and display the original position of the deleted target Widget control based on user triggers.
再次参见图13,失效提示界面中的更换控件显示区可显示在删除按钮的下方,更换控件显示区可展示的显示位阈值可为6个,即更换控件显示区最多显示6个推荐Widget控件。Referring to Figure 13 again, the replacement widget display area in the failure prompt interface can be displayed under the delete button, and the replacement widget display area can display up to 6 display bit thresholds, that is, the replacement widget display area can display at most 6 recommended Widget controls.
如果用户点击推荐的某个业务Widget控件,则可将用户触发的失效Widget控件图标删除,并将选择的推荐Widget控件展示在失效Widget控件的所处原位置。If the user clicks on a recommended business Widget control, the disabled Widget control icon triggered by the user may be deleted, and the selected recommended Widget control may be displayed at the original position of the disabled Widget control.
在一些实施例中,在展示图13所示的失效提示界面时,如果用户直接点击更换控件显示区中的指定推荐Widget控件,则可同时执行删除用户触发的带有失效标识的目标业务Widget控件,以及,将选择的指定推荐Widget控件展示在目标业务Widget控件的所处原位置。同时,失效提示界面取消显示,Widget面板中在已失效的Widget控件的所处原位置替换展示指定推荐Widget控件。In some embodiments, when the invalidation prompt interface shown in Figure 13 is displayed, if the user directly clicks the specified recommended Widget control in the replacement control display area, the target business Widget control with the invalidation mark triggered by the user can be deleted at the same time. , and displaying the selected specified recommended Widget control at the original position of the target business Widget control. At the same time, the display of the invalidation prompt interface is canceled, and the original position of the invalidated Widget control is replaced and displayed in the Widget panel with the designated recommended Widget control.
在一些实施例中,Widget控件的推荐是通过展示推荐业务对应的图标的方式。在一些实施例中,该图标可以是Widget控件,也可以是其他形式的控件展示。In some embodiments, the recommendation of the Widget control is by displaying an icon corresponding to the recommended service. In some embodiments, the icon may be a Widget control, or other forms of control display.
图14为本申请一些实施例中替换展示指定推荐Widget控件的Widget面板的示意图。再次参见图13,更换控件显示区展示有的推荐Widget控件包括时间控件、时钟控件、控制中心控件和健身控件。参见图14,如果用户直接触发健身Widget控件作为指定推荐Widget控件,则将失效的Widget面板中的“少儿”业务Widget控件删除,将健身Widget控件显示在“少儿”业务Widget控件的所处原位置。FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of a Widget panel that replaces and displays a specified recommended Widget control in some embodiments of the present application. Referring to FIG. 13 again, the recommended Widget controls displayed in the replacement control display area include time control, clock control, control center control and fitness control. Referring to Figure 14, if the user directly triggers the Fitness Widget control as the specified recommended Widget control, delete the "Children" business Widget control in the invalid Widget panel, and display the Fitness Widget control at the original position of the "Children" business Widget control .
图15为本申请一些实施例中Widget面板展示空位的示意图。在一些实施例中,在展示图13所示的失效提示界面时,如果用户点击删除按钮,则可直接将带有失效标识的目标业务Widget控件(少儿Widget控件)删除,参见图15,失效提示界面取消显示,被删除的目标业务Widget控件的所处原位置为空位。Fig. 15 is a schematic diagram of displaying vacancies on the Widget panel in some embodiments of the present application. In some embodiments, when the invalidation prompt interface shown in Figure 13 is displayed, if the user clicks the delete button, the target business Widget control (children's Widget control) with the invalidation mark can be directly deleted, see Figure 15, the invalidation prompt The display of the interface is canceled, and the original position of the deleted target business Widget control is empty.
为便于在空位上再次展示其他的业务Widget控件,用户可再次点击被删除的目标业务Widget控件的所处原位置(此时为空位),则弹出控件推荐界面,显示在桌面主页的上层。In order to display other business Widget controls on the vacant space again, the user can click the original position of the deleted target business Widget control again (the space is empty at this time), and the control recommendation interface will pop up and be displayed on the upper layer of the desktop home page.
图16为本申请一些实施例中控件推荐界面的示意图。参见图16,控件推荐界面呈现更换控件显示区,该更换控件显示区显示有系统推荐的与目标业务Widget控件具有相同特性的控件。例如,控件推荐界面的更换控件显示区展示有的推荐Widget控件包括时间控件、时钟控件、控制中心控件和健身控件。如果用户触发健身控件作为指定推荐Widget控件,则将健身控件显示在“少儿”业务Widget控件的所处原位置,替换后显示效果图可再次参见图14所示内容。Fig. 16 is a schematic diagram of a widget recommendation interface in some embodiments of the present application. Referring to FIG. 16 , the widget recommendation interface presents a replacement widget display area, and the replacement widget display area displays widgets recommended by the system that have the same characteristics as the target business Widget widget. For example, some recommended Widget controls displayed in the replacement control display area of the widget recommendation interface include a time control, a clock control, a control center control, and a fitness control. If the user triggers the fitness control as the designated recommended Widget control, the fitness control will be displayed at the original position of the "Kids" business Widget control, and the display effect after replacement can be seen in Figure 14 again.
在一些实施例中,由于不同的业务Widget控件的控件尺寸不同,因此,为便于系统推荐的业务Widget控件能够展示到被删除的目标业务Widget控件的所处原位置,可基于被删除的业务Widget控件的尺寸查找具有相同尺寸的业务Widget控件。而为能够基于用户能够在同一位置启动具有相似特性的业务Widget控件,还可基于业务特性或所属应用作为属性参数,为用户推荐可替换展示的Widget控件。也就是说,与目标业务Widget控件具有相同特性的推荐Widget控件是指控件尺寸相同、业务属性相似、所属应用相同等具有其中至少一个特性的控件。In some embodiments, since different business Widget controls have different control sizes, the business Widget control recommended by the system can be displayed at the original position of the deleted target business Widget control, and can be based on the deleted business Widget The size of the control finds a Business Widget control with the same size. In order to enable the user to start a service Widget control with similar characteristics at the same location, it is also possible to recommend alternatively displayed Widget controls for the user based on the service characteristic or the application it belongs to as an attribute parameter. That is to say, the recommended Widget control having the same characteristics as the target service Widget control refers to controls having at least one of the characteristics such as the same size of the widget, similar business attributes, and the same application.
用户主动删除某个业务Widget控件(无论是否失效)或者因为业务模块不可用导致对应的业务Widget控件失效后移除控件,系统会主动跟根据被删除的Widget控件的业务类型给用户推荐相似形态、业务的控件,以根据当前控件的大小和业务类型给用户推荐相近功能、相同大小的控件,方便用户进行添加,避免Widget面板中出现空位,即便于用户选择后补齐空位,提升用户体验。If a user actively deletes a business widget (whether invalid or not) or removes the widget after the corresponding business widget becomes invalid due to unavailability of the business module, the system will actively recommend similar forms to the user according to the business type of the deleted widget. Widgets for business, to recommend similar functions and same size widgets to users according to the current widget size and business type, so that users can add them easily, avoiding vacancies in the Widget panel, and even filling up the vacancies after users select them, so as to improve user experience.
在一些实施例中,控件移动或删除过程也可以通过用户对焦点的移动控制来实现,示例性的,如图18所示,在一些实施例中,图10中焦点移动到“设置”Widget控件后,通过输入的确认操作或其他预设第一操作可以进行业务的启动,同时触发有效性查询。在接收到的输入是预设的第二操作时,启动该“设置”Widget控件移动或删除线程。In some embodiments, the process of moving or deleting the widget can also be realized by the user moving the focus point. For example, as shown in FIG. 18 , in some embodiments, the focus moves to the “Settings” Widget control in FIG. Afterwards, the service can be started through the input confirmation operation or other preset first operations, and the validity query can be triggered at the same time. When the received input is the preset second operation, the "settings" Widget control is activated to move or delete the thread.
在移动或删除线程启动后,确定“设置”Widget控件在面板中的位置,如果“设置”Widget控件的第一移动方向上的目标位置不是面板的边界(即存在预设大小的位置作为可移动位置),在以“设置”Widget控件的第一移动方向上绘制第一指向箭头,该箭头的指向和第一移动方向相同,该箭头绘制在面板上方的浮层中。如果“设置”Widget控件的第一移动方向上的目标位置是面板的边界(即不存在预设大小的位置作为可移动位置),则在“设置”Widget控件的第一移动方向上绘制删除提示控件,以指示向该方向移动会进行控件的删除。After the movement or deletion thread is started, determine the position of the "Settings" Widget control in the panel, if the target position of the "Settings" Widget control in the first moving direction is not the boundary of the panel (that is, there is a position with a preset size as a movable Position), draw a first pointing arrow in the first moving direction of the Widget control with the "Setting" method, the direction of the arrow is the same as the first moving direction, and the arrow is drawn in the floating layer above the panel. If the target position in the first moving direction of the "Settings" Widget control is the border of the panel (that is, there is no position with a preset size as a movable position), then draw a deletion prompt on the first moving direction of the "Settings" Widget control control to indicate that movement in that direction will result in the removal of the control.
示例性的,在图18所示的界面上,由于“设置”Widget控件的四个可移动方向的目标位置均不是Widget面板的边界,因此在四个方向上均绘制的了指向箭头。以表征这四个方向均可以作为控件的移动方向。Exemplarily, on the interface shown in FIG. 18 , since none of the target positions of the four movable directions of the "Settings" Widget control is the boundary of the Widget panel, pointing arrows are drawn in all four directions. To represent that these four directions can be used as the moving direction of the control.
在一些实施例中,在“设置”Widget控件的四个可移动方向的目标位置均不是Widget面板的边界,进一步判断,目标位置的控件的大小,在目标位置的控件的长宽尺寸和“设置”Widget控件的长宽尺寸相同时,才显示指向箭头,不同时则不显示。在一些实施例中,长宽尺寸相同的控件才可以进行位置的替换。In some embodiments, none of the target positions in the four movable directions of the "Settings" Widget control is the boundary of the Widget panel, and it is further judged that the size of the control at the target position, the length and width of the control at the target position and the "setting" When the length and width of the Widget controls are the same, the pointing arrow will be displayed, and it will not be displayed when they are different. In some embodiments, only controls with the same length and width can be replaced.
在一些实施例中,无论目标位置的控件的大小,均可显示移动箭头。In some embodiments, the movement arrows may be displayed regardless of the size of the control at the target location.
在一些实施例中,在接收到移动操作后,“设置”Widget控件叠加在目标位置控件的上方显示,不移动目标位置控件。In some embodiments, after receiving the moving operation, the "Settings" Widget control is superimposed and displayed on the top of the target position control, without moving the target position control.
在一些实施例中,如图19所示,图18所示的界面上,接收到输入的向第一方向移动控件的指令(例如,右方向键指令),“设置”Widget控件和不被操作的“Rounter”Widget控件位置被设置为不同的图层,则“设置”Widget控件叠加在其右侧的“Rounter”Widget控件位置。以移动后的“设置”Widget控件的位置为基础,继续判断“设置”Widget控件的四个可移动方向上是不是Widget面板的边界,由于其向上移动方向,向左移动方向和向下移动方向上的目标位置均不是Widget面板的边界,因此在这三个个方向上均绘制的了指向箭头。向右移动方向上的目标位置是Widget面板的边界,不存在可以移动的目标位置,因此在在“设置”Widget控件的向右移动方向上绘制删除提示控件,以指示向右方向移动会进行“设置”Widget控件的删除。这样的分离操作,可以在用户意图确定前,比调用对其他Widget控件的控制线程,以提升系统性能。In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 19 , on the interface shown in FIG. 18 , an input command (for example, a right arrow key command) to move the control in the first direction is received, and the Widget control is “set” and not operated. If the position of the "Rounter" Widget is set to a different layer, the "Settings" Widget is superimposed on the position of the "Rounter" Widget on the right. Based on the position of the moved "Settings" Widget control, continue to judge whether the four movable directions of the "Settings" Widget control are the boundaries of the Widget panel, because of its upward moving direction, leftward moving direction and downward moving direction The target positions on are not the boundaries of the Widget panel, so pointing arrows are drawn in these three directions. The target position in the direction of moving to the right is the boundary of the Widget panel, and there is no target position that can be moved, so the delete prompt control is drawn in the direction of moving to the right of the Widget control in the "Settings" to indicate that moving in the right direction will be " Settings" removal of the Widget control. Such a separation operation can improve system performance by invoking control threads for other Widget controls before the user's intention is determined.
在一些实施例中,图18所示的界面上,接收到输入的向第一方向移动控件的指令(例如,右方向键指令),“设置”Widget控件可以和在其右侧的“Rounter”Widget控件互换位置,以使用户充分的看到当前面板上所具有的控件。In some embodiments, on the interface shown in FIG. 18 , after receiving an input command (for example, a right arrow key command) to move the control in the first direction, the "Settings" Widget control can be connected to the "Rounter" on the right side of it. The widget controls are swapped so that the user can fully see the controls that are currently on the panel.
在一些实施例中,在图19所示的界面的基础上,响应与接收到输入的向第一方向移动控件的指令(例如,右方向键指令),显示如图20所示的删除提示界面,以使用户进一步确认是否要删除该控件。In some embodiments, on the basis of the interface shown in FIG. 19 , in response to receiving an input instruction to move the control in the first direction (for example, a right arrow key instruction), a deletion prompt interface as shown in FIG. 20 is displayed. , to give the user further confirmation that they want to delete the control.
在一些实施例中,删除提示界面上的信息提示窗口不遮盖待删除的“设置”Widget控件,以使用户了解当前待删除的对象。In some embodiments, the information prompt window on the deletion prompt interface does not cover the to-be-deleted "settings" Widget control, so that the user knows the current object to be deleted.
在一些实施例中,删除提示界面上的信息提示窗口包括确定删除控件和取消控件。在信息提示窗口显示后,撤销面板上的焦点,并在信息提示窗口的默认窗口上的预设控件显示焦点,以便于用户的操作。In some embodiments, the information prompt window on the delete prompt interface includes a delete confirmation control and a cancel control. After the information prompt window is displayed, cancel the focus on the panel, and display the focus on the preset control on the default window of the information prompt window, so as to facilitate the user's operation.
在一些实施例中,响应与用户对确定删除控件的操作。删除信息“设置”Widget控件。以使“设置”Widget控件的初始位置展示为空,如图21所示。这是因为,无论在移动过程中,“设置”Widget控件是覆盖“Rounter”Widget控件,还是和“Rounter”Widget控件交换位置,这都是移动中的,如果用户确定是要移动控件,则需要使“设置”Widget控件在最后的显示效果上固定在接收移动指令后的位置(移动过程中,可以多次移动控件位置,例如,在图19所述的界面上接收到向下的方向键指令后,“设置”Widget控件还会移动到“多屏互动”Widget控件的位置。但如果“设置”Widget控件被删除,则意味着用户操作的目的是删除该控件,因此中间移动过程中,若发生控件位置变化(重叠或交换)也并非是用户要调整被遮盖或被移动的“Rounter”Widget控件的位置,因此,使“设置”Widget控件的初始位置展示为空,其他控件位置保持不变。In some embodiments, the response is related to the user's operation of determining to delete the control. Remove the message "Settings" Widget control. To make the initial position display of the "Settings" Widget control empty, as shown in Figure 21. This is because, whether the "Settings" Widget control covers the "Rounter" Widget control or exchanges positions with the "Rounter" Widget control during the moving process, it is still moving. If the user is sure to move the control, you need to Make the "Settings" Widget control fixed at the position after receiving the movement command in the final display effect (during the movement process, the position of the control can be moved multiple times, for example, the downward arrow key command is received on the interface described in Figure 19 After that, the "Settings" Widget control will also move to the position of the "Multi-Screen Interaction" Widget control. But if the "Settings" Widget control is deleted, it means that the purpose of the user operation is to delete the control, so during the middle movement, if The position change (overlapping or swapping) of controls does not mean that the user wants to adjust the position of the covered or moved "Rounter" Widget control. Therefore, the initial position display of the "Settings" Widget control is empty, and the positions of other controls remain unchanged. .
在一些实施例中,如果用户选在了取消删除,则返回到图19所示的界面。In some embodiments, if the user chooses to cancel the deletion, the interface shown in FIG. 19 is returned.
在一些实施例中,在图19所示的界面中如果接收到的输入的预设操作,来取消移动/删除线程,则在“设置”Widget控件是覆盖“Rounter”Widget控件的情况下,取消“Rounter”Widget控件在其原位置的显示,并在“设置”Widget控件的原始位置显示“Rounter”Widget控件。如果取消移动/删除线程前,“设置”Widget控件和“Rounter”Widget控件交换了位置,则维持两者的当前位置。在上述的同时,取消浮层中箭头或提示的显示。上述两种手段均可实现图22所示的效果。In some embodiments, in the interface shown in FIG. 19, if the preset operation of the received input is to cancel the movement/deletion of the thread, then in the case where the "Settings" Widget control covers the "Rounter" Widget control, cancel The "Rounter" Widget is displayed at its original position, and the "Rounter" Widget is displayed at the original position of the "Settings" Widget. If the "Settings" Widget control and the "Rounter" Widget control exchanged positions before canceling the move/delete thread, the current positions of the two are maintained. At the same time as above, cancel the display of arrows or prompts in the floating layer. The above two means can achieve the effect shown in FIG. 22 .
在一些实施例中,如果移动过程中的最终的目标位置的控件的长宽尺寸和“设置”Widget控件的长宽尺寸不一致,则将“设置”Widget控件现在在移动过程中的最终的目标位置,并根据预设算法,选择调整最少的其他控件的位置,来维持原有界面均在面板显示,且移动的控件数量最少。In some embodiments, if the length and width dimensions of the control at the final target position during the movement process are inconsistent with the length and width dimensions of the "Setting" Widget control, the final target position of the "Setting" Widget control is now in the movement process , and according to the preset algorithm, select the position of other controls with the least adjustment to maintain the original interface displayed on the panel, and the number of moved controls is the least.
在一些实施例中,取消移动/删除线程后,焦点仍显示在“设置”Widget控件,以便于用户的后续操作。In some embodiments, after canceling the movement/deletion of the thread, the focus is still displayed on the "Settings" Widget control, so as to facilitate the user's subsequent operations.
在一些实施例中,附图中的系统主页的字样是为了简化作图而对变化前该区域图像的替换,该区域的图像在面板控制逻辑中可维持原有的显示逻辑。In some embodiments, the font of the system home page in the drawings is a replacement for the image of the area before the change in order to simplify the drawing, and the image of the area can maintain the original display logic in the panel control logic.
为此,在系统产生推荐Widget控件时,先获取带有失效标识的目标业务Widget控件所对应的控件尺寸。在查找可以被推荐的Widget控件时,需查找与目标业务Widget控件具有相同尺寸的业务Widget控件。除此之外,还可同时将控件尺寸和业务类型作为查找依据,以为用户推荐与失效的指定业务模块具有相似类型的其他业务Widget控件。For this reason, when the system generates a recommended Widget control, it first obtains the control size corresponding to the target service Widget control with an invalidation flag. When looking for a Widget control that can be recommended, it is necessary to look for a business Widget control with the same size as the target business Widget control. In addition, the size of the widget and the business type can also be used as search criteria to recommend other business Widget controls of a similar type to the invalid specified business module for the user.
在一些实施例中,控制器在执行步骤51,即执行基于目标业务Widget控件的属性参数,产生推荐Widget控件,被进一步配置为执行下述步骤:In some embodiments, the controller executes step 51, that is, generates a recommended Widget control based on the attribute parameters of the target business Widget control, and is further configured to perform the following steps:
步骤511、获取指定业务模块的业务类型和目标业务Widget控件的控件尺寸。Step 511, acquire the business type of the specified business module and the control size of the target business Widget control.
步骤512、基于指定业务模块的业务类型,查找与目标业务Widget控件具有相同控件尺寸的业务Widget控件,作为第一类控件,第一类控件对应业务模块的业务类型与指定业务模块的业务类型相同。Step 512, based on the business type of the specified business module, search for a business widget control having the same control size as the target business widget control, as the first type of control, the business type of the business module corresponding to the first type of control is the same as the business type of the specified business module .
步骤513、如果第一类控件的控件数量满足更换控件显示区的显示位阈值,则将第一类控件作为推荐Widget控件。Step 513 , if the number of controls of the first type of controls satisfies the display position threshold of the replacement control display area, use the first type of controls as recommended Widget controls.
系统产生推荐Widget控件的时机可为在用户触发带有失效标识的目标业务Widget控件时,或者,触发Widget面板中展示的空位时。在基于空位产生推荐Widget控件时,可基于空位原展示的业务Widget控件的特性进行推荐。The timing for the system to generate the recommended Widget control may be when the user triggers the target service Widget control with an invalidation flag, or when the user triggers a space displayed in the Widget panel. When generating a recommended Widget control based on the vacancy, the recommendation may be made based on the characteristics of the service Widget control originally displayed in the vacancy.
在基于失效的目标业务Widget控件产生推荐Widget控件时,其推荐策略可按照优先级顺序进行推荐,即先基于业务类型和控件尺寸查找特性相同(即业务类型相同)的Widget控件;再基于桌面应用提供的其他业务模块的控件尺寸查找特性相同(即所属应用相同)的Widget控件;最后基于系统中所有控件的 控件尺寸查找特性相同(即控件尺寸相同)的Widget控件。When recommending Widget controls based on invalid target service Widget controls, the recommendation strategy can be recommended according to the order of priority, that is, firstly find Widget controls with the same characteristics (that is, the same business type) based on the business type and control size; then based on the desktop application Widget controls with the same characteristics (that is, the same application) are searched for the control sizes of other business modules provided; finally, Widget controls with the same characteristics (that is, the same size of the controls) are searched based on the control sizes of all controls in the system.
在一些实施例中,在Widget面板中展示Widget控件时,Widget面板上设有多个具有相同尺寸、且规则排列的栅格网。由于不同的Widget控件对应不同的控件尺寸,所以不同的Widget控件占据的栅格数量不同,例如,再次参见图13,“时期天气”控件占据横向的3个栅格,则对应的控件尺寸为3×1;“信号源”控件占据竖向的3个栅格,则对应的控件尺寸为1×3;“设置”控件占据横向的2个栅格,则对应的控件尺寸为2×1;“少儿”控件占据一个栅格,则对应的控件尺寸为1×1。In some embodiments, when the Widget control is displayed in the Widget panel, the Widget panel is provided with a plurality of regular grid grids with the same size. Since different Widget controls correspond to different control sizes, the number of grids occupied by different Widget controls is different. For example, refer to Figure 13 again, the "period weather" control occupies 3 horizontal grids, and the corresponding control size is 3 ×1; the “Signal Source” control occupies 3 vertical grids, and the corresponding control size is 1×3; the “Settings” control occupies 2 horizontal grids, and the corresponding control size is 2×1;” "Children" control occupies a grid, and the corresponding control size is 1×1.
因此,控件尺寸可由栅格数量来表示,那么控件被删除后所形成的空位尺寸也由栅格数量来表示,那么可进行替换展示的推荐Widget控件的尺寸要求也由栅格数量来表示。例如,如果删除“时期天气”控件,则需要查找同样具有横向3个栅格构成的Widget控件,则对应所需控件尺寸为3×1;如果删除“设置”控件,则需要查找同样具有横向2个栅格构成的Widget控件,则对应所需控件尺寸为2×1;如果删除“少儿”控件,则需要查找同样具有1个栅格构成的Widget控件,则对应所需控件尺寸为1×1。Therefore, the size of the control can be represented by the number of grids, then the size of the space formed after the control is deleted is also represented by the number of grids, and the size requirements of the recommended Widget controls that can be replaced and displayed are also represented by the number of grids. For example, if you delete the "Time Weather" control, you need to find a Widget control that also has 3 horizontal grids, and the corresponding control size is 3×1; if you delete the "Settings" control, you need to find a Widget control that also has 2 horizontal For a Widget control composed of 1 grid, the corresponding required control size is 2×1; if you delete the “Children” control, you need to find a Widget control that also has 1 grid, and the corresponding required control size is 1×1 .
为使得用户在删除一个Widget控件后,在同一位置展示类型相同的Widget控件,可基于业务类型进行查找。如果用户删除的业务Widget控件为“少儿”业务Widget控件,该业务的业务类型为教育型,且其占据一个栅格,那么需要查找同样为教育型且需占据一个栅格的业务Widget控件,作为第一类控件。此时,第一类控件对应业务模块的业务类型与指定业务模块的业务类型相同,以及,第一类控件的控件尺寸与指定业务模块对应的目标业务Widget控件的控件尺寸相同。In order to enable the user to display a Widget control of the same type at the same position after deleting a Widget control, a search can be performed based on the business type. If the business widget deleted by the user is a "children" business widget, the business type of this business is educational, and it occupies a grid, then it is necessary to find a business widget that is also educational and occupies a grid, as First class controls. At this time, the business type of the business module corresponding to the first type of control is the same as the business type of the specified business module, and the control size of the first type of control is the same as that of the target business Widget control corresponding to the specified business module.
在查找到第一类控件后,判断第一类控件的控件数量是否满足更换控件显示区的显示位阈值,即判断第一类控件是否能够占满更换控件显示区的各个显示区。如果第一类控件的控件数量满足更换控件显示区的显示位阈值,说明第一类控件能够占满更换控件显示区的各个显示区,无需在继续查询,则将第一类控件作为推荐Widget控件。After finding the first type of controls, it is judged whether the number of controls of the first type of controls satisfies the display position threshold of the replacement control display area, that is, it is judged whether the first type of controls can occupy all the display areas of the replacement control display area. If the number of controls of the first type of control meets the display position threshold of the replacement control display area, it means that the first type of control can occupy all the display areas of the replacement control display area, and there is no need to continue to query, then the first type of control is recommended as the Widget control .
例如,显示位阈值N根据应用尺寸来定义。在显示位阈值N为6时,如果是1×1的控件尺寸,则N是6,即最多显示6个推荐Widget控件;如果是2×2的控件尺寸,则N是3,即最多显示3个推荐Widget控件;如果是3×2的控件尺寸,则N是2,即最多显示2个推荐Widget控件。For example, the display bit threshold N is defined according to the application size. When the display bit threshold N is 6, if the control size is 1×1, then N is 6, that is, at most 6 recommended Widget controls are displayed; if the control size is 2×2, N is 3, that is, at most 3 are displayed recommended Widget controls; if the control size is 3×2, then N is 2, that is, at most 2 recommended Widget controls are displayed.
在显示位阈值N为6时,如果查找出的第一类控件的控件数量为6,则可直接将查找出的各个第一类控件作为推荐Widget控件,依次展示在更换控件显示区。如果查找出的第一类控件的控件数量为3,小于显示位阈值N,则需继续按照下一顺序进行查询。如果查找出的第一类控件的控件数量为8,大于显示位阈值N,则仅以前6个控件作为推荐Widget控件。When the display bit threshold N is 6, if the number of first-type controls found is 6, each found first-type control can be directly used as a recommended Widget control, and displayed in the replacement control display area in turn. If the number of controls found in the first type of controls is 3, which is less than the display bit threshold N, it is necessary to continue to search in the next order. If the number of controls found in the first type of controls is 8, which is greater than the display bit threshold N, only the first 6 controls are recommended as Widget controls.
在一些实施例中,查找推荐Widget控件的查询顺序,业务类型为第一优先级顺序,在第一优先级顺序查找出的第一类控件不满足条件时,继续以第二优先级顺序进行查找,其中,第二优先级顺序为基于当前指定业务模块所属应用提供的其他业务模块对应的Widget控件进行查找的顺序。在第二优先级顺序查找出的第二类控件不满足条件时,继续以第三优先级顺序进行查找,其中,第三优先级顺序为基于系统提供的所有控件进行查找的顺序。In some embodiments, the query order of the recommended Widget controls is searched, the business type is the first priority order, and when the first type of controls found in the first priority order does not meet the conditions, continue to search with the second priority order , wherein the second priority order is based on the search order for Widget controls corresponding to other business modules provided by the application to which the currently specified business module belongs. When the second type of controls found in the second priority order do not meet the conditions, the search is continued with the third priority order, wherein the third priority order is a search order based on all controls provided by the system.
在一些实施例中,如果第一优先级查找出的第一类控件不满足条件,继续以第二优先级顺序进行查找时,控制器在执行基于目标业务Widget控件的属性参数,产生推荐Widget控件,被进一步配置为执行下述步骤:In some embodiments, if the first type of control found by the first priority does not meet the conditions and continues to search in the order of the second priority, the controller generates a recommended Widget control based on the attribute parameters of the target business Widget control , is further configured to perform the following steps:
步骤514、如果第一类控件的控件数量不满足更换控件显示区的显示位阈值,则基于指定业务模块的所属桌面应用提供的业务模块,查找与目标应用Widget控件具有相同控件尺寸的业务Widget控件,作为第二类控件,第二类控件对应业务模块的所属应用与指定业务的所属应用均为桌面应用。Step 514: If the number of controls of the first type of controls does not meet the display position threshold of the replacement control display area, based on the business module provided by the desktop application to which the specified business module belongs, search for a business widget control with the same control size as the target application Widget control , as the second type of control, the application to which the second type of control corresponds to the business module and the application to which the specified business belongs are both desktop applications.
步骤515、如果第一类控件和第二类控件的总控件数量满足更换控件显示区的显示位阈值,则将第一类控件和第二类控件作为推荐Widget控件。Step 515 , if the total number of controls of the first type of widgets and the second type of controls meets the display position threshold of the replacement widget display area, use the first type of controls and the second type of controls as recommended Widget controls.
在系统按照第一优先级顺序,以业务类型和控件尺寸作为查找依据,查找到的第一控件的控件数量不满足更换控件显示区的显示位阈值,则需要继续基于第二优先级顺序进行查找。此时,获取指定业务模块的所属应用(为桌面应用),并基于指定业务模块的所属桌面应用提供的其他业务模块,查找与目标业务Widget控件具有相同控件尺寸的业务Widget控件,作为第二类控件。此时,第二类控件对应业务模块的所属应用与指定业务的所属应用相同,均为桌面应用,第二类控件的控件尺寸与指定业务模块对应的目标业务Widget控件的相同控件尺寸相同。When the system follows the first priority order and uses the business type and control size as the search basis, and the number of controls found in the first control does not meet the display position threshold of the replacement control display area, it needs to continue to search based on the second priority order . At this time, obtain the application to which the specified business module belongs (which is a desktop application), and based on other business modules provided by the desktop application to which the specified business module belongs, search for a business Widget control with the same control size as the target business Widget control, as the second type controls. At this time, the application of the business module corresponding to the second type of control is the same as the application of the specified business, both of which are desktop applications, and the control size of the second type of control is the same as that of the target business Widget control corresponding to the specified business module.
例如,如果带有失效标识的控件为“少儿”业务Widget控件,该业务模块的所属桌面应用还提供有“亲友圈”、“电视剧”、“电影”等业务模块,且该业务模块均具有提供Widget控件展示的功能。For example, if the control with the invalidation logo is a Widget control of the "Children" business, the desktop application to which this business module belongs also provides business modules such as The functions displayed by the Widget control.
如果“亲友圈”业务Widget控件的控件尺寸为3×2、“电视剧”业务Widget控件的控件尺寸为2×1、“电影”业务Widget控件的控件尺寸为1×1,那么与“少儿”业务Widget控件具有相同控件尺寸(1×1)的Widget控件为“电影”,因此,可将“电影”业务Widget控件作为第二类控件。If the widget size of the "Friends Circle" business widget is 3×2, the widget size of the "TV Drama" business widget is 2×1, and the widget size of the "Movie" business widget is 1×1, then the widget size of the "Children" business Widget controls with the same control size (1×1) are “movies”, therefore, the “movie” service Widget controls can be used as the second type of controls.
基于此方法,查找到的第二类控件可为零个或多个,在基于第二优先级顺序查找完毕后,计算第一类控件和第二类控件的总控件数量,并再次与更换控件显示区的显示位阈值进行对比。Based on this method, zero or more second-type controls can be found. After searching based on the second priority order, calculate the total number of first-type controls and second-type controls, and replace the controls again. The display bit threshold of the display area is compared.
如果总控件数量满足更换控件显示区的显示位阈值,则不再进行后续的查询,将第一类控件和第二类控件作为推荐Widget控件,依次展示在更换控件显示区中。If the total number of widgets satisfies the display position threshold of the replacement widget display area, no subsequent query is performed, and the first type of widget and the second type of widget are used as recommended Widget controls, which are sequentially displayed in the replacement widget display area.
在一些实施例中,在系统按照第一优先级顺序和第二优先级顺序,以业务类型、所属应用提供的其他业务模块和控件尺寸作为查找依据,查找到的第一类控件和第二类控件的总控件数量不满足更换控件显示区的显示位阈值,则需要继续基于第三优先级顺序进行查找。此时,获取系统内存储的所有Widget控件,将与目标业务Widget控件具有相同控件尺寸的业务Widget控件作为第三类控件,并按照优先级顺序,依次推荐给用户,展示在更换控件显示区中。其中,第一类控件、第二类控件和第三类控件的总控件数量满 足更换控件显示区的显示位阈值。In some embodiments, after the system follows the first priority order and the second priority order, and uses the business type, other business modules provided by the application and the size of the control as the search basis, the searched first type of control and the second type of control If the total control quantity of the control does not meet the display bit threshold of the replacement control display area, it is necessary to continue to search based on the third priority order. At this point, get all the Widget controls stored in the system, use the business Widget control with the same control size as the target business Widget control as the third type of control, and recommend it to the user in order of priority, and display it in the replacement control display area . Wherein, the total number of controls of the first type of control, the second type of control and the third type of control meets the display bit threshold of the replacement control display area.
在一些实施例,为避免在基于各个优先级顺序查找推荐Widget控件时,重复添加相同的控件在Widget面板中显示,本申请在查询时,仅在未显示在Widget面板中的剩余符合查询条件的业务Widget控件中进行查询。例如,在查询“少儿”业务模块所属桌面应用提供的其他业务模块时,“推荐”业务Widget控件已经展示在Widget面板中,虽然“推荐”业务Widget控件符合查找条件(控件尺寸相同、与指定业务模块所属同一桌面应用),也不将该“推荐”业务Widget控件作为第二类控件,即不重复展示“推荐”业务Widget控件。In some embodiments, in order to avoid repeatedly adding the same control to be displayed in the Widget panel when searching for recommended Widget controls based on each priority order, the application only selects the remaining ones that meet the query conditions that are not displayed in the Widget panel when querying. Query in the business Widget control. For example, when querying other business modules provided by the desktop application to which the "Children" business module belongs, the "Recommended" business Widget control has been displayed in the Widget panel, although the "Recommended" business Widget control meets the search conditions (the control has the same size, is the same as the specified business modules belong to the same desktop application), and the "recommended" business Widget control is not used as the second type of control, that is, the "recommended" business Widget control is not displayed repeatedly.
在一些实施例中,桌面应用在启动时,其提供的各个业务模块会将自己支持控件信息(控件尺寸、业务类型、所属应用等)上报给Widget面板,控件的类型相当于对应业务模块的业务类型。Widget面板会根据系统预置或者是用户自定义的桌面控件进行展示(Widget面板首次启动展示预置的控件,再次启动时缓存的用户自定义的桌面控件)。In some embodiments, when the desktop application is started, each business module provided by it will report its own support control information (control size, business type, application, etc.) to the Widget panel, and the type of control is equivalent to the business of the corresponding business module type. The Widget panel will be displayed according to system presets or user-defined desktop controls (the Widget panel will display the preset controls when it is first started, and the user-defined desktop controls will be cached when it is started again).
如果用户将要在删除控件时,系统中的控件管理模块(WidgetServer)会先查询当前要删除的控件所属的应用、业务类型和控件的大小。控件管理模块会先查询跟将要删除应用大小、业务类型、所属应用三个维度依次降维,进行挑选Widget控件应用后排序,然后展示排序后的Widget控件推荐顺序。如果系统没有查询到符合条件的推荐控件,则不进行推荐。如果用户选择其中一个推荐Widget控件,既将新的控件补充到被删除控件原先的位置,如果没有选择,则直接删除相应控件。If the user is about to delete a widget, the widget management module (WidgetServer) in the system will first inquire about the application, service type and size of the widget to which the widget currently to be deleted belongs. The widget management module will first query and reduce the dimensionality of the three dimensions of the application to be deleted, the business type, and the application to which it belongs, select and sort the widgets after they are applied, and then display the recommended order of the widgets after sorting. If the system does not find a recommended control that meets the conditions, no recommendation will be made. If the user selects one of the recommended Widget controls, the new widget will be added to the original position of the deleted widget, and if there is no selection, the corresponding widget will be deleted directly.
在一些实施例中,在删除某个业务Widget控件后系统进行控件推荐时,以基于指定业务模块的控件推荐其他控件为例,控件推荐的优先级顺序为:因业务控件(widget)在注册的时候会提供当前业务Widget的控件尺寸(大小)、业务类型、所属应用等,所以当一个控件失效或者要被删除时,系统先查询下失效的业务Widget的所属业务类型是否还有相同尺寸的控件,如果有并且该控件没有在Widget面板中显示(增加没有在桌面显示是防止重复添加相同的控件),则此类的控件优先级最高。然后再查询下当前所属桌面应用内其他的业务控件中相同尺寸的、且没有在Widget面板中被添加的作为第二优先级。如果查询的总控件数量大于N,则不在往后查询;如果两个优先级中符合的总控件数量小于N,则查询下所有的控件,符合尺寸的控件作为第三优先级的控件,并按照优先级的顺序推荐给用户。In some embodiments, when the system recommends widgets after a certain business Widget widget is deleted, taking the widget recommendation based on a specified business module as an example, the priority order of widget recommendation is: because the widget is registered in the At this time, the control size (size), business type, application, etc. of the current business widget will be provided. Therefore, when a control fails or is to be deleted, the system first checks whether the business type of the failed business widget still has a control of the same size. , if there is and the control is not displayed in the Widget panel (increasing that it is not displayed on the desktop is to prevent repeated addition of the same control), this type of control has the highest priority. Then query the other business controls in the current desktop application that have the same size and have not been added in the Widget panel as the second priority. If the total number of controls queried is greater than N, no further query will be made; if the total number of controls in the two priorities is less than N, all controls will be queried, and the controls that meet the size will be the controls of the third priority, and follow the The order of priority is recommended to the user.
可见,在进行控件推荐时,本申请提供的显示设备基于被删除的目标业务Widget控件,先获取该失效的目标业务Widget控件的所属业务类型是否还有相同尺寸的Widget控件,如果有Widget控件则给用户推荐出来;如果没有则查询下所属桌面应用中是否有相同尺寸的业务Widget控件,如果有则推荐,如果没有,则查询下所有的控件,符合尺寸规则的则给推荐(优先展示没有被添加到桌面上)。系统根据当前控件的大小和业务类型给用户推荐相近功能、相同大小的控件,方便用户进行添加,避免Widget面板中出现空位,即便于用户选择后补齐空位,提升用户体验。It can be seen that when recommending widgets, the display device provided by this application is based on the deleted target business Widget control, and first obtains whether there is a Widget control of the same size as the business type of the invalid target business Widget control. If there is a Widget control, then Recommend it to the user; if not, check whether there is a business Widget control of the same size in the corresponding desktop application. added to the desktop). The system recommends controls with similar functions and the same size to the user according to the size of the current control and the type of business, which is convenient for users to add, avoids vacancies in the Widget panel, and even fills the vacancies after the user selects to improve user experience.
在一些实施例中,如图17所示,提供了一种控件显示方法,方法包括:In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 17 , a control display method is provided, the method includes:
S1701:在检测到第一业务Widget控件被删除时,确定并显示第二业务的图标,其中,第二业务对应的第二业务Widget控件的尺寸与第一业务Widget控件的尺寸相同。S1701: When it is detected that the first service Widget is deleted, determine and display the icon of the second service, wherein the size of the second service Widget corresponding to the second service is the same as that of the first service Widget.
在一些实施例中,确定并显示第二业务的图标包括:获取第一业务Widget控件对应的第一业务模块的业务类型和第一业务Widget控件的控件尺寸;基于业务类型,查找具备相同业务类型的目标业务,以及在目标业务中确定与第一业务Widget控件的具有相同控件尺寸的第二业务Widget控件对应的第二业务;显示对应第二业务的图标。通过业务类型的标识,可以使得推荐的控件所对应的业务和被删除的控件业务相同或相似,这样可以有效的替代用户删除的业务。In some embodiments, determining and displaying the icon of the second business includes: obtaining the business type of the first business module corresponding to the first business Widget control and the control size of the first business Widget control; the target service, and determine the second service corresponding to the second service Widget control of the first service Widget control with the same control size in the target service; and display the icon corresponding to the second service. Through the identification of the service type, the service corresponding to the recommended control can be made the same or similar to the service of the deleted control, so that the service deleted by the user can be effectively replaced.
在一些实施例中,在被删除的控件是用户在控件未失效时进行的删除,则推荐不同类型业务对应的控件,在在被删除的控件是用户在控件失效时进行的删除,则推荐相同类型业务对应的控件。这是因为在一些实施例中,用户主动删除未失效的控件可能表征用户不太喜欢该类业务。因此推荐不同业务类型对应的控件。In some embodiments, if the deleted control is deleted by the user when the control is not invalid, controls corresponding to different types of services are recommended; when the deleted control is deleted by the user when the control is invalid, the same recommended The control corresponding to the type business. This is because in some embodiments, the user's initiative to delete a control that has not expired may indicate that the user does not like this type of service. Therefore, controls corresponding to different business types are recommended.
在一些实施例中,确定并显示第二业务的图标包括:获取与第一业务Widget控件的具有相同控件尺寸的第二业务Widget控件对应的第二业务;显示对应第二业务的图标。In some embodiments, determining and displaying the icon of the second service includes: obtaining the second service corresponding to the second service Widget control having the same control size as the first service Widget; and displaying the icon corresponding to the second service.
在一些实施例中,确定并显示第二业务的图标包括:确定多个第二业务及多个第二业务的使用频率;根据多个第二业务的使用频率,显示多个第二业务对应的图标,其中,使用频率高的第二业务对应的图标相较于使用频率低的第二业务对应的图标突出显示。这样可以在相同大小的控件中,选择用户使用频率高,且未在面板中显示的控件进行推荐。有利于用户的快捷使用。In some embodiments, determining and displaying icons of the second services includes: determining a plurality of second services and usage frequencies of the plurality of second services; Icons, wherein the icon corresponding to the second service with high frequency of use is highlighted compared to the icon corresponding to the second service with low frequency of use. In this way, among controls of the same size, controls that are frequently used by users and not displayed in the panel can be selected for recommendation. Conducive to the quick use of the user.
在一些实施例中,突出显示可以是排序优先,也可以是高亮显示,或者大号显示。In some embodiments, the highlighting can be sort-first, highlighting, or large-size displaying.
在一些实施例中,确定并显示第二业务的图标包括:确定多个第二业务及多个第二业务的使用时间;根据多个第二业务的使用时间,显示多个第二业务对应的图标,其中,使用时间和当前时间的时间差小的第二业务对应的图标相较于使用时间和当前时间的时间差大的第二业务对应的图标突出显示。以便于将用户最近使用的,且未在面板中显示的控件进行推荐。有利于用户的快捷使用。In some embodiments, determining and displaying icons of the second services includes: determining a plurality of second services and usage times of the plurality of second services; Icons, wherein the icon corresponding to the second service with a small time difference between the usage time and the current time is highlighted compared to the icon corresponding to the second service with a large time difference between the usage time and the current time. In order to recommend the controls that are recently used by the user and not displayed in the panel. Conducive to the quick use of the user.
在一些实施例中,确定并显示第二业务的图标包括:确定多个第二业务及多个第二业务的更新时间;根据多个第二业务的更新时间,显示多个第二业务对应的图标,其中,更新时间和当前时间的时间差小的第二业务对应的图标相较于更新时间和当前时间的时间差大的第二业务对应的图标突出显示。以便于将最近发生更新的的,且未在面板中显示的控件进行推荐。有利于用户的快捷使用。In some embodiments, determining and displaying the icons of the second services includes: determining a plurality of second services and update times of the plurality of second services; Icons, wherein the icon corresponding to the second service with a small time difference between the update time and the current time is highlighted compared to the icon corresponding to the second service with a large time difference between the update time and the current time. In order to recommend recently updated controls that are not displayed in the panel. Conducive to the quick use of the user.
在一些实施例中,确定并显示第二业务的图标包括:获取与第一业务Widget控件的具有相同控件尺寸的第二业务Widget控件对应的目标业务;在目标业务中过滤被用户删除过Widget控件的第三业务以确定第二业务;显示对应第二业务的图标。以便于在推荐过程中排除用户删除过的业务,避免重复推荐。In some embodiments, determining and displaying the icon of the second service includes: obtaining the target service corresponding to the second service Widget control having the same control size as the first service Widget control; filtering the Widget controls deleted by the user in the target service to determine the second service; and display an icon corresponding to the second service. In order to exclude the services deleted by the user during the recommendation process and avoid repeated recommendations.
在一些实施例中,确定并显示第二业务的图标包括:获取系统页面对应的业务类型,以及获取第一业务Widget控件的控件尺寸,其中系统页面是指显示Widget面板前的系统页面;基于业务类型,查找具备相同业务类型的目标业务,以及在目标业务中确定与第一业务Widget控件的具有相同控件尺寸的第二业务Widget控件对应的第二业务;显示对应第二业务的图标。由于用户调出面板额需求可能是基于当前系统页面触发的,用户目的是寻找业务和当前界面相关的业务,因此推荐的时候推荐和当面系统页面业务相关且未在面板中显示的控件进行推荐。有利于用户的快捷使用。In some embodiments, determining and displaying the icon of the second service includes: obtaining the service type corresponding to the system page, and obtaining the control size of the Widget control of the first service, wherein the system page refers to the system page before the Widget panel is displayed; type, searching for the target business with the same business type, and determining the second business corresponding to the second business Widget control with the same control size of the first business Widget control in the target business; displaying the icon corresponding to the second business. Since the user's demand for calling out the panel may be triggered based on the current system page, the user's purpose is to find services related to the current interface, so when recommending, recommend controls that are related to the current system page business and are not displayed on the panel. Conducive to the quick use of the user.
S1702:接收输入的对第二业务的图标的选择;S1702: Receive an input selection of an icon of the second service;
在一些实施例中,第二业务的图标为多个,焦点被默认设置在突出显示的图标上(此时撤销了Widget面板中的焦点)。用户通过移动焦点,可以查看被可被选择的第二业务的图标。如果用户退出第二业务的图标的选择,则在第一位置留空。如果用户选择了其中一个图标就执行步骤S1703.In some embodiments, there are multiple icons of the second service, and the focus is set on the highlighted icon by default (the focus in the Widget panel is revoked at this time). By moving the focus, the user can view the icon of the second service that can be selected. If the user exits the selection of the icon for the second service, leave blank in the first position. If the user selects one of the icons, execute step S1703.
S1703:在第一位置显示被选择的图标所对应的第二业务的第二业务Widget控件,其中,第一位置是第一业务Widget控件的显示位置。S1703: Display the second service Widget control of the second service corresponding to the selected icon at the first position, where the first position is the display position of the first service Widget control.
在一些实施例中,由于推荐的业务控件的大小和删除的控件的大小相同,因此在补充控件时,无需对其他控件的位置进行调整。In some embodiments, since the size of the recommended business control is the same as that of the deleted control, there is no need to adjust the positions of other controls when adding controls.
在一些实施例中,本申请一些实施例提供了一种控件显示方法包括:在检测到第一业务Widget控件被删除时,确定并显示第二业务的图标,其中,第二业务对应的第二业务Widget控件的尺寸不大于第一位置的尺寸,第一位置为第一业务Widget控件的显示位置以及和第一业务Widget控件的显示位置相邻的空白位置;接收输入的对第二业务的图标的选择;在第一位置显示被选择的图标所对应的第二业务的第二业务Widget控件。本申请中在推荐的时候,考虑被删除的控件以及相邻位置的空白位置(若存在),来进行控件的推荐,此时控件可以和被删除的位置大小相同,或者和整个空白位置相同,或者和整个空白位置的最小位置单元的任意组合相同,实现了多样化的推荐。In some embodiments, some embodiments of the present application provide a method for displaying widgets, including: when detecting that the Widget control of the first business is deleted, determining and displaying the icon of the second business, wherein the icon of the second business corresponding to the second The size of the business Widget control is not greater than the size of the first position, the first position being the display position of the first business Widget control and the blank position adjacent to the display position of the first business Widget control; receiving the input icon for the second business selection; the second service Widget control of the second service corresponding to the selected icon is displayed at the first position. In this application, when recommending, consider the deleted control and the blank space in the adjacent position (if it exists) to recommend the control. At this time, the control can be the same size as the deleted position, or the same as the entire blank position. Or it is the same as any combination of the minimum position unit of the entire blank position, realizing diversified recommendations.
示例性的,第一位置包含删除动作以前就存在的预留空白位置和被删除的控件的目标位置。目标位置为2*4的尺寸,预留空白位置为4*4,则在删除后留下的空白位置是4*6的尺寸(也可以是6*4的尺寸),在推荐的过程中,可以推荐6*4、4*2、2*4、2**2等尺寸的图标。因此扩大了尺寸上可进行筛选的数量。Exemplarily, the first position includes a reserved blank position existing before the delete action and a target position of the deleted control. The target position is 2*4 in size, and the reserved blank space is 4*4, then the blank space left after deletion is 4*6 in size (or 6*4 in size). During the recommendation process, Icons of 6*4, 4*2, 2*4, 2**2 and other sizes can be recommended. The number of sizes that can be screened is thus expanded.
图6为本申请一些实施例中控件处理方法的流程图。参见图6,本发明实施例提供的一种控件处理方法,以检测控件的有效性方法包括:Fig. 6 is a flowchart of a control processing method in some embodiments of the present application. Referring to Fig. 6, a control processing method provided by an embodiment of the present invention, the method for detecting the validity of the control includes:
S1A、接收基于桌面主页产生的预设操作,检测每个指定业务模块的业务状态是否发生变化,指定业务模块是指在Widget面板中展示有业务Widget控件的业务模块,业务状态用于表征指定业务模块是否可用;S1A. Receive preset operations generated based on the desktop homepage, and detect whether the business status of each designated business module has changed. The designated business module refers to a business module that displays a business Widget control in the Widget panel, and the business status is used to represent the designated business. whether the module is available;
S2A、如果存在任一个指定业务模块的业务状态发生变化,则产生对应的状态变化信息,状态变化信息用于确定存在状态变化的指定业务模块对应的目标业务Widget控件;S2A. If there is a change in the business state of any designated business module, then generate corresponding state change information, and the state change information is used to determine the target business Widget control corresponding to the designated business module that has a state change;
S3A、接收用于启动Widget面板的触发操作,基于每个指定业务模块的业务Widget控件展示Widget面板,以及,在Widget面板中的目标业务Widget控件上展示失效标识,失效标识用于表征存在状态变化的指定业务模块对应的目标业务Widget控件失效。S3A. Receiving a trigger operation for starting the Widget panel, displaying the Widget panel based on the business Widget control of each specified business module, and displaying a failure indicator on the target service Widget control in the Widget panel, where the failure indicator is used to represent a state change The target business Widget control corresponding to the specified business module is invalid.
本发明实施例提供的一种控件处理方法及显示设备,接收基于桌面主页产生的预设操作,检测每个指定业务模块的业务状态是否发生变化,在发生变化,则基于状态变化信息确定目标业务Widget控件。在启动Widget面板时,在Widget面板中的目标业务Widget控件上展示失效标识,以表征存在状态变化的指定业务模块对应的目标业务Widget控件失效。可见,该方法及显示设备,在实现控件有效性检测时,可按照业务和应用两个维度来展示控件的有效性,并且在特定的时间点触发查询机制,如果查询到Widget控件失效后在Widget面板中对应的业务Widget控件上展示失效标识,便于用户及时发现不可用的业务Widget控件,用户体验好。A control processing method and a display device provided by an embodiment of the present invention receive preset operations generated based on the desktop home page, detect whether the business status of each specified business module changes, and if there is a change, determine the target business based on the status change information Widget controls. When the Widget panel is started, an invalidation mark is displayed on the target business Widget control in the Widget panel to indicate that the target business Widget control corresponding to the specified business module with a state change is invalid. It can be seen that this method and the display device can display the validity of the control according to the two dimensions of business and application when realizing the validity detection of the control, and trigger the query mechanism at a specific point in time. The invalidation mark is displayed on the corresponding business Widget control in the panel, which is convenient for users to find unavailable business Widget controls in time, and the user experience is good.
图23为本申请在一些示例性实施例中示出的显示设备用户界面示意图。如图23所示,用户界面可以包括多个视图显示区,如图23中示出的视图显示区501A、502A、503A、504A。每个视图显示区中可以布局一个或者多个项目,这里的项目包括图标、窗口、控件等可视化界面元素,其中,控件可以包括图标、按钮、菜单、选项卡、文本框、对话框、状态栏、导航栏、Widget控件等。Fig. 23 is a schematic diagram of a user interface of a display device shown in some exemplary embodiments of the present application. As shown in FIG. 23 , the user interface may include multiple view display areas, such as view display areas 501A, 502A, 503A, 504A as shown in FIG. 23 . One or more items can be laid out in each view display area, where items include icons, windows, controls and other visual interface elements, where controls can include icons, buttons, menus, tabs, text boxes, dialog boxes, status bars , navigation bar, Widget control, etc.
在一些实施例中,显示设备启动后,可以直接进入电视系统主页,该电视系统主页可以是预置的视频点播程序的首页,如聚好看(J)应用首页。In some embodiments, after the display device is started, it can directly enter the homepage of the TV system. The homepage of the TV system can be the homepage of a preset video-on-demand program, such as the homepage of Jukankan (J) application.
在一些实施例中,显示设备可以基于J应用,在标准模式、教育模式或者少儿模式下工作。其中,标准模式是显示设备为用户提供的基本工作模式,教育模式则是指可以专门为用户提供小、初、高等教育媒资的工作模式,少儿模式则是指可以专门为用户提供少儿媒资的工作模式。示例性的,J应用可提供的界面包括标准模式界面、少儿模式界面和教育模式界面,不同模式界面上显示相应模式下用户可访问的内容。In some embodiments, the display device can work in a standard mode, an education mode, or a kid's mode based on the J application. Among them, the standard mode is the basic working mode provided by the display device for users; the education mode refers to the working mode that can provide users with primary, elementary and higher education media resources; the children's mode refers to the provision of children's media resources for users working mode. Exemplarily, the interface that can be provided by the J application includes a standard mode interface, a children's mode interface and an education mode interface, and the content accessible to the user in the corresponding mode is displayed on the interface of different modes.
在一些实施例中,将显示设备支持的不同的工作模式分别称为第一模式和第二模式,在第一模式下显示的用户界面即为第一模式界面,在第二模式下显示的用户界面即为第二模式界面。根据第一模式和第二模式的功能的不同,第一模式界面用于显示第一模式可访问的内容,第二模式界面用于显示第二模式可访问的内容。应当理解,第一模式和第二模式可访问的内容是由内容服务商提供的不同范围的内容。In some embodiments, the different working modes supported by the display device are referred to as the first mode and the second mode respectively, the user interface displayed in the first mode is the first mode interface, and the user interface displayed in the second mode The interface is the second mode interface. According to the difference in functions between the first mode and the second mode, the first mode interface is used to display content accessible in the first mode, and the second mode interface is used to display content accessible in the second mode. It should be understood that the accessible contents in the first mode and the second mode are contents of different scopes provided by content service providers.
在一些实施情形中,标准模式即为第一模式,教育模式和/或少儿模式即为第二模式。标准模式界面即为第一模式界面,教育模式或者少儿模式界面即为第二模式界面。在这些实施情形中,第一模式可访问的内容包括第二模式可访问的内容和其他内容。也就是说,标准模式可访问的内容包括教育媒资和少儿媒资,还包括其他内容。In some implementation situations, the standard mode is the first mode, and the education mode and/or children's mode is the second mode. The standard mode interface is the first mode interface, and the education mode or children's mode interface is the second mode interface. In these implementations, the content accessible in the first mode includes the content accessible in the second mode and other content. That is to say, the accessible content of the standard mode includes educational media resources and children's media resources, as well as other content.
需要说明的是,用户可以在显示设备首次开机时的开机导航过程中选择显示设备的工作模式。其中, 开机导航过程是指对显示设备的进行一系列初始化基础设置过程,包括但不限于选择操作界面语言、初始化连接网络、登录云服务账号、选择工作模式等。用户可在模式选择界面中选择显示设备的工作模式。模式选择界面中包括“标准模式”、“教育模式”和“少儿模式”等多个模式选项。当用户选中“教育模式”时,显示设备将在教育模式下工作,如显示教育模式主页,以及执行教育模式对应的交互控制策略等。当用户选中“标准模式”时,显示设备将在标准模式下工作,如显示标准模式主页,以及执行标准模式对应的交互控制策略等。It should be noted that the user can select the working mode of the display device during the booting navigation process when the display device is turned on for the first time. Among them, the startup navigation process refers to a series of initial basic setting processes for the display device, including but not limited to selecting the language of the operation interface, initializing the connection to the network, logging in to the cloud service account, and selecting the working mode, etc. The user can select the working mode of the display device in the mode selection interface. The mode selection interface includes multiple mode options such as "Standard Mode", "Education Mode" and "Children Mode". When the user selects "educational mode", the display device will work in the educational mode, such as displaying the homepage of the educational mode, and executing the interactive control strategy corresponding to the educational mode. When the user selects "Standard Mode", the display device will work in the standard mode, such as displaying the homepage in the standard mode, and executing the interactive control strategy corresponding to the standard mode.
还需说明的是,用户也可以在标准模式提供的包含模式切换按钮的界面中,控制显示设备由标准模式切换到教育模式或者少儿模式,以及在教育模式或者少儿模式提供的包含模式切换按钮的界面中,控制显示设备由教育模式或者少儿模式切换到标准模式。It should also be noted that the user can also control the display device to switch from the standard mode to the education mode or the children's mode in the interface provided in the standard mode that includes the mode switching button, and the interface that includes the mode switching button provided in the education mode or the children's mode In the interface, control the display device to switch from education mode or children's mode to standard mode.
在一些实施例中,显示设备操作系统启动过程中,启动J应用。J应用启动后,读取系统属性数据中的模式属性变量。如果读取到的模式属性变量是第一值,则显示标准模式系统主页。如果读取到的模式属性变量不是第一值,则显示少儿模式系统主页或者教育模式系统主页。例如,如果读取到的模式属性变量是第二值,则显示少儿模式系统主页;如果读取到的模式属性变量是第三值,则显示教育模式系统主页。In some embodiments, the J application is started during the start-up process of the operating system of the display device. After the J application starts, read the mode attribute variable in the system attribute data. If the read mode attribute variable is the first value, display the standard mode system home page. If the read mode attribute variable is not the first value, display the homepage of the children's mode system or the education mode system homepage. For example, if the read mode attribute variable is the second value, then display the homepage of the juvenile mode system; if the read mode attribute variable is the third value, then display the education mode system homepage.
在一些实施例中,J应用响应于用户操作,执行模式切换过程。具体的,J应用响应于指示由标准模式进入到少儿模式的用户操作,将系统属性数据中的模式属性变量修改为第二值,同时将当前显示的标准模式界面更新为少儿模式界面。J应用响应于指示由少儿模式进入到标准模式的用户操作,将系统属性数据中的模式属性变量修改为第一值,同时将当前显示的少儿模式界面更新为标准模式界面。In some embodiments, the J application executes a mode switching process in response to a user operation. Specifically, the J application modifies the mode attribute variable in the system attribute data to the second value in response to the user operation indicating to enter the kids mode from the standard mode, and at the same time updates the currently displayed standard mode interface to the kids mode interface. The J application modifies the mode attribute variable in the system attribute data to the first value in response to the user operation indicating to enter the standard mode from the children's mode, and at the same time updates the currently displayed children's mode interface to the standard mode interface.
在一些实施例中,J应用提供的电视系统主页至少包括导航栏和位于导航栏下方的内容区,导航栏中包括多个标题控件,内容区中显示的内容会随导航栏中被选中标题控件的变化而变化,从而显示出与被选中标题控件相对应的标题界面。In some embodiments, the home page of the TV system provided by the J application includes at least a navigation bar and a content area below the navigation bar. , so as to display the title interface corresponding to the selected title control.
在一些实施例中,应用程序层中的程序可以被集成在J应用中,通过导航栏的一个控件进行展示。当导航栏中的应用控件被选中后,进行进一步显示该应用的页面。In some embodiments, the programs in the application layer can be integrated in the J application and displayed through a control on the navigation bar. When the application control in the navigation bar is selected, further display the page of the application.
在一些实施例中,显示设备上的应用包括系统应用和用户应用,系统应用可以包括Widget应用和其他系统应用。显示设备开机后,用户应用和其他系统应用会注册到显示设备操作系统。Widget应用用于读取操作系统的应用注册信息,根据读取到的应用注册信息,集成用户应用和其他系统应用对应的Widget,使得用户可以在Widget应用中操作其他系统应用和用户应用,如启动某个用户应用或者操作某个用户应用的某个功能模块。具体实施时,Widget应用可以具有独立的UI交互界面,该UI交互界面可以称为Widget面板,主要用于显示Widget控件。一个Widget控件与某个用户应用或者系统应用对应。用户则通过操作Widget面板上的Widget控件,来操作对应的应用。In some embodiments, the applications on the display device include system applications and user applications, and the system applications may include Widget applications and other system applications. After the display device is powered on, user applications and other system applications are registered with the display device operating system. The Widget application is used to read the application registration information of the operating system, and integrate the Widgets corresponding to the user application and other system applications according to the read application registration information, so that the user can operate other system applications and user applications in the Widget application, such as launching A certain user application or a certain functional module that operates a certain user application. During specific implementation, the Widget application may have an independent UI interaction interface, which may be called a Widget panel, and is mainly used to display Widget controls. A Widget control corresponds to a certain user application or system application. The user operates the corresponding application by operating the Widget control on the Widget panel.
在一些实施例中,显示设备开机后显示的系统主页为Widget应用界面,即系统主页为包括按照预设顺序排列的Widget控件的Widget面板,当用户点击任意一个Widget控件时,该Widget控件对应的应用启动,并显示出该应用的相关内容。In some embodiments, the system home page displayed after the display device is turned on is a Widget application interface, that is, the system home page is a Widget panel including Widget controls arranged in a preset order. When the user clicks on any Widget control, the corresponding Widget control The application starts and displays the relevant content of the application.
在一些实施例中,用于显示Widget面板的视图显示区可以占据整个屏幕,也可以占据部分屏幕,如占据屏幕的左侧区域。In some embodiments, the view display area for displaying the Widget panel may occupy the entire screen, or may occupy part of the screen, such as occupying the left area of the screen.
在一些实施例中,用户可以通过输入预设操作,来启动Widget应用及显示Widget面板。In some embodiments, the user can start the Widget application and display the Widget panel by inputting a preset operation.
在一些实施例中,显示设备通过J应用接收输入的上述预设操作,J应用接收到预设操作后,启动Widget应用。Widget应用根据当前工作模式属性的不同,显示不同状态的Widget面板。具体来说,如果当前工作模式是标准模式,则显示第一状态的Widget面板,第一状态的Widget面板中展示的所有Widget控件均可用;如果当前工作模式是少儿模式或者教育模式,则显示第二状态的Widget面板,第二状态的Widget面板中至少一个Widget控件不可用。这样一来,在标准模式下,用户可打开所有Widget控件,而在少儿模式或者教育模式下,用户将无法直接打开那些限制在相应模式下限制使用的Widget控件。In some embodiments, the display device receives the input preset operation through the J application, and the J application starts the Widget application after receiving the preset operation. The Widget application displays Widget panels in different states according to the attributes of the current working mode. Specifically, if the current working mode is the standard mode, the Widget panel in the first state is displayed, and all widget controls displayed in the Widget panel in the first state are available; For the Widget panel in the second state, at least one Widget control in the Widget panel in the second state is unavailable. In this way, in the standard mode, the user can open all Widget controls, but in the children's mode or education mode, the user will not be able to directly open those Widget controls that are restricted to be used in the corresponding mode.
在一些实施例中,Widget应用启动后,读取系统属性数据中的模式属性变量,根据读取到的模式属性变量判断当前工作模式。从而根据当前工作模式属性的不同,呈现不同状态的Widget面板。可以看出,Widget应用和J应用之间可以共享系统属性数据,通过共享系统属性数据实现了Widget应用和J应用之间的解耦。In some embodiments, after the Widget application is started, the mode attribute variable in the system attribute data is read, and the current working mode is determined according to the read mode attribute variable. Therefore, according to the different properties of the current working mode, different states of the Widget panel are presented. It can be seen that system attribute data can be shared between the Widget application and the J application, and the decoupling between the Widget application and the J application is realized by sharing the system attribute data.
示例性的,在显示J应用标准模式界面(如图9所示的标准模式主页)时,用户可以长按遥控器向左的方向键(以下简称“左键”),来触发显示Widget面板。J应用接收该操作后,通过Intent的隐式启动方式来拉起Widget应用。Widget应用启动后,读取系统属性数据中的模式属性变量,根据读取到的模式属性变量可以判定当前工作模式是标准模式,因此显示第一状态的Widget面板,该第一状态的Widget面板中包括一个或者多个Widget控件,每个Widget控件均可用。在显示第一状态的Widget面板时,用户可以通过操作其上的任意一个Widget控件,来启动Widget对应的应用,并显示应用的相关内容。Exemplarily, when the J application standard mode interface (the home page in standard mode as shown in FIG. 9 ) is displayed, the user can press and hold the left arrow key (hereinafter referred to as "left key") on the remote control to trigger the display of the Widget panel. After the J application receives the operation, it launches the Widget application through the implicit start method of the Intent. After the Widget application is started, it reads the mode attribute variable in the system attribute data. According to the read mode attribute variable, it can be determined that the current working mode is the standard mode, so the Widget panel in the first state is displayed. In the Widget panel in the first state Contains one or more Widget controls, each Widget control is available. When the Widget panel in the first state is displayed, the user can start the application corresponding to the Widget by operating any Widget control on it, and display relevant content of the application.
值得注意的是,J应用响应于接收到的预设操作而拉起Widget应用后,切换到后台运行,Widget应用则在前台运行。进而,Widget应用启动后,Widget面板上的Widget控件可获取焦点,J应用不可获取焦点。其中,Widget面板上的指定Widget首先获取到焦点,指示焦点位置的选择器默认显示在该指定的Widget控件上。在显示Widget面板时,用户可以通过相应操作移动选择器位置,以选择不同的Widget控件。示例性的,该指定的Widget控件可以是Widget面板上第一位序的Widget控件。It is worth noting that, after the J application pulls up the Widget application in response to the received preset operation, it switches to run in the background, and the Widget application runs in the foreground. Furthermore, after the Widget application is started, the Widget control on the Widget panel can obtain the focus, but the J application cannot obtain the focus. Wherein, the specified Widget on the Widget panel first obtains the focus, and the selector indicating the focus position is displayed on the specified Widget control by default. When the Widget panel is displayed, the user can move the position of the selector through corresponding operations to select different Widget controls. Exemplarily, the specified Widget control may be the first Widget control on the Widget panel.
在一些实施例中,J应用响应于接收到的预设操作,在拉起Widget应用的同时,沿显示器的横向向右的方向,将标准模式界面中的内容移动到显示器的右侧内容区中显示。Widget应用启动后,在显示器的左侧内容区中显示Widget面板。这样,在显示出Widget面板的同时,可以继续显示J应用标准模式界面中的内容。In some embodiments, the J application responds to the received preset operation, while pulling up the Widget application, moves the content in the standard mode interface to the right content area of the display along the lateral right direction of the display show. After the Widget application is started, the Widget panel is displayed in the left content area of the display. In this way, while the Widget panel is displayed, the content in the J application standard mode interface can be continuously displayed.
在一些实施例中,显示器的右侧内容区被称为第一内容区,显示器的左侧内容区被称为第二内容区。应理解,第一内容区与第二内容区的尺寸可以根据需求预设。In some embodiments, the right content area of the display is referred to as a first content area, and the left content area of the display is referred to as a second content area. It should be understood that the sizes of the first content area and the second content area can be preset according to requirements.
在一些实现方式中,标准模式界面中靠左的部分内容以原显示尺寸显示在右侧内容区中,靠右的另一部分内容隐藏。示例性的,首先根据预先配置的左侧内容区的宽度W1,确定向右移动的距离X=W1;然后根据向右移动的距离计算标准模式界面中各界面元素的新的显示位置坐标(X0+X,Y0),其中,(X0,Y0)为各界面元素的原显示位置坐标。最后,在保持各界面元素原显示尺寸不变的基础上,将各界面元素显示在新的显示位置处,超出显示视窗右侧边缘的界面元素将被隐藏。In some implementations, the left part of the content in the standard mode interface is displayed in the right content area with the original display size, and the other right part of the content is hidden. Exemplarily, first, according to the width W1 of the pre-configured left content area, determine the distance X=W1 to move to the right; then calculate the new display position coordinates (X0 +X, Y0), where (X0, Y0) is the original display position coordinates of each interface element. Finally, on the basis of keeping the original display size of each interface element unchanged, each interface element is displayed at a new display position, and the interface elements beyond the right edge of the display window will be hidden.
在另一些实现方式中,标准模式界面中的全部内容以压缩后的显示尺寸显示在右侧内容区中。示例性的,首先根据预先配置的左侧内容区的宽度W1,确定右侧内容区的宽度W2=Wmax-W1,Wmax为用户界面最大宽度。然后根据右侧内容区的宽度和用户界面的最大宽度计算缩小比例S,S=W2/Wmax。在根据缩小比例计算标准模式界面中各界面元素的新的显示尺寸为(a0×S)×(b0×S),其中,a0×b0为某界面元素的原显示尺寸。最后将标准模式界面中的全部内容以新的显示尺寸显示在右侧内容区中。In other implementations, all content in the standard mode interface is displayed in the right content area in a compressed display size. Exemplarily, first, according to the pre-configured width W1 of the left content area, the width W2 of the right content area is determined = Wmax-W1, where Wmax is the maximum width of the user interface. Then calculate the reduction ratio S according to the width of the right content area and the maximum width of the user interface, S=W2/Wmax. The new display size of each interface element in the standard mode interface calculated according to the reduction ratio is (a0×S)×(b0×S), where a0×b0 is the original display size of a certain interface element. Finally, all the content in the standard mode interface is displayed in the right content area with the new display size.
在另一些实施例中,Widget面板叠加在J应用标准模式界面的内容上显示。其中,Widget面板可以设置为半透明,以使界面中被遮盖的内容可以透过Widget面板显示出来。In some other embodiments, the Widget panel is displayed superimposed on the content of the J application standard mode interface. Wherein, the Widget panel can be set to be translucent, so that the covered content in the interface can be displayed through the Widget panel.
在一些实施例中,用户可以通过J标准模式主页上的指定控件,来控制切换到少儿模式或者教育模式界面。由于少儿模式或者教育模式界面能显示少儿媒资或者教育媒资,从而可以限制家庭中的儿童使用与少儿或者教育无关的功能,确保儿童可以在纯粹的空间中学习,不被其他因素干扰。In some embodiments, the user can control switching to the children's mode or the education mode interface through a specified control on the homepage of the standard mode. Since the children's mode or education mode interface can display children's media or education media, it can restrict children in the family from using functions that have nothing to do with children or education, ensuring that children can learn in a pure space without being disturbed by other factors.
值得注意的是,J应用的少儿模式界面不同于嵌套在标准模式主页中的“少儿”标题界面。一方面,少儿模式界面是独立的,其显示方案可单独配置,而“少儿”标题界面嵌套在标准模式主页中,其显示方案是标准模式主页显示方案的一部分;另一方面,少儿模式界面所显示的内容,与“少儿”标题界面是不同的。在一些实施例中,标准模式主页的TAB栏中还可以包括“教育”控件,当焦点落在“教育”上时,下方内容显示区中将显示“教育”标题界面。应理解的是,基于与“少儿”标题界面类似的道理,“教育”标题界面不同于教育模式下的用户界面,此处不予赘述。It is worth noting that the J App's Kid Mode interface is different from the "Kids" title interface nested in the standard mode home page. On the one hand, the child mode interface is independent, and its display scheme can be configured separately, while the "children" title interface is nested in the standard mode homepage, and its display scheme is a part of the standard mode homepage display scheme; on the other hand, the child mode interface The displayed content is different from the "Children" title interface. In some embodiments, the TAB column of the home page in the standard mode may also include an "education" control, and when the focus falls on "education", the title interface of "education" will be displayed in the lower content display area. It should be understood that, based on a similar reason to the title interface of "Children", the title interface of "Education" is different from the user interface in the education mode, and details will not be described here.
示例性的,在显示如图10所示的J标准模式主页时,用户可以通过操作移动焦点到“少儿”控件上。当焦点落在“少儿”控件上时,显示的标题界面变化成“少儿”标题界面。图24示例性为一种可能的“少儿”标题界面。如图24所示,该界面中包括“少儿模式”、“父母中心”等功能控件,其中,用户可以通过操作“少儿模式”控件,控制进入到少儿模式。J应用接收到用户对“少儿模式”控件的操作后,显示少儿模式主页,并将本地属性数据中的模式属性值设为第二值。Exemplarily, when the home page in J standard mode as shown in FIG. 10 is displayed, the user can move the focus to the "children" control through operations. When the focus falls on the "Children" control, the displayed title interface changes to the "Children" title interface. Fig. 24 is an example of a possible "children" title interface. As shown in Figure 24, the interface includes functional controls such as "Children's Mode" and "Parents Center", wherein the user can enter into the Children's Mode by operating the "Children's Mode" control. After the application J receives the user's operation on the "children's mode" control, it displays the homepage of the children's mode, and sets the value of the mode attribute in the local attribute data as the second value.
图25为本申请一些实施例中示出的一种少儿模式主页,具体为在显示图24所示“少儿”标题界面时,用户选择“少儿模式”控件并确定后进入的用户界面。如图25所示,少儿模式主页上包括“退出少儿模式”控件,其中,用户可以通过操作“退出少儿模式”控件,来触发切换到标准模式。Fig. 25 is a kids mode homepage shown in some embodiments of the present application, specifically, when the "kids" title interface shown in Fig. 24 is displayed, the user selects the "kids mode" control and enters the user interface after confirmation. As shown in FIG. 25 , the homepage of the children's mode includes a "quit children's mode" control, wherein the user can trigger switching to the standard mode by operating the "exit children's mode" control.
在一些实施例中,在显示少儿模式主页时,用户可以通过预设操作来触发启动Widget应用及显示Widget面板。In some embodiments, when the homepage in the kids mode is displayed, the user can trigger the launch of the Widget application and display the Widget panel through a preset operation.
示例性的,在显示如图25所示的少儿模式主页时,用户可以长按遥控器左键,来触发显示Widget面板。J应用接收该预设操作,通过Intent的隐式启动方式拉起Widget应用。Widget应用启动后,读取系统属性数据中的模式属性变量,根据读取到的模式属性变量可以判定当前工作模式是少儿模式,因此显示第二状态的Widget面板。与在标准模式下所显示的第一状态的Widget面板不同的是,在少儿模式下所显示的第二状态的Widget面板中,至少一个Widget控件不可用。Exemplarily, when the homepage in the children's mode as shown in FIG. 25 is displayed, the user can press and hold the left button of the remote control to trigger the display of the Widget panel. Application J receives the preset operation, and launches the Widget application through the implicit start mode of Intent. After the Widget application is started, the mode attribute variable in the system attribute data is read. According to the read mode attribute variable, it can be determined that the current working mode is the children's mode, so the Widget panel in the second state is displayed. Different from the Widget panel in the first state displayed in the standard mode, at least one Widget control is unavailable in the Widget panel in the second state displayed in the children's mode.
在一些实施例中,第二状态的Widget面板包括隐藏的Widget控件和用于触发显现所述隐藏的Widget控件的解锁控件,即第二状态的Widget面板不显示任何Widget控件,从而通过将所有Widget控件隐藏而使所有Widget控件不可用。此时,用户无法查看Widget面板上的Widget控件,也无法对任何一个Widget控件进行操作。In some embodiments, the Widget panel in the second state includes a hidden Widget control and an unlocking control for triggering the display of the hidden Widget control, that is, the Widget panel in the second state does not display any Widget control, so that by setting all the Widget controls to Controls are hidden making all Widget controls unavailable. At this time, the user cannot view the Widget controls on the Widget panel, and cannot operate any Widget control.
值得注意的是,J应用响应于接收到的预设操作而拉起Widget应用后,切换到后台运行,Widget应用则在前台运行。进而,Widget应用启动后,Widget面板上的解锁控件可获取焦点,J应用不可获取焦点。当用户操作该解锁控件时,Widget应用响应于对该解锁控件的操作(如点击操作),显示密码输入界面,并接收用户在密码输入界面中输入的密码。Widget应用接收到用户输入的密码后,验证输入的密码是否正确;如果验证输入的密码正确,则控制隐藏的Widget控件在Widget面板中显现,从而解除Widget面板的锁定状态。It is worth noting that, after the J application pulls up the Widget application in response to the received preset operation, it switches to run in the background, and the Widget application runs in the foreground. Furthermore, after the Widget application is started, the unlock control on the Widget panel can obtain the focus, but the J application cannot obtain the focus. When the user operates the unlock control, the Widget application displays a password input interface in response to the operation (such as a click operation) on the unlock control, and receives the password input by the user in the password input interface. After the Widget application receives the password entered by the user, it verifies whether the entered password is correct; if it verifies that the entered password is correct, it controls the hidden Widget control to appear in the Widget panel, thereby releasing the locked state of the Widget panel.
在一些实施例中,解锁后的Widget面板与第一状态的Widget面板相同。In some embodiments, the unlocked Widget panel is the same as the Widget panel in the first state.
在解锁Widget面板后,用户可以通过相应操作移动选择器位置,以选择不同的Widget控件。用户可以通过操作选择的Widget控件,来启动Widget控件对应的应用,及显示应用的相关内容。After unlocking the Widget panel, the user can move the position of the selector through corresponding operations to select different Widget controls. The user can start the application corresponding to the Widget control and display relevant content of the application by operating the selected Widget control.
在一些实施例中,上述第二状态的Widget面板上除了显示有解锁控件外,还可以显示有辅助性信息,如时间信息、天气信息、解锁提示信息等。In some embodiments, in addition to displaying the unlock control, auxiliary information such as time information, weather information, and unlock prompt information may also be displayed on the Widget panel in the second state.
在一些实施例中,J应用响应于接收到的预设操作,在拉起Widget应用的同时,沿所述显示器的横向向右的方向,将少儿模式界面中的内容移动到显示器的右侧内容区中显示。Widget应用启动后,在显示器的左侧内容区中显示第二状态的Widget面板。这样,在显示出Widget面板的同时,可以继续显示少儿模式界面中的内容。In some embodiments, the J application responds to the received preset operation, while pulling up the Widget application, moves the content in the children's mode interface to the right content of the display along the lateral right direction of the display displayed in the area. After the Widget application is started, the Widget panel in the second state is displayed in the left content area of the display. In this way, while the Widget panel is displayed, the content in the child mode interface can be continuously displayed.
在一些实现方式中,少儿模式界面中靠左的部分内容以原显示尺寸显示在右侧内容区中,靠右的另一部分内容隐藏。或者,少儿模式界面中的全部内容以压缩后的显示尺寸显示在右侧内容区中。更为具体的实现方式可以参见上述针对标准模式界面介绍的内容,此处不予赘述。In some implementations, the left part of the content in the children's mode interface is displayed in the right content area at the original display size, and the other right part of the content is hidden. Alternatively, all content in the child mode interface is displayed in the right content area in a compressed display size. For a more specific implementation, please refer to the content introduced above for the standard mode interface, which will not be repeated here.
在另一些实施例中,第二状态的Widget面板叠加在少儿模式界面的内容上显示。其中,第二状态的Widget面板所在图层可以设置为半透明,从而使界面中被遮盖的内容可以透过Widget面板所在图层显示出来。In some other embodiments, the Widget panel in the second state is displayed superimposed on the content of the children's mode interface. Wherein, the layer where the Widget panel in the second state is located can be set to be translucent, so that the covered content in the interface can be displayed through the layer where the Widget panel is located.
图26为本申请一些实施例中示出的用户界面,该用户界面具体为在显示图25所示少儿模式系统主页时,接收到长按左键操作而显示的用户界面。如图26所示,在该用户界面的左侧内容区中显示有Widget面板,该Widget面板上显示有解锁控件和辅助性信息,辅助性信息具体包括时间信息“12:34”、问候语“中午好”以及天气信息“今日-11~2℃,晴转多云”。在该用户界面的右侧内容区中继续显示少儿模式系统主页。值得注意的是,在该示例中,受限于右侧视图显示区的尺寸,少儿模式系统主页中的各项目以原始布局参数,对齐右侧视图显示区的左侧边界显示,少儿模式系统主页中超出用户界面右侧边界的显示内容隐藏。其中,原始布局参数是指各项目在图25中的布局参数。FIG. 26 is a user interface shown in some embodiments of the present application. Specifically, the user interface is a user interface displayed when a long press operation of the left button is received when the home page of the system for children in FIG. 25 is displayed. As shown in Figure 26, a Widget panel is displayed in the content area on the left side of the user interface. The Widget panel displays unlock controls and auxiliary information. The auxiliary information specifically includes time information "12:34", greeting " Good noon" and the weather information "Today -11~2℃, sunny to cloudy". In the content area on the right side of the user interface, the main page of the child mode system continues to be displayed. It is worth noting that, in this example, limited by the size of the display area on the right side, each item in the home page of the system in kids mode is displayed in alignment with the left border of the display area on the right side with the original layout parameters, and the home page of the system in kids mode Displayed content that extends beyond the right border of the user interface is hidden. Wherein, the original layout parameters refer to the layout parameters of each item in FIG. 25 .
图27A为本申请一些实施例中示出的用户界面,该用户界面具体为用户操作Widget面板中解锁控件后,显示的密码输入界面。如图27A所示,在密码输入界面中,显示有可操作的数字软键、删除键,以及密码输入区域。用户可以通过移动焦点选择要输入的数字,通过确认操作输入选择的数字,通过操作删除键删除已输入的数字。应当理解,图27A仅是密码输入界面的一种示例。不同产品中显示的密码输入界面可以不同。比如,在一些实施例中,密码输入界面中的密码输入区域中可输入6位或者8位密码,还可以显示字母和/或符号软键,还可以显示清空键等。FIG. 27A is a user interface shown in some embodiments of the present application. The user interface is specifically the password input interface displayed after the user operates the unlock control in the Widget panel. As shown in FIG. 27A , in the password input interface, operable numeric soft keys, a delete key, and a password input area are displayed. The user can select the number to be input by moving the focus, input the selected number by confirming the operation, and delete the input number by operating the delete key. It should be understood that FIG. 27A is only an example of a password input interface. The password input interface displayed in different products may be different. For example, in some embodiments, a 6-digit or 8-digit password can be input in the password input area of the password input interface, and letters and/or symbol soft keys can also be displayed, and a clear key can also be displayed.
图27B为本申请一些实施例中示出的解锁后的用户界面,该用户界面具体为用户在密码输入界面中输入正确密码后显示的用户界面。如图27B所示,在该用户界面的左侧内容区中显示解锁后的Widget面板,该Widget面板上显示有多个Widget控件,分别为“信号源”、“应用中心”、“城市服务”、“小课堂”、“联系人”、“播放器”、“健身计划”、“标准”、“设备”、“智能摄像头”。少儿模式系统主页中的各项目则整体平移到用户界面的右侧内容区,页面中超出用户界面右侧边界的显示内容隐藏。FIG. 27B is an unlocked user interface shown in some embodiments of the present application. The user interface is specifically the user interface displayed after the user enters a correct password in the password input interface. As shown in Figure 27B, the unlocked Widget panel is displayed in the content area on the left side of the user interface, and there are multiple Widget controls displayed on the Widget panel, which are "signal source", "application center" and "city service". , "Small Classroom", "Contacts", "Player", "Fitness Program", "Standard", "Equipment", "Smart Camera". The items in the homepage of the system for children are shifted to the right content area of the user interface as a whole, and the displayed content on the page that exceeds the right boundary of the user interface is hidden.
在一些实施例中,如果Widget应用验证用户在密码输入界面中输入的密码正确,则将系统属性数据中的模式属性变量修改为第二值或者第三值。In some embodiments, if the Widget application verifies that the password input by the user in the password input interface is correct, then modify the mode attribute variable in the system attribute data to the second value or the third value.
在一些实施例中,J应用轮询系统属性数据中的模式属性变量,当轮询到模式属性系统由第二值或者第三值变化为第一值时,将当前显示的少儿模式界面或者教育模式界面更新为标准模式界面。In some embodiments, the J application polls the mode attribute variable in the system attribute data, and when the polled mode attribute system changes from the second value or the third value to the first value, the currently displayed children's mode interface or education The modal interface is updated to the standard modal interface.
在另一些实施例中,当J应用由后台切换到前台运行时,J应用读取系统属性数据中的模式属性变量。如果读取到的模式属性变量是第一值,则显示标准模式界面。如果读取到的模式属性值是第二值或者第三值,则继续显示少儿模式界面或者教育模式界面。这样,当用户在少儿模式或者教育模式下解锁Widget面板成功,再通过返回指令控制Widget应用退出时,Widget应用将退出前台,J应用将切换到前台,并读取到模式属性值为第一值,从而将当前显示少儿模式或者教育模式界面更新为标准模式界面,即从少儿模式或者教育模式切换到标准模式。In other embodiments, when the J application is switched from the background to the foreground, the J application reads the mode attribute variable in the system attribute data. If the read mode attribute variable is the first value, a standard mode interface is displayed. If the read mode attribute value is the second value or the third value, continue to display the child mode interface or the education mode interface. In this way, when the user successfully unlocks the Widget panel in the children's mode or education mode, and then controls the Widget application to exit through the return command, the Widget application will exit the foreground, and the J application will switch to the foreground, and read the mode attribute value as the first value , so as to update the currently displayed child mode or education mode interface to the standard mode interface, that is, to switch from the child mode or education mode to the standard mode.
在一些实施例中,在第二状态的Widget面板中,Widget控件正常显示,其中指定Widget控件不可用,指定Widget控件是指在少儿模式和/或教育模式下限制使用的Widget控件。具体实现时,Widget应用被J应用拉起后,根据各Widget的配置信息确定各Widget的模式属性,若为少儿模式和/或教育模式,则显示包含不可用标识的Widget控件图标,并将该Widget配置为不可用状态;若为标准模式,则显示不包含不可用标识的Widget控件图标。在这些实施例中,用户可以正常查看Widget面板以获知Widget面板上所有的Widget控件,用户可以直接操作可用的Widget控件,而无法直接操作不可用的Widget控件。In some embodiments, in the Widget panel in the second state, the Widget control is normally displayed, wherein the designated Widget control is unavailable, and the designated Widget control refers to a Widget control whose use is restricted in the children's mode and/or the education mode. During specific implementation, after the Widget application is pulled up by the J application, the mode attribute of each Widget is determined according to the configuration information of each Widget. If it is a children's mode and/or an education mode, a Widget control icon containing an unavailable mark is displayed, and the The Widget is configured as unavailable; if it is in the standard mode, the Widget control icon without the unavailable logo will be displayed. In these embodiments, the user can normally check the Widget panel to know all the Widget controls on the Widget panel, and the user can directly operate the available Widget controls, but cannot directly operate the unavailable Widget controls.
在一些实施例中,当用户选中不可用的Widget控件并确定时,Widget应用响应于该用户操作,显示如图27A所示的密码输入界面,以及接收用户在密码输入界面输入的密码。In some embodiments, when the user selects an unavailable Widget control and determines, the Widget application responds to the user operation by displaying the password input interface as shown in FIG. 27A and receiving the password input by the user on the password input interface.
在一些实现方式中,如果Widget应用验证用户在密码输入界面中输入的密码正确,则Widget应用直接拉起用户所操作的Widget控件对应的应用。该对应的应用启动后,可以在左侧内容区中直接显示该应用的相关内容,也可以全屏显示该应用的界面。In some implementation manners, if the Widget application verifies that the password entered by the user in the password input interface is correct, the Widget application directly launches the application corresponding to the Widget control operated by the user. After the corresponding application is started, the relevant content of the application may be directly displayed in the left content area, or the interface of the application may be displayed in full screen.
而在另一些实现方式中,如果Widget应用验证用户在密码输入界面中输入的密码正确,则将用户所操作的Widget控件激活为可用状态,并撤销其图标上的不可用标识。用户再次操作该Widget控件时,方可打开该Widget控件对应的应用,即显示应用的相关内容。In other implementation manners, if the Widget application verifies that the password entered by the user in the password input interface is correct, activate the Widget control operated by the user to an available state, and cancel the unavailable mark on its icon. When the user operates the Widget control again, the application corresponding to the Widget control can be opened, that is, relevant content of the application is displayed.
图28为本申请在一些示例性实施例中示出的用户界面,该用户界面具体为在显示少儿模式系统主页时,接收到长按左键操作而显示的用户界面。在图28所示用户界面中,在用户界面左侧的视图显示区中显示Widget面板,该Widget面板上显示有多个Widget控件,分别为“信号源”、“应用中心”、“城市服务”、“小课堂”、“联系人”、“播放器”、“健身计划”、“标准”、“设备”、“智能摄像头”。其中,“信号源”、“应用中心”、“城市服务”、“设备”为不可用的Widget控件,其上显示有锁定角标,而其他Widget控件为可用的Widget控件。Fig. 28 is a user interface shown in some exemplary embodiments of the present application. The user interface is specifically a user interface displayed after receiving a long press operation of the left button when the homepage of the system for children is displayed. In the user interface shown in Figure 28, a Widget panel is displayed in the view display area on the left side of the user interface, and there are multiple Widget controls displayed on the Widget panel, which are "Signal Source", "Application Center", and "City Service". , "Small Classroom", "Contacts", "Player", "Fitness Program", "Standard", "Equipment", "Smart Camera". Among them, "Signal Source", "Application Center", "City Service" and "Device" are unavailable Widget controls, on which a lock icon is displayed, while other Widget controls are available Widget controls.
在显示图28所示用户界面时,如果用户选中不可用的“应用中心”控件并确认,Widget应用将响应于用户对“应用中心”的操作,显示如图27A所示的密码输入界面,并接收用户在密码输入界面中输入的密码。在一些实施情形中,如果Widget应用验证用户在密码输入界面中输入的密码正确,则直接拉起应用中心应用模块。应用中心应用模块启动后,可以在左侧内容区中显示多个应用程序图标,该多个应用程序图标即为“应用中心”控件对应的一级项目内容。或者,应用中心应用模块启动后,全屏显示应用中心应用模块的主页,在该主页中显示多个应用程序图标。而在另一些实施情形中,如果Widget应用验证用户在密码输入界面中输入的密码正确,则将“应用中心”控件上的锁定角标撤销。用户需要再次操作该“应用中心”控件,才能在左侧内容区中展开“应用中心”控件对应的多个应用程序图标。When the user interface shown in Figure 28 is displayed, if the user selects the unavailable "Application Center" control and confirms, the Widget application will respond to the user's operation on the "Application Center", display the password input interface as shown in Figure 27A, and Receive the password entered by the user in the password input interface. In some implementation situations, if the Widget application verifies that the password entered by the user in the password input interface is correct, the application center application module is directly launched. After the application module of the application center is started, multiple application program icons may be displayed in the left content area, and the multiple application program icons are the first-level item contents corresponding to the "application center" control. Alternatively, after the application module of the application center is started, the homepage of the application module of the application center is displayed in full screen, and multiple application icons are displayed on the homepage. In other implementation situations, if the Widget application verifies that the password entered by the user in the password input interface is correct, the lock icon on the "application center" control is canceled. The user needs to operate the "Application Center" control again to expand the multiple application icons corresponding to the "Application Center" control in the left content area.
图29示例性为在密码输入界面中输入正确解锁密码后显示的用户界面。与图28所示用户界面不同的 是,在图29中,多个应用程序图标浮于Widget面板上方显示。Fig. 29 exemplarily shows a user interface displayed after a correct unlock password is input in the password input interface. Different from the user interface shown in Figure 28, in Figure 29, multiple application program icons are displayed floating above the Widget panel.
在一些实施例中,不同Widget控件对应的解锁密码相同或者不同。Widget应用通过密码输入界面接收到用户输入的密码后,将收到的密码与用户选中的Widget控件对应的正确密码进行对比,从而确定用户输入的密码是否正确,如果正确,则将用户选中的Widget控件激活为可用的Widget控件。In some embodiments, the unlocking passwords corresponding to different Widget controls are the same or different. After the Widget application receives the password entered by the user through the password input interface, it compares the received password with the correct password corresponding to the Widget control selected by the user to determine whether the password entered by the user is correct. If it is correct, the Widget selected by the user The control is activated as an available Widget control.
在一些实施例中,当用户选中具有锁定角标的Widget控件,并且在密码输入界面中输入正确的解锁密码时,可将Widget面板中所有不可用的Widget控件激活为可用的Widget控件。In some embodiments, when the user selects a Widget control with a lock icon and enters the correct unlock password in the password input interface, all unavailable Widget controls in the Widget panel can be activated as available Widget controls.
沿用前述例子,在显示图28所示用户界面时,如果用户选中“应用中心”控件并确认,Widget应用将响应于用户对“应用中心”的操作,显示如图27A所示的密码输入界面,并接收用户在密码输入界面中输入的密码。如果Widget应用验证用户在密码输入界面中输入的密码正确,则将Widget面板中所有不可用的Widget控件上的锁定角标都撤销,进而显示出图30所示的用户界面。在图30中,“信号源”、“应用中心”、“城市服务”、“设备”控件上的锁定角标均消失,意味着“信号源”、“应用中心”、“城市服务”、“设备”控件均被激活为可用的Widget控件。Using the previous example, when the user interface shown in Figure 28 is displayed, if the user selects the "Application Center" control and confirms, the Widget application will respond to the user's operation on the "Application Center" and display the password input interface as shown in Figure 27A. And receive the password input by the user in the password input interface. If the Widget application verifies that the password entered by the user in the password input interface is correct, the lock icons on all unavailable Widget controls in the Widget panel are canceled, and then the user interface shown in FIG. 30 is displayed. In Figure 30, the lock angle marks on the "Signal Source", "Application Center", "City Service" and "Device" controls all disappear, which means that the "Signal Source", "Application Center", "City Service", " Devices" controls are activated as available Widget controls.
在一些实施例中,在显示如上所述的全局锁定状态或者局部锁定状态下的Widget面板时,用户可以通过操作遥控器上的返回键,或者长按右键,以输入返回指令,控制将Widget面板收起,并返回到标准模式主页或者继续显示少儿模式主页或教育模式主页。具体的,Widget应用接收到输入的返回指令后,退出前台,Widget面板收起。J应用响应于Widget应用从前台退出,切换到前台运行,读取系统属性数据中的模式属性变量。如果读取到的模式属性变量是第一值,则将当前显示的标准模式界面或者少儿模式界面更新为标准模式界面。如果读取到的模式属性值是第二值或者第三值,则继续显示少儿模式界面或者教育模式界面。In some embodiments, when the Widget panel in the global lock state or partial lock state as described above is displayed, the user can operate the return key on the remote control, or press and hold the right button to input a return command to control the Widget panel Collapse and return to the standard mode home page or continue to display the kids mode home page or the education mode home page. Specifically, the Widget application exits the foreground after receiving the input return instruction, and the Widget panel is put away. The J application responds to the exit of the Widget application from the foreground, switches to the foreground to run, and reads the mode attribute variable in the system attribute data. If the read mode attribute variable is the first value, the currently displayed standard mode interface or children's mode interface is updated to the standard mode interface. If the read mode attribute value is the second value or the third value, continue to display the child mode interface or the education mode interface.
在一些实施例中,在显示第一状态的Widget面板或者解锁后的Widget面板时,Widget面板中Widget控件可获取焦点,用户可以通过移动焦点位置选中目标Widget控件进行操作。当焦点落在目标Widget控件上时,用户可以通过操作遥控器上的“确认”按键,点击目标Widget控件。Widget应用接收到对目标Widget控件的操作后,启动目标Widget控件对应的应用,显示应用的相关内容。In some embodiments, when the Widget panel in the first state or the unlocked Widget panel is displayed, the Widget control in the Widget panel can obtain the focus, and the user can select the target Widget control by moving the focus position for operation. When the focus falls on the target Widget control, the user can click the target Widget control by operating the "OK" button on the remote control. After receiving the operation on the target Widget control, the Widget application starts the application corresponding to the target Widget control, and displays relevant content of the application.
在一些实施例中,用户操作的Widget控件对应的应用启动后,可以将应用的一级项目内容显示在预设内容区中,例如,浮于Widget面板、显示在用户界面的左侧内容区中。也可以全屏显示应用的一级页面,如应用主页。In some embodiments, after the application corresponding to the Widget control operated by the user is started, the first-level item content of the application can be displayed in the preset content area, for example, floating on the Widget panel and displayed in the left content area of the user interface . It is also possible to display a first-level page of the application in full screen, such as the home page of the application.
图31示例性为用户选中图10所示Widget面板中“AI小聚助手”控件后显示的用户界面。如图31所示,“AI小聚助手”对应的一级项目内容显示在用户界面左侧的视图显示区中。参阅图31可知,“AI小聚助手”对应的一级项目内容包括“天气”、“信息”、“日历”控件,以及,五日天气变化图以及日程安排信息。在图31中,焦点默认停留在“天气”控件上。此时,用户可以通过操作移动焦点选择其他控件来显示不同的项目内容,例如,当焦点选择“日历”控件时,可以取消显示天气信息,显示本月日历详情,当焦点选择“信息”控件时,则取消显示本月日历详情,显示信息列表。FIG. 31 is an exemplary user interface displayed after the user selects the "AI Gathering Assistant" control in the Widget panel shown in FIG. 10 . As shown in Figure 31, the first-level item content corresponding to the "AI Gathering Assistant" is displayed in the view display area on the left side of the user interface. Referring to Figure 31, we can see that the first-level items corresponding to "AI Xiaoju Assistant" include "weather", "information", and "calendar" controls, as well as five-day weather change charts and schedule information. In Figure 31, the focus stays on the "Weather" control by default. At this point, the user can move the focus to select other controls to display different item content. For example, when the focus is on the "Calendar" control, the weather information can be canceled and the calendar details of this month can be displayed. When the focus is on the "Information" control , the calendar details of this month will be canceled and the information list will be displayed.
图32示例性为用户选中图10所示Widget面板中“应用中心”控件后显示的用户界面。如图32所示,“应用中心”对应的一级项目内容在用户界面左侧的视图显示区中展开,具体包括多个应用程序图标。在显示图32时,焦点默认停留在第一个应用程序图标上,用户可以通过操作移动焦点位置,以选择并操作任意一个应用程序以启动该应用程序。Fig. 32 exemplarily shows the user interface displayed after the user selects the "application center" control in the Widget panel shown in Fig. 10 . As shown in FIG. 32 , the content of the first-level items corresponding to the "application center" is expanded in the view display area on the left side of the user interface, specifically including multiple application program icons. When Fig. 32 is displayed, the focus stays on the first application icon by default, and the user can move the focus position to select and operate any application to start the application.
图33示例性为用户选中图10所示Widget面板中“信号源”控件后显示的用户界面。如图33所示,信号源列表显示在用户界面左侧的视图显示区中,信号源列表由多个信号源选项排列而成,如HDMI1、HDMI2、模拟电视、地面数字等。在图33所示界面中,用户可以通过不断向下移动焦点,将信号源列表中隐藏的信号源选项移动到视图显示区中显示出来。在图33中,焦点默认停留在HDMI1上,用户可以通过操作移动焦点位置,以选择并操作任意一个信号源选项。Fig. 33 exemplarily shows the user interface displayed after the user selects the "signal source" control in the Widget panel shown in Fig. 10 . As shown in Figure 33, the signal source list is displayed in the view display area on the left side of the user interface. The signal source list is arranged by multiple signal source options, such as HDMI1, HDMI2, analog TV, terrestrial digital, etc. In the interface shown in FIG. 33 , the user can move the hidden signal source option in the signal source list to the view display area to display it by continuously moving the focus downward. In Figure 33, the focus stays on HDMI1 by default, and the user can move the focus position by operation to select and operate any signal source option.
在一些实施例中,用户可以通过操作Widget控件对应应用的一级项目内容,触发显示该一级项目内容对应的二级项目内容。In some embodiments, the user can trigger the display of the content of the secondary item corresponding to the content of the primary item by operating the content of the primary item of the corresponding application of the Widget control.
图34示例性为用户选中图10所示Widget面板中“设置”控件后显示的用户界面。如图34所示,“一键加速”、“一键直达”、“播放设置”、“图像模式”以及“声音模式”等多个一级设置项目显示在用户界面左侧的视图显示区中,焦点默认停留在“一键加速”项目上。用户可以通过移动焦点位置,来选择要操作的项目,通过操作选择的一级设置项目,触发显示对应的二级项目内容。例如,如果用户选中“声音模式”项目并确认,则将显示“声音模式”项目对应的二级设置项目。如图35所示,“AI音质”、“影院”、“音乐”、“体育”等“声音模式”对应的二级设置项目显示在用户界面左侧的视图显示区中,用户可以通过移动焦点位置,来选中想要设置的声音模式,或者取消当前设置的声音模式。Fig. 34 exemplarily shows the user interface displayed after the user selects the "Settings" control in the Widget panel shown in Fig. 10 . As shown in Figure 34, multiple first-level setting items such as "one-key acceleration", "one-key direct access", "playback settings", "image mode" and "sound mode" are displayed in the view display area on the left side of the user interface , the focus stays on the "One-Key Acceleration" item by default. The user can select the item to be operated by moving the focus position, and by operating the selected first-level setting item, the content of the corresponding second-level item is triggered to be displayed. For example, if the user selects the "sound mode" item and confirms it, the secondary setting item corresponding to the "sound mode" item will be displayed. As shown in Figure 35, the secondary setting items corresponding to "sound mode" such as "AI sound quality", "cinema", "music", "sports" are displayed in the view display area on the left side of the user interface, and the user can move the focus position to select the sound mode you want to set, or cancel the currently set sound mode.
应当理解,用户通过点击Widget控件而触发显示的内容及其层级,取决于Widget控件对应应用的设计,而本领域技术人员可以根据用户需求设计各应用的相关内容的显示逻辑。It should be understood that the displayed content and its level triggered by the user clicking on the Widget control depend on the design of the application corresponding to the Widget control, and those skilled in the art can design the display logic of the relevant content of each application according to user requirements.
值得注意的是,为了避免用户在探索各层级项目内容时产生困扰,在显示项目内容的视图显示区中显示导航图标。例如,当在显示某个应用对应的二级项目内容时,则在相应视图显示区中显示指示返回上一级的图标。如果当前显示的项目内容还包括下一级项目内容,则在相应视图显示区中显示指示进入下一级的图标。It is worth noting that, in order to avoid confusion for the user when exploring the project content of each level, navigation icons are displayed in the view display area where the project content is displayed. For example, when displaying the content of the secondary item corresponding to a certain application, an icon indicating to return to the previous level is displayed in the display area of the corresponding view. If the currently displayed project content also includes the project content of the next level, an icon indicating entering the next level is displayed in the display area of the corresponding view.
本申请提供的显示设备可在两种模式下工作,分别为第一模式和第二模式,第一模式下可访问的内容包括第二模式下可访问的内容和其他内容,这样,便可通过配置不同模式所能访问的内容,使得用户在某个模式下只能访问允许的内容,而限制访问其他内容。例如,第一模式为标准模式,第二模式为少儿模式或者教育模式。在显示标准模式界面时,用户可访问少儿媒资、教育媒资和其他媒资,而在显示少儿模式 界面或者教育模式界面时,用户仅可访问教育媒资和/或少儿媒资。The display device provided by the present application can work in two modes, which are respectively the first mode and the second mode, and the content accessible in the first mode includes the content accessible in the second mode and other content, so that it can be accessed through Configure the content that can be accessed in different modes, so that users can only access allowed content in a certain mode, while restricting access to other content. For example, the first mode is a standard mode, and the second mode is a children's mode or an education mode. When the standard mode interface is displayed, the user can access children's media resources, educational media resources and other media resources, while when the children's mode interface or the education mode interface is displayed, the user can only access educational media resources and/or children's media resources.
在一些实施例中,用户可以通过预设操作,调出Widget控件面板。当显示设备接收到该预设操作时,首先判断当前模式属性;如果当前模式是第一模式,则显示第一状态的Widget面板,第一状态的Widget面板中展示的所有Widget控件均可用;若当前模式是第二模式,则显示第二状态的Widget面板,第二状态的Widget面板中至少一个Widget控件不可用。这样一来,在第一模式下,用户可打开所有Widget控件,而在第二模式下,用户将无法直接打开那些限制在第二模式下使用的Widget控件。In some embodiments, the user can call out the Widget control panel through a preset operation. When the display device receives the preset operation, it first judges the current mode attribute; if the current mode is the first mode, then displays the Widget panel in the first state, and all Widget controls displayed in the Widget panel in the first state are available; if If the current mode is the second mode, the Widget panel in the second state is displayed, and at least one Widget control in the Widget panel in the second state is unavailable. In this way, in the first mode, the user can open all Widget controls, but in the second mode, the user cannot directly open those Widget controls that are restricted to be used in the second mode.
根据上述实施例提供的显示设备,本申请实施例还提供一种Widget控件显示方法。如图36所示,该方法可以包括下述步骤:According to the display device provided in the foregoing embodiments, the embodiment of the present application further provides a Widget control display method. As shown in Figure 36, the method may include the following steps:
S110A,在显示第一模式或者第二模式下的系统页面时,接收用于展示Widget控件的预设操作。S110A. When displaying the system page in the first mode or the second mode, receive a preset operation for displaying the Widget control.
S120A,响应于该预设操作,判断当前的模式属性。如果当前模式是第一模式,则执行S130A,如果当前模式是第二模式,则执行S140A。S120A, in response to the preset operation, determine the current mode attribute. If the current mode is the first mode, execute S130A, and if the current mode is the second mode, execute S140A.
其中,第一模式下可访问的内容包括第二模式下可访问的内容和其他内容。Wherein, the content accessible in the first mode includes the content accessible in the second mode and other content.
S130A,显示第一状态的Widget面板,所述第一状态的Widget面板中展示的所有Widget控件均可用。S130A. Display the Widget panel in the first state, and all the Widget controls displayed in the Widget panel in the first state are available.
具体的,将第一模式下的系统页面中的内容移动到所述第一内容区中继续显示,在所述第二内容区中显示所述第一状态的Widget面板。Specifically, the content in the system page in the first mode is moved to the first content area for continuous display, and the Widget panel in the first state is displayed in the second content area.
S140A,显示第二状态的Widget面板,所述第二状态的Widget面板中至少一个Widget控件不可用。S140A. Display the Widget panel in the second state, where at least one Widget control in the Widget panel in the second state is unavailable.
具体的,将第二模式下的系统页面中的内容移动到所述第一内容区中继续显示,在所述第二内容区中显示所述第二状态的Widget面板。Specifically, the content in the system page in the second mode is moved to the first content area for continuous display, and the Widget panel in the second state is displayed in the second content area.
在更为具体的实现方式中,包括:将第一模式下或者第二模式下的系统主页中靠左的部分内容以原显示尺寸显示在所述第一内容区中,并将靠右的另一部分内容隐藏;或者,将第一模式下或者第二模式下的系统主页中的全部内容以压缩后的显示尺寸显示在所述第一内容区中。In a more specific implementation, it includes: displaying the left part of the content of the system home page in the first mode or the second mode in the first content area with the original display size, and displaying the other part of the right part A part of the content is hidden; or, all the content of the system home page in the first mode or in the second mode is displayed in the first content area in a compressed display size.
在一些实施例中,第二状态的Widget面板包括隐藏的Widget控件和用于触发显现所述隐藏的Widget控件的解锁控件。本申请提供的显示方法还包括:响应于对所述解锁控件的确认操作,显示密码输入界面;当接收到在所述密码输入界面中输入的正确密码时,控制所述隐藏的Widget控件在Widget面板中显现。In some embodiments, the Widget panel in the second state includes a hidden Widget control and an unlock control for triggering the display of the hidden Widget control. The display method provided by the present application further includes: displaying a password input interface in response to the confirmation operation on the unlock control; when receiving the correct password input in the password input interface, controlling the hidden Widget control displayed in the panel.
在一些实施例中,第二状态的Widget面板中的指定Widget控件不可用,所述指定Widget控件是指在第二模式下限制使用的Widget控件。本申请提供的显示方法还包括:响应于对不可用的Widget控件的确认操作,显示密码输入界面;当接收到在所述密码输入界面中输入的正确密码时,显示操作的所述Widget控件对应的内容;响应于对可用的Widget控件的确认操作,显示操作的所述Widget控件对应的内容。In some embodiments, the designated Widget control in the Widget panel in the second state is unavailable, and the designated Widget control refers to a Widget control whose use is restricted in the second mode. The display method provided by the present application further includes: displaying a password input interface in response to the confirmation operation on the unavailable Widget control; when receiving the correct password input in the password input interface, displaying the corresponding content; in response to the confirmation operation on the available Widget control, display the content corresponding to the operated Widget control.
在一些实施例中,响应于输入指示由第二模式切换到第一模式的操作,将系统属性数据中的模式属性变量设为第一值;响应于输入指示由第一模式切换到第二模式的操作,将系统属性数据中的模式属性变量设为其他值。In some embodiments, in response to the operation of switching from the second mode to the first mode in response to the input, the mode attribute variable in the system property data is set to the first value; in response to the input indicating switching from the first mode to the second mode action to set the pattern attribute variable in the system attribute data to a different value.
在一些实施例中,按照下述步骤确定当前模式:获取系统属性数据中的模式属性变量;如果所述模式属性变量为第一值,确定当前模式是第一模式;如果所述模式属性变量不为第一值,确定当前模式是第二模式。In some embodiments, the current mode is determined according to the following steps: obtaining the mode attribute variable in the system attribute data; if the mode attribute variable is the first value, determining that the current mode is the first mode; if the mode attribute variable is not is the first value, it is determined that the current mode is the second mode.
在一些实施例中,当接收到在所述密码输入界面中输入的正确密码时,将所述模式属性变量设为第一值。对应的Widget面板也根据变化后的模式属性调整In some embodiments, when a correct password input in the password input interface is received, the mode attribute variable is set to a first value. The corresponding Widget panel is also adjusted according to the changed mode attribute
在一些实施例中,所述显示操作的所述Widget控件对应的内容,包括:启动所述Widget控件对应的应用,以及通过所述应用,在所述第二内容区中显示所述应用对应的一级项目内容,或者全屏显示所述应用对应的一级页面。在一些实施例中,本申请提供的显示方法还包括:在显示所述Widget面板时,接收输入的返回指令;获取系统属性数据中的模式属性变量;如果所述模式属性变量为第一值,则撤销所述Widget面板,并显示第一模式下的系统主页;如果所述模式属性变量不为第一值,则撤销所述Widget面板,并显示第二模式下的系统主页。In some embodiments, the displaying the content corresponding to the Widget control includes: starting the application corresponding to the Widget control, and displaying the content corresponding to the application in the second content area through the application. The content of the first-level project, or a full-screen display of the first-level page corresponding to the application. In some embodiments, the display method provided by the present application further includes: when displaying the Widget panel, receiving an input return instruction; acquiring a mode attribute variable in the system attribute data; if the mode attribute variable is the first value, Then cancel the Widget panel and display the system homepage in the first mode; if the mode attribute variable is not the first value, cancel the Widget panel and display the system homepage in the second mode.
在一些实施例中,本申请提供的显示方法还包括:在显示所述应用对应的内容时,接收输入的返回指令;响应于所述返回指令,控制返回到上一级界面,所述上一级界面是指显示所述应用对应的当前内容前的界面。In some embodiments, the display method provided by the present application further includes: when displaying the content corresponding to the application, receiving an input return instruction; in response to the return instruction, returning the control to the upper-level interface, the previous The level interface refers to the interface before displaying the current content corresponding to the application.
在一些实施例中,所述第二状态的Widget面板中不可用的Widget控件的图标上具有不可用标识;当接收到在所述密码输入界面中输入的正确密码时,撤销所述不可用标识。In some embodiments, the icon of the unavailable Widget control in the Widget panel in the second state has an unavailable identification; when the correct password input in the password input interface is received, the unavailable identification is revoked .
图37为本申请一些实施例中组件展示方法的流程图。本发明实施例提供一种显示设备,包括:显示器,被配置为呈现用户界面;与显示器连接的控制器,在执行图37所示的组件展示方法时,控制器被配置为执行下述步骤:Fig. 37 is a flowchart of a component display method in some embodiments of the present application. An embodiment of the present invention provides a display device, including: a display configured to present a user interface; a controller connected to the display, when executing the component display method shown in FIG. 37 , the controller is configured to perform the following steps:
S1B、接收对桌面应用的启动操作,获取桌面应用提供的每个业务模块的业务数据,以及,基于每个业务模块的业务数据在用户界面中展示桌面主页。S1B. Receive an operation to start the desktop application, acquire the service data of each business module provided by the desktop application, and display the desktop homepage in the user interface based on the service data of each service module.
图8为本申请一些实施例中系统主页的示意图;图38为本申请一些实施例中桌面主页的示意图。参见图8,用户启动显示设备,显示设备中呈现系统主页,系统主页中展示桌面应用(J应用)控件图标。参见图38,触发该桌面应用控件图标,执行对桌面应用的启动操作,以在显示设备中呈现桌面主页。Fig. 8 is a schematic diagram of a system homepage in some embodiments of the present application; Fig. 38 is a schematic diagram of a desktop homepage in some embodiments of the present application. Referring to FIG. 8 , the user starts the display device, and the display device presents a system home page, and a desktop application (J application) control icon is displayed on the system home page. Referring to FIG. 38 , the desktop application control icon is triggered to start the desktop application to present the desktop home page on the display device.
在展示桌面主页时,获取桌面应用提供的每个业务模块的业务数据,业务数据用于实现业务模块的功能,业务数据中包括业务ID,业务ID用于表征业务模块。基于每个业务模块的业务数据,按照预设主页布局方式,在用户界面中展示桌面主页,桌面主页中展示有各个业务模块的功能内容。When displaying the desktop homepage, obtain the business data of each business module provided by the desktop application. The business data is used to realize the functions of the business module. The business data includes a business ID, which is used to represent the business module. Based on the business data of each business module, the desktop homepage is displayed in the user interface according to the preset homepage layout mode, and the functional content of each business module is displayed on the desktop homepage.
在一些实施例中,桌面主页中展示J应用提供的各个业务模块,每个业务模块均可基于用户的自定义设置以Widget的形式添加至Widget面板中,以提供该业务模块的快速入口。In some embodiments, each business module provided by the J application is displayed on the home page of the desktop, and each business module can be added to the Widget panel in the form of a Widget based on user-defined settings to provide a quick entry to the business module.
Widget面板展示在桌面主页中,Widget面板的展示方式可与启动桌面应用时,在显示设备的用户界面中展示桌面主页的同时,同步展示Widget面板;或者,在启动桌面应用时,优先在显示设备的用户界面中展示桌面主页,而在基于桌面主页产生预设操作时,再调出Widget面板展示在桌面主页中。The Widget panel is displayed on the home page of the desktop, and the display method of the Widget panel can be displayed synchronously with the desktop home page on the user interface of the display device when the desktop application is started; or, when the desktop application is started, the display device is given priority The desktop homepage is displayed in the user interface of the desktop, and when a preset operation is generated based on the desktop homepage, the Widget panel is called out and displayed on the desktop homepage.
在一些实施例中,在显示设备运行时Widget面板通常隐藏显示,在用户需要通过Widget面板快速启动某个功能(如某个业务模块实现的功能)时,可基于预设操作可调出Widget面板展示在桌面主页中,预设操作是指用户长按遥控器左键或其他预设功能键。如果用户想要启动某个功能,则在Widget面板中触发对应的Widget,以直接启动该功能,即启动桌面应用提供的某个业务模块。In some embodiments, the Widget panel is usually hidden when the display device is running, and when the user needs to quickly start a certain function (such as a function realized by a certain business module) through the Widget panel, the Widget panel can be called out based on a preset operation Displayed on the desktop homepage, the default operation refers to the user long pressing the left button on the remote control or other preset function keys. If the user wants to start a certain function, trigger the corresponding Widget in the Widget panel to directly start the function, that is, start a certain business module provided by the desktop application.
在一些实施例中,用户可在启动桌面应用时,可同时为某个业务模块注册对应的Widget。此时,在桌面应用启动时,收集所有业务模块的WidgetManager,触发业务模块相关的组件信息注册,存入WidgetServer。In some embodiments, the user can simultaneously register a corresponding Widget for a certain business module when starting the desktop application. At this time, when the desktop application is started, the WidgetManagers of all business modules are collected, the registration of component information related to the business modules is triggered, and stored in the WidgetServer.
具体地,在为业务模块注册Widget时,控制器被进一步配置为执行下述步骤:Specifically, when registering a Widget for a business module, the controller is further configured to perform the following steps:
步骤101、在为业务模块注册Widget时,获取每个远端业务模块的业务数据,远端业务模块包括桌面应用提供的业务模块或第三方应用。Step 101 , when registering a Widget for a business module, obtain business data of each remote business module, where the remote business module includes a business module provided by a desktop application or a third-party application.
步骤102、将每个远端业务模块的业务数据发送至数据中心模块,数据中心模块用于对每个远端业务模块的业务数据进行处理。Step 102: Send the service data of each remote service module to the data center module, and the data center module is used to process the service data of each remote service module.
步骤103、在业务数据处理完毕后,基于每个远端业务模块的业务ID,为每个远端业务模块分别配置一个业务组件管理模块。Step 103. After the service data is processed, configure a service component management module for each remote service module based on the service ID of each remote service module.
步骤104、调用目标业务组件管理模块,为目标远端业务模块注册对应的Widget,以及,将注册Widget产生的组件信息与对应的业务ID存入组件管理模块。Step 104, calling the target service component management module, registering the corresponding Widget for the target remote service module, and storing the component information and the corresponding service ID generated by registering the Widget into the component management module.
再次参见图5所示的桌面组件框架,在为业务模块注册Widget时,可获取至少一个用于进行组件展示的远端业务模块的业务数据。远端业务模块包括桌面应用提供的业务模块(如图5中的业务模块A)或第三方应用(如图5中的应用B)。Referring to the desktop component framework shown in FIG. 5 again, when registering a Widget for a business module, at least one business data of a remote business module for component display can be obtained. The remote service modules include service modules provided by desktop applications (such as service module A in FIG. 5 ) or third-party applications (such as application B in FIG. 5 ).
在启动桌面应用时,同步拉起数据中心模块(WidgetService),以做好接收远端业务模块的业务数据的准备。因此,在有基于新业务模块的Widget注册时,由数据中心模块接收远端业务模块的业务数据。When starting the desktop application, pull up the data center module (WidgetService) synchronously, so as to be ready to receive the business data of the remote business module. Therefore, when a Widget based on a new service module is registered, the data center module receives the service data of the remote service module.
在数据中心模块对远端业务模的业务数据进行简单处理后,为每一个远端业务模块分别配置一个业务组件管理模块。一个远端业务模块对应一个业务ID,因此,可由该业务ID表征对应的业务组件管理模块(WidgetManager),一个业务模块对应一个业务组件管理模块。After the data center module simply processes the business data of the remote business modules, a business component management module is configured for each remote business module. A remote service module corresponds to a service ID, therefore, the service ID can represent the corresponding service component management module (WidgetManager), and a service module corresponds to a service component management module.
为实现Widget的注册,数据中心模块将目标远端业务模的业务数据发送至对应的目标业务组件管理模块,以由目标业务组件管理模块为目标远端业务模块注册对应的Widget。例如,将业务模块A的业务数据发送至业务组件管理模块A进行组件注册,将业务模块B的业务数据发送至业务组件管理模块B进行组件注册。To realize Widget registration, the data center module sends the business data of the target remote business model to the corresponding target business component management module, so that the target business component management module registers the corresponding Widget for the target remote business module. For example, send the business data of business module A to business component management module A for component registration, and send the business data of business module B to business component management module B for component registration.
在目标业务组件管理模块对目标业务模块进行组件注册时,可同步产生组件数据和Widget面板信息,构成目标业务模块的组件信息。例如,业务模块A的组件信息A包括组件数据A和Widget面板信息A,业务模块B的组件信息B包括组件数据B和Widget面板信息B。When the target business component management module registers components of the target business module, component data and Widget panel information can be synchronously generated to form component information of the target business module. For example, component information A of business module A includes component data A and Widget panel information A, and component information B of business module B includes component data B and Widget panel information B.
在目标业务组件管理模块对目标业务模块进行组件注册完成后,需进一步对目标业务模块的组件信息进行存储,用于存储组件信息的模块为组件管理模块(WidgetServer)。因此,在完成注册后,目标业务组件管理模块将为目标业务模块注册Widget产生的组件信息与对应的业务ID存入组件管理模块(WidgetServer)。组件管理模块按照业务ID存储对应业务模块的组件信息,以便于区分和调用不同业务模块的组件信息。After the component registration of the target business module by the target business component management module is completed, the component information of the target business module needs to be further stored, and the module for storing component information is the component management module (WidgetServer). Therefore, after the registration is completed, the target business component management module will store the component information generated by the target business module registration Widget and the corresponding business ID into the component management module (WidgetServer). The component management module stores the component information of the corresponding business module according to the business ID, so as to distinguish and call the component information of different business modules.
上述为业务模块注册Widget的方式可应用在桌面应用启动时,还可应用在桌面应用运行过程中,只要存在为业务模块注册Widget的情况,均可采用上述方式实现注册。The above method of registering a Widget for a business module can be applied when the desktop application is started, and can also be applied during the running process of the desktop application. As long as there is a situation of registering a Widget for a business module, the above method can be used to realize the registration.
S2B、在展示Widget面板时,调用业务组件管理模块从组件管理模块中获取每个业务ID对应的业务模块的组件信息,并发送至组件展示模块,组件信息是指桌面应用提供的业务模块在注册Widget时产生的信息,组件信息包括组件数据和Widget面板信息,组件数据是指业务ID表征的业务模块所需在Widget面板上展示的数据,Widget面板信息是指Widget展示的界面布局信息。S2B. When displaying the Widget panel, call the business component management module to obtain the component information of the business module corresponding to each business ID from the component management module, and send it to the component display module. The component information refers to the registration of the business module provided by the desktop application Widget information. Component information includes component data and widget panel information. Component data refers to the data required to be displayed on the widget panel by the business module represented by the business ID. Widget panel information refers to the interface layout information displayed by the widget.
在启动桌面应用后,在显示设备的用户界面中呈现桌面主页。在桌面主页展示过程中,可同步展示Widget面板,或者基于预设操作调出Widget面板展示在桌面主页中。那么,在需要展示Widget面板时,基于图5所示的桌面组件框架,调用业务组件管理模块从组件管理模块中获取每个业务ID对应的业务模块的组件信息,并发送至组件展示模块进行展示。After the desktop application is started, a desktop homepage is presented in a user interface of the display device. During the display of the desktop homepage, the Widget panel can be displayed synchronously, or the Widget panel can be called up based on a preset operation and displayed on the desktop homepage. Then, when the Widget panel needs to be displayed, based on the desktop component framework shown in Figure 5, call the business component management module to obtain the component information of the business module corresponding to each business ID from the component management module, and send it to the component display module for display .
组件管理模块中存储有所有可进行组件展示的业务模块的组件信息,因此,在需要呈现Widget面板时,需要将所有业务模块的组件信息进行展示。The component management module stores component information of all business modules capable of displaying components. Therefore, when the Widget panel needs to be presented, the component information of all business modules needs to be displayed.
在桌面应用启动时,如果未进行新业务模块的组件注册,则由不同业务模块对应的业务组件管理模块从组件管理模块中获取历史添加的组件信息。即基于历史添加的每个业务ID,由对应的业务组件管理模块从组件管理模块中获取业务ID对应业务模块的组件信息。When the desktop application starts, if the component registration of the new business module is not performed, the business component management module corresponding to the different business modules obtains the historically added component information from the component management module. That is, based on each business ID added in history, the corresponding business component management module obtains the component information of the business module corresponding to the business ID from the component management module.
在桌面应用启动时,如果进行新业务模块的组件注册,则在查询历史添加的组件信息之外,还需从组件管理模块中获取新注册的组件信息。即基于新注册的每个业务ID,由对应的业务组件管理模块从组件管理模块中获取业务ID对应业务模块的组件信息。When the desktop application starts, if the component registration of the new business module is performed, in addition to querying the historically added component information, it is also necessary to obtain the newly registered component information from the component management module. That is, based on each newly registered service ID, the corresponding service component management module obtains the component information of the service module corresponding to the service ID from the component management module.
在获取到所有需要展示的业务模块的组件信息之后,由每个业务组件管理模块将各自获取到的业务模块的组件信息发送至组件展示模块,以由组件展示模块基于每个业务模块的组件信息完成Widget面板的展示。After obtaining the component information of all business modules that need to be displayed, each business component management module sends the component information of the business modules obtained to the component display module, so that the component display module is based on the component information of each business module Complete the display of the Widget panel.
在一些实施例中,在用户启动桌面应用,在显示设备中呈现桌面主页的同时显示Widget面板时,由 于桌面主页的生成和Widget面板生成所获取数据的用时可能不同,导致Widget面板的显示会延后桌面主页的显示。此时,为保证Widget面板中能够展示数据,避免让用户误会界面显示出错,可先使用默认数据展示Widget面板。例如,默认数据包括默认图片和默认文字,基于默认图片与默认文字生成Widget面板,以及时展示出来。待基于桌面组件框架从组件管理模块中获取缓存的组件信息后,再将各个业务模块的组件信息替换展示在Widget面板中。In some embodiments, when the user starts the desktop application and displays the Widget panel while the desktop home page is presented on the display device, the display of the Widget panel may be delayed because the generation of the desktop home page and the data acquired by the Widget panel may be different. The display of the back desktop home page. At this time, in order to ensure that the data can be displayed in the Widget panel and avoid misunderstanding the interface display errors for users, you can first use the default data to display the Widget panel. For example, the default data includes the default picture and default text, and the Widget panel is generated based on the default picture and default text, and displayed in time. After the cached component information is obtained from the component management module based on the desktop component framework, the component information of each business module is replaced and displayed in the Widget panel.
S3B、调用组件展示模块基于每个业务ID对应的组件数据和Widget面板信息,生成Widget面板,展示在桌面主页中,Widget面板中展示有数个用于提供各个业务模块启动入口的Widget。S3B. The calling component display module generates a Widget panel based on the component data corresponding to each business ID and the Widget panel information, and displays it on the desktop homepage. The Widget panel displays several Widgets for providing the startup entry of each business module.
组件展示模块在接收到每个业务组件管理模块发送的对应业务模块的组件信息之后,即可基于每个业务模块的组件信息,生成Widget面板,展示在桌面主页中。每个业务模块生成对应的Widget,布局在Widget面板上,触发某个Widget,即可实现该Widget对应的业务模块的快速启动。After the component display module receives the component information of the corresponding business module sent by each business component management module, it can generate a Widget panel based on the component information of each business module and display it on the home page of the desktop. Each business module generates a corresponding Widget, lays it out on the Widget panel, and triggers a Widget to realize the quick start of the business module corresponding to the Widget.
为此,控制器在执行调用组件展示模块基于每个业务ID对应的组件数据和Widget面板信息,生成Widget面板,被进一步配置为执行下述步骤:To this end, the controller generates a Widget panel based on the component data and Widget panel information corresponding to each business ID when executing the calling component display module, and is further configured to perform the following steps:
步骤31D、调用组件展示模块基于每个业务ID对应的Widget面板信息,生成包括多个Widget的组件展示框架,一个业务ID对应一个Widget。Step 31D, calling the component display module to generate a component display frame including multiple Widgets based on the Widget panel information corresponding to each service ID, one service ID corresponding to one Widget.
步骤32D、将每个业务ID对应的组件数据展示在对应的Widget上,形成Widget面板,一个Widget对应一个业务模块。In step 32D, the component data corresponding to each service ID is displayed on the corresponding Widget to form a Widget panel, and a Widget corresponds to a service module.
组件信息中的Widget面板信息用于确定每个业务模块对应Widget的布局和大小(长宽尺寸),因此,Widget面板中在展示每个业务模块对应的Widget时,可按照每个Widget的尺寸进行布局和排序。组件信息中的组件数据用于确定每个Widget上所展示的对应业务模块的信息,如业务模块的名称、图标、简介内容等。The Widget panel information in the component information is used to determine the layout and size (length and width) of the Widget corresponding to each business module. Therefore, when displaying the Widget corresponding to each business module in the Widget panel, it can be displayed according to the size of each Widget. layout and sorting. The component data in the component information is used to determine the information of the corresponding business module displayed on each Widget, such as the name, icon, and brief introduction of the business module.
因此,在进行桌面Widget面板展示时,组件展示模块基于每个业务ID对应的业务模块的Widget面板信息,确定每个业务模块对应的Widget的布局和排序。在完成Widget布局和排序后,将每个业务ID对应业务模块的组件数据分别展示在对应的Widget上,形成Widget面板。业务ID、业务模块与Widget一一对应。Therefore, when displaying the desktop Widget panel, the component display module determines the layout and sorting of the Widgets corresponding to each service module based on the Widget panel information of the service module corresponding to each service ID. After completing the Widget layout and sorting, the component data of each business ID corresponding to the business module is displayed on the corresponding Widget to form a Widget panel. There is a one-to-one correspondence between business ID, business module and Widget.
业务模块的组件数据中还包括点击等触发操作,如果用户想要快速启动桌面应用提供的某个业务模块,则在Widget面板中找到该业务模块对应的Widget,触发该Widget,可直接进入对应业务模块的主页,实现该业务模块的快速启动。The component data of the business module also includes trigger operations such as clicking. If the user wants to quickly start a certain business module provided by the desktop application, he can find the corresponding Widget of the business module in the Widget panel, trigger the Widget, and directly enter the corresponding business The home page of the module to realize the quick start of the business module.
在一些实施例中,在Widget面板中展示Widget时,Widget面板上设有多个具有相同尺寸、且规则排列的栅格网。由于不同的Widget对应不同的组件尺寸,所以不同的Widget占据的栅格数量不同。In some embodiments, when displaying the Widget in the Widget panel, the Widget panel is provided with a plurality of regular grids with the same size. Since different Widgets correspond to different component sizes, the number of grids occupied by different Widgets is different.
图39为本申请一些实施例中Widget面板的示意图。为简化作图,未展示实际显示中的桌面主页部分,需要注意的是,Widget面板和桌面主页是两个独立的显示模块,Widget面板可以独立与桌面主页外进行不同显示方式的设置。参见图39,例如,“我的家”组件占据横向的3个栅格,则对应的组件尺寸为3×1(即横向为3个控件单位,纵向占据一个控件单位,后续尺寸表述不再重复解释);“我的应用”组件占据横向的2个栅格,则对应的组件尺寸为2×1;“快捷设置”组件占据1个栅格,则对应的组件尺寸为1×1;“媒体中心”组件占据一个栅格,则对应的组件尺寸为1×1。Fig. 39 is a schematic diagram of a Widget panel in some embodiments of the present application. In order to simplify the drawing, the part of the desktop homepage actually displayed is not shown. It should be noted that the Widget panel and the desktop homepage are two independent display modules, and the Widget panel can be set independently from the desktop homepage in different display modes. Refer to Figure 39. For example, if the "My Home" component occupies 3 grids in the horizontal direction, the corresponding component size is 3×1 (that is, 3 control units in the horizontal direction and 1 control unit in the vertical direction, and the subsequent size expressions will not be repeated. Explanation); "My App" component occupies 2 horizontal grids, and the corresponding component size is 2×1; "Quick Settings" component occupies 1 grid, and the corresponding component size is 1×1; "Media Center" component occupies a grid, and the corresponding component size is 1×1.
将各个Widget按照各自的组件尺寸进行拼接和排序,使得拼接后的多个Widget横向所占据的栅格总数与Widget面板预设的横向栅格总数相同,竖向栅格数量可实时扩展,即Widget面板的横向展示栅格总数不变,而纵向展示栅格总数可变。Splicing and sorting each Widget according to their respective component sizes, so that the total number of horizontal grids occupied by multiple Widgets after splicing is the same as the total number of horizontal grids preset by the Widget panel, and the number of vertical grids can be expanded in real time, that is, Widget The total number of horizontally displayed grids of the panel remains unchanged, while the total number of vertically displayed grids is variable.
在一些实施例中,如果新增加一个业务模块对应的Widget,则在Widget面板中原展示的各个Widget基础上新展示一个Widget。若该Widget的组件尺寸较大,横向无法完全展示,则向下自动扩展一行进行展示。如果将Widget面板中展示的某个Widget删除,则纵向自动收缩。In some embodiments, if a Widget corresponding to a business module is newly added, a new Widget is displayed on the basis of each Widget originally displayed in the Widget panel. If the component size of the Widget is too large to be fully displayed in the horizontal direction, it will automatically expand one row downward for display. If a Widget displayed in the Widget panel is deleted, it will automatically shrink vertically.
在一些实施例中,新增组件时位置的确定方式可以是:获取新增的Widget的组件尺寸,确定当前所有控件所在位置对应的矩形区域中的的空位是否可容纳新增的Widget的组件的尺寸,如果可以容纳,在将新增的Widget的组件邻近已有组件放置,如果不能,则在下方自动扩展一行放置。In some embodiments, the method of determining the position when adding a component may be: obtain the component size of the newly added Widget, and determine whether the vacancy in the rectangular area corresponding to the position of all current controls can accommodate the component of the newly added Widget If the size can be accommodated, the newly added Widget component will be placed adjacent to the existing component, if not, it will be automatically extended by one row below.
在一些实施例中,确定当前所有控件所在位置对应的矩形区域中的的空位,并确定空位区域所能形成的位置组合,确定形成的位置组合中是否包含新增的Widget的组件的尺寸。示例性的田字形分布的四个空位,按照空位分割技术可以分割成如下尺寸的空位:1×1、1×2、2×1、2×2。空位分割技术可以利用现有技术实现。In some embodiments, determine the vacancy in the rectangular area corresponding to the positions of all current controls, determine the position combination that can be formed in the vacancy area, and determine whether the formed position combination includes the size of the newly added Widget component. The four vacancies distributed in an exemplary square shape can be divided into vacancies of the following sizes according to the vacancy segmentation technology: 1×1, 1×2, 2×1, 2×2. The slot segmentation technology can be implemented using existing technologies.
在一些实施例中,在下方自动扩展一行时,需要根据确定的新增的Widget的组件的高度,确定扩展的一行的高度,然后再扩展出的新的一行中放置新增的Widget的组件。示例性的,如果新增的Widget的组件的高度为2,则需要增加高位为2的新增行;如果新增的Widget的组件的高度为1,则需要增加高位为1的新增行。In some embodiments, when automatically extending a row below, it is necessary to determine the height of the expanded row according to the determined height of the newly added Widget component, and then place the newly added Widget component in the expanded new row. Exemplarily, if the height of the component of the newly added Widget is 2, it is necessary to add a new line whose high bit is 2;
在一些实施例中,Widget面板总是在桌面应用中加载,即Widget面板展示在桌面主页中的某个区域位置,在其他页面无法启动Widget面板进行展示。In some embodiments, the Widget panel is always loaded in the desktop application, that is, the Widget panel is displayed in a certain area on the homepage of the desktop, and the Widget panel cannot be activated for display on other pages.
在一些实施例中,桌面主页可以切换不同的TAB进行不同的显示。其他页面是从左面主页任意的TAB下的控件对应的二级页面,或该二级页面又跳转的非桌面主页的三级页面。In some embodiments, the home page of the desktop can switch between different TABs for different display. Other pages are the second-level pages corresponding to the controls under any TAB on the home page on the left, or the third-level pages of non-desktop home pages that are redirected from the second-level pages.
在一些实施例中,如果显示设备在启动时直接进入广电信号源,如直接播放电视节目,此时,显示设备中未展示系统主页,则无法进入桌面主页,即无法产生启动业务模块或Widget面板的预设操作,即无法调出Widget面板进行展示。In some embodiments, if the display device directly enters the radio and television signal source when starting, such as directly playing a TV program, at this time, the display device does not display the system home page, then it is impossible to enter the desktop home page, that is, the startup service module or Widget panel cannot be generated The default operation, that is, the Widget panel cannot be called up for display.
在一些实施例中,接收用户移动焦点的指令,在焦点移动到页面的左或右边界时,响应与用户继续移 动焦点的指定,判断当前页面是否是桌面主页,如果是,则将桌面主页向相反的方向移动,并在显示界面上空出的位置显示Widget面板。In some embodiments, an instruction to move the focus from the user is received, and when the focus moves to the left or right border of the page, in response to the designation of the user continuing to move the focus, it is judged whether the current page is the desktop homepage, and if so, the desktop homepage is moved to Move in the opposite direction, and display the Widget panel at the vacant position on the display interface.
在一些实施例中,在显示设备中呈现桌面主页时,如果用户想要启动不同应用,例如电视里安装的第三方云视听应用,需要将桌面应用(J应用)置为后台/撤销线程后再启动云视听应用的界面。而在云视听应用展示状态下,无法调出Widget面板,只有回到桌面主页后才能打开。In some embodiments, when the desktop home page is presented on the display device, if the user wants to start a different application, such as a third-party cloud audio-visual application installed in the TV, the desktop application (J application) needs to be set to the background/cancel the thread and then Start the interface of the cloud audio-visual application. In the display state of the cloud audio-visual application, the Widget panel cannot be called up, and it can only be opened after returning to the home page of the desktop.
可见,本申请提供的一种显示设备,其配置桌面组件框架,通过桌面组件框架实现桌面Widget面板中展示的各个Widget的自定义布局,不受系统限制,可实现丰富的界面效果,用户体验好。It can be seen that the display device provided by the present application is equipped with a desktop component framework, and realizes the custom layout of each Widget displayed in the desktop Widget panel through the desktop component framework, which is not limited by the system, and can realize rich interface effects and good user experience. .
在一些实施例中,Widget面板中展示的某个Widget对应的业务模块发生数据变化时,可对Widget的展示内容进行刷新。数据刷新方式包括发生数据变化的业务模块主动通知到桌面应用,以及,Widget面板按照一定的时间间隔主动从数据中心模块获取每个业务模块的数据变化。In some embodiments, when a data change occurs in a business module corresponding to a certain Widget displayed in the Widget panel, the displayed content of the Widget may be refreshed. The data refresh method includes actively notifying the desktop application of the business module that has data changes, and the Widget panel actively obtains the data change of each business module from the data center module at a certain time interval.
在一些实施例中,在采用业务模块主动通知桌面应用进行数据刷新的方式时,控制器被进一步配置为执行下述步骤:In some embodiments, when the business module proactively notifies the desktop application to perform data refresh, the controller is further configured to perform the following steps:
步骤41D、在目标业务模块产生信息更新时,调用数据中心模块获取目标业务模块产生的新组件信息,以及,基于目标业务模块的目标业务ID,将目标业务模块的新组件信息发送至目标业务ID对应的目标业务组件管理模块。Step 41D, when the target business module generates an information update, call the data center module to obtain the new component information generated by the target business module, and, based on the target business ID of the target business module, send the new component information of the target business module to the target business ID The corresponding target business component management module.
步骤42D、调用目标业务组件管理模块将目标业务ID对应的新组件信息发送至组件展示模块。Step 42D, calling the target business component management module to send the new component information corresponding to the target business ID to the component display module.
步骤43D、调用组件展示模块基于目标业务ID确定Widget面板中对应的目标Widget,以及,基于目标业务ID对应的新组件信息更新目标Widget的信息展示,实现Widget面板中展示信息的更新。Step 43D, call the component display module to determine the corresponding target Widget in the Widget panel based on the target service ID, and update the information display of the target Widget based on the new component information corresponding to the target service ID, so as to update the displayed information in the Widget panel.
在采用业务模块主动通知桌面应用进行数据刷新的方式时,产生数据变化的目标业务模块主动通知桌面应用以刷新Widget面板中对应Widget的展示内容,此时,产生数据变化的目标业务模块将数据变化发送至数据中心模块(WidgetService)。When the business module actively notifies the desktop application to refresh data, the target business module that generates data changes actively notifies the desktop application to refresh the display content of the corresponding Widget in the Widget panel. At this time, the target business module that generates data changes will update the data Sent to the data center module (WidgetService).
目标业务模块可产生的数据变化包括组件数据变化或Widget面板信息变化,组件数据变化可包括需要进行展示的信息发生变化或者触发操作方式发生变化,Widget面板信息变化包括样式或布局等发生变化。因此,可基于目标业务模块的变化数据产生新组件信息,将新组件信息主动发生至数据中心模块。The data changes that can be generated by the target business module include component data changes or Widget panel information changes. Component data changes can include changes in information that needs to be displayed or changes in trigger operation methods, and changes in Widget panel information include changes in style or layout. Therefore, new component information can be generated based on the change data of the target business module, and the new component information can be actively generated to the data center module.
数据中心模块对目标业务模块的新组件信息进行简单处理后,将目标业务模块的新组件信息分发至与目标业务模块对应的目标业务组件管理模块。在分发时,可基于目标业务模块的目标业务ID确定用于管理目标业务模块组件信息的目标业务组件管理模块(WidgetManager)。After the data center module simply processes the new component information of the target business module, it distributes the new component information of the target business module to the target business component management module corresponding to the target business module. When distributing, the target business component management module (WidgetManager) for managing component information of the target business module can be determined based on the target business ID of the target business module.
为实现Widget面板的数据刷新,调用目标业务组件管理模块将目标业务ID对应的新组件信息发送至组件展示模块,由组件展示模块基于新组件信息更新Widget面板中对应Widget的展示内容。同时,为及时更新组件管理模块中的缓存数据,目标业务组件管理模块基于目标业务ID同步将对应的新组件信息发送至组件管理模块进行存储。In order to refresh the data of the Widget panel, the target business component management module is called to send the new component information corresponding to the target business ID to the component display module, and the component display module updates the display content of the corresponding Widget in the Widget panel based on the new component information. At the same time, in order to update the cached data in the component management module in time, the target service component management module synchronously sends the corresponding new component information to the component management module for storage based on the target service ID.
在新组件信息表征目标业务模块产生数据变化的是组件数据时,例如,目标业务模块为联系人应用端,如果用户在应用端新添加/删除一个联系人,则变化的组件数据为联系人信息。在将联系人信息基于桌面组件框架传递给组件展示模块后,由目标业务模块的目标业务ID,确定Widget面板中的目标Widget,为“联系人”组件。因此,将新添加的联系人信息更新到“联系人”组件的展示内容中,或者,将删除的联系人信息从“联系人”组件中删除,实现Widget面板中展示信息的更新。When the new component information indicates that the data change of the target business module is component data, for example, the target business module is the contact application side, if the user adds/deletes a new contact on the application side, the changed component data is the contact information . After the contact information is transmitted to the component display module based on the desktop component framework, the target Widget in the Widget panel is determined by the target business ID of the target business module as the "contact" component. Therefore, the newly added contact information is updated to the display content of the "Contact" component, or the deleted contact information is deleted from the "Contact" component, so as to update the display information in the Widget panel.
在新组件信息表征目标业务模块产生数据变化的是Widget面板信息时,例如,目标业务模块为联系人应用端,如果“联系人”组件的样式为方形,,现将组件样式更改为圆形,那么变化的Widget面板信息为组件样式。在将组件样式信息基于桌面组件框架传递给组件展示模块后,由目标业务模块的目标业务ID,确定Widget面板中的目标Widget为“联系人”组件。因此,将“联系人”组件的组件样式由原来的方形更新为圆形,实现Widget面板中展示信息的更新。When the new component information indicates that the data change of the target business module is the Widget panel information, for example, the target business module is the contact application side, if the style of the "Contact" component is square, now change the component style to a circle, Then change the Widget panel information to the component style. After the component style information is transmitted to the component display module based on the desktop component framework, the target Widget in the Widget panel is determined to be the "contact" component by the target business ID of the target business module. Therefore, update the component style of the "Contact" component from the original square shape to a circle shape to update the information displayed in the Widget panel.
可见,在桌面应用中提供的某个业务模块产生数据变化时,由该业务模块主动通知桌面应用,实时更新Widget面板中展示信息,可以很方便的实现动态组件,Widget面板展示效果更好。It can be seen that when a business module provided in the desktop application changes data, the business module actively notifies the desktop application and updates the information displayed on the Widget panel in real time, which can easily implement dynamic components, and the display effect of the Widget panel is better.
在一些实施例中,在采用Widget面板主动获取业务模块的变化数据进行数据刷新的方式时,控制器被进一步配置为执行下述步骤:In some embodiments, when the Widget panel actively acquires the changed data of the business module for data refresh, the controller is further configured to perform the following steps:
步骤51D、在间隔刷新Widget面板展示信息时,按照预设间隔,调用目标业务组件管理模块从数据中心模块获取目标业务模块产生的新组件信息,以及,将目标业务模块产生的新组件信息发送至组件展示模块;Step 51D, when refreshing the display information on the Widget panel at intervals, call the target business component management module to obtain the new component information generated by the target business module from the data center module according to the preset interval, and send the new component information generated by the target business module to Component display module;
步骤52D、调用组件展示模块基于目标业务ID确定Widget面板中对应的目标Widget,以及,基于目标业务ID对应的新组件信息更新目标Widget的信息展示,实现Widget面板中展示信息的间隔刷新。Step 52D, call the component display module to determine the corresponding target Widget in the Widget panel based on the target service ID, and update the information display of the target Widget based on the new component information corresponding to the target service ID, so as to realize the interval refresh of the displayed information in the Widget panel.
在采用Widget面板主动获取业务模块的变化数据进行数据刷新的方式时,由Widget面板主动请求目标业务模块返回变化数据,此时,目标业务模块接收到请求后将自身产生的新组件信息发送至数据中心模块,经过简单数据处理后,再由目标业务模块(目标业务ID)对应的业务组件管理模块从数据中心模块获取目标业务模块产生的新组件信息。When the Widget panel actively obtains the change data of the business module for data refresh, the Widget panel actively requests the target business module to return the change data. At this time, the target business module sends the new component information generated by itself to the data after receiving the request. The central module, after simple data processing, obtains new component information generated by the target business module from the data center module by the business component management module corresponding to the target business module (target business ID).
为实现Widget面板的数据刷新,调用目标业务组件管理模块将目标业务ID对应的新组件信息发送至组件展示模块,由组件展示模块基于新组件信息更新Widget面板中对应Widget的展示内容。同时,为及时更新组件管理模块中的缓存数据,目标业务组件管理模块基于目标业务ID同步将对应的新组件信息发送至组件管理模块进行存储。In order to refresh the data of the Widget panel, the target business component management module is called to send the new component information corresponding to the target business ID to the component display module, and the component display module updates the display content of the corresponding Widget in the Widget panel based on the new component information. At the same time, in order to update the cached data in the component management module in time, the target service component management module synchronously sends the corresponding new component information to the component management module for storage based on the target service ID.
在一些实施例中,可设定Widget面板间隔更新信息的预设间隔为30分钟,那么调用目标业务组件管理模块主动获取目标模块的新组件信息的预设间隔也为30分钟。预设间隔还可为其他数值,不做具体限 定。In some embodiments, the preset interval for updating information on the Widget panel can be set as 30 minutes, and then the preset interval for invoking the target business component management module to actively obtain the new component information of the target module is also 30 minutes. The preset interval may also be other values, which are not specifically limited.
图40为本申请一些实施例中Widget面板中播放器Widget数据刷新的示意图。在新组件信息表征目标业务模块产生数据变化的是组件数据时,例如,目标业务模块为播放器,在Widget面板中对应的目标Widget为“播放器”组件。参见图40中(a),如果“播放器”组件原展示歌曲A、B、C,在经过预设间隔30分钟后,由播放器对应的目标业务组件管理模块主动通过数据中心模块请求播放器返回当前播放信息。参见图40中(b),如果当前播放信息为歌曲A、B、C、D、E,则在Widget面板中的“播放器”组件的展示内容由“歌曲A、B、C”变更为“歌曲A、B、C、D、E”,以将播放器的最新播放信息自动呈现给用户,实现Widget面板中展示信息的间隔刷新。Fig. 40 is a schematic diagram of updating player Widget data in the Widget panel in some embodiments of the present application. When the new component information indicates that the data change of the target business module is component data, for example, the target business module is a player, and the corresponding target Widget in the Widget panel is a "player" component. Referring to (a) in Figure 40, if the "player" component originally displayed songs A, B, and C, after a preset interval of 30 minutes, the management module of the target business component corresponding to the player actively requests the player through the data center module Returns the current playback information. Referring to (b) in Figure 40, if the current playing information is songs A, B, C, D, E, then the displayed content of the "player" component in the Widget panel is changed from "songs A, B, C" to " Songs A, B, C, D, E", to automatically present the latest playback information of the player to the user, and realize the interval refresh of the information displayed on the Widget panel.
可见,桌面应用可主动获取某个业务模块产生的数据变化,由该业务模块对应的目标业务组件管理模块按照预设间隔主动获取该业务模块的新组件信息,以主动实时间隔更新Widget面板中展示信息,可以很方便的实现动态组件,Widget面板展示效果更好。It can be seen that the desktop application can actively obtain the data changes generated by a certain business module, and the target business component management module corresponding to the business module can actively obtain the new component information of the business module according to the preset interval, and update the display on the Widget panel at an active real-time interval. Information, it is very convenient to implement dynamic components, and the display effect of the Widget panel is better.
在一些实施例中,在实现动态组件时,桌面应用还可根据每个业务模块的业务状态,更改Widget面板中对应Widget的有效状态,有效状态用于表征对应Widget是否可被点击触发。例如,如果某个业务模块被卸载,则为提示用户不可通过Widget面板中的Widget快速启动该业务模块,可在对应的Widget上添加失效标识。In some embodiments, when implementing dynamic components, the desktop application can also change the valid status of the corresponding Widget in the Widget panel according to the business status of each business module. The valid status is used to indicate whether the corresponding Widget can be triggered by clicking. For example, if a certain business module is uninstalled, in order to remind the user that the business module cannot be quickly started through the Widget in the Widget panel, an invalidation mark may be added to the corresponding Widget.
具体地,在为失效的Widget添加失效标识时,控制器被进一步配置为执行下述步骤:Specifically, when adding an invalidation identifier to an invalidated Widget, the controller is further configured to perform the following steps:
步骤61D、在删除目标业务模块时,接收对目标业务模块的删除操作,基于目标业务模块的目标业务ID,调用对应的目标业务组件管理模块向组件展示模块发送携带目标业务ID的业务删除指令。Step 61D. When deleting the target service module, receive the delete operation on the target service module, and based on the target service ID of the target service module, invoke the corresponding target service component management module to send a service deletion command carrying the target service ID to the component display module.
步骤62D、调用组件展示模块,基于业务删除指令,在Widget面板中与目标业务ID对应的目标Widget上添加失效标识,失效标识用于表征目标业务ID对应的目标业务模块对应的Widget失效。Step 62D: call the component display module, and based on the service deletion instruction, add an invalidation mark on the target Widget corresponding to the target service ID in the Widget panel. The invalidation mark is used to indicate that the Widget corresponding to the target service module corresponding to the target service ID is invalid.
在某个业务模块被删除时,该业务模块的业务状态发生变化,因此,主动通知桌面应用,以更新Widget面板中对应Widget的展示信息。When a business module is deleted, the business status of the business module changes, so the desktop application is actively notified to update the display information of the corresponding Widget in the Widget panel.
如果桌面应用内配置的某个业务模块被删除/下线,说明桌面应用不再提供该业务模块,则显示设备的应用管理模块会将删除/下线广播发送至Widget面板,在该业务模块对应的目标Widget上展示失效标识。在应用模块被删除时,在Widget面板中对应的Widget上展示失效标识,以及时告知用户相应Widget失效,对应的业务模块被删除,不可通过触发Widget启动对应的业务模块,用户体验好。同时,为及时更新组件管理模块中的缓存数据,目标业务组件管理模块基于目标业务ID同步将对应的业务删除指令发送至组件管理模块,以使组件管理模块将被删除的业务模块的组件信息删除,更新缓存。If a business module configured in the desktop application is deleted/offline, it means that the desktop application no longer provides the business module, then the application management module of the display device will send the deletion/offline broadcast to the Widget panel, and the corresponding The invalidation logo is displayed on the target Widget. When the application module is deleted, the invalidation mark is displayed on the corresponding Widget in the Widget panel, and the user is notified in time that the corresponding Widget is invalid, the corresponding business module is deleted, and the corresponding business module cannot be started by triggering the Widget, so the user experience is good. At the same time, in order to update the cached data in the component management module in time, the target business component management module will synchronously send the corresponding service deletion command to the component management module based on the target service ID, so that the component management module will delete the component information of the deleted business module ,refresh cache.
失效是指不可用。业务模块的失效是指应用是否可用,例如,如果该应用虽然存在显示设备中,但因政策原因下线或后台不再维护,则该业务模块不可用。相反的,有效是指可用状态。Failure means unavailability. The failure of a business module refers to whether the application is available. For example, if the application exists in the display device, but is offline due to policy reasons or is no longer maintained in the background, the service module is unavailable. In contrast, valid refers to the usable state.
在目标业务模块被删除时,目标业务模块的业务状态发生变化,那么目标业务模块的新组件信息表征组件数据发生变化,此时,组件数据是指目标业务模块不可用,即不可执行触发操作。When the target business module is deleted and the business status of the target business module changes, the new component information of the target business module indicates that the component data has changed. At this time, the component data means that the target business module is unavailable, that is, the trigger operation cannot be performed.
在目标业务模块产生新组件信息后,主动通知桌面应用,即将新组件信息发送至数据中心模块,数据中心模块对目标业务模块的新组件信息进行简单处理后,将目标业务模块的新组件信息分发至与目标业务模块对应的目标业务组件管理模块。在分发时,可基于目标业务模块的目标业务ID确定用于管理目标业务模块组件信息的目标业务组件管理模块(WidgetManager)。After the target business module generates new component information, it actively notifies the desktop application, that is, sends the new component information to the data center module, and the data center module simply processes the new component information of the target business module, and distributes the new component information of the target business module To the target business component management module corresponding to the target business module. When distributing, the target business component management module (WidgetManager) for managing component information of the target business module can be determined based on the target business ID of the target business module.
基于新组件信息,调用目标业务ID对应的目标业务组件管理模块向组件展示模块发送携带目标业务ID的业务删除指令。为实现Widget面板的数据刷新,由组件展示模块基于业务删除指令,在Widget面板中与目标业务ID对应的目标Widget上添加失效标识,失效标识用于表征目标业务ID对应的目标业务模块对应的Widget失效。Based on the new component information, call the target service component management module corresponding to the target service ID to send a service deletion command carrying the target service ID to the component display module. In order to realize the data refresh of the Widget panel, based on the service deletion command, the component display module adds an invalidation mark on the target Widget corresponding to the target business ID in the Widget panel. The invalidation mark is used to represent the Widget corresponding to the target business module corresponding to the target business ID invalidated.
图41为本申请一些实施例中在Widget上展示失效标识的示意图。参见图41,如果用户卸载的业务模块为随心听,在将媒体中心的业务删除指令基于桌面组件框架传递给组件展示模块后,由目标业务模块的目标业务ID,确定Widget面板中的目标Widget为“随心听”组件。最后,在Widget面板中的随心听业务对应的Widget控件上展示失效标识,如图中“已失效”标识。Fig. 41 is a schematic diagram of displaying failure signs on Widgets in some embodiments of the present application. Referring to Figure 41, if the service module uninstalled by the user is Xpress, after the service deletion command of the media center is passed to the component display module based on the desktop component framework, the target Widget in the Widget panel is determined by the target service ID of the target service module as "Listen to your heart" component. Finally, the invalidation mark is displayed on the Widget control corresponding to the Xpressing service in the Widget panel, as shown in the figure "Invalidated".
可见,在桌面应用中提供的某个业务模块被删除时,由该业务模块主动通知桌面应用,实时更新Widget面板中展示信息,可以很方便的实现动态组件,Widget面板展示效果更好。It can be seen that when a business module provided in the desktop application is deleted, the business module actively notifies the desktop application to update the information displayed on the Widget panel in real time, which can easily implement dynamic components, and the display effect of the Widget panel is better.
在一些实施例中,在Widget面板展示在桌面主页后,用户看到Widget面板中存在展示有失效标识的Widget时,如果用户触发该失效Widget,则在当前界面中弹出失效提示界面。In some embodiments, after the Widget panel is displayed on the home page of the desktop, when the user sees a Widget displaying an invalidation logo in the Widget panel, if the user triggers the invalidated Widget, an invalidation prompt interface will pop up in the current interface.
具体地,在触发带有失效标识的Widget控件时,控制器被进一步配置为:Specifically, when triggering a Widget control with an invalidation flag, the controller is further configured to:
步骤71D、接收对Widget面板中展示有失效标识的目标Widget的触发操作,不执行目标Widget对应的目标业务模块的启动过程,以及,在桌面主页中呈现展示有删除按钮的失效提示界面。Step 71D: Receive a trigger operation on a target Widget with an invalidation mark displayed in the Widget panel, do not execute the start-up process of the target business module corresponding to the target Widget, and present an invalidation prompt interface with a delete button on the home page of the desktop.
步骤72D、接收对删除按钮的触发操作,将Widget面板中的所述目标Widget删除。Step 72D, receiving a trigger operation on the delete button, and deleting the target Widget in the Widget panel.
在用户触发Widget面板中展示有失效标识的目标Widget时,由于该目标Widget对应的目标业务模块已无法启动。因此,在触发Widget面板中带有失效标识的目标Widget时,不再执行启动目标Widget对应目标业务模块的动作。When the user triggers a target Widget with an invalidation flag to be displayed in the Widget panel, the target business module corresponding to the target Widget cannot be started. Therefore, when a target Widget with an invalidation flag in the Widget panel is triggered, the action of starting the target business module corresponding to the target Widget is no longer performed.
而为告知用户当前目标Widget对应的目标业务模块无法启动,则在桌面主页中弹出失效提示界面。In order to inform the user that the target business module corresponding to the current target Widget cannot be started, a failure prompt interface will pop up on the home page of the desktop.
图42为本申请一些实施例中另一种失效提示界面的示意图。参见图42,在用户触发已失效的“媒体中心”Widget时,在当前用户界面中呈现失效提示界面。失效提示界面中展示有删除按钮、取消按钮和更换控件显示区。删除按钮用于实现对失效Widget的删除,取消按钮用于关闭该失效提示界面。更换控件显示区用于展示系统推荐的可进行展示的其他Widget。如果用户点击删除按钮,则可将Widget面板中的 目标Widget删除,即将“媒体中心”Widget删除。Fig. 42 is a schematic diagram of another failure prompt interface in some embodiments of the present application. Referring to Fig. 42, when the user triggers the invalidated "media center" Widget, an invalidation prompt interface is presented in the current user interface. In the invalidation prompt interface, there are delete button, cancel button and replacement control display area. The delete button is used to delete the invalid Widget, and the cancel button is used to close the invalidation prompt interface. The replacement widget display area is used to display other widgets recommended by the system that can be displayed. If the user clicks the delete button, the target Widget in the Widget panel can be deleted, that is, the "media center" Widget will be deleted.
在一些实施例中,Widget面板位于桌面主页中,那么在基于Widget面板触发失效的目标Widget时,失效提示界面由Widget面板提供,即由组件展示模块控制展示。弹出的失效提示界面显示在Widget面板的上层,相当于失效提示界面展示在桌面主页的上层。失效提示界面的展示不对桌面主页原显示结构造成影响,即桌面主页中原显示的各个业务不会调整位置,失效提示界面以悬浮形式进行展示。In some embodiments, the Widget panel is located in the home page of the desktop, so when the invalid target Widget is triggered based on the Widget panel, the failure prompt interface is provided by the Widget panel, that is, the display is controlled by the component display module. The pop-up invalidation prompt interface is displayed on the upper layer of the Widget panel, which is equivalent to displaying the invalidation prompt interface on the upper layer of the desktop homepage. The display of the invalidation prompt interface does not affect the original display structure of the desktop homepage, that is, the positions of the various businesses originally displayed on the desktop homepage will not be adjusted, and the invalidation prompt interface is displayed in a floating form.
在一些实施例中,在更换控件显示区展示系统推荐的推荐Widget控件时,推荐Widget控件基于带有失效标识的目标Widget控件的属性参数产生,属性参数即为控件(Widget)信息。由于用户在基于业务应用注册Widget时,注册该业务Widget控件时产生的图标、尺寸大小、业务类型、所属应用等信息均会存储在组件管理模块(WidgetServer)。因此,可从组件管理模块(WidgetServer)获得目标Widget的属性参数。属性参数包括控件尺寸、业务类型、所属应用等。推荐Widget控件是指与目标Widget具有相同特性的控件,推荐Widget控件用于基于用户的触发替换展示在被删除的目标Widget控件的所处原位置。In some embodiments, when the recommended Widget control recommended by the system is displayed in the replacement widget display area, the recommended Widget control is generated based on the property parameters of the target Widget control with an invalidation flag, and the property parameters are widget (Widget) information. When a user registers a Widget based on a business application, the icon, size, business type, application and other information generated when registering the business Widget control will be stored in the component management module (WidgetServer). Therefore, the attribute parameters of the target Widget can be obtained from the component management module (WidgetServer). Attribute parameters include control size, business type, application, etc. The recommended Widget control refers to a control that has the same characteristics as the target Widget, and the recommended Widget control is used to replace and display the original position of the deleted target Widget control based on user triggers.
失效提示界面中的更换控件显示区可显示在删除按钮的下方,如果更换控件显示区可展示的显示位阈值可为6个,则更换控件显示区最多显示6个推荐Widget控件,更换控件显示区可展示的显示位还可为其他数量个,可根据实际应用情况调整。The replacement control display area in the failure prompt interface can be displayed under the delete button. If the replacement control display area can display up to 6 display bit thresholds, the replacement control display area can display up to 6 recommended Widget controls, and the replacement control display area The number of display positions that can be displayed can also be other numbers, which can be adjusted according to actual application conditions.
由于不同的Widget的控件尺寸不同,因此,为便于系统推荐的Widget能够展示到被删除的目标Widget的所处原位置,可基于被删除的Widget的尺寸查找具有相同尺寸的Widget。而为能够基于用户能够在同一位置启动具有相似特性的Widget,还可基于业务类型或所属应用作为属性参数,为用户推荐可替换展示的Widget。也就是说,与目标Widget具有相同特性的推荐Widget控件是指控件尺寸相同、业务类型相似、所属应用相同等具有其中至少一个特性的控件。Since different Widgets have different control sizes, in order to display the Widget recommended by the system at the original location of the deleted target Widget, a Widget with the same size can be searched based on the size of the deleted Widget. In order to be able to start Widgets with similar characteristics at the same location based on the user, it is also possible to recommend alternatively displayed Widgets to the user based on the service type or the application it belongs to as an attribute parameter. That is to say, the recommended Widget controls having the same characteristics as the target Widget refer to controls having at least one of the characteristics such as the same size, similar business type, and the same application.
在一些实施例中,桌面组件框架可实现Widget面板中某个Widget的多级菜单展开,根据业务需求,可对桌面应用提供的各个业务模块进行分类,将同属于一个类型的业务划分为同一类,并为该类在Widget面板中配置一个总的Widget。在需要触发该总Widget下的某个业务时,可触发该总Widget,在Widget面板中弹出二级业务菜单,二级业务菜单中展示有各个同属于一个类型的业务对应的菜单项。再基于二级业务菜单触发某个菜单项,即可实现对应业务的快速启动。In some embodiments, the desktop component framework can realize the multi-level menu expansion of a certain Widget in the Widget panel, and can classify the various business modules provided by the desktop application according to business requirements, and divide the business of the same type into the same category , and configure a general Widget in the Widget panel for this class. When a service under the total Widget needs to be triggered, the general Widget can be triggered, and a secondary service menu pops up in the Widget panel, and the secondary service menu displays menu items corresponding to services of the same type. Then trigger a menu item based on the secondary service menu to realize the quick start of the corresponding service.
为此,在桌面组件框架基于各个业务模块的类型进行分类时,控制器被进一步配置为执行下述步骤:To this end, when the desktop component framework classifies based on the type of each business module, the controller is further configured to perform the following steps:
步骤81D、在Widget面板中添加Widget分组时,接收对Widget面板中展示的添加按钮的触发操作,切换添加页面展示在用户界面中,添加页面中展示Widget分组列表和组件预览区,同一Widget分组下的各个Widget所属业务模块的业务类型相同,组件预览区展示有Widget分组对应的各个Widget。Step 81D, when adding a Widget group in the Widget panel, receive a trigger operation on the Add button displayed in the Widget panel, switch the add page to display in the user interface, and display the Widget group list and component preview area on the Add page, under the same Widget group The business types of the business modules to which each Widget belongs are the same, and the component preview area displays each Widget corresponding to the Widget group.
步骤82D、接收对Widget分组列表中目标Widget分组的触发操作,在组件预览区展示与目标Widget分组对应的Widget。Step 82D: Receive a trigger operation on the target Widget group in the Widget group list, and display the Widget corresponding to the target Widget group in the component preview area.
步骤83D、接收对组件预览区中目标Widget的触发操作,将目标Widget分组对应的目标Widget添加到Widget面板中。Step 83D, receiving a trigger operation on the target Widget in the component preview area, and adding the target Widget corresponding to the target Widget group into the Widget panel.
用户可基于Widget面板添加Widget,此时,Widget面板的最底部展示有添加按钮(如图39所示),触发该添加按钮,生成添加页面,切换展示在用户界面中。The user can add a Widget based on the Widget panel. At this time, an Add button is displayed at the bottom of the Widget panel (as shown in FIG. 39 ), and the Add button is triggered to generate an Add page, which is switched and displayed in the user interface.
图43为本申请一些实施例中添加页面的一种示意图。参见图43,添加页面中展示Widget分组列表和组件预览区,Widget分组列表中展示有数个Widget分组的名称,一个Widget分组包括具有相同业务类型的业务模块的Widget,即将同一业务类型的业务模块进行分类;组件预览区展示有Widget分组对应的各个业务模块的Widget,组件预览区的展示内容随着Widget分组列表中被点击的目标Widget分组的改变而改变。Fig. 43 is a schematic diagram of adding pages in some embodiments of the present application. See Figure 43, the Widget group list and the component preview area are displayed on the adding page, and the names of several Widget groups are displayed in the Widget group list, and a Widget group includes Widgets with business modules of the same business type, that is, business modules of the same business type Classification; Widgets of each business module corresponding to the Widget group are displayed in the component preview area, and the display content in the component preview area changes with the change of the clicked target Widget group in the Widget group list.
在一些实施例中,添加页面和Widget面板是通过组件展示模块生成的,桌面主页是通过系统配置的应用管理模块生成的。在图8所示的界面中,所述桌面应用的显示窗口位于系统主页的上,在触发桌面应用时,桌面主页弹出展示在系统主页的上层。在需要调出Widget面板时,用户长按遥控器左键,调出Widget面板并展示在桌面主页中。Widget面板的一种可行展示方式是从显示器的左侧弹出,将桌面主页整体向右挤出,桌面主页左侧留出的空位供Widget面板展示。此时,桌面主页的右侧显示内容从显示器中消失,以图38所示状态进行展示;如果取消Widget面板的显示,则桌面主页整体向左移动,恢复原状态。In some embodiments, the added page and the Widget panel are generated through the component display module, and the desktop home page is generated through the application management module of the system configuration. In the interface shown in FIG. 8 , the display window of the desktop application is located on the system homepage, and when the desktop application is triggered, the desktop homepage pops up and is displayed on the upper layer of the system homepage. When the Widget panel needs to be called up, the user long presses the left button of the remote control to call up the Widget panel and display it on the desktop homepage. A feasible way to display the Widget panel is to pop up from the left side of the display, extrude the desktop homepage as a whole to the right, and leave a space on the left side of the desktop homepage for the Widget panel to display. At this time, the displayed content on the right side of the desktop homepage disappears from the display, and is displayed in the state shown in Figure 38; if the display of the Widget panel is canceled, the desktop homepage moves to the left as a whole and restores the original state.
在一些实施例中,Widget面板位于桌面主页中,那么在基于Widget面板触发添加按钮时,添加页面由Widget面板提供,即由组件展示模块控制展示。弹出的添加页面显示在Widget面板的上层,相当于展示在桌面主页的上层。添加页面以覆盖的形式展示在桌面主页上层,因此,添加页面的展示不对桌面主页原显示结构造成影响,即桌面主页中原显示的各个业务不会调整位置。In some embodiments, the Widget panel is located in the home page of the desktop, so when the add button is triggered based on the Widget panel, the add page is provided by the Widget panel, that is, the display is controlled by the component display module. The pop-up add page is displayed on the upper layer of the Widget panel, which is equivalent to being displayed on the upper layer of the home page of the desktop. The added page is displayed on the upper layer of the desktop homepage in the form of overlay. Therefore, the display of the added page will not affect the original display structure of the desktop homepage, that is, the positions of the original displayed businesses on the desktop homepage will not be adjusted.
在一些实施例中,如果用户触发目标Widget分组,如少儿专区,则可确定目标Widget分组(少儿专区)对应的所属同一业务类型的业务模块可为“少儿模式”、“小课堂”、“学习报告”等,那么在组件预览区需展示与目标Widget分组对应的各个业务模块的Widget,如“少儿模式”Widget、“小课堂”Widget、“学习报告”Widget等。其中,各个业务Widget可具有不同组件尺寸,以供用户选择并添加目标组件尺寸的Widget至Widget面板中。In some embodiments, if the user triggers the target Widget group, such as the children's zone, it can be determined that the service modules of the same business type corresponding to the target Widget group (children's zone) can be "children's mode", "small classroom", "learning Report", etc., then the widgets of each business module corresponding to the target widget group need to be displayed in the component preview area, such as the "Kids Mode" Widget, "Small Classroom" Widget, and "Learning Report" Widget, etc. Wherein, each business widget may have different component sizes for the user to select and add a Widget of a target component size to the widget panel.
在一些实施例中,在展示添加页面时,由业务组件管理模块从组件管理模块中基于每个业务ID获得对应的预先注册Widget的每个业务模块的组件信息和业务类型,组件信息是指桌面应用提供的业务模块在注册Widget时产生的信息,组件信息包括组件数据和Widget面板信息,组件数据是指业务ID表征的业务模块所需在Widget面板上展示的数据,Widget面板信息是指Widget展示的界面布局信息。In some embodiments, when the added page is displayed, the component information and business type of each business module of the corresponding pre-registered Widget are obtained from the component management module by the business component management module based on each business ID, and the component information refers to the desktop The information generated when the business module provided by the application registers the Widget. The component information includes component data and widget panel information. interface layout information.
基于业务类型对数个业务模块进行分组,调用组件展示模块将业务类型相同的业务模块生成Widget分组列表,并将业务类型相同的每个业务模块对应的Widget展示在组件预览区。用户在触发Widget分组 列表中的任一个目标Widget分组时,在组件预览区展示与目标Widget分组对应的各个Widget;且在切换触发另一个目标Widget分组时,在组件预览区切换展示与新触发的目标Widget分组对应的各个Widget。Group several business modules based on business types, call the component display module to generate a Widget group list for business modules of the same business type, and display the Widgets corresponding to each business module of the same business type in the component preview area. When the user triggers any target Widget group in the Widget group list, each Widget corresponding to the target Widget group will be displayed in the component preview area; Each Widget corresponding to the target Widget group.
在一些实施例中,如果用户对某个分组下已经添加至少一个Widget到Widget面板中,则在展示添加页面时,由业务组件管理模块统计前一次已添加Widget到Widget面板的业务模块的业务类型,基于已添加业务类型计算同一业务类型下已添加Widget到Widget面板的业务模块的数量。在展示Widget分组列表时,在该业务类型对应的Widget分组所在显示条目上展示已添加数量,如图43中“媒体中心”Widget分组下的Widget的已添加数量为1个。In some embodiments, if the user has added at least one Widget to the Widget panel under a certain group, then when the added page is displayed, the business component management module counts the business type of the business module that has added Widget to the Widget panel for the last time , calculate the number of business modules that have added Widgets to the Widget panel under the same business type based on the added business type. When displaying the Widget group list, the added quantity is displayed on the display item of the Widget group corresponding to the service type, as shown in Figure 43, the added quantity of Widgets under the "Media Center" Widget group is 1.
在用户需要在Widget面板中展示少儿专区分组下的各个业务模块的Widget,则直接触发组件预览区中的目标Widget,如触发“少儿模式”Widget,则将“少儿模式”Widget添加到Widget面板中。When the user needs to display the widgets of each business module under the children's zone group in the widget panel, the target widget in the component preview area will be directly triggered. If the "kids mode" widget is triggered, the "kids mode" widget will be added to the widget panel .
此时,为实现Widget面板中目标Widget分组下各个业务模块的Widget的添加,由触发的目标Widget确定目标业务ID,调用目标业务ID对应的目标业务组件管理模块将目标Widget的组件信息存储至组件管理模块中,便于后续进行组件展示。At this time, in order to realize the addition of Widgets of each business module under the target Widget group in the Widget panel, the target business ID is determined by the triggered target Widget, and the target business component management module corresponding to the target business ID is called to store the component information of the target Widget in the component In the management module, it is convenient for subsequent component display.
图44为本申请一些实施例中添加页面的另一种示意图。参见图44,在用户触发添加页面中的目标Widget分组为“应用”时,则可确定目标Widget分组(应用专区)对应的业务模块均为应用类型的业务,可为“云视听小电视”、“CIBN酷喵”、“云视听极光”、“银河奇异果”等。那么在组件预览区需展示目标Widget分组的固定Widget与目标Widget分组对应的各个业务模块的Widget,如固定Widget为“我的应用(1x1)”Widget、“我的应用(2x1)”Widget、“我的应用(2x2)”Widget;目标Widget分组对应的Widget可为“云视听小电视”Widget、“CIBN酷喵”Widget、“云视听极光”Widget、“银河奇异果”Widget等。Fig. 44 is another schematic diagram of adding pages in some embodiments of the present application. Referring to Figure 44, when the user triggers to add the target Widget group in the page as "application", it can be determined that the business modules corresponding to the target Widget group (application area) are all application-type services, which can be "cloud audio-visual small TV", "CIBN Cool Meow", "Cloud Audiovisual Aurora", "Galaxy Kiwi", etc. Then in the component preview area, the fixed widgets of the target widget group and the widgets of each business module corresponding to the target widget group need to be displayed. For example, the fixed widgets are "My Application (1x1)" Widget, "My Application (2x1)" Widget, " My application (2x2)" Widget; Widgets corresponding to the target Widget group can be "Cloud Audiovisual Small TV" Widget, "CIBN Cool Meow" Widget, "Cloud Audiovisual Aurora" Widget, "Galaxy Kiwi" Widget, etc.
目标Widget分组(如应用分组)的固定Widget包括不同组件尺寸,不同组件尺寸的Widget执行不同的触发流程,例如,如果组件尺寸为1x1,则在触发对应“应用”分组Widget时,用户界面会跳转到我的应用页面,我的应用页面展示同为应用类型的各个应用,该应用以菜单项形式展示,而不再以Widget形式展示;如果组件尺寸为2x1或2x2,则在触发对应“应用”分组Widget时,会在当前Widget面板的上层展示“我的应用”的分类菜单,“我的应用”的分类菜单中展示的是系统安装的同为应用类型的各个应用,该应用以菜单项形式展示,而不再以Widget形式展示。The fixed widgets of the target widget group (such as the application group) include different component sizes. Widgets with different component sizes perform different trigger processes. For example, if the component size is 1x1, when the corresponding "application" group widget is triggered, the user interface will jump. Go to my application page, which displays various applications of the same application type, and the application is displayed as a menu item instead of a widget; if the component size is 2x1 or 2x2, trigger the corresponding "application "When grouping Widgets, the category menu of "My Application" will be displayed on the upper layer of the current Widget panel. The category menu of "My Application" displays the applications of the same application type installed by the system. displayed in the form of Widget instead of in the form of Widget.
在一些实施例中,如果用户想将同一业务类型对应的Widget分组添加到Widget面板,以便通过Widget面板同时查看到系统安装的各个业务模块(如所有应用),则可将点击组件预览区中目标Widget分组的固定Widget,如“我的应用(2x1)”Widget;如果用户想要将某个业务模块的Widget添加到Widget面板中,以便基于Widget面板直接启动某个业务模块,则可点击组件预览区中各个业务模块的Widget,如“云视听小电视”Widget、“CIBN酷喵”Widget、“云视听极光”Widget、“银河奇异果”Widget等。In some embodiments, if the user wants to add widget groups corresponding to the same business type to the Widget panel, so as to simultaneously view various business modules (such as all applications) installed in the system through the Widget panel, the user can click on the target in the component preview area Fixed Widgets grouped by Widgets, such as "My Application (2x1)" Widget; if the user wants to add a Widget of a certain business module to the Widget panel, so as to directly start a certain business module based on the Widget panel, he can click the component to preview Widgets of various business modules in the district, such as "Cloud Audiovisual TV" Widget, "CIBN Cool Meow" Widget, "Cloud Audiovisual Aurora" Widget, "Galaxy Kiwi" Widget, etc.
可见,本申请提供的显示设备,在基于桌面组件框架展示桌面组件时,可以根据自己的业务需求,定制组件的宽高、布局、样式、点击跳转、多级展开菜单等,Widget面板的展示效果更好,用户体验好。It can be seen that when displaying desktop components based on the desktop component framework, the display device provided by this application can customize the width, height, layout, style, click to jump, multi-level expansion menu, etc. of the components according to their own business needs, and display the widget panel The effect is better and the user experience is good.
在一些实施例中,用户在基于Widget面板触发目标Widget分组对应的目标Widget时,可在当前Widget面板中弹出二级分类菜单,以展示所有同属于目标Widget分组对应的业务类型的各个业务模块。为此,控制器被进一步配置为执行下述步骤:In some embodiments, when the user triggers the target Widget corresponding to the target Widget group based on the Widget panel, a secondary classification menu may pop up in the current Widget panel to display all business modules belonging to the business type corresponding to the target Widget group. To this end, the controller is further configured to perform the following steps:
步骤9D1、在触发目标Widget分组对应的目标Widget时,接收对Widget面板中与目标业务模块对应的目标Widget的触发操作,如果目标Widget的组件尺寸满足预设尺寸,则调用目标业务组件管理模块从组件管理模块中获取目标Widget分组下每个业务模块对应的菜单项信息,并发送至组件展示模块。Step 9D1, when triggering the target Widget corresponding to the target Widget group, receive a trigger operation on the target Widget corresponding to the target business module in the Widget panel, if the component size of the target Widget meets the preset size, call the target business component management module from The component management module obtains the menu item information corresponding to each business module under the target Widget group, and sends it to the component display module.
步骤92D、调用组件展示模块基于每个业务模块对应的菜单项信息,生成业务菜单,展示在Widget面板中,业务菜单中展示目标Widget分组下每个业务模块对应的业务菜单项。Step 92D: call the component display module to generate a service menu based on the menu item information corresponding to each business module, and display it in the Widget panel, and display the service menu items corresponding to each business module under the target Widget group in the service menu.
在用户需要触发目标Widget分组对应的目标Widget时,先判断用户触发Widget面板中的目标Widget的组件尺寸是否满足预设尺寸,预设尺寸是指非1x1的组件尺寸。如果目标Widget的组件尺寸为1x1,则不满足预设尺寸,因此,用户界面会跳转到目标Widget分组的主页面。例如,在触发“应用”对应的目标Widget时,如果该Widget的组件尺寸为1x1,则用户界面跳转至我的应用页面,我的应用页面展示同为应用类型的各个应用,该应用以菜单项形式展示,而不再以Widget形式展示。When the user needs to trigger the target Widget corresponding to the target Widget group, first determine whether the component size of the target Widget in the Widget panel triggered by the user meets the preset size, and the preset size refers to a component size other than 1x1. If the component size of the target Widget is 1x1, the preset size is not satisfied, so the user interface will jump to the main page of the target Widget group. For example, when the target Widget corresponding to "Application" is triggered, if the component size of the Widget is 1x1, the user interface jumps to the My Application page, which displays various applications of the same application type. Items are displayed instead of Widgets.
如果目标Widget的组件尺寸为2x1或2x2,则满足预设尺寸,因此,则可在Widget面板中弹出目标Widget分组对应的分类菜单,即业务菜单。此时,调用目标Widget分组中各个业务模块对应的目标业务组件管理模块从组件管理模块中获取对应目标Widget分组下每个业务模块对应的菜单项信息,并发送至组件展示模块。If the component size of the target Widget is 2x1 or 2x2, the preset size is met. Therefore, the classification menu corresponding to the target Widget group can pop up in the Widget panel, that is, the service menu. At this point, call the target business component management module corresponding to each business module in the target Widget group to obtain the menu item information corresponding to each business module under the corresponding target Widget group from the component management module, and send it to the component display module.
在展示目标业务模块分类下的各个业务菜单项时,由组件展示模块基于每个业务模块对应的菜单项信息,生成业务菜单。业务菜单是相对于Widget面板的二级菜单,业务菜单中展示目标Widget分组下每个业务模块对应的业务菜单项,生成业务菜单的方式可参照前述实施例中基于桌面应用提供的各个业务模块的组件信息生成Widget面板的方式,此处不再赘述。When displaying each service menu item under the classification of the target service module, the component display module generates a service menu based on the menu item information corresponding to each service module. The service menu is a secondary menu relative to the Widget panel. The service menu items corresponding to each service module under the target Widget group are displayed in the service menu. The method of generating the service menu can refer to the various service modules provided based on the desktop application in the foregoing embodiments. The method of generating the Widget panel from the component information will not be repeated here.
例如,如果触发的“应用”分组Widget的组件尺寸为2x1或2x2,则在当前Widget面板的上层展示“我的应用”的分类菜单,“我的应用”的分类菜单中展示的是系统安装的同为应用类型的各个应用,该应用以菜单项形式展示。For example, if the component size of the triggered "Application" group Widget is 2x1 or 2x2, the category menu of "My Application" will be displayed on the upper layer of the current Widget panel, and the category menu of "My Application" will display the ones installed by the system. For each application of the same application type, the application is displayed in the form of a menu item.
图45为本申请一些实施例中业务菜单的一种示意图。参见图39和图45,如果用户基于Widget面板触发目标Widget分组(我的应用)对应的“我的应用(2x1)”Widget,则在当前Widget面板中弹出业务菜单,业务菜单中展示有“我的应用”分类下所有应用的菜单项,如“云视听小电视”菜单项、“CIBN酷喵”菜单项、“云视听极光”菜单项、“银河奇异果”菜单项等。用户触发任一菜单项,即可直接启动对应的应用。Fig. 45 is a schematic diagram of a service menu in some embodiments of the present application. Referring to Figure 39 and Figure 45, if the user triggers the "My Application (2x1)" Widget corresponding to the target Widget group (My Application) based on the Widget panel, the service menu will pop up in the current Widget panel, and the "My Application" will be displayed in the service menu. The menu items of all applications under the "Applications" category, such as the "Cloud TV" menu item, the "CIBN Cool Meow" menu item, the "Cloud Video Aurora" menu item, the "Galaxy Kiwi" menu item, etc. When the user triggers any menu item, the corresponding application can be launched directly.
图46为本申请一些实施例中业务菜单的另一种示意图。参见图39和图46,如果用户基于Widget面板触发目标Widget分组(AI Camera)对应的“AI Camera”Widget,则在当前Widget面板中弹出业务菜单,业务菜单中展示有“AI Camera”分类下所有应用的菜单项,如“魔镜”菜单项、“视频通话”菜单项、“AI健身”菜单项、“小聚在家”菜单项等。用户触发任一菜单项,即可直接启动对应的业务模块,切换展示对应的业务主页。Fig. 46 is another schematic diagram of the service menu in some embodiments of the present application. Referring to Figure 39 and Figure 46, if the user triggers the "AI Camera" Widget corresponding to the target Widget group (AI Camera) based on the Widget panel, the service menu will pop up in the current Widget panel, and all the "AI Camera" categories will be displayed in the service menu. The menu items of the application, such as the "Magic Mirror" menu item, the "Video Call" menu item, the "AI Fitness" menu item, the "Small Gathering at Home" menu item, etc. When the user triggers any menu item, the corresponding business module can be started directly, and the corresponding business home page can be switched and displayed.
在一些实施例中,由Widget面板位于桌面主页中,那么在基于Widget面板触发目标Widget分组时弹出业务菜单,显示在Widget面板的上层,业务菜单由Widget面板提供,即由组件展示模块控制展示。业务菜单以浮层的形式展示在Widget面板上层,因此,业务菜单的展示不对Widget面板和桌面主页各原显示结构造成影响,即Widget面板和桌面主页中各原显示的各个业务不会调整位置。In some embodiments, the Widget panel is located in the home page of the desktop, so when the target Widget group is triggered based on the Widget panel, the service menu pops up and is displayed on the upper layer of the Widget panel. The service menu is provided by the Widget panel, that is, the display is controlled by the component display module. The service menu is displayed on the upper layer of the Widget panel in the form of a floating layer. Therefore, the display of the service menu does not affect the original display structure of the Widget panel and the desktop homepage, that is, the positions of the original displayed services on the Widget panel and the desktop homepage will not be adjusted.
在一些实施例中,再次参见图39,Widget面板中还展示有编辑按钮和对齐按钮,触发编辑按钮,可对Widget面板中展示的任一Widget进行修改,如修改属性;触发对齐按钮,可对Widget面板中展示的所有Widget进行对齐排列等。In some embodiments, referring to FIG. 39 again, an edit button and an alignment button are also displayed in the Widget panel. When the edit button is triggered, any Widget displayed in the Widget panel can be modified, such as modifying properties; when the alignment button is triggered, the All Widgets displayed in the Widget panel are aligned and arranged.
在一些实施例中,在Widget面板展示过程中,无论目标业务模块以上述介绍的任一种方式产生数据变化,需要Widget面板刷新界面显示内容时,目标业务模块的变化数据返回,或者目标业务模块主动刷新数据时,均将变化数据发送至数据中心模块,在数据中心模块收到变化数据并简单处理后,按照目标业务ID分发给对应的目标业务组件管理模块。目标业务组件管理模块收到数据后,再根据目标业务ID分发到相应的Widget。组件展示模块接收到数据后,在目标Widget上展示变化数据,以更新Widget面板的显示信息。In some embodiments, during the display process of the Widget panel, no matter whether the target business module generates data changes in any of the above-mentioned ways, when the Widget panel needs to refresh the interface display content, the changed data of the target business module is returned, or the target business module When the data is actively refreshed, the changed data is sent to the data center module. After the data center module receives the changed data and simply processes it, it is distributed to the corresponding target business component management module according to the target business ID. After the target business component management module receives the data, it distributes it to the corresponding Widget according to the target business ID. After the component display module receives the data, it displays the changed data on the target Widget to update the display information of the Widget panel.
可见,本申请提供的显示设备,在基于桌面组件框架展示桌面组件时,可对桌面应用提供的各个业务模块按照不同的类型进行分类,同一分类下的各个业务属于同一类型。因此,可以横向无限扩展出跟多的分类,每个分类管理自己的组件。It can be seen that, when displaying desktop components based on the desktop component framework, the display device provided by this application can classify each service module provided by the desktop application according to different types, and all services under the same category belong to the same type. Therefore, more categories can be extended infinitely horizontally, and each category manages its own components.
图37为本申请一些实施例中组件展示方法的流程图。参见图37,本发明实施例提供一种组件展示方法,所述方法包括:Fig. 37 is a flowchart of a component display method in some embodiments of the present application. Referring to Figure 37, an embodiment of the present invention provides a component display method, the method includes:
S1B、接收对桌面应用的启动操作,获取所述桌面应用提供的每个业务模块的业务数据,以及,基于每个所述业务模块的业务数据在所述用户界面中展示桌面主页;S1B. Receive a startup operation on the desktop application, acquire the business data of each business module provided by the desktop application, and display the desktop homepage in the user interface based on the business data of each business module;
S2B、在展示Widget面板时,调用业务组件管理模块从组件管理模块中获取每个业务ID对应的业务模块的组件信息,并发送至组件展示模块,所述组件信息是指桌面应用提供的业务模块在注册Widget时产生的信息,所述组件信息包括组件数据和Widget面板信息,所述组件数据是指业务ID表征的业务模块所需在Widget面板上展示的数据,所述Widget面板信息是指Widget展示的界面布局信息;S2B. When displaying the Widget panel, call the business component management module to obtain the component information of the business module corresponding to each business ID from the component management module, and send it to the component display module. The component information refers to the business module provided by the desktop application The information generated when the Widget is registered, the component information includes component data and Widget panel information, the component data refers to the data required to be displayed on the Widget panel for the business module represented by the business ID, and the Widget panel information refers to the Widget panel information Displayed interface layout information;
S3B、调用所述组件展示模块基于每个业务ID对应的所述组件数据和Widget面板信息,生成Widget面板,展示在桌面主页中,所述Widget面板中展示有数个用于提供各个业务模块启动入口的Widget。S3B. Call the component display module to generate a Widget panel based on the component data and Widget panel information corresponding to each business ID, and display it on the desktop homepage. There are several displays in the Widget panel for providing each business module startup entry Widget.
本发明实施例提供的一种组件展示方法及显示设备,在启动桌面应用时,基于各个业务模块的业务数据展示桌面主页。在桌面主页中展示Widget面板时,调用业务组件管理模块从组件管理模块中获取每个业务ID对应的业务模块的组件信息,并发送至组件展示模块,调用组件展示模块基于每个业务ID对应的组件数据和Widget面板信息,生成Widget面板,展示在桌面主页中,Widget面板中展示有数个用于提供各个业务模块启动入口的Widget。可见,该方法及显示设备基于桌面组件框架进行组件展示时,不受系统限制,将组件信息拆分成组件数据和Widget面板信息,可以对Widget面板中呈现的各个Widget的布局、样式等进行自定义编辑,为用户提供多样效果的Widget面板。A component display method and a display device provided by an embodiment of the present invention display a desktop homepage based on business data of each business module when a desktop application is started. When displaying the Widget panel on the desktop homepage, call the business component management module to obtain the component information of the business module corresponding to each business ID from the component management module, and send it to the component display module, and call the component display module based on the information corresponding to each business ID Component data and Widget panel information generate a Widget panel and display it on the home page of the desktop. The Widget panel displays several Widgets that provide the startup entry for each business module. It can be seen that when the method and the display device display components based on the desktop component framework, the component information is split into component data and Widget panel information without being restricted by the system, and the layout and style of each Widget presented in the Widget panel can be customized. Define the editor to provide users with a Widget panel with various effects.
在一些实施例中,当显示设备的输入信号源发生变化时,在当前显示的界面上层显示Widget提醒。示例性的,当检测到某一个或者多个HDMI接口的信号输入发生从无到有的变化时,确定输入信号源发生变化,此时,在当前显示的界面上层显示Widget提醒。通过Widget提醒,来提示用户信号源已发生变化,和/或,在显示Widget提醒时,用户可以通过操作指示显示设备显示Widget面板或者信号源选择界面。In some embodiments, when the input signal source of the display device changes, a Widget reminder is displayed on the upper layer of the currently displayed interface. Exemplarily, when it is detected that the signal input of one or more HDMI interfaces has changed from scratch, it is determined that the input signal source has changed, and at this time, a Widget reminder is displayed on the upper layer of the currently displayed interface. The Widget reminder is used to prompt the user that the signal source has changed, and/or, when the Widget reminder is displayed, the user can instruct the display device to display the Widget panel or the signal source selection interface through operations.
在一些实施例中,用于加载Widget提醒的控件不可获取焦点。在这些实施例中,当显示Widget提醒时,焦点可以停留在用户最后一次操作后的位置上保持不变。In some embodiments, the control used to load the widget reminder is not focusable. In these embodiments, when the Widget reminder is displayed, the focus may remain unchanged after the user's last operation.
在另一些实施例中,Widget提醒所在的控件可获取焦点。在这些实施例中,当显示Widget提醒时,Widget提醒控件抢占焦点,即,焦点自动落在Widget提醒所在控件上。In some other embodiments, the control where the Widget prompts is located may acquire focus. In these embodiments, when the Widget reminder is displayed, the Widget reminder control seizes the focus, that is, the focus automatically falls on the control where the Widget reminder is located.
在一些实施例中,显示设备开机后显示电视系统主页或者其他信号源对应的页面,其中,电视系统主页可以是预置视频点播程序的主页,如“聚好看”应用的应用主页,其他信号源对应的页面可以是直播电视首页或者HDMI接口对应的页面。应当理解,在显示电视系统主页时,显示设备的输入信号源是视频点播程序,此时,直播电视接口、HDMI接口等其他信号源可以无信号输入。在显示直播电视首页时,视频点播程序接口、以及HDMI接口等其他信号源可以无信号输入。In some embodiments, after the display device is turned on, it displays the TV system homepage or pages corresponding to other signal sources, where the TV system homepage can be the homepage of a preset video-on-demand program, such as the application homepage of the "Jukankan" application, other signal sources The corresponding page may be the live TV homepage or the page corresponding to the HDMI interface. It should be understood that when displaying the homepage of the TV system, the input signal source of the display device is a video-on-demand program, and at this time, other signal sources such as live TV interface and HDMI interface may have no signal input. When displaying the live TV home page, other signal sources such as the video-on-demand program interface and the HDMI interface may have no signal input.
在显示电视系统主页或者其他信号源对应的页面时,如果检测到输入信号源发生变化,如新增一路信号源、减少一路信号源或者信号源切换,则在系统主页上层显示Widget提醒。在显示Widget提醒时,用户可以通过长按左键指示显示设备显示Widget面板或者“信号源”Widget控件对应的一级项目内容。When displaying the home page of the TV system or the page corresponding to other signal sources, if it is detected that the input signal source changes, such as adding a signal source, reducing a signal source or switching signal sources, a Widget reminder will be displayed on the upper layer of the system home page. When the Widget reminder is displayed, the user can instruct the display device to display the first-level item content corresponding to the Widget panel or the "signal source" Widget control by long pressing the left button.
图47为本申请在一些示例性实施例中示出的用户界面,该用户界面具体为在显示如图7所示电视系统主页时,检测到输入信号源发生变化而显示的用户界面。如图47所示,在系统主页上层左上角区域显示有Widget提醒控件,通过该Widget提醒控件,用户可以获知当前发生信号源变化。另外,在图47所示示例中,Widget提醒控件不可获取焦点。Fig. 47 is a user interface shown in some exemplary embodiments of the present application. The user interface is specifically a user interface displayed when a change in the input signal source is detected when the homepage of the TV system as shown in Fig. 7 is displayed. As shown in Figure 47, a Widget reminder control is displayed in the upper left corner of the system home page, through which the user can learn that the current signal source changes. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 47, the Widget reminder control cannot acquire focus.
示例性的,在显示如图47所示包含Widget提醒控件的用户界面时,如果用户长按左键,则可以显示Widget面板,如图640所示,此处不予赘述。Exemplarily, when displaying the user interface containing the Widget reminder control as shown in FIG. 47 , if the user presses and holds the left button, the Widget panel may be displayed, as shown in FIG. 640 , which will not be repeated here.
另一示例性的,在显示如图47所示包含Widget提醒控件的用户界面时,如果用户长按左键,则显示“信号源”控件对应的一级项目内容,如图18所示,此处不予赘述。In another example, when the user interface containing the Widget reminder control as shown in FIG. 47 is displayed, if the user presses and holds the left button, the content of the first-level item corresponding to the "signal source" control is displayed, as shown in FIG. 18 . I won't repeat them here.
在一些实施例中,在显示桌面主页/非全屏播放页面时,Widget提醒控件在显示的时候不可获取焦点。显示设备接收用户移动焦点的指令,在焦点移动到显示界面的左/右边界时,确定当前是否显示有Widget提醒控件,若是,则控制面板区域显示信号源控件对应的次级面板,以展示信号源信息;若否,则控制面板区域显示默认的Widget面板。其中,非全屏播放页面是指全屏播放页面外的其他页面。In some embodiments, when the desktop home page/non-full-screen playback page is displayed, the Widget reminder control cannot acquire focus when it is displayed. The display device receives an instruction from the user to move the focus, and when the focus moves to the left/right border of the display interface, determine whether there is a Widget reminder control currently displayed, and if so, display the sub-panel corresponding to the signal source control in the control panel area to display the signal Source information; if not, the control panel area displays the default Widget panel. Wherein, the non-full-screen playback page refers to other pages other than the full-screen playback page.
在一些实施例中,默认的Widget面板是主面板,主面板的上至少部分组件对应有次级面板,以展示该组件对应的详细信息。示例性的,Widget面板中设置有信号源组件,在用户选中信号源组件后,在Widget控制面板区域显示信号源控件对应的次级面板。In some embodiments, the default Widget panel is the main panel, and at least some components on the main panel correspond to sub-panels to display detailed information corresponding to the components. Exemplarily, the Widget panel is provided with a signal source component, and after the user selects the signal source component, a sub-panel corresponding to the signal source control is displayed in the Widget control panel area.
在一些实施例中,当显示设备全屏播放视频节目时,如果检测到输入信号源发生变化,则在继续全屏播放视频节目的同时,在视频节目画面的上层显示Widget提醒。此时,用户可以通过操作指示显示设备显示Widget面板或者信号源列表。In some embodiments, when the display device plays the video program in full screen, if it is detected that the input signal source changes, the Widget reminder is displayed on the upper layer of the video program screen while continuing to play the video program in full screen. At this point, the user may instruct the display device to display the Widget panel or the signal source list through operations.
在一些实施例中,在全屏播放视频节目时显示的Widget提醒控件可获取焦点。In some embodiments, the Widget reminder control displayed when the video program is playing in full screen can acquire focus.
在一些实施例中,可以在视频节目画面上显示Widget提醒控件的同时,在Widget提醒控件上显示焦点对象。或者,可以当Widget提醒控件在视频节目画面上的显示时长达到第一预设时长时,在Widget提醒控件上显示焦点对象。In some embodiments, the focus object may be displayed on the Widget reminder control while the Widget reminder control is displayed on the video program screen. Alternatively, when the display duration of the Widget reminder control on the video program screen reaches a first preset duration, the focus object may be displayed on the Widget reminder control.
在一些实施例中,当焦点停留在Widget提醒控件上时,用户可以通过确认操作来控制显示Widget面板或者信号源列表。In some embodiments, when the focus stays on the Widget reminder control, the user can control the display of the Widget panel or the signal source list through a confirmation operation.
在一些实施例中,如果在显示Widget提醒控件后的第二预设时长内未接收到对Widget提醒控件的确认操作,则撤销Widget提醒控件。In some embodiments, if no confirmation operation on the Widget reminder control is received within the second preset time period after the Widget reminder control is displayed, the Widget reminder control is canceled.
在一些实施例中,在视频节目画面上显示有Widget提醒控件时,用户可以通过操作遥控器上的返回按键或者其他指定按键撤销Widget提醒控件。In some embodiments, when the Widget reminder control is displayed on the video program screen, the user can cancel the Widget reminder control by operating the return button or other designated buttons on the remote control.
在一些实施例中,在全屏播放页面中,Widget提醒控件在显示的时候不可获取焦点。用户可以通过预定按键触发显示装置将焦点设置在Widget提醒控件上,或者,此时显示的Widget提醒控件被默认配置为出现即获得焦点,用户可以通过方向键移动焦点,来是焦点位于Widget提醒控件或者全屏播放窗口。In some embodiments, in the full-screen playback page, the Widget reminder control cannot acquire focus when it is displayed. The user can trigger the display device to set the focus on the Widget reminder control through a predetermined button, or, the Widget reminder control displayed at this time is configured by default to obtain the focus when it appears, and the user can move the focus through the direction keys, so that the focus is on the Widget reminder control Or play the window full screen.
在全屏播放页面显示Widget提醒控件时,响应与接收到对应遥控设备上的确认键的确认指令时,判断当前焦点的位置/当前是谁获得了焦点,若Widget提醒控件获得焦点,则显示Widget面板区域或显示信号源控件对应的次级面板;若全屏播放窗口获得焦点,则控制暂停视频的播放。When the Widget reminder control is displayed on the full-screen playback page, when responding to and receiving the confirmation command of the confirmation key on the corresponding remote control device, determine the current focus position/who currently has the focus, and if the Widget reminder control obtains the focus, then display the Widget panel The area or sub-panel corresponding to the display source control; if the full-screen playback window gets focus, the control pauses the playback of the video.
在一些实施例中,在暂停视频的播放的同时,取消全屏播放窗口上显示的Widget提醒控件。In some embodiments, while the video playback is paused, the Widget reminder control displayed on the full-screen playback window is canceled.
在一些实施例中,Widget提醒控件获得焦点,显示Widget面板区域或显示信号源控件对应的次级面板。可以是,移动全屏播放窗口的位置,并在空出的区域显示Widget面板区域或显示信号源控件对应的次级面板。或者直接在全屏播放窗口上方,以浮层的方式Widget面板区域或显示信号源控件对应的次级面板。In some embodiments, the Widget notification control gets the focus, and the Widget panel area is displayed or the sub-panel corresponding to the signal source control is displayed. It may be that the position of the full-screen playback window is moved, and the Widget panel area or the sub-panel corresponding to the signal source control is displayed in the vacated area. Or directly above the full-screen playback window, the Widget panel area or the sub-panel corresponding to the signal source control is displayed in the form of a floating layer.
图48为在全屏播放视频节目时检测到信号源变化而显示的用户界面。如图48所示,该用户界面中,视频节目画面全屏显示,在视频节目画面上层的左上角区域显示有Widget提醒控件。此时的Widget提醒控件上未显示有焦点对象,即其未获取焦点。Fig. 48 is a user interface displayed when a signal source change is detected when a video program is played in full screen. As shown in FIG. 48 , in the user interface, the video program screen is displayed in full screen, and a Widget reminder control is displayed in the upper left corner area of the upper layer of the video program screen. At this time, no focus object is displayed on the Widget reminder control, that is, it has not acquired focus.
图49为图48中Widget提醒控件的显示时长达到第一预设时长(如3s)后显示的用户界面。与图48所示界面的主要不同在于,在图49所示用户界面中,Widget提醒控件上显示有焦点对象。此时,用户可以通过操作遥控器上的确认键,指示显示Widget面板或者信号源列表。FIG. 49 is a user interface displayed after the display duration of the Widget reminder control in FIG. 48 reaches a first preset duration (for example, 3s). The main difference from the interface shown in FIG. 48 is that, in the user interface shown in FIG. 49 , a focus object is displayed on the Widget reminder control. At this point, the user can instruct to display the Widget panel or the signal source list by operating the confirmation key on the remote controller.
图50示例性为在显示图49所示用户界面时,接收到用户输入的确认操作而显示的用户界面。如图50所示,继续播放视频节目的同时,在视频节目画面的上层显示Widget面板或者信号源列表。FIG. 50 exemplarily shows a user interface displayed upon receiving a confirmation operation input by a user when the user interface shown in FIG. 49 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 50 , while continuing to play the video program, a Widget panel or a signal source list is displayed on the upper layer of the video program screen.
在图48-23所示示例中,如果接收到用户输入的确认操作,还可以停止播放视频节目。In the example shown in Figure 48-23, if the confirmation operation input by the user is received, the video program can also be stopped.
在一些实施例中,用户可以通过操作,将Widget面板上的Widget控件移除,以及,移动Widget控件在Widget面板上的位置,以改变Widget面板中Widget控件间的布局。In some embodiments, the user can remove the Widget controls on the Widget panel and move the position of the Widget controls on the Widget panel to change the layout of the Widget controls in the Widget panel.
下面,以图7所示Widget面板为例,介绍移动Widget控件位置、删除Widget控件过程的用户操作和界面变化。Next, taking the Widget panel shown in FIG. 7 as an example, user operations and interface changes in the process of moving the position of the Widget control and deleting the Widget control are introduced.
在一些实施例中,当焦点停留在任意一个Widget控件上时,用户可以通过长按遥控器上的确认键,来激活Widget面板的编辑状态,当Widget面板处于编辑状态时,用户即可对其上的Widget控件进行移动或者删除。In some embodiments, when the focus stays on any Widget control, the user can activate the editing state of the Widget panel by long pressing the confirmation key on the remote control. When the Widget panel is in the editing state, the user can edit it Move or delete the Widget controls on the
在一些实施例中,将编辑状态的Widget面板称为Widget编辑面板。In some embodiments, the Widget panel in the editing state is called a Widget editing panel.
图51为一种显示Widget面板的用户界面,在该用户界面中,焦点停留在“设置”控件上。当用户长按遥控器上的确认键时,Widget面板进入到编辑状态,进而显示出Widget编辑面板,如图52所示。Figure 51 is a user interface displaying the Widget panel, in which the focus stays on the "Settings" control. When the user presses and holds the confirmation key on the remote control, the Widget panel enters the editing state, and then displays the Widget editing panel, as shown in FIG. 52 .
在一些实施例中,Widget面板上具有用于激活Widget面板编辑状态的控件,用户可以通过操作该控件,来激活Widget面板的编辑状态。In some embodiments, the Widget panel has a control for activating the editing state of the Widget panel, and the user can activate the editing state of the Widget panel by operating the control.
在一些实施例中,在用户长按某个Widget控件以激活Widget面板的编辑状态后,根据焦点所在的默认拾起该Widget控件。例如,如图51所示,焦点停留在“设置”控件上,当用户长按遥控器上的确认键时,激活Widget面板编辑状态的同时,自动拾起“设置”控件(将焦点放置在“设置”控件上)。这是因为用户在焦点位于该Widget控件时唤起设置操作,意味着用户是将对这个Widget控件进行编辑操作,因此通过默认拾起该Widget控件,相比于拾起预先定好的控件,简化了用户操作。In some embodiments, after the user presses and holds a certain Widget control to activate the editing state of the Widget panel, the Widget control is picked up according to the default location where the focus is. For example, as shown in Figure 51, the focus stays on the "Settings" control, and when the user presses and holds the confirmation key on the remote control, the "Settings" control is automatically picked up while the Widget panel editing state is activated (put the focus on the "Settings" control). Settings" control). This is because the user invokes the setting operation when the focus is on the Widget control, which means that the user will edit the Widget control. Therefore, picking up the Widget control by default simplifies the user’s operate.
在一些实施例中,用户通过返回指令的操作可以解除“设置”控件的拾起,然后通过方向键移动焦点, 在焦点位于目标控件的时候,通过短按确定键拾起目标控件。In some embodiments, the user can cancel the picking of the "Settings" control through the operation of the return command, and then move the focus through the direction keys. When the focus is on the target control, short press the OK key to pick up the target control.
在一些实施例中,自动拾起“设置”控件后,通过连续的指令,可以取消Widget面板的激活。In some embodiments, after the "Settings" control is automatically picked up, the activation of the Widget panel can be deactivated through continuous instructions.
在一些实施例中,在自动拾起“设置”控件,确定“设置”控件的位置,对于不邻近边界的侧面显示方向控件,以指示可输入的的不删除控件的方向指令。对于邻近边界的侧面显示删除控件,以表征输入该方向的方向指令会删除控件。In some embodiments, after the "Settings" control is automatically picked up, the position of the "Settings" control is determined, and a direction control is displayed for a side that is not adjacent to the boundary to indicate an inputtable direction command that does not delete the control. A delete control is displayed for sides adjacent to the border to indicate that entering a direction command for that direction deletes the control.
在一些实施例中,自动拾起“设置”控件可以位于中间位置,因此以其为中心的上下左右四个方向均显示方向控件,在接收用输入的向右移动的方向指令后,移动控件位置,被指向位置的控件(如“Router”控件)可以被覆盖即设置控件覆盖在“Router”控件上方显示,也可以交换位置,此时控制器判断“设置”控件的四个边是否邻近面板边界,示例性的,如图54所示,设置控件的右侧边邻近的显示面板的右边界,其他边不与面板边界相邻,因此其他三个侧面分别显示方向箭头控件,右侧显示删除提示控件。通过删除控件的显示,可以提示用户此时继续按压遥控设备上的该侧方向键(示例性的,右侧方向按键),不会使“设置”控件移动到下一行,而是会进行删除操作。一方面避免了现有技术的控件管理逻辑中进入让整个Widget面板进入控件删除/安装模式中的繁琐操作,另一方便,删除的控件可以提示用户继续输入方向按键指令所执行的操作,在“设置”控件移动到邻近边界位置后,在未接收到进一步的向右移动的按键指令前,进行明显的提醒可以减轻用户由于其他设备中,在接收到焦点移动指令后将焦点移动到下一行或进行动效提醒不能移动的操作习惯带来的影响。In some embodiments, the automatically picked up "Settings" control can be located in the middle position, so the direction controls are displayed in the four directions centered on it, up, down, left, and right. After receiving the direction instruction to move to the right inputted by the user, the position of the control is moved. , the control pointed to (such as the "Router" control) can be overlaid, that is, the setting control is overlaid and displayed on the top of the "Router" control, or the position can be exchanged. At this time, the controller judges whether the four sides of the "Setting" control are adjacent to the border of the panel , for example, as shown in Figure 54, set the right side of the control to be adjacent to the right border of the display panel, and the other sides are not adjacent to the panel border, so the other three sides display direction arrow controls respectively, and the right side displays a deletion prompt controls. By deleting the display of the control, the user can be prompted to continue pressing the side direction key (for example, the right direction key) on the remote control device at this time, and the "settings" control will not be moved to the next row, but will be deleted. . On the one hand, it avoids the cumbersome operation of entering the entire Widget panel into the control deletion/installation mode in the control management logic of the prior art; After the "Settings" control is moved to a position adjacent to the boundary, before receiving a further right-moving key instruction, an obvious reminder can relieve the user from moving the focus to the next line or the next line after receiving the focus movement instruction in other devices. The impact of the operating habit of not being able to move is animated.
在一些实施例中,可以通过如下方法判断控件的边是否邻近面板的边界,一种方式是,通过确定控件边界和Widget边界是否为预设值,预设值表征邻近边界的控件和Widget面板边界之间的距离,这个距离值可以根据设计过程中的控件展示位和Widget面板显示位置来确定。另一种方式是,指定边界控件位,在控件的位置和边界控件位重叠时,确定控件邻近边界控件位对应的边界。再一种方式中,通过控件的坐标和预设的坐标判断,示例性的,x=a是左边界对应的控件位置的边界,x=b是右边界对应的控件位置的边界。在“设置”控件的两个竖向边的x坐标分别为A、B时,若a不等于A,b等于B时,则确定该控件邻近面板的右边界,则左侧显示方向箭头,右侧显示删除控件。在一些情形中,控件的宽度为3会出现,a等于A,b等于B时,则确定该控件邻近面板的左边界和右边界,则左侧显示删除控件,右侧也显示删除控件,用户通过左右箭头均会触发控件删除。In some embodiments, the following method can be used to determine whether the edge of the control is adjacent to the border of the panel. One way is to determine whether the border of the control and the border of the Widget are preset values. The distance between them can be determined according to the display position of the control and the display position of the Widget panel during the design process. Another way is to specify the boundary control bit, and when the position of the control overlaps with the boundary control bit, determine the boundary corresponding to the control adjacent to the boundary control bit. In another manner, judging by the coordinates of the control and the preset coordinates, for example, x=a is the boundary of the control position corresponding to the left boundary, and x=b is the boundary of the control position corresponding to the right boundary. When the x-coordinates of the two vertical sides of the "Settings" control are A and B respectively, if a is not equal to A and b is equal to B, then it is determined that the control is adjacent to the right border of the panel, and then a direction arrow is displayed on the left side, and a direction arrow is displayed on the right side. The side shows the delete control. In some cases, a control with a width of 3 will appear. When a is equal to A and b is equal to B, it is determined that the control is adjacent to the left and right borders of the panel, and the delete control is displayed on the left side, and the delete control is also displayed on the right side. The user Control deletion is triggered by both the left and right arrows.
在一些实施例中,覆盖显示可以避免控件的反复移动,示例性的,用户选择向右移动“设置”控件,该控件可以覆盖在第一目标控件如“Router”控件上方,如果用户选择向下移动,设置”控件可以覆盖在第二目标控件如“多屏互动”控件上方,“Router”控件恢复显示且位置避免,如果用户现在输入完成编辑的操作,则通过坐标的更新,互换“设置”控件和“多屏互动”控件,而“Router”控件不受影响。In some embodiments, the overlapping display can avoid the repeated movement of the control. Exemplarily, if the user chooses to move the "Settings" control to the right, the control can be overlaid on the first target control such as the "Router" control. If the user chooses to move down The "Move, Set" control can be overlaid on the second target control such as the "Multi-Screen Interaction" control, and the "Router" control is restored to the display and the position is avoided. If the user enters the editing operation now, the "Settings" can be exchanged through the update of the coordinates " control and "Multi-Screen Interaction" control, while the "Router" control is not affected.
示例性的,在显示图640所示用户界面时,用户可以通过向下移动焦点,向下滑动Widget面板,使布局在Widget面板下部的控件显示在视图显示区中。图53为用户向下滑动Widget面板到底部后显示的用户界面,在图53中,在当前功能控件的下方显示有编辑控件和添加控件。当用户操作该编辑控件时,Widget面板进入到编辑状态,进而可以显示出Widget编辑面板;当用户操作该添加控件时,将跳转到Widget商店界面。Exemplarily, when the user interface shown in FIG. 640 is displayed, the user may slide the Widget panel downwards by moving the focus downward, so that the controls arranged at the lower part of the Widget panel are displayed in the view display area. FIG. 53 is a user interface displayed after the user slides the Widget panel to the bottom. In FIG. 53 , edit controls and add controls are displayed below the current function controls. When the user operates the editing control, the Widget panel enters the editing state, and then the Widget editing panel can be displayed; when the user operates the adding control, it will jump to the Widget store interface.
参阅图52,Widget编辑面板上保留Widget面板上的Widget控件,此外还显示有位置框架。位置框架由多个栅格组成,一个栅格是Widget控件所能占据的最小区域单元,同时也是移动Widget控件位置时的最小移动距离。一个Widget控件可以布局在一个或者多个栅格上。应当理解,Widget控件的尺寸越大,其占据的栅格数量越多。在图52中,“设置”控件处于拾起状态,此时,“设置”控件上还显示有操作指示标识,该操作指示标识指示四个移动方向,分别为上、下、左、右,表示用户可以向上、下、左、右移动“设置”控件。Referring to Fig. 52, the Widget controls on the Widget panel are reserved on the Widget editing panel, and a position frame is also displayed. The position frame is composed of multiple grids. A grid is the smallest area unit that a Widget control can occupy, and it is also the minimum moving distance when moving the position of the Widget control. A Widget control can be laid out on one or more grids. It should be understood that the larger the size of the Widget control, the larger the number of grids it occupies. In Figure 52, the "Settings" control is in the picked-up state. At this time, the "Settings" control also displays an operation indicator, which indicates four moving directions, which are up, down, left, and right, indicating The user can move the Settings control up, down, left, and right.
在显示Widget编辑面板时,用户通过操作,可以拾起要移动的Widget控件,还可以向上、下、左或者右移动拾起的Widget控件,通过将Widget控件移出视图显示区来删除Widget控件,以及放下拾起的Widget控件。示例性的,当焦点停留在某个Widget控件上时,用户可以操作遥控器上的确认键拾起该Widget控件,接着,通过操作遥控器上的方向键移动该Widget控件的位置,如果将该Widget控件移出视图显示区,将会删除该Widget控件;用户可以通过操作遥控器上的确认键放下拾起的Widget控件。When the Widget editing panel is displayed, the user can pick up the Widget control to be moved, move the picked up Widget control up, down, left or right, delete the Widget control by moving the Widget control out of the view display area, and Drop the picked up Widget control. Exemplarily, when the focus stays on a Widget control, the user can operate the confirmation key on the remote control to pick up the Widget control, and then move the position of the Widget control by operating the direction keys on the remote control. When the Widget control is moved out of the view display area, the Widget control will be deleted; the user can drop the picked up Widget control by operating the confirmation key on the remote control.
参阅图52,在拾起“设置”控件的状态下,如果用户按下遥控器上的右键,“设置”控件将向右移动,其中,每按下一次右键,“设置”控件向右移动一个栅格。当然,用户也可以按压遥控器上的左键、上键或者下键将“设置”控件向左、上以及下方移动。Referring to Figure 52, in the state of picking up the "Settings" control, if the user presses the right button on the remote control, the "Settings" control will move to the right, wherein, each time the right button is pressed, the "Settings" control will move one step to the right grid. Of course, the user can also press the left button, the up button or the down button on the remote control to move the "setting" control to the left, up and down.
当显示设备接收到向右移动“设置”控件的用户操作时,显示图54所示用户界面。可以看出,相对于图52,在图54中,“设置”控件向右移动一个栅格,与“Rouder”控件重叠且显示在“Rouder”控件的上层,“设置”控件上显示的操作指示标识指示三个移动方向,分别为上、下和左,表示用户可以向上、下、左移动“设置”控件。值得注意的是,“设置”控件当前所在的栅格位于视图显示区的边缘,因此在“设置”控件的右侧显示有删除提醒,用以提醒用户可以通过右键操作将“设置”控件移出视图显示区,以删除该控件。When the display device receives the user operation of moving the "Settings" control to the right, it displays the user interface shown in FIG. 54 . It can be seen that, compared to Figure 52, in Figure 54, the "Settings" control moves one grid to the right, overlaps with the "Router" control and is displayed on the upper layer of the "Router" control, and the operation instructions displayed on the "Settings" control The logo indicates three directions of movement, up, down, and left, indicating that the user can move the Settings control up, down, and left. It is worth noting that the grid where the "Settings" control is currently located is located at the edge of the view display area, so a deletion reminder is displayed on the right side of the "Settings" control to remind the user that the "Settings" control can be moved out of view by right-clicking display area to remove the control.
在显示图54所示用户界面时,如果用户按压遥控器上的右键,将显示如图55所示的删除确认框,删除确认框中包括“确定删除”控件和“取消”控件。如果用户选中“确定删除”控件,即指示显示设备将“设置”控件删除,此时可以显示图56所示用户界面;如果用户选中“取消”,则返回到图54所示用户界面。在图56所示用户界面中,“设置”控件消失,“Rouder”控件呈现出来,且焦点停留在“Rouder”控件上。When the user interface shown in FIG. 54 is displayed, if the user presses the right button on the remote controller, a deletion confirmation box as shown in FIG. 55 will be displayed, and the deletion confirmation box includes a "OK to delete" control and a "Cancel" control. If the user selects the "Delete" control, the display device is instructed to delete the "Settings" control, and the user interface shown in Figure 56 can be displayed at this time; if the user selects "Cancel", the user interface shown in Figure 54 is returned. In the user interface shown in Figure 56, the "Settings" control disappears, the "Router" control appears, and the focus stays on the "Router" control.
在一些实施例中,如果某个Widget控件的周围产生与其尺寸适配的空位,则使该Widget控件延伸到 空位,以补足该空位。其中,当Widget控件的宽度与其周围空位的宽度相同,或者Widget控件的高度与其周围空位的高度相同时,认为Widget控件与其周围的空位尺寸适配。空位是指未被Widget控件占据的栅格。In some embodiments, if there is a space around a certain Widget control that fits its size, the Widget control is extended to the space to fill up the space. Wherein, when the width of the Widget control is the same as the width of the surrounding space, or the height of the Widget control is the same as the height of the surrounding space, it is considered that the Widget control is adapted to the size of the surrounding space. Empty slots are grids not occupied by Widget controls.
如图57所示,该图中展示空位的变化,而不是指三个状态存在同一实际界面。Widget控件右侧产生1×1的空位时,该Widget控件可以向右延伸一个栅格,从而由显示状态11变化为显示状态12。当该Widget控件下侧产生1×1的空位时,该Widget控件可以向下延伸一个栅格,从而由显示状态11变化为显示状态13。应当理解,显示状态11为该Widget控件占据1×1个栅格时的状态,显示状态12为该Widget控件占据1×2个栅格时的状态,显示状态13为该Widget控件占据2×1个栅格时的状态。As shown in Figure 57, the figure shows the change of vacancies, rather than the same actual interface for the three states. When a 1×1 vacancy is generated on the right side of the Widget control, the Widget control can extend one grid to the right, thereby changing from display state 11 to display state 12 . When a 1×1 vacancy is generated on the lower side of the Widget control, the Widget control can extend downward by one grid, thereby changing from display state 11 to display state 13 . It should be understood that display state 11 is the state when the Widget control occupies 1×1 grid, display state 12 is the state when the Widget control occupies 1×2 grid, and display state 13 is the state when the Widget control occupies 2×1 grid. The state of the grid.
如图58所示,该图中展示空位的变化,而不是指三个状态存在同一实际界面。当图58中Widget控件右侧产生1×1的空位时,该Widget控件可以向右延伸一个栅格,从而由显示状态21变化为显示状态22。当该Widget控件下侧产生1×2个空位时,该Widget控件可以整体向下延伸一个栅格,从而由显示状态21变化为显示状态23。应当理解,显示状态21为该Widget控件占据1×2个栅格时的状态,显示状态22为该Widget控件占据1×3个栅格时的状态,显示状态13为该Widget控件占据2×2个栅格时的状态。As shown in Figure 58, the figure shows the change of vacancies, rather than the same actual interface for the three states. When a 1×1 vacancy is generated on the right side of the Widget control in FIG. 58 , the Widget control can extend one grid to the right, thereby changing from display state 21 to display state 22 . When 1×2 vacancies are generated on the lower side of the Widget control, the Widget control can extend downwards by one grid as a whole, thereby changing from the display state 21 to the display state 23 . It should be understood that the display state 21 is the state when the Widget control occupies 1×2 grids, the display state 22 is the state when the Widget control occupies 1×3 grids, and the display state 13 is the state when the Widget control occupies 2×2 grids. The state of the grid.
如图59示,该图中展示空位的变化,而不是指三个状态存在同一实际界面。当图59中Widget控件右侧产生2×1的空位时,该Widget控件可以向右延伸一个栅格,从而由显示状态31变化为显示状态32。当该Widget控件下侧产生1×2个空位时,该Widget控件可以整体向下延伸一个栅格,从而由显示状态31变化为显示状态33。应当理解,显示状态31为该Widget控件占据2×2个栅格时的状态,显示状态32为该Widget控件占据2×3个栅格时的状态,显示状态33为该Widget控件占据3×2个栅格时的状态。As shown in Figure 59, the figure shows the change of vacancies, rather than the same actual interface in the three states. When a 2×1 vacancy is generated on the right side of the Widget control in FIG. 59 , the Widget control can extend one grid to the right, thereby changing from display state 31 to display state 32 . When 1×2 vacancies are generated on the lower side of the Widget control, the Widget control can extend downwards by one grid as a whole, thereby changing from the display state 31 to the display state 33 . It should be understood that the display state 31 is the state when the Widget control occupies 2×2 grids, the display state 32 is the state when the Widget control occupies 2×3 grids, and the display state 33 is the state when the Widget control occupies 3×2 grids. The state of the grid.
在一些实施例中,以高度最高的Widget控件的高度作为该Widget控件所在行的高度。此外,当行与行之间存在空位行时,下方的行整体向上平移,以将空位行补足。各行中的Widget控件向左对齐。In some embodiments, the height of the highest Widget control is used as the height of the row where the Widget control is located. In addition, when there is a blank row between the rows, the lower rows are translated upward as a whole to complement the blank row. Widget controls in each row are aligned to the left.
在一些实施例中,在编辑完成后,确定空位的位置,然后确定是否存在位于其左侧的控件,如果存在则判定左侧控件的高度是否和空位的高度相同,若相同,则扩大左侧控件的显示区域以覆盖空位,若不同,则确定是否存在位于其右侧的控件,如果存在则判定右侧控件的高度是否和空位的高度相同,若相同,则扩大右侧控件的显示区域以覆盖空位,如果不同,则不填充该空位,或执行其他维度的判断逻辑。In some embodiments, after the editing is completed, determine the position of the empty space, and then determine whether there is a control on the left side of it, and if so, determine whether the height of the left control is the same as the height of the empty space, and if they are the same, expand the left side The display area of the control to cover the empty space. If it is different, determine whether there is a control on the right side of it. If it exists, determine whether the height of the control on the right is the same as the height of the empty space. If they are the same, expand the display area of the control on the right to Cover the vacancy, if different, do not fill the vacancy, or execute the judgment logic of other dimensions.
在一些实施例中,在编辑完成后,确定空位的位置,然后确定是否存在位于其上侧的控件,如果存在则判定左侧控件的宽度是否和空位的宽度相同,若相同,则扩大左侧控件的显示区域以覆盖空位,若不同,则确定是否存在位于其下侧的控件,如果存在则判定下侧控件的宽度是否和空位的宽度相同,若相同,则扩大下侧控件的显示区域以覆盖空位,如果不同,则不填充该空位,或执行其他维度的判断逻辑。In some embodiments, after the editing is completed, determine the position of the blank, and then determine whether there is a control on its upper side, and if so, determine whether the width of the control on the left is the same as the width of the blank, and if so, expand the left side The display area of the control to cover the empty space. If it is different, determine whether there is a control located below it. If it exists, determine whether the width of the lower control is the same as the width of the empty space. If they are the same, expand the display area of the lower control to Cover the vacancy, if different, do not fill the vacancy, or execute the judgment logic of other dimensions.
在一些实施例中,左右两个方向的判断和上下两侧的判断可以以任意顺序组合。In some embodiments, the determination of the left and right directions and the determination of the up and down sides can be combined in any order.
在一些实施例中,各行中的Widget控件按照先从从上到下,再从左到右的顺序排列。In some embodiments, the Widget controls in each row are arranged from top to bottom and then from left to right.
在显示图54所示用户界面时,用户可以操作遥控器上的确认键以放下“设置”控件。根据上述规则,当用户操作遥控器上的确认键以放下“设置”控件时,将显示如图60所示的用户界面。在图60中,“设置”控件左侧产生空位栅格。“Rouder”控件移动到下一行,并向左对齐,其左侧存在两个空位栅格。在显示图60时,用户可以操作遥控器上的返回键以退出编辑状态。根据上述规则,当用户操作遥控器上的返回键时,将显示图61所示用户界面。在图61中,“设置”控件向左延伸一个栅格,从而将其左侧的空位补足;“Rouder”控件向右延伸2个栅格,从而将其右侧的空位补足。When the user interface shown in FIG. 54 is displayed, the user can operate the confirmation key on the remote control to drop the "Settings" control. According to the above rules, when the user operates the confirmation key on the remote control to drop the "Settings" control, a user interface as shown in FIG. 60 will be displayed. In Figure 60, a grid of slots is generated to the left of the Settings control. The "Router" control moves to the next row and is aligned to the left with two empty grids to its left. When Figure 60 is displayed, the user can operate the return key on the remote controller to exit the editing state. According to the above rules, when the user operates the return key on the remote controller, the user interface shown in FIG. 61 will be displayed. In Figure 61, the "Settings" control is extended by one grid to the left to fill the vacancy on its left; the "Router" control is extended to the right by 2 grids to fill the vacancy on its right.
在显示图56所示用户界面时,用户可以操作遥控器上的返回键,指示退出编辑状态,显示如图62所示用户界面。在图62中,“Rouder”控件图标向左延伸一个栅格,以补充删除“设置”控件而产生的空位。When the user interface shown in FIG. 56 is displayed, the user can operate the return key on the remote controller to instruct to exit the editing state, and the user interface shown in FIG. 62 is displayed. In Figure 62, the "Router" control icon is extended one grid to the left to fill the void created by the removal of the "Settings" control.
应当理解,在显示图56所示用户界面时,用户也可以继续移动焦点位置,来选择要移动或者删除的控件,以及通过确认操作拾起选择的控件,通过操作方向键移动拾起的控件。例如,用户可以通过确认操作拾起“Rouder”控件。接着,用户可以通过一次左键操作,将“Rouder”控件向左移动一个栅格。或者,用户可以通过右键操作,将“Rouder”控件移出视图显示区,从而将“Rouder”控件从Widget面板上删除。It should be understood that when the user interface shown in FIG. 56 is displayed, the user can also continue to move the focus position to select the control to be moved or deleted, and pick up the selected control through the confirmation operation, and move the picked up control by operating the arrow keys. For example, the user can pick up the "Router" control with a confirmation action. Then, the user can move the "Router" control one grid to the left with one left-click operation. Alternatively, the user can right-click to move the "Router" control out of the view display area, thereby deleting the "Router" control from the Widget panel.
在一些实施例中,对于失效的Widget控件,在显示Widget面板时,在失效Widget控件图标上显示失效标识,以通过失效标识提醒用户此Widget控件已经失效。应当理解,造成Widget控件失效的原因有多种,例如,如果系统中某个应用程序被删除,那么将导致该应用程序对应的Widget控件失效。In some embodiments, for an invalid Widget control, when the Widget panel is displayed, an invalidation mark is displayed on the icon of the invalidated Widget control, so as to remind the user that the Widget control has been invalidated through the invalidation mark. It should be understood that there are various reasons for the failure of the Widget control. For example, if an application program in the system is deleted, the Widget control corresponding to the application program will become invalid.
从图63可以看出,该Widget面板上的“发现”控件图标上显示有失效标识“?”,表示“发现”控件为失效的Widget控件。It can be seen from FIG. 63 that the "Discovery" control icon on the Widget panel displays an invalid mark "?", indicating that the "Discovery" control is an invalid Widget control.
在一些实施例中,在显示Widget面板时,如果用户通过操作拾起失效的Widget控件,可以显示Widget失效提示框,Widget失效提示框中包括用于删除失效Widget的控件和取消控件,用户可以操作删除控件,将拾起的失效Widget控件删除,或者操作取消控件,返回到显示Widget失效提示框前的界面。In some embodiments, when the Widget panel is displayed, if the user picks up the invalid Widget control by operation, a Widget invalidation prompt box may be displayed, and the Widget invalidation prompt box includes a control and a cancel control for deleting the invalid Widget, and the user can operate Delete the control, delete the invalid Widget control picked up, or operate the cancel control, and return to the interface before the Widget invalidation prompt box is displayed.
另外,Widget失效提示框中还可以显示多个推荐Widget控件,用于更换拾起的失效Widget控件。用户可以在Widget失效提示框中选中一个推荐Widget控件,来将其拾起的失效Widget控件更换为选中的推荐Widget控件。In addition, a plurality of recommended Widget controls may also be displayed in the Widget invalidation prompt box for replacing the picked up invalid Widget controls. The user can select a recommended Widget control in the Widget invalidation prompt box to replace the invalid Widget control picked up by the user with the selected recommended Widget control.
需要说明的是,推荐Widget控件是根据拾起的失效Widget控件筛选出的,推荐Widget控件与拾起的失效Widget控件的尺寸相同。It should be noted that the recommended Widget controls are selected according to the picked up invalid Widget controls, and the size of the recommended Widget controls is the same as that of the picked up invalid Widget controls.
例如,在显示图63所示用户界面时,用户首先移动焦点到“发现”控件上,然后操作遥控器上的确认键拾起“发现”控件,由于“发现”控件为失效的Widget控件,因此,当显示设备接收到对“发现”控件的确认操作时,显示Widget失效提示框,如图64所示。参阅图64,在该Widget失效提示框中,显示有“删除失效Widget”控件、“取消”控件以及多个推荐Widget。在显示该Widget失效提示框时,如果 用户操作“删除失效Widget”控件,则将“发现”控件从Widget面板中删除,并返回到包含最新Widget面板的用户界面。在显示该Widget失效提示框时,如果用户操作“取消”控件,将返回到44所示用户界面。在显示该Widget失效提示框时,如果用户选中某个推荐Widget,显示设备则将Widget面板中的“发现”控件更换为用户选中的推荐Widget。For example, when the user interface shown in Figure 63 is displayed, the user first moves the focus to the "Discovery" control, and then operates the confirmation key on the remote control to pick up the "Discovery" control. Since the "Discovery" control is an invalid Widget control, therefore , when the display device receives a confirmation operation on the "discovery" control, it displays a Widget invalidation prompt box, as shown in FIG. 64 . Referring to FIG. 64 , in the Widget invalidation prompt box, there are displayed a "delete invalid Widget" control, a "cancel" control, and multiple recommended widgets. When the Widget invalidation prompt box is displayed, if the user operates the "Delete Invalid Widget" control, the "Discovery" control is deleted from the Widget panel, and returns to the user interface containing the latest Widget panel. When the Widget invalidation prompt box is displayed, if the user operates the "Cancel" control, the user interface shown in 44 will be returned. When the Widget invalidation prompt box is displayed, if the user selects a recommended Widget, the display device replaces the "Discovery" control in the Widget panel with the recommended Widget selected by the user.
在一些实施例中,在显示Widget面板前,检测各个Widget控件是否失效,如果存在失效的Widget控件,则将失效的Widget控件从Widget面板数据中删除,从而显示的Widget面板中不显示失效的Widget控件。In some embodiments, before displaying the Widget panel, it is detected whether each Widget control is invalid, and if there is an invalid Widget control, the invalid Widget control is deleted from the Widget panel data, so that the displayed Widget panel does not display the invalid Widget controls.
在一些实施例中,显示设备在教育模式下工作时,用户可以通过按键输入、触控输入和/或语音输入对显示设备进行操作。In some embodiments, when the display device works in the education mode, the user can operate the display device through key input, touch input and/or voice input.
在一些实施例中,显示设备在教育模式下开机后,显示教育模式系统主页。In some embodiments, after the display device is turned on in the education mode, it displays the homepage of the education mode system.
在一些实施例中,教育模式系统主页可以以下述实施例介绍的方式进行显示。In some embodiments, the education mode system home page can be displayed in the manner described in the following embodiments.
在一些实施例中,显示设备开机后显示的系统主页采用Widget方式设计,即系统主页上包括按照预设顺序排列的Widget控件,当用户点击任意一个Widget控件时,用户界面跳转到该Widget控件对应的一级页面或者Widget程序的主界面。In some embodiments, the system home page displayed after the display device is turned on is designed in a Widget manner, that is, the system home page includes Widget controls arranged in a preset order, and when the user clicks on any Widget control, the user interface jumps to the Widget control The corresponding first-level page or the main interface of the Widget program.
在一些实施例中,用于显示Widget控件的视图显示区可以占据整个屏幕,也可以占据部分屏幕,如占据屏幕的左侧区域。In some embodiments, the view display area for displaying the Widget control may occupy the entire screen, or may occupy part of the screen, such as occupying the left area of the screen.
在一些实施例中,用户可以将本地图片或者系统提供的背景主题设置成系统主页的背景。In some embodiments, the user can set a local picture or a background theme provided by the system as the background of the system homepage.
在一种实现方式中,显示设备可以是常见的显示屏幕固定设置的,用户只能以横向画面宽度大于竖向画面宽度的方式进行观看。在一些实施例中,显示设备的显示屏幕是可以旋转的,显示设备设置有支撑部,以及与该支撑部连接的显示部,支撑部可以放在平台墙面等上对整个显示设备进行支撑或固定,显示部可以相对于支撑部进行旋转,横屏状态时使用户以横向画面宽度大于竖向画面宽度的方式进行观看,竖屏状态时使用户以横向画面宽度小于竖向画面宽度的方式进行观看。In an implementation manner, the display device may be a common fixed display screen, and the user can only watch in a manner in which the horizontal screen width is greater than the vertical screen width. In some embodiments, the display screen of the display device can be rotated, the display device is provided with a support part, and a display part connected to the support part, and the support part can be placed on a platform wall or the like to support the entire display device or Fixed, the display part can be rotated relative to the support part. In the landscape state, the user can watch with the horizontal screen width greater than the vertical screen width. In the portrait state, the user can watch with the horizontal screen width smaller than the vertical screen width. watch.
在一些实施例中,显示设备显示部的旋转角度是在同一象限,从横屏状态转到竖屏状态,竖屏状态改横屏状态的时候会沿原旋转路经返回。In some embodiments, the rotation angle of the display part of the display device is in the same quadrant, and the state changes from the landscape state to the portrait state, and returns along the original rotation path when changing from the portrait state to the landscape state.
在一些实施例中,显示设备启动时,如果检测到当前显示器处于横屏状态,则显示横屏系统主页。图65为本申请一些实施例中示出的一种用户界面,该用户界面为采用Widget方式设计的横屏系统主页。如图65所示,该用户界面中包括“时间”、“设置”、“日历”、“天气”、“聚好看”、“聚好学”等多个Widget控件。值得注意的是,在横屏系统主页上可以显示竖屏应用的Widget控件。In some embodiments, when the display device is started, if it is detected that the current display is in a landscape orientation, the landscape system homepage is displayed. FIG. 65 is a user interface shown in some embodiments of the present application. The user interface is a homepage of a horizontal screen system designed in the form of a Widget. As shown in Figure 65, the user interface includes multiple Widget controls such as "Time", "Settings", "Calendar", "Weather", "Jukankan", "Juhaoxue". It is worth noting that the Widget control of the vertical screen application can be displayed on the home page of the horizontal screen system.
在一种实施例中,在显示器处于横屏状态时,用户可以通过按键输入、触控输入和/或语音输入,控制固定组件旋转以使显示器由当前横屏状态转换为竖屏状态,并从显示的横屏系统主页切换到竖屏系统主页。In one embodiment, when the display is in the horizontal screen state, the user can control the rotation of the fixed component through key input, touch input and/or voice input to convert the display from the current horizontal screen state to the vertical screen state, and from The displayed home page of the horizontal screen system is switched to the home page of the vertical screen system.
在一些实施例中,当显示横屏系统主页时,如果用户点击横屏系统主页上可以显示竖屏应用的Widget控件,则显示旋转确认界面,该旋转确认界面中包括“确定旋转”控件和“取消”控件。当用户点击“确定旋转”控件时,控制器控制显示器旋转,并在显示器显示竖屏系统主页。例如,在显示如图65所示的横屏状态系统主页时,如果用户点击“小视频”控件,则显示如图66所示的旋转确认界面。当用户点击该旋转确认界面中的“确定旋转”控件时,显示器旋转到竖屏状态,显示器显示竖屏系统主页。In some embodiments, when the homepage of the landscape system is displayed, if the user clicks on the Widget control that can display the application in the portrait orientation on the homepage of the landscape system, the rotation confirmation interface is displayed, and the rotation confirmation interface includes the "Confirm rotation" control and the " Cancel" control. When the user clicks the "confirm rotation" control, the controller controls the display to rotate, and displays the system home page in portrait orientation on the display. For example, when the homepage of the system in landscape orientation as shown in FIG. 65 is displayed, if the user clicks on the “small video” control, the rotation confirmation interface as shown in FIG. 66 will be displayed. When the user clicks the "Confirm Rotation" control in the rotation confirmation interface, the display rotates to the portrait state, and the display displays the portrait system homepage.
图67为本申请一些实施例中示出的一种用户界面,该用户界面为采用Widget方式设计的竖屏系统主页。如图67所示,该用户界面中包括“时间”、“设置”、“日历”、“天气”、“聚好看”、“聚好学”等多个Widget控件。值得注意的是,在竖屏系统主页上可以显示横屏应用的Widget控件。FIG. 67 is a user interface shown in some embodiments of the present application. The user interface is a homepage of a vertical screen system designed in the form of a Widget. As shown in Figure 67, the user interface includes multiple Widget controls such as "Time", "Settings", "Calendar", "Weather", "Jukankan", "Juhaoxue". It is worth noting that the Widget control of the horizontal screen application can be displayed on the home page of the vertical screen system.
需要说明的是,横屏系统主页和竖屏系统主页中显示的Widget控件可以相同、不完全相同或者完全不同。It should be noted that the Widget controls displayed on the homepage of the horizontal screen system and the homepage of the vertical screen system may be the same, not completely the same, or completely different.
在一些实施例中,在显示横屏系统主页或者竖屏系统主页时,用户可以通过触控输入删除主页上的Widget控件,或者移动Widget控件在主页中的位置,以改变主页中Widget控件的布局。In some embodiments, when the home page of the horizontal screen system or the home page of the vertical screen system is displayed, the user can delete the Widget control on the home page through touch input, or move the position of the Widget control on the home page to change the layout of the Widget control on the home page .
在一些实施例中,响应与输入唤起Widget面板的操作,确定显示设备当前的旋转状态,在显示设备处于横屏状态时,控制桌面主页移动,并在空出的位置显示Widget面板。在显示设备处于竖屏状态时,撤销竖屏主页的显示,全屏显示Widget面板。In some embodiments, the current rotation state of the display device is determined in response to the operation of the input to arouse the Widget panel, and when the display device is in a landscape state, the home page of the desktop is controlled to move, and the Widget panel is displayed at the vacant position. When the display device is in the portrait state, cancel the display of the portrait homepage and display the Widget panel in full screen.
下面,以横屏系统主页为例,对删除主页上的Widget控件或者移动Widget控件在主页中位置时的触控操作及用户界面变化过程进行介绍。In the following, taking the home page of the horizontal screen system as an example, the touch operation and the user interface change process when deleting the Widget control on the home page or moving the position of the Widget control on the home page are introduced.
在一些实施例中,编辑操作输入后可以在原位置显示Widget面板,也可以取消桌面主页的显示,全屏显示Widget面板。In some embodiments, after the editing operation is input, the Widget panel can be displayed at the original position, or the display of the desktop home page can be canceled, and the Widget panel can be displayed in full screen.
在一些实施例中,显示设备是可以触控操作的显示设备,在显示横屏系统主页时,用户可以通过长按页面上任意一个Widget控件,来激活页面编辑状态。例如,如图68所示,当用户长按“K歌”控件时,页面编辑状态被激活,显示如图69所示的编辑状态下的系统主页。In some embodiments, the display device is a display device that can be operated by touch. When the home page of the horizontal screen system is displayed, the user can long press any Widget control on the page to activate the page editing state. For example, as shown in Figure 68, when the user presses the "Karaoke" control for a long time, the page editing state is activated, and the system homepage in the editing state as shown in Figure 69 is displayed.
在一些实施例中,选中控件并维持触控,可以拖动控件,拖动完成后,检测触控点的位置,在触控点移动后的位置位于第一控件位上时,确定该控件位上是否存在已有控件,若有,则控制已有控件和被拖动的控件交换控件位,若没有,则将被拖动的控件在第一控件位显示。In some embodiments, the control can be dragged while the control is selected and kept under touch. After the dragging is completed, the position of the touch point is detected, and when the position of the touch point is located on the first control position, the position of the control is determined. Whether there is an existing control on the screen, if yes, control the existing control and the dragged control to exchange control positions, if not, display the dragged control at the first control position.
在一些实施例中,如果触控点移动至显示区域的边界,显示是否删除被拖动的控件的提示。In some embodiments, if the touch point moves to the boundary of the display area, a prompt indicating whether to delete the dragged control is displayed.
如图69所示,编辑状态下的系统主页上保留原有的Widget控件,每个Widget控件图标的右上角均显示有删除按钮,用户可以通过点击Widget控件上的删除按钮来删除该Widget控件。如图69所示,当用户点击“K歌”控件图标上的删除按钮时,显示如图70所示的删除确认框,删除确认框中显示有“确定删 除”控件和“取消”控件时,用户可以点击“确定删除”控件,指示将“K歌”控件删除,点击“取消”控件返回到如图69所示用户界面。As shown in Figure 69, the original Widget controls are retained on the system home page in the editing state, and a delete button is displayed on the upper right corner of each Widget control icon, and the user can delete the Widget control by clicking the delete button on the Widget control. As shown in Figure 69, when the user clicks the delete button on the "Karaoke" control icon, the delete confirmation box shown in Figure 70 is displayed, and when the delete confirmation box displays the "OK to delete" control and the "Cancel" control, The user can click on the "OK to delete" control to instruct to delete the "Karaoke" control, and click on the "Cancel" control to return to the user interface shown in FIG. 69 .
此外,如图69所示,编辑状态下的系统主页中显示有位置框架,位置框架由多个栅格组成,一个栅格是Widget控件所能占据的最小区域单元,同时也是移动Widget控件位置时的最小移动距离。一个Widget控件可以布局在一个或者多个栅格上。当系统主页处于编辑状态时,用户还可以通过拖动手势移动任意一个Widget控件的位置。In addition, as shown in Figure 69, the system homepage in the editing state displays a position frame, which is composed of multiple grids. A grid is the smallest area unit that a Widget control can occupy, and it is also used when moving the position of a Widget control. the minimum movement distance. A Widget control can be laid out on one or more grids. When the system home page is in the editing state, the user can also move the position of any Widget control by dragging gestures.
另外,参阅图69,编辑状态下的系统主页中显示有“还原”控件和“确定”控件,用户可以点击“还原”控件,来指示还原到编辑前的系统主页,可以点击“确定”控件,来控制编辑操作生效,以及指示退出编辑状态并显示编辑后的系统主页。In addition, referring to Figure 69, the system home page in the editing state displays a "Restore" control and a "OK" control. The user can click the "Restore" control to instruct to return to the system home page before editing, and click the "OK" control. To control the editing operation to take effect, and indicate to exit the editing state and display the edited system home page.
在一些实施例中,当用户将目标Widget控件由第一位置拖拽到第二位置并松手时,根据目标Widget控件在第二位置时占据的栅格确定一个或者多个可选区域,每个可选区域包括至少一个被目标Widget控件部分占据或者全部占据的栅格,每个可选区域与目标Widget控件的尺寸相同;计算目标Widget控件与各可选区域的重叠面积,将产生最大重叠面积的可选区域确定为目标区域;将目标Widget控件放置在目标区域上。In some embodiments, when the user drags the target Widget control from the first position to the second position and lets go, one or more selectable areas are determined according to the grid occupied by the target Widget control at the second position, each The optional area includes at least one grid that is partially or fully occupied by the target Widget control, and each optional area is the same size as the target Widget control; calculate the overlapping area between the target Widget control and each optional area, and the maximum overlapping area will be generated The optional area of is determined as the target area; the target Widget control is placed on the target area.
如图71所示,用户将图71中Widget控件由第一位置拖动到第二位置并松手,此时,该Widget控件占据的栅格包括栅格1-6,根据栅格1-6可以确定可选区域1-3,其中,可选区域1包括栅格1-2,可选区域2包括栅格1-4,可选区域3包括栅格5-6,各可选区域的尺寸与Widget控件尺寸相同,均为2×2。经计算,确定Widget控件与可选区域1-3重叠面积分别为S1、S2、S3,由于S3>S2>S1,因此,将Widget控件显示在可选区域3上。可选区域是根据相邻的栅格组合形成的。As shown in Figure 71, the user drags the Widget control in Figure 71 from the first position to the second position and lets go. At this time, the grid occupied by the Widget control includes grids 1-6, and grids 1-6 can Determine optional areas 1-3, wherein optional area 1 includes grids 1-2, optional area 2 includes grids 1-4, optional area 3 includes grids 5-6, and the size of each optional area is the same as Widget controls have the same size, 2×2. After calculation, it is determined that the overlapping areas of the Widget control and the optional areas 1-3 are S1, S2, and S3 respectively. Since S3>S2>S1, the Widget control is displayed on the optional area 3. Alternative regions are formed based on combinations of adjacent grids.
参阅图72,根据上述规则,如果用户通过拖动手势将“K歌”控件由原位置拖动到如图72所示位置并松手后,将显示图73所示的用户界面。由图73可以看出,经用户拖动,“K歌”控件分别向下及向右移动一个栅格,并单独布局在第二行,“聚好看”、“聚好学”等控件整体下移三个单元格,并布局在第三行中,第二行和第一行之间产生空位行,第二行和第三行中产生空位。Referring to Fig. 72, according to the above rules, if the user drags the "Karaoke" control from the original position to the position shown in Fig. 72 through the dragging gesture and lets go, the user interface shown in Fig. 73 will be displayed. It can be seen from Figure 73 that after the user drags, the "Karaoke" control moves down and to the right by one grid respectively, and is separately laid out in the second row, and the controls such as "Jukankan" and "Juhaoxue" move down as a whole Three cells are laid out in the third row, with gaps between the second and first rows, and gaps in the second and third rows.
在显示图80所示用户界面时,如果用户点击“确定”控件,表示用户确认该编辑操作,因此退出编辑状态,显示图81所示用户界面。相比于图73,在图74中,第二行和第一行之间的空位行被补足,第二行和第三行中的控件向左对齐。在显示图73所示用户界面时,如果用户点击“还原”控件,表示用户取消该编辑操作,因此,返回到拖动“K歌”控件前的界面。When the user interface shown in FIG. 80 is displayed, if the user clicks the "OK" control, it means that the user confirms the editing operation, so the editing state is exited, and the user interface shown in FIG. 81 is displayed. Compared to Fig. 73, in Fig. 74, the blank row between the second row and the first row is filled, and the controls in the second row and the third row are aligned to the left. When the user interface shown in FIG. 73 is displayed, if the user clicks the "Restore" control, it means that the user cancels the editing operation, and therefore returns to the interface before dragging the "Karaoke" control.
值得注意的是,用户可以也可以通过按键输入确认或者取消已输入的编辑操作,从而实现与点击“确定”控件或者“取消”控件相同的作用。具体的,在显示图73所示用户界面时,用户可以按下遥控器上的确认键,来确认输入的编辑操作并退出编辑状态,进而显示出用户界面。用户可以按下遥控器上的返回键,来取消已输入的编辑操作,进而返回到拖动“K歌”控件前的界面。It is worth noting that the user can also confirm or cancel the input editing operation by pressing the key, so as to achieve the same effect as clicking the "OK" control or the "Cancel" control. Specifically, when the user interface shown in FIG. 73 is displayed, the user can press the confirmation key on the remote controller to confirm the input editing operation and exit the editing state, and then display the user interface. The user can press the return key on the remote control to cancel the input editing operation, and then return to the interface before dragging the "Karaoke" control.
在一些实施例中,横屏系统主页及竖屏系统主页中还显示有用于激活页面编辑状态的控件,用户可以通过点击该控件,来激活页面编辑状态。例如,在显示图71所示横屏系统主页时,用户可以通过向上滑动主页,将编辑控件滑动到视图显示区中。当用户点击该编辑控件时,页面编辑状态被激活,进而显示出编辑状态下的横屏系统主页。In some embodiments, the homepage of the horizontal screen system and the homepage of the vertical screen system also display a control for activating the page editing state, and the user can activate the page editing state by clicking the control. For example, when the homepage of the horizontal screen system shown in FIG. 71 is displayed, the user can slide the editing control into the view display area by sliding the homepage upwards. When the user clicks the edit control, the page editing state is activated, and then the horizontal screen system home page in the editing state is displayed.
在一些实施例中,显示设备响应于接收到触控输入,呈现触控模式对应的用户界面。例如,在显示如图71横屏系统主页时,响应于接收到用户对“K歌”控件的长按操作,显示如图76所示的触控模式对应的编辑状态下的系统主页。In some embodiments, the display device presents a user interface corresponding to the touch mode in response to receiving the touch input. For example, when the horizontal screen system homepage as shown in Figure 71 is displayed, in response to receiving the user's long press operation on the "Karaoke" control, the system homepage in the editing state corresponding to the touch mode as shown in Figure 76 is displayed.
在一些实施例中,检测移动后的“K歌”控件的位置,在该位置已存在不完全重叠的其他控件时,确定被覆盖的控件所在的行,并将这些行内的所有控件下移被覆盖的控件所在的行的高度,并将“K歌”控件显示在拖动后的位置。In some embodiments, the position of the moved "Karaoke" control is detected, and when there are other controls that do not completely overlap at this position, determine the row where the covered control is located, and move all the controls in these rows down to be The height of the row where the covered control is located, and the "Karaoke" control is displayed at the dragged position.
示例性的,拖动后的控件占据了第四行栅格和第五行栅格中的部分位置(2×2)。其覆盖的控件包括“儿童画板”控件,“家庭留言”控件和“家庭相册”控件。这些控件占据的行的行高为4(第三行栅格、第四行栅格、第五行栅格、第六行栅格),因此将行高内的除“K歌”控件外的其他控件向下移动4个栅格。“K歌”控件展示在第四行栅格和第五行栅格中的部分位置(2×2)。Exemplarily, the dragged control occupies part of the positions (2×2) in the fourth row grid and the fifth row grid. The controls it covers include the "Children's Drawing Board" control, the "Family Message" control and the "Family Album" control. The row height of the rows occupied by these controls is 4 (the third row grid, the fourth row grid, the fifth row grid, and the sixth row grid), so the other controls in the row height except the "Karaoke" control The control moves down 4 grids. The "Karaoke" control is displayed in the fourth row and the fifth row of the grid (2×2).
在一些实施例中,向下移动的控件会进行向左补齐,以在视觉上展示的更顺畅。In some embodiments, controls that move down will be left-filled for a smoother visual presentation.
在一些实施例中,控件会以行为单位,向上补齐,使得不出现一行空白的栅格。In some embodiments, the control will fill up in units of rows, so that no blank grid line will appear.
在一些实施例中,上述两个补齐可以先后执行,可以同时执行。In some embodiments, the above two completions may be performed successively or simultaneously.
示例性的,在移动后的“K歌”控件占据了第三行栅格、第四行栅格,原有的其他控件占据了第五行栅格及一下的位置,同时“儿童画板”控件和“办公白板”控件进行了向左补齐。Exemplarily, the moved "Karaoke" control occupies the third and fourth rows of the grid, and other original controls occupy the positions of the fifth and lower grids. At the same time, the "Children's Drawing Board" control and The "Office Whiteboard" control has been filled to the left.
在一些实施例中,检测移动后的“K歌”控件的位置,在该位置完全和已存在相同大小的其他控件重叠时,两者进行位置的互换。In some embodiments, the position of the moved "Karaoke" control is detected, and when the position is completely overlapped with other controls of the same size, the positions of the two are exchanged.
尽管参照前述各实施例对本申请进行了详细的说明,本领域的普通技术人员应当理解:其依然可以对前述各实施例进行修改,或者对其中部分或者全部技术特征进行等同替换;而这些修改或者替换,并不脱离本申请各实施例的范围。Although the present application has been described in detail with reference to the above-mentioned embodiments, those skilled in the art should understand that: it can still modify the above-mentioned embodiments, or equivalently replace some or all of the technical features; and these modifications or Substitutions do not depart from the scope of the various embodiments of the present application.

Claims (10)

  1. 一种显示设备,包括:A display device comprising:
    显示器,被配置为显示呈现有Widget面板的桌面主页,所述Widget面板中展示有数个用于提供业务模块启动入口的业务Widget控件;The display is configured to display a desktop home page that presents a Widget panel, and the Widget panel displays several business Widget controls for providing a business module startup entry;
    与所述显示器连接的控制器,所述控制器被配置为:a controller coupled to the display, the controller configured to:
    在检测到第一业务Widget控件被删除时,确定并显示第二业务的图标,其中,所述第二业务对应的第二业务Widget控件的尺寸与所述第一业务Widget控件的尺寸相同;When it is detected that the first business Widget control is deleted, determine and display the icon of the second business, wherein the size of the second business Widget control corresponding to the second business is the same as the size of the first business Widget control;
    接收输入的对所述第二业务的图标的选择;receiving an input selection of an icon for the second service;
    在所述第一位置显示被选择的图标所对应的第二业务的第二业务Widget控件,其中,所述第一位置是所述第一业务Widget控件的显示位置。The second service Widget control of the second service corresponding to the selected icon is displayed at the first position, wherein the first position is a display position of the first service Widget control.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的显示设备,所述控制器在执行所述确定并显示第二业务的图标,被进一步配置为:According to the display device according to claim 1, when the controller executes the determination and displays the icon of the second service, it is further configured to:
    获取所述第一业务Widget控件对应的第一业务模块的业务类型和所述第一业务Widget控件的控件尺寸;Obtain the service type of the first service module corresponding to the first service Widget control and the control size of the first service Widget control;
    基于所述业务类型,查找具备相同业务类型的目标业务,以及在所述目标业务中确定与第一业务Widget控件的具有相同控件尺寸的第二业务Widget控件对应的第二业务;Based on the business type, search for a target business with the same business type, and determine in the target business a second business corresponding to a second business Widget control having the same control size of the first business Widget control;
    显示对应所述第二业务的图标。An icon corresponding to the second service is displayed.
  3. 根据权利要求1所述的显示设备,所述控制器在执行所述确定并显示第二业务的图标,被进一步配置为:According to the display device according to claim 1, when the controller executes the determination and displays the icon of the second service, it is further configured to:
    获取与第一业务Widget控件的具有相同控件尺寸的第二业务Widget控件对应的第二业务;Obtaining a second service corresponding to a second service Widget control having the same control size as the first service Widget control;
    显示对应所述第二业务的图标。An icon corresponding to the second service is displayed.
  4. 根据权利要求1所述的显示设备,所述第二业务为多个,所述控制器在执行所述确定并显示第二业务的图标,被进一步配置为:According to the display device according to claim 1, there are multiple second services, and the controller is further configured to perform the determination and display icons of the second services:
    确定多个第二业务及多个所述第二业务的使用频率;determining a plurality of second services and usage frequencies of a plurality of said second services;
    根据多个所述第二业务的使用频率,显示多个所述第二业务对应的图标,其中,使用频率高的第二业务对应的图标相较于使用频率低的第二业务对应的图标突出显示。Displaying a plurality of icons corresponding to the second services according to the frequency of use of the plurality of second services, wherein the icons corresponding to the second services with high frequency of use are more prominent than the icons corresponding to the second services with low frequency of use show.
  5. 根据权利要求1所述的显示设备,所述第二业务为多个,所述控制器在执行所述确定并显示第二业务的图标,被进一步配置为:According to the display device according to claim 1, there are multiple second services, and the controller is further configured to perform the determination and display icons of the second services:
    确定多个第二业务及多个所述第二业务的使用时间;determining a plurality of second services and usage times of a plurality of said second services;
    根据多个所述第二业务的使用时间,显示多个所述第二业务对应的图标,其中,使用时间和当前时间的时间差小的第二业务对应的图标相较于使用时间和当前时间的时间差大的第二业务对应的图标突出显示。Display multiple icons corresponding to the second services according to the use time of the plurality of second services, wherein the icon corresponding to the second service with a small time difference between the use time and the current time is compared with the time difference between the use time and the current time The icon corresponding to the second service with a large time difference is highlighted.
  6. 根据权利要求1所述的显示设备,所述第二业务为多个,所述控制器在执行所述确定并显示第二业务的图标,被进一步配置为:According to the display device according to claim 1, there are multiple second services, and the controller is further configured to perform the determination and display icons of the second services:
    确定多个第二业务及多个所述第二业务的更新时间;determining a plurality of second services and update times of a plurality of said second services;
    根据多个所述第二业务的更新时间,显示多个所述第二业务对应的图标,其中,更新时间和当前时间的时间差小的第二业务对应的图标相较于更新时间和当前时间的时间差大的第二业务对应的图标突出显示。Display multiple icons corresponding to the second services according to the update times of the multiple second services, wherein the icon corresponding to the second service with a small time difference between the update time and the current time is compared with the time difference between the update time and the current time The icon corresponding to the second service with a large time difference is highlighted.
  7. 根据权利要求1所述的显示设备,所述控制器在执行所述确定并显示第二业务的图标,被进一步配置为:According to the display device according to claim 1, when the controller executes the determination and displays the icon of the second service, it is further configured to:
    获取与第一业务Widget控件的具有相同控件尺寸的第二业务Widget控件对应的目标业务;Obtain the target business corresponding to the second business Widget control having the same control size as the first business Widget control;
    在目标业务中过滤被用户删除过Widget控件的第三业务以确定第二业务;Filter the third service whose Widget control has been deleted by the user in the target service to determine the second service;
    显示对应所述第二业务的图标。An icon corresponding to the second service is displayed.
  8. 根据权利要求1所述的显示设备,所述控制器在执行所述确定并显示第二业务的图标,被进一步配置为:According to the display device according to claim 1, when the controller executes the determination and displays the icon of the second service, it is further configured to:
    获取系统页面对应的业务类型,以及获取所述第一业务Widget控件的控件尺寸,其中系统页面是指显示Widget面板前的系统页面;Obtaining the service type corresponding to the system page, and obtaining the control size of the first service Widget control, wherein the system page refers to the system page before the Widget panel is displayed;
    基于所述业务类型,查找具备相同业务类型的目标业务,以及在所述目标业务中确定与第一业务Widget控件的具有相同控件尺寸的第二业务Widget控件对应的第二业务;Based on the business type, search for a target business with the same business type, and determine in the target business a second business corresponding to a second business Widget control having the same control size of the first business Widget control;
    显示对应所述第二业务的图标。An icon corresponding to the second service is displayed.
  9. 一种显示设备,包括:A display device comprising:
    显示器,被配置为显示呈现有Widget面板的桌面主页,所述Widget面板中展示有数个用于提供业务模块启动入口的业务Widget控件;The display is configured to display a desktop home page that presents a Widget panel, and the Widget panel displays several business Widget controls for providing a business module startup entry;
    与所述显示器连接的控制器,所述控制器被配置为:a controller coupled to the display, the controller configured to:
    在检测到第一业务Widget控件被删除时,确定并显示第二业务的图标,其中,所述第二业务对应的第二业务Widget控件的尺寸不大于第一位置的尺寸,所述第一位置为所述第一业务Widget控件的显示位置以及和所述第一业务Widget控件的显示位置相邻的空白位置;When it is detected that the first business Widget control is deleted, determine and display the icon of the second business, wherein the size of the second business Widget control corresponding to the second business is not larger than the size of the first position, and the first position The display position of the first business Widget control and the blank position adjacent to the display position of the first business Widget control;
    接收输入的对所述第二业务的图标的选择;receiving an input selection of an icon for the second service;
    在所述第一位置显示被选择的图标所对应的第二业务的第二业务Widget控件。A second service Widget control of the second service corresponding to the selected icon is displayed at the first position.
  10. 一种控件处理方法,包括:A control processing method, comprising:
    在检测到第一业务Widget控件被删除时,确定并显示第二业务的图标,其中,所述第二业务对应的第二业务Widget控件的尺寸与所述第一业务Widget控件的尺寸相同;When it is detected that the first business Widget control is deleted, determine and display the icon of the second business, wherein the size of the second business Widget control corresponding to the second business is the same as the size of the first business Widget control;
    接收输入的对所述第二业务的图标的选择;receiving an input selection of an icon for the second service;
    在所述第一位置显示被选择的图标所对应的第二业务的第二业务Widget控件,其中,所述第一位置是所述第一业务Widget控件的显示位置。The second service Widget control of the second service corresponding to the selected icon is displayed at the first position, wherein the first position is a display position of the first service Widget control.
PCT/CN2022/090765 2021-03-04 2022-04-29 Control processing method and display device WO2022237603A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202280017552.6A CN117043733A (en) 2021-03-04 2022-04-29 Control processing method and display device

Applications Claiming Priority (9)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202110264767 2021-03-04
CN202110505212.5A CN115022695B (en) 2021-03-04 2021-05-10 Display device and Widget control display method
CN202110505212.5 2021-05-10
CN202111531851.5A CN115037971B (en) 2021-03-04 2021-12-14 Display equipment and control display method
CN202111526619.2 2021-12-14
CN202111531851.5 2021-12-14
CN202111526619.2A CN115037970B (en) 2021-03-04 2021-12-14 Control validity detection method and display device
CN202210066285.3 2022-01-20
CN202210066285.3A CN114510170B (en) 2021-03-04 2022-01-20 Component display method and display device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022237603A1 true WO2022237603A1 (en) 2022-11-17

Family

ID=81549002

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/090765 WO2022237603A1 (en) 2021-03-04 2022-04-29 Control processing method and display device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (5) CN115022695B (en)
WO (1) WO2022237603A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN116420138A (en) * 2022-06-23 2023-07-11 广州视源电子科技股份有限公司 Desktop element operation method, electronic equipment and intelligent interaction panel
CN115309299B (en) * 2022-09-14 2024-02-23 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Desktop card display method, device, terminal, storage medium and program product

Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103279261A (en) * 2013-04-23 2013-09-04 惠州Tcl移动通信有限公司 Wireless communication device and adding method of widgets of wireless communication device
US20130268810A1 (en) * 2012-04-06 2013-10-10 Fujitsu Limited Detection of Dead Widgets in Software Applications
US20160077720A1 (en) * 2014-09-17 2016-03-17 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for displaying application
CN106201189A (en) * 2016-06-30 2016-12-07 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Widget display packing, device and electronic equipment
WO2016201963A1 (en) * 2015-06-19 2016-12-22 赤子城网络技术(北京)有限公司 Application pushing method and device
US20170123645A1 (en) * 2014-04-04 2017-05-04 Huawei Device Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for automatically adjusting interface element
CN106959878A (en) * 2017-03-31 2017-07-18 努比亚技术有限公司 Widget management method and mobile terminal
CN111813493A (en) * 2020-09-14 2020-10-23 深圳传音控股股份有限公司 Method of operating component, terminal, and storage medium

Family Cites Families (28)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20080098290A1 (en) * 2006-10-23 2008-04-24 Carnet Williams Method and system for providing a widget for displaying multimedia content
KR20090116932A (en) * 2008-05-08 2009-11-12 삼성전자주식회사 Display apparatus displaying a widget window and the method therof
US20100161713A1 (en) * 2008-12-18 2010-06-24 Sap Agdietmar-Hopp-Allee Method and system for personalizing a desktop widget
CN102736903A (en) * 2011-04-08 2012-10-17 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 Method and device for managing widgets based on intelligent terminal desktop
US20130263053A1 (en) * 2012-03-29 2013-10-03 Charles G. Tritschler Media widget to interface with multiple underlying applications
CN103699381A (en) * 2013-12-20 2014-04-02 Tcl集团股份有限公司 Method and system for setting Widget based on Firefox OS (Operating System) platform
CN104796782A (en) * 2014-01-16 2015-07-22 深圳数字电视国家工程实验室股份有限公司 Method and device for controlling smart television
US9681086B2 (en) * 2014-03-12 2017-06-13 Google Inc. System and method for continuing playback in widget after app is backgrounded
CN104008348B (en) * 2014-04-17 2017-03-29 小米科技有限责任公司 application control method, device and terminal
CN104125345B (en) * 2014-08-13 2017-01-25 中科创达软件股份有限公司 Mode switching method and device
CN104182545A (en) * 2014-09-05 2014-12-03 北京金山安全软件有限公司 Application program recommendation method and device
CN104715174B (en) * 2015-03-18 2016-08-24 北京奇虎科技有限公司 Realize method, device and the intelligent terminal of the switching of intelligent terminal user pattern
CN106155472A (en) * 2015-04-28 2016-11-23 东莞酷派软件技术有限公司 A kind of operation application drawing calibration method, device and mobile terminal
CN105117245A (en) * 2015-08-04 2015-12-02 小米科技有限责任公司 Method and apparatus for uninstalling application program
CN105160239A (en) * 2015-08-11 2015-12-16 小米科技有限责任公司 Application program access restriction method and apparatus
CN105843472A (en) * 2016-03-21 2016-08-10 乐视网信息技术(北京)股份有限公司 Intelligent terminal and application icon deletion method therefor
CN106446632B (en) * 2016-09-22 2020-09-22 北京奇虎科技有限公司 Hidden display starting method and hidden display starting device for application program
CN107395880B (en) * 2017-07-14 2021-05-28 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 Information display method and device and terminal
CN110362366B (en) * 2018-04-02 2022-06-24 青岛海信移动通信技术股份有限公司 Application interface display method and device
CN108845855A (en) * 2018-06-08 2018-11-20 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Method for displaying user interface, device, terminal and storage medium
CN108958583A (en) * 2018-06-29 2018-12-07 维沃移动通信有限公司 A kind of method for sorting and terminal device of icon
WO2021031629A1 (en) * 2019-08-18 2021-02-25 海信视像科技股份有限公司 Display apparatus, and multi-function button application method for control device
WO2021031623A1 (en) * 2019-08-18 2021-02-25 海信视像科技股份有限公司 Display apparatus, file sharing method, and server
CN111405300A (en) * 2020-02-28 2020-07-10 北京达佳互联信息技术有限公司 Pendant display method and device, electronic equipment and computer readable storage medium
CN111669621B (en) * 2020-04-30 2022-04-12 聚好看科技股份有限公司 Media asset data issuing method, server and display device
CN112162809B (en) * 2020-09-24 2022-10-21 聚好看科技股份有限公司 Display device and user collection display method
CN112148166A (en) * 2020-09-28 2020-12-29 维沃移动通信有限公司 Desktop component management method and device
CN112269527B (en) * 2020-11-16 2022-07-08 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Application interface generation method and related device

Patent Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20130268810A1 (en) * 2012-04-06 2013-10-10 Fujitsu Limited Detection of Dead Widgets in Software Applications
CN103279261A (en) * 2013-04-23 2013-09-04 惠州Tcl移动通信有限公司 Wireless communication device and adding method of widgets of wireless communication device
US20170123645A1 (en) * 2014-04-04 2017-05-04 Huawei Device Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for automatically adjusting interface element
US20160077720A1 (en) * 2014-09-17 2016-03-17 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for displaying application
WO2016201963A1 (en) * 2015-06-19 2016-12-22 赤子城网络技术(北京)有限公司 Application pushing method and device
CN106201189A (en) * 2016-06-30 2016-12-07 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Widget display packing, device and electronic equipment
CN106959878A (en) * 2017-03-31 2017-07-18 努比亚技术有限公司 Widget management method and mobile terminal
CN111813493A (en) * 2020-09-14 2020-10-23 深圳传音控股股份有限公司 Method of operating component, terminal, and storage medium

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN117043733A (en) 2023-11-10
CN114510170A (en) 2022-05-17
CN115022695A (en) 2022-09-06
CN115037970B (en) 2023-07-14
CN114510170B (en) 2023-04-25
CN115037970A (en) 2022-09-09
CN115037971B (en) 2023-06-27
CN115037971A (en) 2022-09-09
CN115022695B (en) 2023-09-19

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP5398728B2 (en) Information processing apparatus, information processing method, recording medium, and integrated circuit
WO2022237603A1 (en) Control processing method and display device
WO2021189697A1 (en) Video display method, terminal, and server
WO2022012271A1 (en) Display device and server
CN112073798B (en) Data transmission method and equipment
CN112073787B (en) Display device and home page display method
WO2021120419A1 (en) User interface display method and device
CN112788378B (en) Display device and content display method
CN114793298B (en) Display device and menu display method
US10225602B1 (en) System and method for digital television operation and control-contextual interface
CN113391746B (en) Display equipment and multi-window focus control method
WO2022083554A1 (en) User interface layout and interaction method, and three-dimensional display device
WO2021197078A1 (en) Display method and display device
CN112584210B (en) Display device, video recording method and recorded file display method
WO2021223074A1 (en) Display device and interaction control method
CN112367550A (en) Method for realizing multi-title dynamic display of media asset list and display equipment
CN112235621A (en) Display method and display equipment for visual area
CN112492402B (en) Display device
WO2022001635A1 (en) Display device and display method
CN111310424B (en) Form generation method and display device
WO2022037213A1 (en) Display method and display device
WO2023071348A1 (en) Display device, and method for displaying content of external device
WO2021189693A1 (en) Method for displaying album control, and display device
CN117608426A (en) Display equipment and multi-application same-screen display method
CN115914763A (en) Display device and multimedia resource playing method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22806571

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 202280017552.6

Country of ref document: CN

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 22806571

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1